diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-06 04:18:35 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-06 04:18:35 -0800 |
| commit | f038f4fa4c9c78e145e67ea6570026aafb539783 (patch) | |
| tree | 081af88e6d16752cac79571df2c724f6536dd23d | |
| parent | e6b030bc4fd095e9b4a94d6fe1b522acdbd11563 (diff) | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52809-0.txt | 7372 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52809-0.zip | bin | 110708 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52809-h.zip | bin | 160250 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52809-h/52809-h.htm | 9766 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52809-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 34826 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52809-h/images/logo.jpg | bin | 12221 -> 0 bytes |
9 files changed, 17 insertions, 17138 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3007dbb --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #52809 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/52809) diff --git a/old/52809-0.txt b/old/52809-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 9d0ab90..0000000 --- a/old/52809-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7372 +0,0 @@ -Project Gutenberg's The Banner Boy Scouts Mystery, by George A. Warren - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - - - -Title: The Banner Boy Scouts Mystery - -Author: George A. Warren - -Release Date: August 15, 2016 [EBook #52809] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS MYSTERY *** - - - - -Produced by Giovanni Fini, Roger Frank and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - - - TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE: - -—Obvious print and punctuation errors were corrected. - - - - - BANNER BOY SCOUTS - MYSTERY - - - - - THE BANNER - BOY SCOUTS - MYSTERY - - _By_ - - GEORGE A. WARREN - - THE WORLD SYNDICATE - PUBLISHING COMPANY - CLEVELAND NEW YORK - - - - - _Published 1937 by - The World Syndicate Publishing Co._ - -[Illustration: LOGO] - - _Printed in the United States of America_ - - - - - CONTENTS - - - CHAPTER PAGE - - I LOST 9 - - II FIRE! 23 - - III PAUL LOOKS INTO THE MATTER 28 - - IV DETECTIVES 36 - - V A SUSPICIOUS INDIVIDUAL 44 - - VI THE SPY 53 - - VII THE ROBBERY 66 - - VIII ENCOUNTER 73 - - IX WHO IS MR. GREY? 81 - - X STUMPED! 90 - - XI A HUNCH 97 - - XII A BUMP ON THE HEAD 105 - - XIII DISCOVERY 113 - - XIV A NEW TURN OF EVENTS 122 - - XV FOLLOWING UP THEIR CLUES 131 - - XVI PAUL GETS INTO TROUBLE 138 - - XVII PARENTAL ADMONITIONS 149 - - XVIII FALSE ALARM! 156 - - XIX CAPTURED! 163 - - XX ESCAPE! 172 - - XXI CONVINCING THE POLICE 178 - - XXII MR. GREY 191 - - XXIII PAUL HELPS OUT 197 - - XXIV BATTLE 204 - - XXV INTO THE LAKE 210 - - XXVI TROUBLE AT HOME 218 - - XXVII MYSTERY OF THE WHITE CARD 229 - - XXVIII AGAIN THE WHITE CARD 237 - - XXIX MYSTERY SOLVED 243 - - - - -BANNER BOY SCOUTS MYSTERY - - - - -CHAPTER I - -LOST - - -“Ken! Ken Armstrong! Dinner is ready.” - -“I’m coming, Mother,” he called from his room upstairs. - -Hurriedly he finished brushing his hair and raced downstairs to the -dining room. His father was already at the table and waiting for the -children to take their places. Mrs. Armstrong in the meanwhile was -adding the finishing touches in setting the table. “Before you sit -down, Ken,” his mother told him, “will you please go out and call -Betty. She must be outside somewhere playing.” - -“Yes, Mother.” - -Ken obeyed and went outside to look for his younger sister, who was -five years old. It was a day in the latter part of August, warm, clear. -Stepping out on the porch, he called out, “Betty! Betty!” - -There was no answer. Ken looked in the yard, then in the garage where -she sometimes climbed into the back of the car and amused herself -playing with her doll. But she was not there either. Ken walked across -the street and rang the Smiths’ doorbell. Mrs. Smith herself answered -and Ken asked, “Is Betty here, Mrs. Smith?” - -She shook her head. “No,” she answered. “She was playing with my little -Helen until about an hour ago, when she left.” - -“Thank you,” Ken said and walked away. On the sidewalk, he paused to -think of all the places where she might be. Ken walked further down the -street and stopped at the Morrison home. Paul answered the doorbell. -“Hello, Ken,” he called. - -“Hello, Paul. Is Betty here playing with your little brother?” - -“Why, no, Ken. Pete has been at the park all day and has just returned.” - -“That’s strange,” muttered Ken. - -“What’s strange?” - -“I can’t seem to find her.” - -“Oh, you’ll find her,” Paul assured his friend. “She may be playing -with little Karliner across the street.” - -“That’s right. I didn’t think of it. Thanks, Paul.” - -“So long, Ken. Don’t forget the meeting tonight.” - -“I won’t,” Ken called back over his shoulder. He went across the street -to the Karliner home and rang the doorbell. Mrs. Karliner opened the -door. “Is Betty here?” he asked. - -“No,” answered the youthful woman. “Betty and Karl had a childish -quarrel this morning and they quit playing together.” - -“Until tomorrow,” remarked Ken, laughing. - -“Yes, no matter how much they quarrel the children always come together -again,” she said, also laughing. - -“And it is a good thing they do,” added the boy. - -“Yes. And in that respect, grown ups would do well to take after -children.” - -“You are right, Mrs. Karliner.” Ken edged away from the doorway. “You -will excuse me, but I have to find Betty.” - -The woman smiled and closed the door. Ken walked back toward his own -house. He was puzzled and couldn’t think where else his younger sister -might be. Usually she was somewhere in the neighborhood. If she wasn’t -in her own yard, she could always be found either at the Morrisons, -the Smiths or the Karliners. But today she wasn’t at any one of those -places. As he entered his own yard, Ken thought of one other place -where she might be. Around the corner was a small park where Mrs. -Armstrong very often took the child to play. Perhaps she had gone -there with some other child. Ken thought he better run over there in -a hurry before his mother became worried. However, there were only a -few children there because it was dinner time. And no Betty. He walked -through the playground twice. No sign of his sister. - -For the first time, Ken became anxious. Of course, she was not lost, -he thought to himself. But where could she be? Slowly he walked -home without coming to any definite opinion. Stepping onto the porch -noiselessly, he hesitated to enter the house. If he told his mother he -could not find Betty, she might become frightened. He conceived another -idea. Walking around to the side of the house, he peeked through the -window into the dining room. Seeing that his mother was not there, he -knocked on the window and motioned for his father to come outside. Mr. -Armstrong came out onto the porch. “What’s the trouble, Ken?” he asked. - -The boy tried hard not to look anxious. “Dad, I can’t seem to find -Betty,” he whispered. - -Mr. Armstrong was a tall, heavy set man. He tugged at his close cropped -mustache and muttered, “You can’t seem to find her, eh? Did you look -everywhere?” - -“I did.” - -“At the Morrisons?” - -“Yes. I was also at the Smiths, the Karliners and at the park, Dad. She -was not at any one of those places.” - -“Hmm!” mused Mr. Armstrong. “She must be somewhere around, Ken. Let us -first search the yard thoroughly.” - -Together they looked over the yard and then the garage. But the child -was not there. Finally they stopped their search. “You say that you -were to the park, at the Morrisons, the Smiths, the Karliners?” asked -Mr. Armstrong. - -“Yes, Dad.” - -“Can you think of anywhere else she might be? Do you know of any other -child she occasionally plays with?” - -Just then Mrs. Armstrong came out onto the porch and called, “Ken, -John, what are you doing out here when you are supposed to be at the -dinner table? And where is Betty?” - -Mr. Armstrong walked slowly over to his wife and said, “Now, Edna, -don’t you become upset. It seems that Betty is nowhere where she -usually plays. Do you know of any other child she sometimes plays with -and with whom she might be now?” - -Mrs. Armstrong became very pale. “Were you to the Karliners, Ken?” she -queried anxiously. - -“Yes, mother.” - -“Now don’t you become alarmed, Edna. The child is somewhere around. But -she may have walked off alone somewhere or she might be playing at some -house.” - -“Were you to the Johnsons?” Mrs. Armstrong asked. Ken shook his head. -“Then run over and see. And if she is not there, stop in at the -McKinlys.” - -Ken was off at a run. The Johnson home was at the end of the street. -Junior himself opened the door and Ken bent down to question the -child. “Is Betty here?” he asked. - -The little boy shook his head and muttered, “Nah.” Mrs. Johnson came to -the door and he asked her the same question. “Why, no,” she replied. -“She never comes. I would like very much for her to come and play with -Junior, but she never does. I guess it is a little too far away for -her.” - -Ken was anxious to be off. “Yes, I guess so,” he answered. “Excuse me.” -And he was off. - -The McKinly home was across the street. But she was not there either. -Ken walked away deeply concerned. Returning home he found his parents -awaiting him, their faces drawn and worried. At the news that the -child was neither at the Johnsons nor the McKinlys, Mrs. Armstrong -clenched her fingers. Her husband stood up. “She must have walked off -somewhere,” he said. “I’ll notify the police and have them search for -her.” - -“Wait a minute, Dad,” cried Ken. “Perhaps she is in her room.” - -Without losing a second, he dashed up the stairs. A minute later he -was coming down slowly. By the expression on his face the parents -could tell that she was not in her room. Mr. Armstrong walked to the -foyer where the telephone was and they could hear him calling the -police and giving a detailed description of the child. She was five -years old, blonde hair and blue eyes, weighed between forty-five and -fifty pounds and was about twenty-six or twenty-seven inches tall. His -task completed, he returned to the dining room. He put an arm around -his wife’s shoulder and said, “Now, don’t worry, Edna. The child most -likely has walked off by herself and she will be found. You will have -her again in half an hour.” - -Ken jumped out of his chair and dashed out of the house. He ran over -to the Morrison home and called Paul. Drawing his friend aside, he -whispered, “Paul, call the troop together. We cannot find Betty and we -have to make a search for her.” - -“That’s too bad,” replied Paul. “I’m sure no harm has come to her and -we will find her.” - -The two boys walked off to call the boys together. Some of the Boy -Scouts lived in the immediate neighborhood while the others were -reached by telephone. Practically every one of them knew Betty by -sight, but just to make sure a description of her was passed around. -Within ten minutes the entire Stanhope Troop No. 1 was out on the -streets and searching for the child. In the meanwhile the police had -also sent out an alarm and were combing the town to find Betty. The -news had spread and many townspeople had joined in the search. - -For the next half hour every nook and corner of the town was ransacked. -Many a little girl was stopped and asked if her name was Betty -Armstrong. But always it was a shake of the head and the word no. -Suddenly the news spread that the search was off and that the child was -safely home. Ken, who was with Paul, sprinted home. The two boys burst -into the house and found Betty sitting very calmly at the table having -her dinner. Quite innocently she shook a finger a her big brother and -scolded him. “You’re late,” she told him. “Mama is angry if you come -late for dinner.” - -The two boys, hot and out of breath as they were, couldn’t resist -laughing at the innocent humor of the child. “Where were you?” Ken -demanded. - -Just then Mr. Armstrong came in. Seeing his missing child at the -table, he sighed with relief. Mrs. Armstrong came in from the kitchen -and said, “You men better have your dinner right away, before it gets -spoiled.” - -Paul moved away, saying, “I will wait for you upstairs, Ken, in your -room.” - -“Jack is also upstairs,” mentioned Mrs. Armstrong. “He found the child -and brought her home.” - -Paul walked upstairs while Mr. Armstrong turned to his wife and asked, -“Where did he find her?” - -“On Leonard Street.” - -“So far away!” exclaimed Ken. “Leonard Street is at the edge of the -town.” - -“Yes.” - -“What was she doing there?” asked Mr. Armstrong. - -“Who knows?” his wife exclaimed. - -Ken turned to his younger sister. “What were you doing so far away from -home?” he demanded. - -“Don’t bother the child now,” asserted his mother. “Let us eat now. You -can ask her all the questions you want later or tomorrow.” - -“Yes, Mother.” - -The family settled down to their meal and for the present tried to -forget the anxiety and worry the child had caused them. - -As soon as he could get away from the table, Ken did so and raced -upstairs. Dashing into his room, he called out, “Hello, Jack.” - -“Hello, Ken. I hear Betty gave you a bad scare.” - -“And how!” added Paul. “The only ones we did not have searching for her -were the marines, and only because there are none in Stanhope.” - -“Yes, that is just what I want to ask you about, Jack. How did you come -to find her?” asked Ken. - -“I was out that way visiting Bud Menninger. You know him, don’t you, -Ken?” - -“Yes, he is the fellow who wants to join our troop, isn’t he?” - -“That’s right,” answered Jack. “Well, I was riding home on my bicycle -when I happened to notice Betty walking along, all by herself. I was -so surprised, I wouldn’t believe my eyes at first. I couldn’t imagine -what she would be doing so far away from home. At any rate, I jumped -off my bike and approached her and then I saw that it was really her. -She was sucking a large peppermint stick.” - -“Sucking a peppermint stick!” exclaimed Ken. “Who gave it to her?” - -“That is just the point. I asked her and she replied that a man gave it -to her.” - -“A man!—” - -Paul interrupted. “Don’t interrupt, Ken,” he said. “Listen to the rest -of the story. It is mighty interesting.” - -“All right, I won’t interrupt. Go on.” - -“Well, I questioned her a little more,” continued Jack, “and she told -me that she was walking home from the Smiths when a man stopped her and -asked if she wanted some candy. Like a child, she couldn’t refuse. So -he took her by the hand and he bought her that peppermint stick she was -sucking.” - -“Then what?” Ken asked eagerly. - -“From further questioning, it seems that after he bought her the candy, -they just kept on walking. I looked her over closely and saw that she -was not all frightened or hurt in any way. So it seems that the man who -took her walking, did not harm her in the least.” - -“But how come he left her at the edge of the town all by herself. A -man must be crazy to do a thing like that.” - -“Now that is a clue,” spoke up Paul. “An ordinary man would not do a -thing like that.” - -“Clue!” exclaimed Ken, surprised. “What sort of clue? What are you -talking about?” - -“Let me finish,” urged Jack. “As I was talking to her, I noticed -that she kept one hand behind her back. I asked her why and she just -shrugged her shoulders. I looked and I saw that she was clutching a -card in her little fist. I asked where she got it and she told me that -the man gave it to her before he left her. I asked her to give it to me -and she did. Here it is.” - -Jack held up the white card, three inches by two inches. The boys -huddled together, examining it. “Why, it is just a plain, blank, white -card!” exclaimed Ken. - -“That’s right. But what is the meaning of it?” asked Jack. - -There was no answer. The three boys were mystified. The whole story -sounded very odd and the card made it all the more perplexing. “From -all the evidence at hand,” remarked Paul, “I am convinced that there -must be something wrong with the man who walked off with the child.” - -“But that’s just it,” exploded Ken. “If there is something wrong with -the man, he must be found out and put away into an asylum. He can’t be -permitted to roam the streets and walk away with children.” - -“And if Paul’s suggestions are correct,” added Jack, “God knows what -other tricks he might be up to and what damage he may be doing.” - -“Now let’s think this out calmly and logically,” said Paul. “First did -you ask Betty to describe the man?” - -“I did,” replied Jack. “But all she would say was that he was tall and -very kind to her.” - -“There are many tall men in town. That is no clue,” said Ken. - -Paul rose. “We certainly have to look into the matter and see what we -can do.” - -“What can we do?” asked Ken. “As far as I know there are no crazy -people in Stanhope and only a lunatic would do a thing like that.” - -“We have about an hour before the meeting,” suggested Jack. “Suppose we -go down to Leonard Street and look around.” - -Just then Mr. Armstrong came in. “Hello, Jack,” he greeted. - -“Hello, Mr. Armstrong.” - -He saw that the boys seemed to be on the verge of leaving and he said, -“I hope I am not keeping you boys from going on your way.” - -“Well, we were preparing to leave, but—” that from Ken. - -“I merely want to ask Jack about his finding Betty.” - -Jack repeated his story, leaving out the part about the white card. For -a while there was silence. Mr. Armstrong mused. Finally he said, “It -must have been some man who knows the family and bought her some candy.” - -“But why should he leave her at the end of the town to walk back -alone,” demanded Ken. - -Mr. Armstrong shrugged his shoulders wearily. “I can’t understand that -myself,” he said. “But the fact remains that the child was not harmed. -Which leads us to the conclusion that the man must have been a friend.” - -The boys had no desire to argue with the older man and so they left it -at that. In the street, Ken asked, “Why did you leave out that part -about the white card, Jack?” - -“I didn’t think it mattered,” was the answer. “I figured that if I told -him about it, he would give it over to the police, and then it would -get into the newspapers and then everybody would know about it. And the -guilty man, even if he is crazy, would know better than to do anything -to give himself away. As it is, nobody knows, except the three of us, -and by a little quiet work we may track the culprit down.” - -“I think you did right,” spoke up Paul. - -“That is to be seen,” added Ken skeptically. - -The boys walked down to Leonard Street and Jack pointed out the exact -spot where he came upon Betty. The neighborhood was one occupied -mostly by the poorer people of the town. Of course, there was -nothing to be found in the way of clues. They walked all around the -neighborhood and noticed the various shacks and empty lots but did not -come across any man that was tall and kindly looking. At last they -decided to give up the search and go to a meeting of their boy scout -troop, the Red Fox Patrol. - -All the other boys—Nuthin’, The Carberry twins, William and Wallace, -Bobolink, Bluff—were already there when the three arrived. Pressed for -information, Jack for the third time re-told his story. - - - - -CHAPTER II - -FIRE! - - -Several days passed and although the boys had not forgotten the -incident, they did nothing to look for the culprit. The only evidence -they had was the white card and the information that the man was tall. - -It was about five-thirty and the boys were coming from the baseball -field. Paul and William, walking ahead, turned into Water Street, and -the rest of the boys followed them. At about the middle of the street, -they suddenly heard the weird cry, “Fire! Help! Fire!” - -The boys stopped in their tracks and looked around to find where the -cry was coming from. Paul began to run and the boys followed him. They -came upon a two story frame house. Dense clouds of smoke came billowing -out of the doorway. Paul turned to the one nearest him, who happened to -be William, and ordered, “Call the Fire Department! Hurry!” - -William set off at a run. Paul, followed by the other boys, ran to -the back of the house. He cried, “A couple of you try to find buckets -and water. The others stick around and form a water brigade until the -firemen come.” - -Pushing open the back door, he dashed into the house. He noticed that -the smoke was dense at the front door. Just as he turned to run up the -stairs, tongues of flames shot out of the smoke. The thought came to -him that the fire had started at the front door. But how? Why? At the -front door, of all places. - -He raced upstairs and threw open the first door that he came upon. No -one there. He dashed for the next room. An old man and woman, in their -late seventies, if not older, were rushing back and forth, picking up -things and dropping them. They were so bewildered, they did not know -what to do. As Paul dashed in, they rushed at him and clung to his -arms. They were absolutely speechless; they did nothing but tremble. -Paul shook them off and rushed to the window, threw it open and cried -to the boys below, “Get a ladder! Get a ladder!” - -He looked for the firemen but they had not yet arrived. Every second -seemed to him an hour. He saw the boys scatter in a frantic search for -a ladder. The five minutes that elapsed to procure a ladder seemed like -an age. At last Bobolink came running up with a ladder and he placed it -under the window. But it was too short, and Paul cried, “Get something -to stand it on. A box. Anything.” - -Bobolink scurried to find something upon which to stand the ladder. A -minute later he returned with a soap box. The ladder was stood on the -box and several of the boys supported it. Paul helped the old woman -through the window onto the ladder. “One of you boys climb up and help -her down.” - -He saw the boys hesitate. Evidently they thought that the ladder would -not hold. In the meanwhile, the woman, trembling and bewildered, almost -fell from the ladder. Bluff raced up and directed the woman’s legs, -rung by rung. The old woman at last descended and collapsed in Ken’s -arms. Paul turned to the old man. “Is there anybody else in the house?” -he asked briskly. - -The old man nodded his head vigorously. “Downstairs,” his trembling -lips mumbled. “A baby in a crib.” - -“Which room?” - -The old man’s teeth chattered so violently that he could not speak. -Again Paul demanded to know which room the child was in but the old -man could not talk. He almost hurled the man through the window as he -helped him to gain a footing on the ladder. Without waiting another -instant, Paul dashed out of the room and down the stairs which by now -were crackling with flames. The last couple of steps were so badly -burned that he had to jump. He scurried about wildly and at last found -what he was searching for—a pail of water. Dipping his handkerchief -into it, he clasped the wet rag over his mouth and nostrils. Layers -of heavy smoke whirled all about him. He walked along the wall and -listened carefully. An infant’s wailing came to his ears and he -searched frantically for the door. Finding it at last, he threw it -open and stepped in quickly. He brought in with him a dense cloud of -smoke. He moved blindly about the room, directed only by the cries of -the infant. He stumbled against the crib and clasped the child to him. -Smoke entered his lungs and he began to cough. He felt choked and was -sure he was going to collapse before he managed to get out. He heard -a shattering crash. Someone had broken the window and he ran to it. -He felt someone take the child from him and direct him to the broken -window. Someone lifted him almost bodily through the window and the -next moment he fainted. - -About fifteen or twenty minutes after the alarm had been sent in, the -Volunteer Fire Brigade came clanging down the street. Immediately they -pulled out the hose and set to work. Captain Bob was there. It was -he who had helped Paul through the window. About a minute after Paul -had been taken out of the house, there was a terrible shattering and -crackling. From all sides of the house streaks of flame spurted forth, -until the whole building was enveloped in a sheet of flame. - -Paul came to and opened his eyes to find his father bending over him. -“Are you all right, fellow?” Dr. Morrison asked. - -Paul sat up and blinked his eyes. He nodded. “I’m all right, Dad. What -are you doing here?” - -“Just happened to come along.” - -His father helped him to his feet and he found the boys crowding -around him. “How do you feel?” asked William. - -Paul nodded. Ken remarked, “Some fire eater you are.” - -He smiled and turned to watch the firemen fighting the blazing -structure. “What happened to the old couple?” he asked. - -“They are all right,” answered Nuthin’. “They wouldn’t have been, -though, if it hadn’t been for you.” - -Bobolink added, “The child would surely have perished if not for you, -Paul.” - -Just then a policeman came and pushed them all back. Some moments -later the front door fell in with a shattering thud. The firemen -poured gallons of water into the blaze but it did not seem to help. -The fire ate through the wooden house and ten minutes later one of -the walls collapsed. A groan rose up from the watching crowd and some -turned their heads away. As the wall collapsed tongues of flame and -dense smoke came shooting out. Some of the firemen retreated and then -returned to continue their struggle with the blaze. - -Another wall caved in and eventually the roof of the house came -crashing down. Captain Bob realized that further effort was futile -and he ordered his firemen to just stand around and let the fire burn -itself out. Soon the house was a heap of ashes and smoldering pieces of -wood. The firemen left and the crowd dispersed. - - - - -CHAPTER III - -PAUL LOOKS INTO THE MATTER - - -Jack was sitting on the Morrison porch. It was about eight o’clock in -the evening of the same day. Ken came walking up through the yard. -“Hello, Ken.” - -“Hello, Jack. What are you doing here?” - -“Waiting for Paul.” - -Ken came onto the porch and sat down beside his friend. “Did Paul call -you too?” he asked. - -“That’s right. He told me over the telephone that he had something -important to talk over.” - -“He told me the same thing. I wonder what it is.” - -“Perhaps it is something about the fire.” - -“Well, let’s not guess, but wait for Paul to tell us instead.” - -Several minutes later, Paul came out. “Hello, fellows,” he called. - -“Hello, Paul.” - -“Hello, Paul. What is it you have to tell us?” asked Jack. - -“Let’s go where we will have some privacy,” answered Paul. - -Paul led them into the garage and the three boys piled into the back of -the car. “Now,” said Ken, “you can tell us without anyone overhearing -us. Don’t keep us in suspense any longer or we will collapse of -curiosity.” - -“First tell us how you feel,” spoke up Jack. “Any after effects from -the smoke?” - -“I feel perfectly all right,” was the answer. “Now, this is what I want -to talk to you about.” - -“Yes, what is it all about?”—that from Ken. - -“Jack,” began Paul, “do you still have that white card? You know the -one I mean.” - -“Of course. I still have it, certainly. What about it?” - -“Will you show it to me?” - -Jack began to look through his pockets. Finally he confessed, “I guess -I don’t have it with me. I must have left it home, in my other coat -pocket.” - -“What about the card?” asked Ken. - -“Only this,” replied Paul gravely. And he showed them the card. “Is it -the same card?” he asked. - -Jack examined it very closely. “To me it appears as though it is the -very self-same card. How did you get it?” - -“Now listen closely,” whispered Paul. The other two boys leaned over. -“I rushed down the burning stairs to find the room in which the child -was. Well, I was groping along the wall with my hands because I -couldn’t see a thing. I came upon the door and I moved my hand up and -down trying to find the knob when I came upon something sticking in the -doorway. Without thinking any further, I grabbed it and shoved it into -my pocket.” Paul paused to add emphasis to his forthcoming statement. -“And that thing was this card,” he concluded. - -The boys gasped. “This card!” exclaimed Jack. - -“Are you sure?” asked Ken. - -“Absolutely positive,” asserted Paul. - -“But how did it get there?” - -“That is something I don’t know and which I would very much like to -know.” - -For about a minute the boys sat there in silence, overcome with -amazement. Jack jumped out of the car. “Come on, fellows,” he called. - -“Where to?” asked Paul. - -“To my house. I want to find that card.” - -Jack was so excited, he had difficulty in restraining himself from -running. The other boys kept up with him, walking briskly. At the -Stormways home, Jack rushed up the steps of the porch. “You wait here,” -he called over his shoulder to his companions. - -Two minutes later he came rushing out of the doorway. “Here it is,” he -cried, waving the white card. - -The two cards were compared; they were identical in every respect. -“This is getting to be serious,” whispered Ken. - -“Terribly serious,” added Ken. “We must do something about it. The man -must be absolutely crazy.” - -“Crazy is not the word,” said Paul. “Dangerous is more fitting. If he -is permitted to roam the streets without being stopped, only God knows -what damage he will do and what crimes he may commit.” - -“But what can we do?” Jack questioned anxiously. “Our suspicions are -only a hunch. These cards may only be an accident.” - -“No,” said Paul, shaking his head. “My opinion is that this is no -accident but the work of a distorted mind.” - -The boys sat down on the porch. At a loss as to the meaning of it all, -they remained silent. Paul whispered, “I’ll tell you what we can do, -though.” - -“What?” - -“Let’s go over and see Captain Bob.” - -“What for?” queried Ken. - -“I want to ask his opinion on the origin of the fire.” - -“Well, that won’t hurt any,” remarked Jack. - -The three boys set off. Captain Bob himself opened the door for them -and led them into the living room. Turning to Paul, the Captain said, -“You are the boy that dashed into the burning building this afternoon, -aren’t you?” - -“Yes, but it was really nothing.” - -Captain Bob sat himself down and pointed the boys to seats. “Well,” he -drawled, “you are a modest boy. But if it hadn’t been for you, the old -folks and the child would have burned to cinders.” - -“If I had not entered, one of the other boys would have,” he answered. -“We were the first on the scene, you know.” - -“Yes, so I understand. But what is it I can do for you boys?” - -Paul leaned forward in his chair. “Captain Bob,” he said, “we came over -to ask you your opinion on the origin of the fire.” - -“Just what do you want to know?” - -Paul hesitated, not knowing exactly how to put his question. He -said, “What I want to know, Captain, is whether you think the fire -was—er,—an accident, or whether you think someone started the fire.” - -“You are asking very serious questions,” replied Captain, knitting his -brows. - -“Yes, I know, but I am very much interested and—” - -“May I ask why you should be interested?” asked the old man shrewdly. - -“It’s only because,—er,—when I dashed into the building, I noticed -something very odd about the fire.” - -“Just what do you mean?” - -“Well, as we ran up to the house, we noticed smoke pouring out of the -front door. I dashed inside by the back door and then I saw that most -of the smoke and fire seemed to be at the threshold of the front door. -Now that is very odd.” - -“Yes, you are quite right, my boy,” answered Captain Bob. “As a matter -of fact, the front door caved in first. However, I came to the fire a -little too late to really judge the cause or origin of the fire. But it -did seem to me that there was something odd about the whole thing.” - -“Was there anything about the fire that would lead you to believe that -it was an accident or perhaps—er,—otherwise?” asked Paul, pressing -his point. - -Captain Bob scratched his chin thoughtfully and said, “My dear boy, you -are asking some very serious questions that may get you into trouble.” - -Paul insisted. “Just the same, would you form an opinion?” - -“No, I really couldn’t because, as I said before, I came to the fire -too late. I had no chance to look into the cause of the fire and now -that the house is a heap of ashes, the chances of finding any clue is -very slight. Suppose you tell me your opinion, my boy.” - -“To be quite frank, Captain, I think that the fire was started by some -pyromaniac.” - -The Captain sat up in his chair. “What makes you think so?” he demanded -suddenly. - -Paul hesitated. He did not want to give himself away. “Just a hunch,” -he replied. - -Captain Bob sank back into his chair. For what seemed a very long -time there was absolute silence. The Captain seemed to be musing over -something and the boys had nothing more to say. Paul rose and his -friends did likewise. “Thank you, Captain Bob,” said Paul. “I guess we -will be going now.” - -Escorting them to the door, the Captain said, “Don’t thank me. I am -glad you came.” He hesitated. “And,—er,—don’t you go around talking -about a pyromaniac, my boy. It may get you into trouble.” - -“I won’t, Captain,” promised Paul. - -“Goodnight, boys.” - -“Goodnight, Captain Bob.” - -The boys walked along for some few steps in silence. Ken spoke up. -“That talk with the captain didn’t help much, did it, Paul?” - -“No, very little. But I have now become more convinced than ever that -the fire was the work of a mentally distorted person.” - -“You count me in on that,” added Jack. “I certainly agree with you. But -what can we do about it, that is the problem.” - -“Doesn’t seem as if we can do anything for the present,” muttered Ken. - -“Guess you’re right,” answered Paul thoughtfully. A moment later he -added, “Tomorrow let us try and obtain a better description of the man -from your sister, Betty, Ken. If she can tell us a few things on how he -looks and the sort of clothes he wears, that would help a lot.” - -“It certainly would,” agreed Ken. “We will try it tomorrow.” - -“Yes. In the meanwhile there is nothing else we can do tonight. So I am -for going home,” announced Paul. - -“Same here.” - -“Me too.” - -The boys separated and went home. The following morning, they met again -at Ken’s home. Taking Betty out into the yard, the boys tried to get -some information from her about the man who had taken her for a walk -and then deserted her at the end of the town. But the child had already -forgotten him entirely and their efforts were in vain. - - - - -CHAPTER IV - -DETECTIVES - - -That afternoon, William went to the Stanhope Free Public Library to -return a book. Walking in back of the room in search of a good novel, -he came upon Paul hunched over a stack of newspapers. “What are you up -to now, Paul?” he asked in a whisper. - -“Tell you later.” - -“A mystery, huh?” William joked. - -Paul smiled and waved his friend away. “Leave me alone now,” he said, -“I’ll tell you all about it later.” - -“Very well.” - -William walked away and Paul returned to his stack of newspapers. -He spent almost three hours going through the papers of the past -two months. Tired, he decided to stop there. Besides, he was quite -satisfied with the information he had obtained. He left the library and -walked home. On the way he stopped to call for Ken but did not find -him in. Crossing the street to his own home he found Jack, Ken and -William on the porch waiting for him. “Well, what is the secret?” cried -William. “Tell us.” - -Paul motioned to the boys to follow him and he led them to the garage -where they would be assured of privacy. The boys found boxes on which -to sit and they gathered around Paul. “Well, what is it?” asked Jack. - -“I have spent about three hours in the library this afternoon,” Paul -informed them “and—” - -“William told us that already,” interrupted Ken. - -“I have been going through the newspapers for the past weeks,” -continued Paul. - -“What for?” asked Jack. - -“I was looking up the fire reports. In the past two months there have -been four fires, one each two weeks or so.” - -“What about it?” Jack wanted to know. - -“Can’t you fellows see for yourselves?” asked Paul, irritated by their -indifference. “Don’t you think that in a small town such as this, a -fire every two weeks is very much above the average?” - -“Say,” cried Ken, “you have hit upon something. Come to think of it, -that is a pretty high average.” - -“But what has that to do with the story?” asked Jack. - -“Simply this,” answered Paul. “Under normal conditions, there would not -be such frequent fires. In other words, all the fires of the past two -months may or may not have been caused accidentally.” - -“You don’t think yesterday’s fire was an accident?” questioned William. - -“No,” was Paul’s categorical answer. - -William raised his eyebrows in surprise. He was not acquainted with -the facts of the case as the other boys were. “What therefore is the -conclusion?” asked Jack. - -“It is evident,” returned Paul. “For the past two months at least one -fire, or more has been started by a maniac.” - -“This thing is becoming worse and worse,” commented Ken. - -“Yes,” Paul said gravely, “the situation is very serious and it is up -to us to do something.” - -“Why is it up to us?” asked William. But just as soon as the words were -out of his mouth, he knew the answer. - -“Because,” was Paul’s answer, “we are the only ones who seem to be -acquainted with the situation and our suspicions are quite definite.” - -“Don’t you think it might be wise to acquaint the police with our -suspicions?” inquired Ken. - -“I am against doing anything of the sort,” stated Jack. “If we do that, -there will be a public scandal. It will be in every newspaper in town -and the culprit, whoever he is, will become wary. As it is, we may come -upon him by surprise.” - -“I agree absolutely,” commented Paul. - -“What is our job going to be?” asked William, eager to do something as -soon as possible. - -“For the present there is only one thing we can do,” said Paul. “We -will talk the whole matter over with the boys of the patrol. We are -all pretty close friends and we can act as a group. The thing we have -to insist upon is secrecy on the part of all the boys and to be always -on guard.” - -“That alone is not enough,” added William. “I suggest that we also have -the boys patrolling the streets, so that in case of anything, they will -be Johnny-on-the-spot.” - -“That is something we will have to discuss with the rest of the boys,” -asserted Paul. “In the meanwhile, suppose we notify the fellows to come -to a meeting tonight after supper. Do you think it is all right?” - -“Yes, I think that is a very good idea,” commented William. The other -boys agreed and it was decided to meet in Ken’s garage. - -That evening at about seven, the boys began to congregate in Ken’s -garage. They came by one’s and two’s. Fifteen minutes later they were -all there except Jack. The boys were curious as to the reason for the -meeting and they wanted to start without waiting for the missing member -but Paul refused. He suggested that someone run over to call Jack. -Bluff volunteered. They waited about five minutes and the messenger -returned saying that Jack was not home. Paul remarked, “I wonder where -he could have gone?” - -Nuthin’ said, “He will most likely be here any minute. In the meanwhile -let’s get going.” - -“Yes, let’s do that,” echoed Wallace. - -Urged on by the other boys, Paul finally consented and the meeting -was called to order. Paul then outlined the situation for them, told -them the pros and cons of the problem and in conclusion said, “There -is one more thing I want to tell you. In going through the newspaper -files for information on the fire reports, I noticed that there seemed -to be about two weeks difference between fires. In other words, since -the last fire was yesterday, we have about two weeks in which to act. -The thing for us to do now is not to talk about it to anyone outside -of this group and to be always on guard. If we don’t track this maniac -down, God knows what damage he is liable to do.” - -For a short while there was silence. Nuthin’ grinned and remarked, -“What you want us to do, Paul, is for us to become detectives.” - -Nuthin’ meant it as a joke but Paul took it seriously. “That is just -what I want you to do,” he asserted gravely. “We must all become -detectives and find this man.” - -“But the information we have is so slight. We really have no clues to -work on,” protested Bobolink. - -“That is very true,” replied Paul, “but we must do the best we can.” - -A little later, the meeting was officially adjourned, but no boy -ventured to leave. Their curiosity was aroused by Jack’s not coming to -the meeting and they waited around. Paul felt anxious, though he had -no reason to be. To Ken, who was sitting beside him, he whispered, “I -wonder what happened to Jack!” - -Ken shrugged his shoulders. “I can’t imagine. He promised to be here. -And he is not home either.” - -“That’s just it,” countered Paul. “The fact that he is not home implied -that he was on the way over here. But something must have happened on -the way to keep him from coming to the meeting.” - -“We can go over and see if he is home now.” - -“That is a good idea. Let’s go.” - -Ken and Paul rose and the other boys did likewise. In a group they -walked over to Jack’s house. Ken went in while all the others remained -outside. A minute later he emerged and motioned that the missing boy -was not home. The boys were disappointed and a few of them became -worried. Bobolink commented, “This is becoming serious. We ought to -look for him.” - -Paul turned the idea down. “You fellows better go home,” he said, “and -don’t worry. Jack has a right to go wherever he pleases and if he did -not show up at the meeting, there must be a good reason for it.” - -“But where could he have gone,” Nuthin’ asked anxiously. “After all, -something may have happened to him.” - -Paul, though he was anxious himself, made believe that there was -nothing to worry about and laughed at the suggestion that something -might have happened to Jack. “Most likely he went to see someone or -something like that,” he remarked casually. “Nothing serious could have -happened to him.” - -“Besides, he is the sort of fellow who can take care of himself,” added -Ken. - -“And what’s more,” argued Paul again, “we don’t know where to look for -him. And if we spread an alarm, his folks will become worried and that -is something we certainly don’t want.” - -“No, I guess you are right, Paul,” agreed Nuthin’. - -Several of the other boys nodded and showed willingness to agree with -Paul’s idea that they all go home. They walked along as a group until -one by one the boys fell out to go home. Finally only Paul and Ken were -left. The two boys walked side by side and Paul seemed exceedingly -quiet and preoccupied with his thoughts. Ken hesitated to break in upon -his friend, but finally he asked, “What are you so quiet and thoughtful -about?” - -“I wasn’t really thinking of anything,” the other replied. - -“We may as well go home, like the others,” suggested Ken. - -“No, let’s not do that. Suppose we walk down Main Street a bit. To tell -you the truth, I am a bit worried about Jack.” - -“Worrying won’t help any,” Ken wisely remarked. - -The boys walked down Main Street and then retraced their steps. At -Paul’s house, they silently sat down on the steps of the porch and -remained like that, neither one uttering a sound. - - - - -CHAPTER V - -A SUSPICIOUS INDIVIDUAL - - -Now let us see what really happened to Jack. He left his home with the -intention of going to the meeting. As he walked along, deeply occupied -with his thoughts, he suddenly became conscious of a certain individual -that had just passed. Jack turned on his heel and stared at the -retreating back of the individual. The man was tall and thin—gaunt; -he wore a cap and a jacket and pants that hung like sacks upon him. -Jack tried to think what it was about the individual that attracted -his attention and he concluded that it was something wild about his -appearance, about his bearing. He began to follow the man, sorry that -he did not get a good look at the man’s face. - -Jack went over the situation in his mind. He wanted to go to the -meeting and if he did not come, the boys might feel badly. On the -other hand, there was something very suspicious about the person he -was following. The man appeared to be very excited, or anxious; he -seemed to be very much on the alert, turning his head this way and that -way, as though searching for something. Jack felt sorry that he could -not get a good look at the man’s face. Perhaps he could do it now, he -thought, by walking ahead then walking back toward him; or possibly -by hiding in some doorway and obtaining a close view of him as the man -passed. But on second consideration, he thought it better not to do -that. The man might get a good look at him and remember his face, which -would put him at a disadvantage. - -Jack decided merely to follow and see what would happen. Twice the -man turned around and looked back; Jack decided to cross over to the -other side of the street. His heart pounded and he became nervous -and excited. He followed, keeping his eyes glued to the back of the -suspicious character. The man kept shifting his head in all directions, -staring at people, at houses, at everything; his eyes seemed to bore -right into things. - -The man turned into John Street, usually a deserted street with only -several old houses on it. Jack quickly removed the light sweater he -was wearing and formed it into a small package under his arm. If the -man had noticed him, the fact that he now appeared in a white shirt, -carrying a package under his arm, would make the man think him a -different person. The man continued walking rapidly with Jack hot -on his trail. The street was very poorly lit and Jack was forced to -shorten the distance between the man and himself, though he still -kept to the wrong side of the street. Coming to a lonely house set -on a large plot, the man suddenly dashed behind the wall. Jack felt -his excitement increase. He was only sorry that Paul or one of the -boys were not with him; not that he felt afraid but for the sake of -companionship. He had a weird, creepy feeling to be following a man on -a deserted, dark street. - -Jack kept on walking as though nothing happened. He made believe that -he didn’t see anything unusual. His head square on his shoulders, he -kept a careful watch out of the corner of his eye. He saw a large rock -on the lot he was passing and immediately he threw himself behind it. -Looking from the side of his shelter, he watched the house across the -street. Possibly five minutes passed and nothing happened. To him it -seemed like hours. At last the man he had been following showed himself -at the corner of the house. Warily, the man stuck his head out and -looked in all directions. In spite of the distance between them, the -man’s wild appearance, his ghostly form outlined in the dark, made Jack -shiver; a cold chill ran down his spine. - -At last the man came forth and walked away in the direction from which -he had come. Waiting until he thought it was safe for him to follow, -Jack then rose and sprinted forward until he was within about five -yards of his man, who no longer shifted his head back and forth wildly -but, instead kept looking straight ahead of him. Jack was glad of that -because it made it easier following. - -At Main Street, the man turned right. Jack followed and became more -convinced that his suspicions were well founded. Beyond any doubt there -was either something wrong with the man or else he was a fugitive of -some sort, trying to get away. The man turned into Water Street and -Jack felt a cold chill break out. Instantly it flashed upon him that -the suspicious fire of the previous day had occurred on Water Street. -Was the man returning to the place of his crime? Or was he on his way -to perpetrate another crime, perhaps set flames to another house in the -same neighborhood? - -His head turned straight ahead of him, the man walked on briskly. Jack -followed. Closer and closer they came to the house that had burned -down. When they were within about ten yards of it, the man suddenly -stopped in his tracks and very slowly turned around. In the nick of -time, Jack dashed into a shadow and was out of sight. The man hesitated -and then very slowly approached the heap of ashes and sticks of wood -that were once a house. Jack hid himself, watching him closely, -wondering what he was up to. Seeing the man approach the heap of ashes, -Jack’s emotions got so strong that he could barely control himself. -“Easy!” he mumbled to himself. “Take it easy now!” - -He flattened himself out on the ground and watched his man who sat down -on the bare earth as though in grief. The man’s shoulders heaved and -soon Jack heard sobs of genuine sorrow. Jack could not help feeling -sorry for the poor chap. He wondered what was wrong with him, that -might have caused him to set fire to the house. For by now, Jack was no -longer in any doubt as to the man’s guilt. - -For some time the man sat there, hunched over, his body trembling and -sobbing bitterly. At last he got on his knees and crept forward to the -heap of ashes. Picking up a handful, he let the dust slide through his -fingers. Five or six times he repeated this action. Finally he took out -of his pocket a handkerchief, spread it out on the ground, and piled -several handfuls of ashes on it; then gathering the ends together, he -made a knot and put the package under his arm. Rising, he looked around -and then walked off in the direction of Main Street. - -Just as soon as he thought it was safe, Jack was up and following. What -was the most reasonable thing to do, he tried to figure out. Should -he notify the police? Should he run off and talk it over with Paul or -Ken? Or should he do nothing and just follow. Unable to determine what -would be his most reasonable action, he continued to follow the man and -thought of nothing else. - -A block before Main Street, he saw his man suddenly disappear into -the side street. Becoming frantic at the thought of losing him, Jack -sprinted up to the corner. He saw his man flattening out against the -wall of the corner building. Jack hid behind a parked car. Was the -man aware of being followed? Jack tried to think whether he had at -any moment shown himself. His deliberations were cut short by the man -stepping forth again and continuing on his way. Pursuer and pursued -turned left on Main Street. The man increased his pace, stretching out -his long legs. However, Jack had no difficulty in following. Clear -across the town the two went, back to John Street into which the man -turned. Jack hesitated for a second before crossing the street. There -was something funny about being led back to this deserted street. Could -it be possible that he was being led into a trap of some sort? Chucking -his anxiety and doubt to the winds, he crossed the street to follow, -but by then the man had disappeared. He walked up and down the street -but the man did not return. - -Jack returned to Main Street. “Whew!” He wiped the perspiration off -his brow. That was some night, some chase, he thought to himself. The -next moment he felt a pang of regret for having lost track of his man. -However, it could not be helped and it would be useless to worry over -it. Now that he had a pretty good picture of the individual—even -though he had not seen the face—Jack felt certain that he would come -upon him again. In the meanwhile he thought it best to go over and see -Paul. - -Paul and Ken were sitting on the steps of the porch. Side by side, in -silence, each mused over his thoughts. Paul noticed someone approach -the gate. The next moment he was on his feet and running to meet his -chum. “Jack!” he cried, “where have you been?” - -Ken also ran up. “Hey!” he spoke harshly, “you had us in stitches. What -is the idea of disappearing like that and where have you been?” - -Jack smiled. “I am sorry I had you fellows worried,” he said. “But wait -until I tell you what happened to me.” - -“What?” demanded Paul impatiently. - -“Let’s sit down first; I’m tired.” - -The boys sat down at the rear of the porch, so as not to be disturbed. -Jack told his story and Paul and Ken listened gravely, interrupting -every once in a while for some detailed information. They sat so -closely together, listened so attentively to the narrative, that an -outsider seeing them would have taken them for conspirators. In a sense -they were that: they were conspiring on how to capture and rid the -neighborhood of a maniac. When Jack had at last concluded, Ken let out -a long whistle. Paul whispered, “That proves all my suspicions.” - -“Wait a minute,” said Ken. “Let’s re-consider the whole situation. Both -of you seem to have the impression that the man is a maniac, crazy. But -how do you know that he didn’t contrive the whole thing just to put on -a show for Jack’s sake? How do you know what the man was up to? He -might have realized that he was being followed and to mislead Jack, he -performed a mighty interesting show. We don’t know whether this man is -guilty of burning down that house and before we are sure of it, let’s -not pass judgement.” - -There was silence. Those statements provided plenty of food for thought -and all three of them knitted their brows. Paul said, “What you say -is true, Ken. Of course, we must not pass judgement hastily. However, -somehow I feel that my suspicions are correct.” - -Jack nodded. “I feel the same way about it,” he offered as his opinion. - -“At any rate,” argued Ken, “let’s wait and see. You say that you would -recognize him if you saw him again—” - -“Absolutely,” asserted Jack interrupting. “I could pick him out of a -million men.” - -“Very well, then. In that case, we will watch out for him. In the -meanwhile, I suggest that the first thing tomorrow morning we go over -to Water Street and examine the place. Perhaps we will find some sort -of clue, his footprints if nothing else.” - -“It’s too bad we can’t go there tonight,” said Jack. - -“No. For one thing, it is too late. And secondly if someone noticed -us there tonight, we would be under suspicion. And that would make -everything perfect.” - -“That’s settled, then,” remarked Ken as he rose. “I am going home. -Coming, Jack?” - -“Yes. Goodnight, Paul.” - -“Goodnight. See you fellows tomorrow morning.” - -“Righto!” - - - - -CHAPTER VI - -THE SPY - - -The following morning, immediately after breakfast, the three boys met -and set off for Water Street. At the scene of the fire, Jack pointed -out the approximate spot where the man had sat and wept. Searching for -footprints, they found many, most of them indistinct and smudged. They -continued their search for other possible clues but found none. In the -midst of their searchings, however, Paul looking up thought he saw a -flitting shadow duck behind a fence across the street. Making believe -that he saw nothing, he bent over and continued his investigations; -however, he had his eyes glued to the spot. And sure enough, he saw a -head protrude. He was amazed. Was it possible that someone was spying -on them? Was it possible that the person Jack had followed the evening -before had now turned around and was following them? - -He called the two boys over. Pretending that he was explaining to -them the outline of a footprint, he told them in a few words, of his -discovery. “Don’t look now,” he warned his friends; “and don’t both -look at the same time.” - -Ken joked, saying, “I hope this thing hasn’t got you so that you are -beginning to see things.” - -“Don’t be funny,” remarked Paul seriously. “Suppose you fellows move -off now. Keep an eye on the spot I pointed out to you and don’t give -yourselves away.” - -The boys separated and pretended to be absorbed in their -investigations. They kept this up for about five minutes and then Paul -called them and they walked away. “Well?” he asked anxiously. - -Jack nodded. “You are right,” he whispered. “I also saw the head -protruding from behind the fence watching us.” - -“What about you, Ken? Did you see anything?” - -He shook his head. “I’m sorry,” he said, “but I am not as eagle-eyed as -you two. I saw nothing suspicious.” - -“But I saw him watching us several times,” insisted Paul. - -“I saw him only once,” added Jack. - -“Well, you two may be right and I wrong,” commented the third companion. - -“Who do you think it could be?” asked Jack. “And what do you think his -purpose is?” - -“How should I know?” - -“Do you think it is that man I followed last night?” - -Paul hesitated for a moment then shook his head. “No, and I will tell -you why. The person you followed last night was tall and gaunt. This -individual appeared to me to be about average height and robust. I -could tell that from the shadow.” - -“Shall I turn around and see if we are being followed?” asked Ken. - -“No, don’t do that,” warned Paul. “He might catch on that we know we -are being followed. I have a better plan.” - -“What?” - -“When we get to Main Street, you, Ken, will turn right, wave to us, -make believe as though you are saying goodbye. Jack and I will turn -left and pretend that we are going home. But instead of actually -walking off, Ken, you will dash into a doorway and watch to see if -anyone is following us.” - -“And if there is?” asked Ken. - -“Then you will follow him, naturally,” was Paul’s answer. - -“And if there is not?” - -“Then you will take a roundabout route and meet us in my house in about -half an hour.” - -“All right. I’ll do that.” - -At Main Street, the group parted, one boy walking off in one direction, -while the other two headed in the opposite direction. Ken, just as soon -as he parted from his companions, walked to the second store from the -corner, a haberdashery, and stared at the window display. Actually, -however, his eyes were roaming elsewhere and he was carefully watching -the corner. Some people came out of Water Street, but by the look on -their faces, by their general appearance and by the fact that they -seemed to know exactly which way their direction lay, Ken knew that it -was not any one of them. Suddenly he caught his breath. A robust man of -medium height emerged from the street and paused at the corner. He wore -a light jacket and a Panama hat, the brim pulled down over his forehead. - -After standing hesitantly on the corner, he turned left, seemingly bent -on following Paul and Jack. Ken crossed the street and followed. The -chase continued for several blocks, the man increasing his pace and Ken -doing likewise. The two boys were just ahead, crossing Chestnut Street. -As the man came to the corner, he turned. Ken stopped at a corner -store and looked at the window display. He watched the man walk to the -middle of the block and then turn into the yard of a private house. Ken -scratched his head and wondered. - -The two boys were awaiting him. As Ken came up the walk to the porch, -Paul asked, “Well?” - -Ken nodded meaningfully and the two boys were re-assured of their -suspicions. Joining his companions, he muttered, “This man hunt is -getting me. I’m afraid that before it is all over I am going to go -crazy.” - -“Why? What’s the matter?” inquired Jack. - -“Do you know who was following us?” Ken put the question very gravely -and looked from one boy to the other. - -“Who?” - -“Captain Bob.” - -The announcement came as a shock, almost overwhelming them. Each boy -searched the face of the other for some meaning or understanding. But -all of them were just as puzzled. Paul repeated the name, “Captain Bob! -But why should he follow us?” - -Ken shrugged his shoulders. “Are you sure it was he?” questioned Jack, -his demeanor grave and serious. - -“I am absolutely positive. After all, I know the man. It’s true I -didn’t see his face—” - -Paul jumped. “You didn’t see his face!” he exclaimed. “Then how do you -know it was he? You might be mistaken.” - -Ken shrugged his shoulders. “Very possible,” he said, “but I am pretty -sure I am not mistaken. To begin with, I know the man and I can -recognize him without seeing his face. And secondly, I watched him -walk down Chestnut Street and enter a house at about the middle of the -street. That is where he lives, isn’t it?” - -“Yes, but are you sure he walked into his own house—that is, Captain -Bob’s house?” demanded Paul. - -“Well, no, I didn’t follow him all the way to his home; I watched from -the corner. But just the same I am pretty sure that it was Captain Bob.” - -There was silence. The boys could not understand why the Captain should -follow them. “Well, I’ll be!” exclaimed Jack. “This thing is getting -beyond me and I am losing my patience.” - -“Now don’t get excited,” cautioned Paul. “And keep quiet for a couple -of minutes. I am trying to think of something.” - -“Think of what?” asked Ken. - -“Of what he said to us when we were over to see him,” was the answer. - -“What about it?” - -Paul leaned over toward his two companions. “Now look, fellows,” he -began. “There is one particular thing he told us that comes back to me -now very distinctly. You remember how just as we were leaving, he said -to us, ‘Don’t you go around talking about a pyromaniac; it may get you -into trouble.’ Remember him saying that?” - -Jack nodded. “Yes, I remember.” - -“Same here,” added Ken, “now that you call our attention to it. But -what about it? He meant it for our own good.” - -“Of course,” said Paul, “I am not doubting his sincerity. But, Captain -Bob is much shrewder than we give him credit for, that’s the point.” - -“How do you mean?” inquired Jack. - -“We came over to talk over with him the fire, didn’t we?” continued -Paul. “Well, remember that he didn’t seem to have a very definite -opinion though he did feel that there was something odd about the cause -or origin of the fire.” - -“Well, what’s your point?” demanded Ken, his curiosity aroused. - -“Only this,” said Paul, “that since we told him of our own doubts -about the fire and that since we told him we suspected a pyromaniac, -he immediately came to the conclusion that we knew more than we were -telling him. And in order to find out what we may know about the fire, -he is following us.” - -“Sounds logical to me,” muttered Jack. - -Ken shook his head. “It may sound logical,” he said, “but somehow I am -not convinced. How should he know we were going out to Water Street -this morning? And he would have to watch the house of any one of us -three all morning to follow us. And why should he pick this morning to -follow us?” - -Paul smiled at his friend’s naive questions. “To begin with,” he said, -“how do we know he has not been following us since that night we spoke -to him? But I am under the impression that his following us is just an -accident.” - -“An accident!” echoed Jack. “Explain yourself.” - -“I will if you don’t interrupt. My impression is that he was coming to -Water Street this morning also to search for some clues to the fire. -But when he saw us there, he naturally watched us to see what we were -up to and then followed us.” - -Ken shook his head in a gesture of disbelief. Jake, on the other hand -mused quietly, trying to untangle the whole situation, but unable to -find a starting point. Finally he asked, “Do you think he will continue -to follow us, Paul?” - -“Can’t tell. He may and he may not.” - -After a short time of silence, Jack rose and suggested, “Well, let’s go -home for lunch.” - -“That’s a bully idea,” cried Ken. “I didn’t realize how hungry I am.” - -“All right, I’ll see you boys later,” said Paul. - -That evening, immediately after supper, Paul went across the street to -call for Ken. As the two boys walked down the street, Paul whispered, -“We are being followed.” - -Ken gasped. “Captain Bob!” he exclaimed in a hushed tone of voice. - -“Don’t know. But for the last half hour I noticed that someone was -hovering about the house. And as we came out and walked away, I noticed -a form slink out of the shadows and follow us.” - -“What do you think we ought to do?” - -“I have an idea.” And he whispered some instructions to his friend. - -Ken nodded. “And then what?” he asked. - -“Leave the rest to me.” - -When the two boys arrived in front of Jack’s home, Paul spoke up rather -loudly, “I guess I’ll walk down the block and call Nuthin’. I’ll be -back in about five minutes.” - -“All right,” answered Ken just as loudly. “Jack and I will wait for -you.” - -Ken entered the yard while Paul walked off straight ahead. Turning in -at the end of the street, he set off at a run around the block. - -Returning to the same street at the other end, he hovered close to the -wall of a building and looked everywhere to detect the hiding place of -the spy. Suddenly he caught his breath. He detected a slight movement -behind a fence at the other side of the street, several houses below. -He crossed to the other side and walked ahead. Sure enough, a man -stepped out and came toward him. As they met, Paul greeted, “Hello, -Captain Bob.” - -The man grunted and was going to pass on, but Paul instantly got into -his way. The man stopped, “Huh?” he muttered. “Did you speak to me?” - -“I said hello, Captain Bob.” - -“Hello yourself. Now let me see, your face seems to be familiar, but I -can’t seem to remember your name.” - -“Paul Morrison.” - -“Oh, yes, yes. You are the boy who dashed into the burning house and—” - -Paul interrupted. “Yes, that’s right; you know me.” What a poor -actor the man was, Paul thought. He certainly couldn’t get away with -pretending that he didn’t know him. His heart pounded and perspiration -gathered on his brow. He was debating with himself what his approach -should be. Would it be best merely to imply that Captain Bob’s spying -was a known fact to them or should he put it frankly to the old man -and see what he would say. Paul steeled himself. Very suddenly, trying -to take the man off his guard, he said, “Captain Bob, I am very much -surprised that you should be following us.” - -The old man straightened up. “What was that you said? Following you? -What for? Why should I be following you, tell me that.” - -“That is something you should tell me,” he replied respectfully. “But -you spied on us this morning on Water Street and then followed us as -far as Chestnut Street. And just now you were following us again.” - -It was really too dark to tell, but Paul felt that the old man had -turned red and became confused. “My dear boy,” he mumbled angrily, “You -don’t know what you are talking about.” - -“You shouldn’t say that, Captain Bob. If I wasn’t positive, I wouldn’t -accost you like this.” - -After a moment of tense silence, the captain laughed. “Well, my boy,” -he said, “you are right, but I promise not to do it any more.” - -“Thank you. But if you don’t mind, I wish you would tell me why you are -following us.” - -Captain Bob replied gravely, “You see, my boy, there have been too -many fires in this town lately. And when you and your friends came -and talked to me about the fire the other day, I became a little -suspicious. I tried to,—er,—get as much information out of you as I -could, but somehow I felt that you were not telling me everything. So I -thought I would check up on you.” - -A feeling of relief swept over Paul. He wanted to jump into the air -and shout for joy. Even though he was a modest boy, he had to pat -himself on the back; thus far, all his suspicions and deductions had -been correct. He would certainly make a good detective. The captain -was waiting for him to say something and he commented, “But we really -don’t know any more than we told you, Captain Bob. If there is anything -the boys and I can do to help you, such as help check up on your -suspicions—that is if you have any—we would be glad to do so.” - -The old man chuckled. “You are a smart one, my boy. I know that you -have something up your sleeve. But never mind.” - -Paul felt his face going red. He must not give anything away, he -thought. Out loud, he said, “But really, Captain, we don’t. We don’t -know as much as you do, if as much.” - -“Well, never mind. And,—er,—forget about my following you. I meant no -harm.” - -“I’m sure of that,” replied the boy. “And it is perfectly all right.” - -“Good night, my boy.” - -“Good night, Captain Bob.” - -Paul watched the man disappear around the corner. And just as he -started to cross the street, two figures darted out toward him, “Well?” -cried Ken. - -Paul put a finger to his lips. “Sh!” he cautioned. - -The boys retreated to Jack’s garage where Paul told his companions the -story. Just as soon as the narrative was completed, Ken cried, “The sly -old fox! You know, I wouldn’t be at all surprised if he continues to -spy on us.” - -“That is just what I was going to say,” agreed Paul. “He is a very -shrewd man and I am positive that he suspects somehow.” - -“You don’t mean to say that he suspects us of setting fire to that -house?” inquired Jack seriously. - -“No, not setting fire to the house,” answered Paul smiling. “That is -ridiculous and we must give him more credit than that. My impression is -that he suspects us of knowing something about it which we are holding -back from him. And that happens to be true.” - -“Providing, of course, that our suspicions are correct,” argued Ken, -still a bit doubtful. - -“Well, of course, under those conditions.” - -“What do you think our next move should be?” questioned Jack. - -“Let’s go to the movies,” suggested Ken. - -“Oh, no!” exclaimed Jack. - -“Why not?” reasoned Paul. “Captain Bob won’t follow us tonight any -more—” - -“Which makes it safe for us to go to the movies,” joked Ken. - -The boys laughed. “Seriously, though,” said Paul, “there is nothing -else for us to do tonight. That man was abroad last night, and it is -reasonable to assume that he won’t do any more prowling around tonight.” - -“I agree with that wholeheartedly,” said Ken. “Let’s go to the movies.” - - - - -CHAPTER VII - -THE ROBBERY - - -The following morning, at the breakfast table, Paul happened to glance -at the front page of the _Stanhope Herald_ which Dr. Morrison was -reading. At the bottom of the page, boxed off, was a story with the -headline PROFESSOR LINK’S HOUSE ROBBED. Paul became quite upset and -found it difficult to eat his cereal. However, he controlled himself -and did not show any untoward interest in the newspaper. His father -finished breakfast first, and he laid down the paper and left for his -office. Paul gulped down his milk, picked up the paper and went out on -the porch. - -The story was that someone had broken into Professor Link’s home and -had stolen a valuable, early edition of “Colonial History.” Nothing -else was taken, except that the thief had strewn many of the books on -the floor. The theory was that the thief had entered by an open window -in the library. - -Ken came dashing across the street and up to the porch. “Hey, Paul!” he -cried, “did you read the story in the morning paper?” Paul held up the -paper. “So you know already?” - -Jack came. “Well, what do you think of the robbery?” he asked bluntly. -“I had a feeling we should not have gone to the movies last night.” - -“What could we have done?” asked Ken. - -“We might have come upon him and possibly frustrated his plan.” - -“So!” exclaimed Ken. “You think that ‘he’ did it? Pretty soon you will -have every crime under the sun charged up against him.” - -“I don’t think we could have done anything,” commented Paul. “The paper -says that the robbery occurred any time after about midnight, when the -professor says he left his library to go to bed.” - -“But we might have come across him sometime before and followed him. -Then we might about have judged what he was up to.” Thus argued Jack. - -“Maybe yes and maybe no,” was Paul’s pert statement. - -“Paul,” demanded Ken, “you don’t mean to tell me that you really -believe this man, this so-called maniac, committed the robbery, do you?” - -“Yes, I do.” - -“Tell me, how do you figure it out?” - -“It’s very simple,” was Paul’s answer. “Only one book was stolen. Of -course, the book was an old edition and valuable, but valuable only to -a man like Professor Link. In actual money, the book is worth perhaps -ten or fifteen dollars; but if the thief was going to sell it, he -wouldn’t get more than four or five dollars for it.” - -“Yes,” added Jack, “there were more valuable things in the room, if -the thief had been interested in stealing something valuable. That is -in itself enough to show that the thief, whoever he was, was either -a maniac or one who was interested in obtaining only that book and -nothing else. But an ordinary, normal man, would not break into a house -to steal something like that.” - -“Maybe,” remarked Ken doubtfully, “but—” - -Paul interrupted, saying, “Let’s go over to Bobolink and get him to go -over to Professor Link. He is Bobolink’s grandfather, isn’t he?” - -“Yes. Let’s do that.” - -The boys wended their way to Bobolink’s home and luckily found him -still in. He was glad to see them, and commented, “I was just going to -call you fellows.” - -“What for?” - -“I thought that perhaps you might be interested in accompanying me to -my grandfather’s home.” - -“That’s why we came for you,” Jack informed him. - -“Good. I’ll be with you in a minute.” - -Professor Link who lived alone except for a woman who cooked and kept -house for him, was a retired college professor and an authority in -colonial history. He occupied a small, private house of his own and -spent his time writing books on the history of the early pioneering -days. - -His three companions behind him, Bobolink rang the bell. The -housekeeper opened the door. “Good morning, Mrs. Hix,” greeted -Bobolink. “Is my grandfather in?” - -Mrs. Hix answered, “He is in the library.” - -The boys filed in and Bobolink knocked on the library door. “Come in,” -someone called. - -The boys entered. Mr. Link was a gray haired man of about sixty with -a warm smile, who was very friendly to young people. “Hello, Gramps,” -greeted Bobolink. - -“Hello, fellows,” returned the professor. “What are you doing here?” he -asked curiously. - -“Just thought we would pay you a visit,” his grandson informed him. - -“That’s very nice of you, but I wonder what is behind it. Sit down, -boys.” - -The walls of the room were lined with books. And it appeared that the -mess that the thief had caused was all cleaned up. “What about that -robbery, Gramps?” asked Bobolink. - -Paul was walking around the room, pretending to be looking at the -books. Actually he was searching for something. He paused to hear the -professor’s answer to the question. “Not much harm done.” - -“Was it a valuable book?” asked Jack. - -“Not so particularly valuable; a book on colonial history.” - -“Isn’t it rather odd that the thief should take that particular book -and nothing else?” asked Paul casually. - -Professor Link pursed his lips. “Rather,” he answered. “If he had been -out to steal, he could have found more valuable things to take. He -might even have found some money in the drawer of my desk, if he had -looked.” - -“But nothing else was touched?” Paul asked the question and was anxious -to hear the answer. “No. Nothing else seems to have been taken.” -Bobolink and Ken discussed with the professor the state university to -which they were going, entering as freshmen in September. Paul walked -around the back of the desk. He glanced down into the waste-paper -basket. His heart almost stopped still. He picked something out of the -basket and said to the professor, “Do you mind if I use this to copy -down the name of a book?” Professor Link looked at the card. “Not at -all. Where did you get it?” - -“In the waste basket.” Paul turned the card to show that it was blank -on both sides. - -The boys stared at Paul and at the white card. “Here is some clean -paper,” the professor said, and pushed forward a white pad. “And here -is a pencil,” he added. - -“This is perfectly all right,” asserted Paul. Picking up the pencil, he -pretended that he was copying down the title of a book. - -The boys were eager to get out, yet they could not very well show -haste without making the professor suspicious. So they lingered for -an additional twenty minutes, discussing colleges and college life. -At last they escaped. As soon as they were outside the door, Bobolink -opened his mouth to ask a question. But Paul cautioned him. “Sh! Let’s -wait until we are further away from the house.” - -Some distance away, Bobolink finally asked his question. “What was that -card you picked out of the basket?” - -Paul took it out of his pocket and showed it to them—a white card, -blank on both sides, and three by two inches. “You have your card, -Jack?” asked Paul. “Mine is home.” - -“Yes, here it is.” And he produced it. - -The cards were compared; they were identical. “Well, now what do you -think of that!” exclaimed Bobolink. - -“In every case,” whispered Paul seriously, “the same person. This is -becoming terrible.” - -“Yes,” agreed Ken. “I’m coming to look at it from your point of view. -And from now on we have to take it more seriously and do something.” - -“What can we do?” asked Bobolink. - -“You know what?” remarked Paul. “If I didn’t think we would be laughed -at, I would tell the police.” - -“Aw, go on,” said Ken. “If all the evidence you have is the white card -and the fact that Jack followed a suspicious looking person, they -would think that you were either crazy or trying to put something over.” - -“That’s the trouble,” asserted Paul. “In that case it is up to us to -solve the mystery and put an end to it.” - -“Well said,” commented Bobolink, “but how are we going to do it?” - - - - -CHAPTER VIII - -ENCOUNTER - - -The boys did not know what to do nor how to do it. But they were -determined to put an end to the mystery. And shortly, too. If the -man was permitted to roam the streets of the town freely, God knows -what damage he might eventually do and what crimes he might have up -his sleeve. He might lead away another child, he might commit more -robberies, he might put the torch to a house full of sleeping persons, -he might do anything. He had to be caught; upon that the boys were -firmly convinced. - -That evening, Jack came to Paul and said, “Listen, I’m going to tell my -mother that I am having supper at your house tonight. But instead, I am -going down to Jones Street and nose around a bit.” - -“That’s a good idea. But suppose I go with you.” - -“No, I would rather go down alone. It is too difficult for two people -to be hiding together, darting in and out, and all that.” - -“You are right, Jack. Be careful, though. Don’t get into any trouble. I -feel guilty letting you go alone.” - -“Oh, don’t talk like an old woman.” The boys laughed at that. “I can -take care of myself. I have done it before.” - -“Very well, go ahead. But I want you to come back and tell what -happens.” - -“All right. But if nothing happens, I won’t come. I will go home -instead.” - -Thus it was agreed and the two boys parted. Half an hour later, Jack -was at the corner of Main and Jones Streets. It was still daylight and -Jack had the opportunity to look the neighborhood over. It was a poor -and deserted neighborhood, not far from the edge of the town. The first -building on the corner was an old wooden house. At the street level was -a grocery store, and the floor above looked as though it were occupied -by a family. - -Alongside this building was an empty lot, as was true of the opposite -corner. Further on, intermittently on both sides of the street were -one or two family wooden homes. Jack walked up and down the block -twice. There were some women on several of the porches and a number of -children played on the empty lots. He decided to take up a position at -the corner of Jones and Main Streets, but it was still light and he -didn’t want to arouse any suspicion. So it became a problem as to how -to spend the hours until dark. - -First he walked up and down the block several times, then went around -the block twice until he was afraid that people in the neighborhood -might become suspicious of him. Then he walked up Main Street and back -again. It seemed to him that the day would never end. He crossed -the street to the empty lot and walked to the farthest corner of it. -Picking out a comfortable place to sit down, where he would not be -noticed, he tried to watch the corner so as to see everyone who passed. - -The minutes dragged on endlessly. What is the matter, Jack asked -himself. Time usually passes so quickly; before you turn around the day -is gone. And now—He shifted in his seat and found the ground hard to -sit on. Staring vaguely at the house on the corner, at the few people -that passed up and down, many thoughts came to his mind. The uppermost -thought in his mind was, what might be wrong with this man, the maniac? -It was something he wished he knew, as he had always been interested in -trying to figure out what made people do the things they did. - -But that thought soon slipped his mind and was replaced by another -one—that of going to college. Another three weeks and the summer -vacation would be over and Ken, Bobolink, Paul and he would be on their -way to the state university. What was college life like, he wondered. -There were sports, of course. Ken would make a swell swimmer and Paul -would most likely join the football squad. As for himself, he would -try basketball. Then there were the fraternities. He had heard a lot -about Greek letter clubs. But he was not going to bother much with any -outside activities; he was going to study to be a doctor. So was Paul. -And it took a lot of study to become a doctor. - -He was staring rather aimlessly. His dreaming helped to pass the time -away. It was already almost dusk. Suddenly he was electrified. He -jumped to his feet and then he dropped to the ground again. A tall -individual had just then emerged from the door of the corner house. -Bending low, he ran to the corner and caught sight of the retreating -back of his man. A cold chill ran down his spine. He was certain of his -man. There was the same height, the same baggy clothes and that wild -appearance. The man kept shifting his head in all directions; his eyes -seemed to be everywhere, staring at people, at houses, at everything. - -Jack followed closely. It was still not quite dark and he hoped he -would not be stopped by anyone. He was rather glad when the man turned -into York Street. It was a quiet, residential street and instantly -Jack feared what the man might be up to. Was he bent on starting a -fire in one of the fine houses on the street? But his fears were in -vain because the man kept on walking, almost reaching the tracks. -Repeating his gestures of the day before, the man suddenly stopped -and very slowly turned around on his heel. Jack had just enough time -to dash behind a fence. The man entered the yard and then walked -behind the house. Jack ran up and hid himself behind a tree almost -directly across from the house. Looking closely, he noticed that the -house appeared to be unoccupied. There were no lights in the windows -and there was nothing to indicate that anyone lived there. The man -reappeared and entered the house by the front door. He just walked in -without using any key, or breaking in the lock. There was something -suspicious about the house. If it were unoccupied, it should be locked. -If a family did live there, there would be some light in the windows; -and probably the maniac would not enter so assured of his safety. - -It seemed to Jack that the man was in the house a long time. He decided -on a dangerous tactic. Quickly, noiselessly, he sprinted across the -street, jumped the fence and ran to the side of the house. Cautiously, -he moved to see if there was a back door; he found it on the other side -of the house. Putting his hand on the knob, he turned it and pushed, -but the door wouldn’t open; it was locked. He moved toward the front -again, to watch for the exit of his man. Every second was an eternity. -His heart pounded wildly and if he had not controlled himself, he would -have trembled, not so much from fear as from anxiety and excitement. - -He flattened himself out against the wall and remained stationary, not -daring to make a noise. Suddenly he felt long, bony fingers grab him -by the shoulder and wheel him around. His blood went cold and he could -almost feel his hair standing on end. “So!” the man grunted under his -breath. “What are you doing, following me, eh?” Jack cowered before -the great height towering over him. He saw that the man had a rising -forehead, bushy eyebrows and deep eye sockets. What impressed him most, -however, were the man’s sunken cheeks and his wild eyes, which were -dark and brilliant. - -For almost a minute, Jack was paralyzed and couldn’t talk. Eventually -he muttered, “No—no—I—I’m not following you.” - -“Yes, you are,” accused the man. “You have been following me for two -weeks now and I want you to stop it.” - -Jack heaved a sigh of relief. The man was crazy. But was he dangerous, -he wondered. Would he attack him. He was on guard against an attack. -“Why, no, Mister, I’m not following you. Why should I? I don’t even -know you.” - -“You lie!” screamed the other. “You lie! You do know me and I know you.” - -Jack thought he had better be quiet and polite with his assailant. A -good, sound argument might get him out of his predicament, he thought. -“I am sorry, Mister,” he said, “but I repeat that I don’t know you. If -you know me, as you say you do, then what is my name.” - -Still holding on to Jack’s shoulder, the man scratched his chin. “Now -let me see,” he mumbled to himself. “What is your name?” He mused, -then he snapped his fingers and announced, “I know. It’s Jack.” - -The boy gasped. How could that man know him, know his name. What was -he to do? He wished he had never known about this thing, had never -followed this man and had never got into this situation. Controlling -himself, he asked, “What is my family name?” - -“Barrows!” the man snapped back. “Barrows, that’s it.” - -“You are wrong,” contradicted Jack. “My name is Ed Smith.” - -“No,” insisted the man, “you are Jack Barrows. And I demand to know why -you are following me.” - -“But I am not following you. You are mistaken.” - -“Then what are you doing here?” The man’s voice now boomed. “Tell me -that!” - -“I used to live in this house,” fabricated unhappy Jack. “I once used -to live here,” he repeated, “and I was just looking around.” - -“So you used to live here!” - -The man lifted his free arm and swung. Jack ducked. The arm crashed -against the wall, the man screamed with pain and Jack wrenched himself -free. The man lunged for him. Jack side-stepped and stuck his foot out; -his victim tripped and stretched himself out on the ground. Without -waiting or looking back, Jack was off. He jumped the fence and dashed -down the street. Rounding the corner, he stopped to consider why he -was running. He stood nonchalantly and waited for his man to appear. -But the mysterious individual was not forthcoming. He waited five more -minutes and still he did not appear. - -He came around the corner again and crossed to the other side of the -street. Walking slowly and cautiously, he came to the tree opposite the -house. Taking shelter, Jack looked across. A wave of pity swept through -him at the scene he saw. On the very same spot, almost where he fell, -the man was now sitting up and his shoulders were trembling. From all -appearances, the man was sobbing bitterly, as though his heart were -breaking. - -Who is this man, Jack asked himself. And what is the matter with him? -What had ever happened to him to cause him to become what he was. Jack -asked himself all those questions but had no answers. He determined to -find out. He must find out, he thought to himself. - -Jack looked at his watch and saw that it was almost nine o’clock. He -realized that he was terribly hungry. He decided not to wait around any -more but to go home. On the way he remembered that he had promised Paul -that he would come over and tell him if anything had happened. But he -did not feel like it at the moment and he went straight home and called -Paul on the telephone. - - - - -CHAPTER IX - -WHO IS MR. GREY? - - -Paul and Ken were listening attentively to Jack’s story of what had -happened the night before. Paul commented, “It’s really a pity. What we -have to do is to catch him in the act as soon as possible and have him -arrested. Then something might be done for him.” - -“What could be done for him?” asked Ken. - -“Oh, I don’t know. Most likely he would be put into an asylum. That -would be best, too, I guess.” - -Jack showed his companions the house to which he followed his man the -night before. There was nothing much to see there. The place was empty -and unoccupied. But strangely, the front door was open. They entered -and searched about. All the rooms were empty and dusty. In the hall -again Paul noticed some scraps of paper in one corner. He looked at -them but thought nothing suspicious of it. He sniffed the air and then -shook his head. - -Outside again, they walked calmly off. “No clues here, it seems,” -muttered Ken. - -“No,” asserted Paul. And again he thought of the scraps of paper but -the next moment dismissed them from his mind. “What seems to bother -me most,” he added, “is how he came to suspect that he was being -followed?” - -“I don’t think he really suspected,” said Jack. “My opinion is that he -came upon me by accident.” - -“A very unhappy accident,” commented Ken. - -“Yes, rather.” - -“I should think so,” remarked Paul. He shook his head doubtfully. “Yet -somehow I can’t quite believe it. Of course, you’re most likely right, -but—” - -He broke off his sentence in the middle, not quite decided upon his -opinion. Jack thought out loud. “I wonder who this man is and what is -wrong with him?” - -“You say there is a grocery store at the corner house, is that right?” -The boys stopped and Jack nodded. “Then,” continued Ken, “let’s go down -there and inquire in a roundabout way in the store. They might know -him.” - -“That’s a swell idea,” cried Paul. - -“Yes, I think so too,” added Jack. “Let’s do it.” - -They walked down to Jones Street. A very short distance before they -arrived at their destination, they stopped to decide upon their plan of -action. “Exactly how are we going to do it?” asked Jack. - -“One of us will have to go inside and make a purchase, then ask about a -tall dark-complexioned man.” - -“I guess one of you two better go in. They may have noticed me around -here and they might get suspicious.” - -“I will go in,” offered Ken. “But what am I to say?” - -“Just ask if they know a tall, dark man living somewhere in the -neighborhood,” instructed Paul. - -“But if they ask me what I want him for, what am I to say?” - -“Make up some kind of story, anything. Say that you were told that he -was a plumber, or something like that, and that you want him to do a -job.” - -“All right, I’ll go in. Where are you fellows going to be?” - -“We will be right here. And when you come out, just keep walking -straight ahead as if you don’t know us.” - -“Okey, here goes.” - -Ken walked off and came to the store. He hesitated, looked around, -pretending that he was not certain it was the right place. He entered. -He noticed that a middle-aged woman was alone in the store. She came -out from behind the counter and asked, “Is there anything I can do for -you?” - -“Er—excuse me,” he said, “but I am looking for a tall, dark man. I was -told that he lives in this neighborhood somewhere.” - -“I know a tall, dark man,” she answered, speaking softly. “What is it -you want him for, may I ask?” - -“I was told he was a carpenter and looking for work and—” - -“It couldn’t be Mr. Grey. He is not a carpenter. You couldn’t mean him.” - -“No, I guess not. Thank you.” - -“It’s quite all right.” - -Ken left the store much excited. He walked briskly till he came upon -the boys. They fell in alongside of him. “Well?” asked Paul. - -“His name is Mr. Grey,” gasped Ken. - -“What else?” - -“That’s all. The woman did not tell me any more.” - -“But the name alone is not enough,” cried Jack. “What does he do? Where -does he live?” - -“I couldn’t ask her such questions,” Ken defended himself. “She would -become suspicious and tell me nothing.” - -“Let’s not argue,” cautioned Paul. “At least we have his name, that’s -something. Did the woman in the store seem to know him?” - -“Yes. I should imagine from the way she spoke that she knew him well.” - -“She didn’t mention anything, else?” asked Jack. - -“No.” - -The boys walked silently along for some while. Paul snapped his -fingers. “You know what?” he cried. “Let’s look him up in the town -directory.” - -“Where will we get one?” inquired Ken. - -“I have one home,” said Paul. - -The boys hurried to the Morrison home and Paul brought out the town -directory. It didn’t help them any. There were three Greys. One was a -pharmacist, the second was a butcher and the third a lawyer. They put -the book down and Jack muttered, “That’s not much of a help.” - -“No. It’s very possible that he has only recently moved into town,” -commented Paul. - -“Now that is an idea,” remarked Ken. “The reason he is so little known -must be because he is a newcomer around here.” - -“But how does that help us any?” asked Jack. - -“Well, it’s good to keep it in mind,” asserted Ken. - -“What do you say we go down to that neighborhood again?” asked Jack, -“and just look around. Perhaps we can find some person who knows -something.” - -“It’s all right with me,” was Paul’s comment. - -The three boys shuffled off the porch and walked down Main Street -again. At Jones Street, they could find no other stores in the -immediate neighborhood where they might enter and obtain some -information. They walked back and forth several times, but their -searches were futile. One of them suggested that they quit and go home -and the others assented. Passing on the other side of the street, -the three of them kept their eyes on the store. A woman emerged. Ken -grasped Paul by the arm. “Look,” he said, “there’s the woman leaving -the store.” - -“Well, what about her?” - -“Don’t you understand?” demanded Ken. “She is the woman I spoke to when -I entered the store.” - -“That’s right,” cried Jack. “If she is leaving, someone else must be in -the store. I am going in. Perhaps I can obtain some information.” - -Paul held on to his chum who was on the point of walking off. “No,” he -said. “I’m going in. You may have been noticed around here before and -it would look suspicious. Both of you just keep walking back and forth -and don’t attract attention. I am going in.” - -Jack and Ken continued walking along Main Street while Paul crossed -over to the store and entered. A customer was at the counter and -Paul pretended to be looking around. The customer left and the man, -evidently the proprietor, remained behind the counter, waiting for Paul -to give his order. “Is there anything I can do for you?” he asked. - -Paul picked up a small box of chocolate crackers and deposited a -nickel on the counter. The man picked up the coin and rang it up on -the register. “Excuse me, Mister, but it seems that a certain Mr. Grey -lives in this neighborhood and....” - -Paul did not finish his sentence. He scrutinized the man’s features -and concluded that the proprietor of the grocery was a shrewd, hard, -and unsympathetic individual. He must be careful of every word, he told -himself. The man drawled, “Now let me think.” He scratched his chin and -pretended that he was trying to remember an individual by the name of -Mr. Grey. “What is it you want of him?” he asked. - -“Well, you see,” Paul began, “my mother heard that he was a carpenter -and she wants some work done.” That was bad, he thought to himself. -It was the same story that Ken had used and if his wife told him that -some boy was in looking for a carpenter, the man was sure to become -suspicious. But he was obliged now to stick to his story. He continued, -“So she sent me around here to try and find him.” - -“Where do you live?” the grocery man asked him. - -“Around the corner. The next street.” - -“I don’t remember ever seeing you around in the neighborhood.” - -Paul realized that he was in a predicament and he had to get himself -out of it. “We just moved in, two weeks ago,” he answered. - -The man scratched his chin again. “Isn’t that strange?” he muttered. “I -haven’t heard of anyone moving in or out of the neighborhood within the -past two weeks.” He paused and eyed Paul who felt his face going red. -“Well, at any rate, I am sorry but I don’t know any Mr. Grey around -here.” - -Paul moved away from the counter. “Thank you,” he said. - -“It’s quite all right. Tell your mother to come in here sometime and do -her shopping. I like to know the people in the neighborhood.” - -“I will.” - -Paul was glad to escape from the store. He had never before realized -how difficult it is to obtain information from people. Joining his -companions, he laughed good naturedly. “What’s the joke?” asked Jack. - -“The old so and so!” he exclaimed. “He got more out of me than I got -out of him.” - -“You mean you didn’t find out anything?” Jack was serious and anxious. - -Paul shook his head. “Not a thing. The old man beat around the bush and -finally confessed that he didn’t know anyone by the name of Mr. Grey.” - -“And you fellows accused me of not obtaining enough information,” Ken -joked. “At least I found out what his name is.” - -The boys were discouraged. “Now what?” asked Jack in a tone of -hopelessness. - -His companions did not know what to do next and rather than talk about -it, they walked along silently. They came to the street on which Jack -lived and he said he was going home. Ken said, “No, don’t do that. It’s -early yet.” - -“Oh, I thought I would go home and putter around with my dad’s car; it -needs some work done on it.” - -“I’ll tell you what,” commented Ken. “Let’s go over and speak to your -father, Paul. He is a doctor and knows a lot of people in town. Perhaps -he might tell us something.” - -Paul shrugged his shoulders. “Yes, we can do that. But I don’t think he -has many patients in this neighborhood.” - -“And if he doesn’t know,” continued Ken, “we might go over and see -Chief of Police Bates. He knows me and I am sure we could get to see -him.” - -Paul shook his head. “I don’t think we ought to see Chief Bates. He -might ask us a lot of questions, worm the story out of us and then -laugh at us or call us crazy kids.” - -“We might at least try your father,” insisted Ken. - -“All right. We will do that.” - -But Dr. Morrison did not know either. He mentioned John Grey, the -pharmacist, Walter Grey the butcher and W. J. Grey the lawyer. Those -were all the Greys he knew. But the boys knew that themselves. They -were stumped. - - - - -CHAPTER X - -STUMPED! - - -It was shortly after lunch time and Paul was doing an errand for his -father. Walking down Main Street, he stopped at a stationery store to -look at the window display. His attention was attracted by someone -coming out of the store. He caught his breath. The man was tall, gaunt, -with ill fitting clothes hanging like sacks on him. “Mr. Grey!” he -thought to himself. - -Not hesitating, Paul followed. He wanted to get a good look at -the man’s face, but how was he going to do that? He thought fast. -Increasing his pace, he walked past the man. At the corner, he -pretended that he was lost and was looking for something. He waited for -Mr. Grey to come up. Approaching the man, he said, “Excuse me, sir. But -can you tell me where McDougal Street is? You see, I am a stranger in -this town.” - -Paul looked up at the great height towering over him. He was very much -excited and kept shifting his weight from one foot to the other. Mr. -Grey answered softly, “I’m sorry, son, but I really don’t know.” - -Paul pretended that he was disappointed. The man’s sunken cheeks, long -nose and deep sockets, were imprinted in his mind. But it was Mr. -Grey’s eyes that bore into him. Those eyes! he thought to himself, he -would never forget them. They were dark, brilliant, wild. He became -conscious that he was staring very awkwardly at the man and that Mr. -Grey was waiting for him to say something. He said, “You see—er—I am -looking for Grey’s Pharmacy.” - -The man repeated to himself, “Grey’s Pharmacy! I am sorry, but I don’t -think I know where it is.” - -On the spur of the moment, Paul said, “And then I have to go down also -to John and Main Streets. Can you tell me where that is?” - -Paul thought that the man would show some sign of interest at the -mention of the words Grey and John Street. But he was disappointed. -Mr. Grey was quite calm and not at all disturbed by those words. He -answered softly, “Yes, I can tell you where John Street is. You walk -straight down Main Street; you can’t miss it. It is quite a walk -though; almost a mile.” He hesitated for a second and looked down the -street. “There is the car coming,” he continued. “You can take it and -get off at John Street.” - -“Thank you,” murmured Paul and stepped aside to let the man pass on. -He watched Mr. Grey, walk away. Remembering that he still had the -errand to do for his father, he was undecided whether to follow or not. -Shaking his head, he turned and walked off. - -Completing the errand for his father, he ran off to the stationery -store. He entered. A young man behind the counter asked, “What can I do -for you?” - -Paul showed him a blank, white card. “Have you got any cards like -that?” he asked. - -The young man behind the counter took the card, fingered it and -answered, “Yes, we have them. How many do you want?” - -“I need ten,” said Paul. - -The young man stopped as he was pulling out a box from one of the -shelves, and replied, “I’m sorry. The cards are twenty-five cents a -hundred and we don’t sell less than a package of a hundred.” - -“Never mind, then,” announced Paul and walked out of the store. - -Paul felt cheerful; he seethed with excitement. Now he was getting -somewhere, he thought. Upon reflection he realized that he was nowhere -nearer to a solution of the mystery than he was before. Yet he could -not dispel his feeling of excitement. - -He felt someone touch him on the arm and Paul turned around. “Hello, -Captain Bob,” he called. - -“Hello, yourself, my boy,” was the reply. “What are you doing just now?” - -“Nothing much. I am at your disposal, if you want me to do something -for you,” he offered. - -“No, I don’t want you to do anything for me,” and the captain shook his -head. “I merely want to have a few words with you.” - -“That’s all right with me. What is it you want?” - -“Let’s first move away from the main thoroughfare,” remarked Captain -Bob, smiling. “We may get knocked over by all these people rushing past -us.” - -They walked away a short distance into Cherry Street. Paul was curious -to know what the captain had to say to him. He was on his guard, -though. The old man was clever and shrewd and if he thought he was -going to obtain information from him, he was mistaken. Paul steeled -himself and asked, “Is this all right? I guess we can talk here without -being disturbed.” - -Captain Bob nodded. “Yes, I think so, too,” he answered. “What I want -to ask you, my boy, is how are you getting along with solving that -mystery of yours?” - -Paul gasped. He didn’t think the man would put it up to him so bluntly. -“What mystery?” he asked, trying to make his voice sound as though he -were surprised at the question. - -“Now, now,” commented the old man. “Never mind beating around the bush. -Let’s be honest with each other. I suppose you know that I am also -interested in finding the culprit who is responsible for starting that -fire?” - -“That is news to me,” replied Paul. “I didn’t think you had any -suspicions about the cause of the fire.” - -“Well, you know I did. And what’s more, I also know that you and your -friends are doing a lot of detective work. I just want to know how you -are getting along and whether you have come upon any substantial clues.” - -Paul smiled, feeling slightly guilty. “As a matter of fact,” he -answered, “we have not been doing much lately at all. And ...” he -paused to suspend the effect of the remark. “And we don’t know any more -now than we did when we spoke to you about it.” - -“Tsk, tsk.” Captain Bob appeared angry. “I guess we will just have to -wait and see what happens.” - -“If there is anything my friends and I can do,” began Paul. - -The captain cut him short. “Never mind,” he said, “never mind. Goodbye.” - -Captain Bob walked off. Paul smiled to himself and went home. All -afternoon he brooded over his problem. The mystery continued to be a -mystery to him. He wondered what Captain Bob was up to, whether he was -still following him and his friends and also whether the old man was -conducting an investigation of his own. His father came up the steps of -the porch. “What are you brooding about, son?” he asked. - -“Oh, nothing much,” was the answer. “Just thinking.” - -Dr. Morrison looked askance at his son. “Well,” he commented, “let’s -hope you are really thinking and not pretending you are thinking.” - -“W-w-what was that you said?” gasped Paul. - -But Dr. Morrison laughed softly and walked into the house. Paul got out -of his seat and walked off. Jack was busy tinkering with his father’s -car. He looked up and called out, “Hello, Paul. Anything new?” - -Paul sat down on the box of tools. “A little,” he answered nonchalantly. - -Jack wiped his greasy hands. “What do you mean.” - -“I saw Mr. Grey.” Jack opened his eyes wide and stared at his friend. -“And I spoke to him, too,” he added. - -Jack sat down on the running board. “Well, go on, tell me. What -happened?” he asked anxiously. - -Paul related the events. Jack listened attentively. Finally he -muttered, “So! Does all that help any?” - -Paul shrugged his shoulders. “Very little. But at least I now have a -good idea of the sort of person he is.” A pause. “Captain Bob spoke to -me,” he announced. - -“What does he want? How did you see him?” - -“He stopped me in the street. He wants to know what we are doing and -how we are getting along.” - -“A shrewd, clever fellow, that Captain Bob,” was Jack’s appraisal. -“He is aware that we know something which we won’t tell him and he is -trying to get it out of us.” - -“I was wondering,” remarked Paul, “whether it wouldn’t be better to -tell him and see what happens.” - -“What good will that do?” - -“None that I can see, but ...” - -“But what?” - -“Nothing. Let’s forget that angle of it and think what to do?” - -“I know what I am going to do,” announced Jack. - -“What?” - -“The same as I did last night. I am going to follow Mr. Grey.” He eyed -his companion. “And you?” he asked. - -“I haven’t decided yet. Guess I’ll go home now.” - - - - -CHAPTER XI - -A HUNCH - - -Paul, however, did not go home. On the way he changed his mind and -went to the library instead. He went to the back of the room and pored -over the newspaper files of the past few months. About an hour later -he left the library. He had a hunch which gave him a new track to work -on. He had a slip of paper in his hand and he looked on the writing on -it several times until he memorized it. Then he tore the slip of paper -into minute scraps and disposed of it. - -Immediately after supper, he went out of the house and walked off. He -had a definite destination in mind. At Corral Street, which was two -blocks from Water Street, he set about looking for a particular number. -That led him about half a mile away from the place of the former fire, -which coincided with his hunch. He came upon the number he was looking -for. The house was a two story dwelling, set away from the sidewalk. At -the gate was a sign: - - JONES & JONES - REALTORS - HOUSE FOR RENT - -Paul walked around the block and looked over the neighborhood. It was -a similarly poor section of the town. Coming back to the empty house, -he sneaked into the yard and walked to the rear of the house. Unable -to find a good location from which he could watch anyone approaching -or entering the house, he retreated a short distance and took up a -position behind the gate and sheltered by some shrubbery. From his -vantage point, he could not only see anyone approaching the house, but -also keep a sharp watch at those passing along the street. - -It was already dusk. Paul settled himself, getting as comfortable as -possible. There was nothing else to do but wait and see. Perhaps his -hunch was a good one, and on the other hand, perhaps a very poor one, -he thought to himself. At any rate, he had nothing to lose by going -through with it. - -Time dragged on. He watched the sky become grayer and darker. The moon -rose and the first star came out. Night came on gradually. In spite of -himself, he began to fidget and become impatient. Was something going -to happen or wasn’t it? He went over in his mind the hunch that he had -and tried to figure out how reasonable it was. At least to himself it -appeared reasonable. He wondered, however, what Jack or Ken might think -of it. It was no use doing that, he told himself, because he had not -spoken to them about it. The next moment he was sorry he hadn’t done -it. Two heads, three heads are always better than one and they might -have seen things about this which had not occurred to him. He felt his -eyelids become heavy and tired and he closed his eyes for a second. -Only a second. He had to keep watch, he told himself. But even though -he fought against it, he did fall sound asleep as he waited. He dreamed -a hodge podge in which Mr. Grey, Captain Bob, Ken and Jack were all -setting fire to a house, laughing gleefully. When he awoke he felt -ashamed of himself for not keeping the watch. - -He took up his position again and resumed his watching. How could -he fall asleep like that, he asked himself. And he flushed with -embarrassment to have committed such an act. For all he knew, somebody -may have been here and was gone again. He looked at his watch. Nine -o’clock. He had been sleeping for almost an hour. He held his breath -and listened. Nothing. For about five minutes he watched the house and -the street. Except for an occasional bypasser, nothing happened. He -crept out of his hiding and looked all around the house. Nothing seemed -to have happened, nobody seemed to have been there. Calling himself a -fool, he decided to give up his watch and to go off. - -He walked along and meditated upon his foolish hunch. Is it a foolish -one, though, he asked himself. If nothing happened tonight, does that -mean that there is no basis for my suspicion? Is it not possible that -something may happen tomorrow night, or the night after? He stopped in -his tracks and thought, suppose something should happen there now, just -after I left? For a second he felt that he should turn around and take -up his vigil again. He took several steps ahead but then turned around -and walked back. - -He came to the house. From across the street, he let his eyes roam -about the place to see if anything might have happened. Nothing -stirred. All seemed to be still and quiet. He went around the block, -skipped across a fence and came up from the back of the house. Moving -along noiselessly, he crept along the yard. He had made up his mind to -go once again all around the house and investigate. Suddenly he caught -his breath and flattened himself on the ground, midst the wild tall -grasses. He saw a shadow coming around the corner of the house. The -man, for such it was wore dark clothes and a slouch hat pulled down -over the forehead. Like a shadow, the man moved along the wall. Every -few seconds he stopped and looked and listened. There was something -familiar about that man, Paul thought. He held his breath and watched, -his eyes glued to the moving figure. The next instant he smiled to -himself. - -The man came to the front of the house, quickly ran across and -disappeared behind the wall. Paul got off the ground and sprinted -forward. Ducking around the corner of the house, he saw the back of -the man, who seemed to be hesitating, undecided as to his next course -of action. Paul moved forward on tiptoes. Coming up from behind, he -touched the man, who jumped as though touched by an electric spark, -“It’s only I, Captain Bob.” - -He smiled. The old man stared into his face and for several seconds was -speechless. “You—you certainly gave me a scare, boy,” he muttered. - -“I’m sorry,” apologized Paul, “but I thought it was so funny to find -you groping around here that—” - -Captain Bob grabbed him by the arm and pulled him around to the back of -the house. Shaking a finger under the boy’s nose, he muttered, “You! -You young upstart! Scaring me like that and thinking it’s funny.” His -severity melted and he smiled. “I should imagine it would be funny,” he -said, “but what brings you here, my boy?” - -Paul smiled. He had not yet gotten over the humor of the situation. -“I imagine that we both came here on the same hunch,” he informed the -captain. - -“How do you know that my hunch is the same as yours? Tell me that.” - -“Suppose you tell me your hunch and I’ll tell you mine, Captain Bob,” -he said. “And I’ll wager they are both the same.” - -“I asked you first,” replied the old man. “If it is the same, I won’t -hesitate to say so.” - -“Well,” began Paul, “I happened to be looking through the newspaper -files of the last two months and I noticed that three out of the last -four fires occurred at houses belonging to the Jones and Jones realty -company. The papers also mentioned several addresses of other houses of -theirs, and I picked this one to look things over.” - -“But why should there be anything suspicious about that?” asked the -shrewd old man. - -“I thought that possibly somebody had a grudge against the realty -company or against one of the Joneses. So I thought I might as well do -a little investigation.” - -Captain Bob wobbled his head. “You young pups!” he muttered. “There -is no getting away from you. Did I hear you say that you want to be a -doctor?” - -“Yes. I am going away to college in September. Jack and I, both of us -are going to study to be doctors.” - -“Well, I don’t know about your friend Jack, but I think you ought to -study to be a detective.” - -“Then I guessed?” cried Paul. - -“You certainly did,” was the answer. “And let’s walk away before -someone sees us. You go first and wait for me at the end of the street.” - -Paul obeyed. He sprinted across the yard and over the fence and walked -away. Two minutes later, Captain Bob joined him and he related to the -old man his experience of that night and how he had already walked off -and then returned. “I thought for a while that the hunch was a very -poor one,” he concluded. - -“No,” answered the captain. “On the contrary, it was a most logical -one. Have you done any more investigations along this line?” - -Paul became wary. He realized that again Captain Bob was trying to -elicit information from him. He shook his head. “Not much,” was his -answer. - -“Well, just keep it up. Perhaps if we continue we may yet catch the -culprit.” - -“I hope so,” remarked Paul. - -Soon after they separated, Captain Bob saying that he was going home -and Paul seriously intended to do the same. In front of his own home, -he paused and leaned against the gate. Ken crossed the street and came -up to him. “Say, where have you been all evening?” inquired the latter. - -“Oh, just following up a hunch of mine.” - -“What sort of hunch?” - -“Tell you about it later. Did you see Jack?” - -“No and he isn’t home either because I went over to call him.” - -Paul leaned against the fence and mused. The wind pushed a piece of -paper against his leg. Bending down to pull it away, he suddenly -remembered something. “Come on,” he said to his friend. - -“Where to?” asked Ken. - -“To that house which Jack showed us this morning.” - -“What for? It is kind of late, too. Almost ten o’clock.” - -“We will be back shortly. Come on.” - - - - -CHAPTER XII - -A BUMP ON THE HEAD - - -That same night Jack was impatient to be through with supper, and -immediately after, he left his house and hiked down to Jones Street. -He didn’t know exactly what to expect, nor was he sure that anything -at all was going to happen. He thought that it would be best to stick -around and if Mr. Grey came out of his hiding, to follow him. It was -now four days after the fire on Water Street and something was bound to -happen in the immediate future. But what, or how, or when, was still a -mystery to him. - -Jack took along with him a brown sweater. He thought that if there -was any need for it, he would put it on, and thus be able to change -his appearance, if only slightly. He had the sweater wrapped up in a -package under his arm. That too would make a slight difference in his -appearance—first carrying a package and later being without one. - -He took the same position as the day before and he did not have to wait -long for darkness to come. It was already dusk when he came to Jones -Street. Just as soon as it was dark enough, he changed his place by -coming forward and hiding behind the chassis of a wrecked car. That -secured for him a better view of the street as well as the corner. - -Watchful waiting—that was his task. But how long? Wasn’t Mr. Grey ever -coming out? Was he to be disappointed tonight? He glanced at his watch; -it was five minutes after nine. He saw the stars come out one by one in -the sky and the moon come up on the horizon. In the street and around -the corner there seemed to be very little activity. People passed up -and down but he was not interested in them. Soon he saw the grocery man -emerge and lock up his store. - -Jack waited and watched, counting each minute. Time hung heavy on his -hands. He began to wish, as he had the day before that he had never -bothered with it at all, but the next instant he thought differently. -He was in it and he meant to stick it through; he would not give it up -just because he was impatient. It was quite possible, he thought to -himself that Mr. Grey would not attempt one of his usual jaunts through -the town. After all, one could not expect things to happen every night. -It was quite possible that Mr. Grey had become suspicious, that he -had actually become aware that he was being followed. Anything was -possible, he thought to himself. - -Ten minutes passed, fifteen minutes, twenty minutes—and still nothing -happened. Gradually, Jack became convinced that Mr. Grey was not -coming out tonight. Suddenly it occurred to him that perhaps he had -come too late. He remembered that the day before Mr. Grey had ventured -forth at about six-thirty. And tonight he had not arrived there until -about seven-thirty. He nodded to himself and thought that no doubt -he had come too late. But what to do now and where to look first? He -certainly could not just walk around town and look for his man; that -would probably be futile. He debated with himself whether to go to -Water Street, to the site of the last fire or to go to the house where -he had followed Mr. Grey the night before. He decided on the latter -course and off he went. - -Peace and darkness shrouded the house. Jack walked up and down several -times on the wrong side of the street. Then, growing bold he dashed -across the street and into the yard. Not thinking it wise to approach -the house, he crept noiselessly along the fence and all around the -yard. There seemed to be not a soul around; except for the wind, -nothing else seemed to stir. He approached the wall of the house and -tried to peek into a window. But it was dark and, naturally, he saw -nothing. - -Cautiously, Jack approached the front of the house. Suddenly he stopped -and held his breath. He heard a slight rumbling noise. He listened -closely. Again the same noise. “Mice or rats,” he told himself. He -moved forward again then, flattening himself out against the wall, he -waited. A woman passed down the street. He took out his searchlight -which he was now glad he had brought, and moved forward again to the -front of the house. Putting his hand on the knob, he turned it and the -door opened slightly. Wondering how it was that the hinges, probably -rusty, did not squeak, he pushed the door wider open. - -He flashed his light on and stepped quickly into the hall and closed -the door behind him. He threw a beam of light on the papers which Paul -had pointed out to him; they were still there, in the same spot and -untouched. Again he thought he heard a slight rumbling noise. Backing -up close against the wall, he listened. Yes, there it was again. -Rats or mice, he thought to himself. For a fraction of a second he -hesitated. What was he doing in here, he asked himself. Did he expect -to find Mr. Grey in the house? If so, what would he do if he did? -Beside, Paul, Ken and he had been in the house only that morning. - -Brushing aside all the doubts in his mind, he tiptoed along the hall. -He passed one door, the second door. He retraced his steps and threw -a beam of light upon the stairway. Suddenly he felt a sharp blow on -the back of his head. His knees gave way and before he crashed to the -floor, he sensed a figure fleeing past him and out through the door. As -he fell to the floor he saw a million colored stars converging upon his -eyes. Innumerable distorted thoughts flashed through his mind. Then -darkness and he knew no more. - -Jack opened his eyes and through a haze saw two figures hovering over -him. He reached to the back of his head and writhed with pain. Somebody -was bending over him and talking but he could not understand what he -was saying; it sounded like buzzing in his ears. He closed his eyes and -relaxed. Very suddenly he sat up and looked around. He rubbed his eyes, -then the back of his head; he felt a large bump there and touching it -made him shiver with pain. “How are you, old boy?” somebody was asking -him. - -The person bending over him, murmured softly, “How do you feel, Jack -old boy?” - -The mist before his eyes cleared and in the darkness he made out Paul -on his knees in front of him and a short distance away, Ken. He turned -his head and he noticed that he was in the open. “W-w-where am I?” he -asked, his face distorted with pain as he touched the bump on the back -of his head. - -“You’re all right,” Paul assured him. “Just tell me how you feel. Any -broken bones?” he asked, smiling. - -Jack felt himself all over, and answered, “No, I guess not.” Looking -into his friend’s smiling face, he also grinned, “Just where am I and -what happened to me?” he asked curiously. - -“What happened to you, I don’t know; you will have to tell us that. -But I can tell you where we are. We are in the yard of—” - -“Yes, I know,” interrupted Jack. He now remembered the house, where -he had been socked on the head. Rising to his feet, he felt a little -wobbly. Paul supported him. “Let’s go away from here,” he said -dejectedly. - -Paul laughed. “Nobody will attack us,” he said. - -They walked off. Jack was flanked on either side by Paul and Ken. After -a short silence, Jack asked, “How did you come to be there? And tell me -what happened, will you?” - -“You’d better tell us what happened,” asserted Ken. “We found you there -stretched out horizontally. Some bump you have, too.” - -Jack touched the wound and groaned with pain. “It’s nothing much,” said -Paul. “You’ll live a long time yet.” - -Paul and Ken laughed. But Jack couldn’t see what was so funny. Ken -said, “Come on, tell us what happened.” - -“That’s just it,” protested Jack, “I wish I knew myself. The last thing -I can remember is that I got an awful wallop on the back of the head -and sock! I was out.” - -“Who was that person we saw running away from the house?” asked Paul. - -Jack stopped in his tracks. “Running away!” he exclaimed. “Who? What? -When?” - -“Ken and I,” Paul explained, “were coming up the street. We were about -ten feet from the house, when we saw somebody dash out of the yard and -down toward the other end of the street. We thought there might be -something wrong so we investigated.” - -“And we found you,” added Ken. - -“He must have been the fellow who socked you on the head,” concluded -Paul. - -“Well, why didn’t one of you go after him?” demanded Jack. - -“Somebody had to take care of you, didn’t they?” questioned Paul. - -“By then it was too late,” added Ken. - -Jack began to walk back toward the house. “Come on,” he said, “we’re -going back and see what happened.” - -“What for?” asked Paul. “We looked and didn’t see a thing.” - -Jack felt his pockets. “Besides,” he added, “my flashlight must be -somewhere there in the hall.” - -“No. Here it is,” said Ken, taking it out of his pocket. - -But Jack insisted on going back to the house and they did. Ken was left -outside on guard while the other two entered the house. They found the -first door in the hall open. The dust on the floor was stirred by many -footprints but there was nothing else visible in the room. The two -returned to the hall and searched but they found nothing. “I wonder -who it was that socked me like that?” muttered Jack. - -“It’s no use wondering because you can only guess,” asserted Paul. “My -own opinion is that some stray individual happened to be in here when -you entered and just as your back was turned, he hit you on the head -and escaped. That’s all.” - -“But why? Why?” demanded Jack. “And what was he doing here?” - -“How should I know? And since there is nothing else we can do here, -let’s go.” - -Joining Ken, they walked off and went home. - - - - -CHAPTER XIII - -DISCOVERY - - -Ken was saying, “It is rather strange that somebody should have been in -that house when it is supposed to be empty and deserted.” - -“But why?” demanded Paul. “Being empty and unoccupied, anybody might -walk in and look around.” - -“Very true,” commented Jack, “but why should he sock me, that’s -something I can’t understand.” He put his hand behind his head and -winced with pain. “Suppose,” he continued, “some person does stray into -the house and while he is there I enter. Does that mean that he has -to bang me on the head and run away? It is not logical. There must be -something to it.” - -“You may be right,” conceded Paul, “but somehow it doesn’t strike me -so. By the way, did I tell you fellows how I ran into Captain Bob last -night and almost scared him to death?” - -“No,” cried Ken. “Tell us.” - -Paul narrated his last night’s adventure. The boys laughed heartily at -the thought of Captain Bob being scared out of his wits. He also told -them that the captain had also had the same hunch as he. Then he asked, -“What do you fellows think of it?” - -Jack merely shrugged his shoulders, manifesting his lack of opinion. -Ken, however, said, “It sounds quite logical to me.” - -“Logic does not always prove anything,” remarked Paul. - -Jack jumped out of his seat and snapped his fingers. “I have an idea,” -he cried. - -“Tell us,” said Ken. - -“What is it?” asked Paul. - -“It is something I couldn’t exactly explain; it’s just something I -feel—a hunch. Come on, we’re going back to that empty house.” - -“But what for?” demanded Paul. “We have been there several times and we -have found no clues or anything.” - -“Well, we’re going back and look again.” - -Jack disappeared into the house and a minute later came out carrying -his flashlight and as baseball bat. “What is the bat for?” asked Ken. - -“Just in case of anything,” was the answer. “I’m not taking chances any -more.” - -The boys rocked with laughter, Jack joining in. “You think you’re going -to hit somebody with that thing?” questioned Ken, still laughing. - -“I suppose the fellow who hit you is waiting there for you to even -things up,” commented Paul. - -“You fellows can laugh all you want,” said Jack, “but I’m taking it -along just the same. Come on.” - -They were on their way. Jack said, “Paul, you and I are going into the -house, while you, Ken, are going to hide outside and give us the usual -signal in case you see somebody suspicious coming up the street or -about to enter the house.” - -“And what are we going to do?” asked Paul. - -“You and I are going into that first room and investigate. If there is -anything to be found, somehow I feel convinced that it will be found in -that room. I have only one reason for it. When I was hit on the head I -had my back to that door. Therefore the person who hit me came out of -that room.” - -“That sounds reasonable,” remarked Paul. “But I, on the contrary, have -no illusions about finding any clues there. It seems to me that we went -over every inch of ground in that room.” - -“You are wrong, Paul,” contradicted Jack. “All we did was merely look -around. We did not make a real search of the room.” - -The boys came to the house. All three of them made sure of a good -location for Ken to hide and keep watch. When that was done, Paul -and Jack entered the house and closed the door behind them. “Now,” -whispered Jack, “Let’s open the door of this first room and examine -it.” Jack did so and swung the door back and forth on its hinges. -“Notice something?” he asked his chum. - -“I most certainly do, Jack. This is very suspicious.” - -“What is it you notice?” asked Jack. - -“Why, the movement of the door swinging on its hinges; it’s noiseless. -Isn’t that what you mean?” - -“Yes. The hinges must be well oiled and that is why I did not hear -when the door was opened and I was hit on the head. Under normal -circumstances, the hinges should be rusty and there should be plenty of -squeaking every time the door is swung open.” - -“You are right, Jack. But I still don’t see what your hunch is.” - -“Let’s just wait and see. I don’t know exactly what it is myself yet. I -can only make a wild guess. Let’s go into the room.” - -They entered and closed the door behind them. They had no use for their -flashlights because the room had a window in each corner wall, and -it was now early morning, about ten o’clock. “Notice another thing,” -remarked Jack. “The windows—they are all in perfect shape.” - -“That’s right, but that is nothing extraordinary. It is possible that -the last tenant had moved out only recently.” - -“Well, that doesn’t matter so much. Shall we first thoroughly go over -the walls or the floor?” - -Paul looked about for several seconds before he answered. “I think we -had better do the floor first.” They looked down. “You know,” continued -Paul, “I am somehow beginning to get a hunch like you have. I can’t -exactly explain it, but—” - -Jack interrupted, crying enthusiastically, “Do you really mean that? -Because then—” - -Paul held up a finger to his lips and cautioned, “Sh! Not so loud. -Walls have ears, you know, and all that.” Both of them crouched down. -“Do you notice something odd about the dust on the floor?” he asked. - -“Yes,” replied Jack. “I noticed it the first time we were here but I -forgot to mention it. There seems to be very little dust on this floor -compared to the other rooms.” - -“That is right. Now you begin at the other end of the room and I will -begin at this end of the room. Examine every single plank of wood and -see if it lifts out of the floor.” - -“That was my intention exactly,” whispered Jack. “You are getting on to -my hunch perfectly.” - -Paul by now had become excited with the new turn of events and he was -eager to be doing something. “Less talk and more work,” he snapped at -his friend briskly. - -Jack smiled and moved away to his end of the floor. The boys -partitioned the floor in half and set to work with zest. They ran their -hands over the floor and tested each plank. Despite their eagerness and -rapid movements, it took them a long time. The two of them must have -been working close to an hour, and Paul was occupied now in front of -the window when he hissed across the room, “Jack, I have it!” - -Paul flushed with excitement. Jack raced across the room and joined his -friend. Paul had discovered a removable piece of wood about six inches -long by about three inches wide. He held it up in his hand. “Now!” he -whispered. He plunged his hand into the opening and pulled. But too -much effort was not necessary, the trap door opened easily. Jack was -ready to rush right down, but Paul, ever prudent and careful, grabbed -him by the arm and restrained him. “Wait a moment,” he whispered. -“Let’s make sure of things.” - -Paul went to the window and peeked out. He located Ken and saw the boy -on guard, his eyes roaming everywhere and on the alert. Jack had in -the meanwhile gone out into the hall. Paul now joined him and together -they looked through the house to make sure whether anyone was in there -or was watching them. Reassured at last, they returned to the room and -again pulled up the trap door. There were stairs leading down, but it -was dark below and Jack flashed on his light. From every appearance it -looked like an ordinary cellar. Paul whispered, “All right, let’s go -down. I’ll go first.” - -Jack nodded and his chum began to descend the stairs. He followed, -gripping his bat in his hand. Becoming conscious of the weapon, he -smiled to himself remembering how his friends joked at his taking it -along. Now, in case of anything, it would be very useful. - -Paul, who carried the flashlight, reached the bottom of the stairs and -waited for his chum. Jack joined him. Together they followed the beam -of light around the room. At one side was a printing press and quite a -bit of printing paraphernalia; in the center of the room was a table -and several chairs; against the walls were several boxes, a jacket and -a cap hung on a nail and from the ceiling there extended an electric -bulb. Jack whispered, “What do you make of it all?” - -Paul shrugged his shoulders. Again he threw a beam of light all around -the room. Satisfied with what he saw, he turned and motioned to his -friend that they leave. Jack shook his head. “No,” he whispered, “let’s -see exactly what they have here.” - -“Not now,” was the whispered reply. “Some other time.” - -He began to mount the stairs and Jack followed. They closed the trap -after them and replaced the piece of wood. Paul went over to the window -and peeked out. And it was a lucky thing that he did. Locating Ken on -the spot they had left him, he noticed the guard put his fingers to -his lips and whistle. But they could not hear the whistle because both -the door to the house and the door to the room were closed. Grabbing -Jack by the arm, he cried, “Hurry!” and dragged him out of the room. In -the hall they just managed to duck under the stairs as the door opened -and by the sound of the footsteps the boys guessed that two men had -entered. They heard a gruff voice mutter, “All right, we’ll do it.” - -The next instant they heard the second door open and close. Venturing -out from their hiding place, they listened carefully to the opening of -the trap door, one man descending, then the second man descending and -then, plop, the trap door closing again. The boys looked at each other. -Paul smiled while Jack wiped the perspiration off his forehead with -a muffled sigh of relief. Paul opened the door noiselessly and they -stepped out into the open. At a sign from Paul, Ken was in an instant -over the fence and away. A moment later Jack and Paul were out of the -yard and running down the street. - -They joined Ken at the end of the street. The two boys did not dare to -speak until they were some distance away from the empty house. Finally, -Jack, who couldn’t restrain himself any more, heaved a very audible -sigh of relief and exclaimed, “Boy! Was that a close shave! I’m so -nervous, my hands are shaking.” - -“What happened?” asked Ken who could see that something important had -transpired. - -“Let’s not talk now,” said Paul. “Wait until we get someplace where we -can’t be overheard.” He looked from one of his friends to the other. -“Don’t look so curious and excited,” he added. “Let’s discuss some -ordinary topic. Did you fix your dad’s car, Jack?” - -Jack looked at his chum and burst out laughing. Paul looked as calm -and unconcerned as though nothing had happened. “I’m glad to see you -fellows enjoying your fun,” remarked Ken. “But I wish you would tell me -the joke so I could also enjoy it and laugh.” - -That set both Jack and Paul laughing. “Pardon us, Ken,” said Paul. “But -there really is nothing to laugh about. That’s the joke. But we will -tell you all about it right away.” - - - - -CHAPTER XIV - -A NEW TURN OF EVENTS - - -Jack stopped dead in his tracks. His two friends also stopped and faced -him. “What is it?” asked Paul. - -“I was just wondering,” answered Jack, “whether we shouldn’t go back -there, watch until those two leave and then go down there again.” - -“Go down where?” asked Ken; they had not yet told him of the cellar -they had discovered. - -Paul shook his head. “No,” he said. “We have had enough for one day. -And then, I want some time to think this thing over and try to piece -everything together. Let’s go to Ken’s garage where we can have some -privacy.” - -“You really think we shouldn’t go back?” asked Jack. - -“Yes, I’m convinced.” - -“Don’t mind me,” said Ken as the three of them continued walking. “I’m -only an ornament among the three of us.” - -“Don’t be so impatient,” said Paul. “Wait. We’ll tell you everything.” - -They came to Ken’s garage and sat down on boxes. Paul related what had -happened. Several times Ken gasped in astonishment. When the story was -finally ended, Paul commented, “But what puzzles me is how all the -incidents fit together. The fires, Mr. Grey, Jack getting bumped on -the head, Captain Bob, where do all these facts fit in?” - -“As far as Captain Bob is concerned, you can leave him out of it,” -commented Jack. “No matter what it is all about, I’m quite sure he is -an innocent party.” - -“Yes,” said Ken. “As chief of the fire department he naturally would be -interested in why there are an unusually large number of fires.” - -“All right, suppose we agree that Captain Bob is out of it,” said Paul, -“what about all the other facts. How does Mr. Grey fit in, for example?” - -“Yes, how does he fit in?” asked Ken. “Isn’t it possible that what you -stumbled on today has nothing to do with all the other incidents?” - -“It may sound all right,” remarked Jack, “but I don’t think so. For -example, by now I am convinced that the fellow who hit me came out of -that cellar.” - -“But why should he run away?” questioned Paul. “Why couldn’t he have -made you a prisoner, as that would be a more natural thing to do?” - -“Perhaps,” argued Jack. “But if he had, he would have had to take me -down in the cellar. Now suppose he blindfolds me, still I might hear -something they say. I might escape and inform the police. My opinion -is that he hit me and ran away, hoping that the blow on the head would -scare me so that I would never return.” - -His two companions nodded. “Suppose we accept that as the real reason. -Where does everything else fit in? What are they doing with a printing -press down there? They shouldn’t have to hide that.” - -“But the mere fact that they are hiding it is proof that they are doing -something illegal,” commented Ken. - -His two companions repeated the word, “Illegal! Illegal!” - -Jack began to walk up and down, his chin in his hand and deep in -thought. The other two were also silent and thinking hard. Jack picked -up an old newspaper from the floor. Suddenly he dropped the paper, -jumped high into the air and cried frantically, “I have it! I have it!” - -His two friends leaped out of their seats, and ran up to him. “Well!” -demanded Paul, for once impatient and curious. “What is the answer?” - -“The answer is,” whispered Jack and then paused, “Counterfeiters!” he -whispered. - -Ken jumped into the air enthusiastically. “That’s right!” he cried. -“That’s right!” - -Paul smiled with satisfaction. Putting an arm around Jack, he said, “It -sounds very reasonable. Counterfeiters have to use a printing press. -And counterfeiters do something illegal and therefore have to hide.” He -nodded his head. “Sounds very logical.” - -They returned to their seats. “But,” continued Paul, “even if we grant -the fact that they are counterfeiters, how do all the other incidents -fit in? The fires and Mr. Grey for example?” - -“Must they fit in?” inquired Ken. - -“They don’t have to,” was Paul’s reply, “but I have a notion that they -do.” - -Jack nodded and agreed with his chum. “I feel the same way about it,” -he said. “It is very possible that what we have discovered today has -absolutely nothing to do with the fires or Mr. Grey. But somehow I have -a feeling that there is some connection. But I can’t say what.” - -“But if there is some sort of a connection between all these facts, how -do you think they fit in?” asked Paul. - -Jack shook his head. Ken said, “Suppose we begin from the very -beginning. I mean from the time you came upon the house, Jack. Now, was -it not Mr. Grey who led you to the house?” - -“Yes. And then he sneaked around in the back and scared me half to -death.” - -“All right. Now if he had anything to do with the counterfeiters do you -think he would have led you to that very house he wants you to keep -away from? If he were a member of that gang of counterfeiters and he -knew you were following him, don’t you think he would lead you to some -other part of town?” - -Paul said, “That may sound logical, but the opposite may also sound -logical. For example, if we concede that the fellow who hit Jack on -the head and then ran away did it to frighten him so that he would -keep away from there, why can’t we say the same thing about Mr. Grey? -Is it not possible that Mr. Grey knew he was being followed and -purposely led Jack to that very house, then sneaked up behind him to -frighten him so that he would never return? Isn’t that very plausible?” - -“Say,” cried Jack, “if what you say is true, that fellow certainly made -a mistake.” - -“And how!” echoed Ken. - -“Now if we know all that,” continued Paul, “that makes Mr. Grey a -member of the gang of counterfeiters.” - -“But what about the fires? And leading Betty away. And those white -cards, what about them? And the robbery at Professor Link’s?” - -The boys looked at each other very glumly. “The whole thing is like a -crazy jigsaw puzzle,” muttered Paul. - -“Telling me!” mumbled Ken. “It has already given me a headache. The -thing worries me so, I can’t sleep nights.” - -The boys laughed at the manner in which Ken said it. “You have to -sleep,” remarked Jack. “Otherwise how are we going to solve this jigsaw -puzzle of a mystery?” - -The boys sat around and brooded. Three minds with one thought—how to -solve the mystery; how all the details fitted into the general picture. -They were so silent and lost in thought that they were not at all -aware of Ken’s little sister Betty approaching and regarding them with -surprise. She stood rooted in one spot and stared at her brother and -his two friends. Finally she couldn’t bear it any longer. She opened -her mouth wide and cried suddenly, “Boo!” The boys jumped as though -they were shot. Reassured again, they smiled heaving sighs of relief. -“Mother says you should come to dinner,” she said. - -“Dinner!” exclaimed Ken. “Is it time for dinner already?” - -All three simultaneously looked at their watches. “My, how time flies,” -mumbled Jack. “Twelve-thirty already.” - -Mrs. Armstrong came to the porch and called, “Betty!” - -“I’m right here, Mother,” cried the child. And she ran to the porch. - -“Did you find Ken?” - -“He is at the garage. And Jack and Paul too.” - -“Tell them all to come in; lunch is ready.” - -The boys entered the house. Paul and Jack telephoned home that they -were having lunch with Ken. At the table, in the midst of the meal, -Jack almost choked as he thought of something. “Hurry up, fellows,” he -whispered. “I’ve just thought of something important.” - -“Can’t you at least eat without thinking?” mocked Ken. - -“Yes, take it easy,” was Paul’s advice. - -“Choke easy, you mean,” corrected Ken. - -“Stop all that talk,” spoke up Jack, “and hurry up and finish. I want -to get out and talk this thing over.” - -As soon as they were through with their meal, the boys retreated to the -garage again. “Now what is it?” asked Paul. - -“It is something that I thought of just as soon as we got into the -cellar,” replied Jack, “but it slipped my mind and I forgot to mention -it.” - -“Well, what is it?” asked Ken. “Don’t keep us in suspense.” - -“It’s this. When we descended the stairs into the cellar, Paul, it -occurred to me that if the police cornered the gang of counterfeiters -in that cellar, how would they manage to escape?” - -“They wouldn’t,” was Ken’s opinion. - -“Suppose you were one of the gang, wouldn’t you think of such a -possibility and make sure of an exit, of a means of escape?” - -“Certainly.” - -“Then that means, that probably there is another entrance or exit into -that cellar.” - -“That’s right,” said Paul. “I’m glad you thought of it. It is something -we should have thought of at once.” - -“Oh I wish you didn’t,” said Ken, pretending that he was in tears, -“because that only adds another item in the puzzle to solve.” - -“Which isn’t going to be very easy.” - -“No, it certainly won’t.” - -“Let’s come down to earth now,” remarked Jack, “and think in terms of -action. What are we going to do now? What should be our plan of action -from now on? Can you think of anything, Paul?” - -For a short while, there was silence. At last Paul ventured to -suggest, “We might, for example, give up following Mr. Grey; at least -temporarily. Then we have to watch that house and get to know the men -entering and leaving and determine as well as we can who the members of -the gang are.” - -“I was just thinking of something,” remarked Ken. “Do you remember, -Paul, how hostile the grocery man was and how he squirmed out of giving -you any information about Mr. Grey?” - -“Yes, what about it?” - -“Well, it just occurred to me, that the man must know something if he -is so anxious to conceal it.” - -“Hmm!” muttered Jack. - -“Another thing,” continued Ken. “Isn’t it true, Jack, that each time -you followed Mr. Grey, it seemed to you that he emerged from that -corner house, the house in which the store is situated?” - -“That’s right. What are you driving at?” - -Ken scratched his head. “I feel this way about it,” he said, “that most -likely that corner house is owned or at least rented by the grocery -man. Now if Mr. Grey comes out of that house, he must live there.” His -two companions leaned forward and listened to him attentively. They -suspected that what he was saying might be very valuable. He continued, -“Therefore, if Mr. Grey lives in that house, the grocery man must know -him; under ordinary circumstances, he would have no reason to say that -he didn’t know Mr. Grey. It therefore follows that either he knows that -Mr. Grey is a crook or possibly he himself is somehow involved in the -situation.” - -The boys gasped. The reasonableness and logic of Ken’s statement was -beyond question. Yet how true was it? If it were true, another missing -link was being added to the already complicating puzzle. “Then why,” -asked Jack, “should the woman have mentioned the name Mr. Grey when you -entered the store and asked for information Ken?” - -Paul answered, “That’s simple. If we assume that what Ken said is true, -the grocery man’s wife knows nothing of her husband’s operations and -very innocently gave away the name.” - -“Yes, that’s right,” agreed Ken. - -“That only makes it worse,” muttered Jack. - -Again the group became silent. They would hit upon an idea, discuss it -rapidly and then they would brood for a while. Jack leaped to his feet. -“Let’s do something,” he cried. - -Paul rose. “I for one,” he said, “am going home and I suggest you do -the same. That will calm us down. Then we will meet again after supper -and—do something.” - - - - -CHAPTER XV - -FOLLOWING UP THEIR CLUES - - -Jack was restless, excited. The mystery had him upset. While Paul and -Ken each went to their respective homes, Jack loitered along Main -Street. Not that he hoped to do anything or come upon any clues; he -merely didn’t feel like going home. He walked down as far as Jones -Street and again investigated the neighborhood. Returning to the -corner, he went into the store and on the pretense that he was buying a -small box of chocolate wafers, he let his eyes wander about the place. -But there was nothing especial to see; it was the same as any other -ordinary grocery. The woman was in the store and she appeared to be a -mild sort of person. Considering it unwise to ask any questions or seek -any information from her, he paid for his wafers and left. - -He munched as he walked along. Thinking hard for some plan of action, -he couldn’t come to any definite decision. Finally he concluded that -Paul was right—he should go home and let the matter rest for a while. -Quickening his pace, he walked home and busied himself with tasks about -the house. - -After supper, the three boys met at Paul’s home. They sat down on -the porch and waited for someone to speak first. Paul finally spoke -up and said, “Right now, I think, we have to look into two angles of -the situation. One of us should go down to Jones Street and watch the -grocery man. The other two should go back to that empty house and see -what happens there.” - -“How about you going down to Jones Street?” asked Jack. “You spoke to -the grocery man and you know what he looks like.” - -“That suits me. You and Ken, in the meanwhile, will watch the empty -house.” - -“How about that other angle of yours, Paul? The one about watching -out for a fire at some house owned by the Jones and Jones real estate -company,” commented Ken. “I think it’s a good hunch that we ought to -follow up.” - -“I think we can drop it for tonight at any rate and see what happens,” -answered Paul. “Let’s go.” - -They walked off the porch and headed for Main Street. “So long,” called -Paul, and waved. - -“Good luck,” returned Jack. - -“We’ll be seeing you,” said Ken. - -Jack and Ken walked off together. “It’s a little early yet, don’t you -think?” asked Ken. - -Jack looked at his watch; it was not quite seven-thirty. “Yes,” he -answered. “But we will go down there anyhow and see.” - -They walked past the house as though they were ordinary pedestrians. -Coming to the railroad tracks, they turned around and walked back -through the street on which the back of the house faced. It was eight -o’clock now but it was still daylight. So they decided to walk around -the block once more and as far as the railroad tracks. As soon as -it became dusk, they returned to the house and took up different -positions. Jack hid himself directly behind the fence overlooking the -front of the house; Ken, on the other hand, picked out a hiding place -at the rear of the house. The two were thus able to keep a watch all -around the house and at the same time be within reach of each other in -case of necessity. - -The boys watched the sky become gray and the stars come out; the -moon crept out of the horizon and night descended. Perfectly still, -noiseless, inconspicuous, the two kept guard. Every once in a while, -people passed up and down the street, and immediately Jack was on the -alert, anxious, impatient. But nothing happened and time dragged along. -Suddenly he heard the sound of a soft whistle and he turned his head to -locate Ken. Again the same soft whistle. Jack looked all around him, -then, very cautiously, he crept over to his friend. Ken had his ear to -the ground. Jack whispered, “What’s up?” - -Ken motioned for his friend to put his ear to the ground and Jack did -so. He flattened himself out and glued his ear to the ground. A slight -trembling of the earth came to his ears, accompanied by a steady, -muffled sound. For about five minutes both boys put their ears to the -ground and listened. Ken, although he guessed what it was, whispered, -“What do you think it is?” - -“The printing press.” - -Ken nodded. “I thought so too.” - -Jack whispered, “When did you first hear that sound?” he asked. - -“It seemed to begin only a short while ago.” - -The boys were silent, thinking hard. If the press had been operating -only a short while, then it was most logical to conclude that whoever -was in the cellar had come there recently, within the last thirty, -forty, fifty minutes. Yet the boys had been on guard for a full hour -and as far as they knew, no one had entered the house by the front -door. Jack, therefore, became more firmly convinced that there was -another door somewhere; that the cellar could be reached and left -perhaps some distance away from the house. Jack whispered, “I’m going -back.” - -Ken nodded. His friend crept away and again he was alone. Each one in -his own hiding place, they watched and waited, but nothing happened. -Overhead was the blue sky with the moon and the stars. All around them -was darkness. Their waiting and watching was in vain—at least so it -seemed. - -Another hour passed and still nothing happened. Ken lay with his ear to -the ground and occupied himself with listening to the hissing sound -that came out of the earth. Jack watched and waited but not a thing -stirred. He became restless and chafed with impatience. Finally he -wiggled over to Ken and also put his ear to the ground. Still that -hissing sound and the trembling of the earth. Ken whispered, “They must -be working hard down there.” - -Jack nodded and kept silent. Together they lay flat on the ground and -listened. Again it was Ken who whispered, “What do you say, you think -we ought to go? There is nothing doing here.” - -“No, let’s wait a short while more. I wonder what Paul is doing.” - -“Same here. I hope at least he has found something interesting to do. -This doing nothing is killing me.” - -Jack felt the same way about it. As a matter of fact, Jack was of more -impatient nature than Ken, but he felt it upon himself to urge his -friend on. “Take it easy and don’t lose your patience,” he whispered -back. “A thing like this takes time you know; plenty of time.” - -Again they fixed their ears to the ground. They remained like that for -a short time. Suddenly they pushed their ears deeper into the ground. -In the darkness, they looked at each other. “Do you hear what I hear?” -whispered Ken. - -“Yes, nothing.” - -“That’s right. They must have stopped the printing press.” - -“Yes. Now what?” - -Silence. The boys knitted their brows. If they had stopped their press, -Jack asked himself, would they be coming out of the cellar now? And if -they were, which door would they use? Possibly they would come out by -the front door because they might not care to use the same door for -an exit as well as an entrance. But if they did use the rear door how -would the boys find it? Jack looked around. It might be in either of -three directions, he reasoned to himself—on either sides of the house -or to the rear; to the front was the sidewalk and street, which would -be a most improbable means for a tunnel or other form of approach and -exit. “Stay here,” he whispered to Ken. “I’m going back to my place. We -will stay here another half hour, and if nothing happens, I have other -plans.” - -“What?” - -“I’ll tell you later.” - -Jack crept back to his hiding place. With nothing else to do but to -wait and watch he again became conscious of the darkness and of time -dragging. There was utter stillness and he could hear himself breathe; -the tick of his watch in his pocket sounded extraordinarily loud. He -waited. A few pedestrians passed by. He waited some more. He counted -every minute. When the time was up a low muffled whistle issued from -his lips. He turned his head and saw Ken creep out of his place. -Together they sneaked out of the yard and walked off. Ken asked, -“Well, what are your other plans?” - -“I was thinking,” said Jack, “that they must have another way of -getting in and out—” - -“Yes, you mentioned that once before.” - -“Well, what I was really trying to determine is where that other -entrance might be. Now, logically, it can be at any one of three -places. There might be a tunnel leading away from the cellar of the -house on either side or at the rear. What we have to do, therefore, is -to examine those three possibilities.” - -“But we can’t do much tonight,” remarked Ken. “For one thing it’s dark -and there isn’t much we can see. And secondly, it’s late already.” - -“That’s very true, but I certainly would like to get an idea of how the -land lays.” - -“We can leave that for tomorrow. Now I think we ought to go over and -see if Paul is waiting for us.” - -“That’s right. I almost forgot about him. I wonder if he came across -anything.” - -“Well, I only hope that he didn’t have to spend such a dull time as we -did,” was Ken’s comment. - -“You have to take things as they come,” answered Jack. “Sometimes there -is plenty to do and at other times there is nothing to do.” - - - - -CHAPTER XVI - -PAUL GETS INTO TROUBLE - - -Ken and Jack came to Paul’s house but they saw their friend nowhere -around. “You think he is in the house?” asked Ken. - -“No. He would be waiting for us on the porch.” - -“What will we do, then? Where will we wait for him?” - -“Let’s wait for him in front of your gate, Ken. He ought to be coming -any minute, I suppose.” - -The boys leaned against the fence, talking in low tones to while -the time away. They were impressed before with how hard it is to be -patient, but now it was doubly hard. For it seemed that Paul was not -coming. They waited thirty minutes, an hour, an hour and thirty minutes -and still no Paul. Jack was actually becoming worried that something -had happened to his chum. Ken suggested several times, “Perhaps he is -home. Do you think we ought to try to find out? Though it’s a little -too late to ring the bell.” - -But Jack knew better; he knew his chum. If Paul had returned before -they did, he would have waited for them on the porch; that was a -certainty. He would not have gone to bed until he had seen and spoken -to his friends and made sure that they were all right. Finally Jack -could not bear it any longer and he muttered, “I’m going to look for -him.” - -“I’m going with you,” said Ken with determination. “Where will we look -first?” - -“There are only two places where we can look—at Jones Street and then -that empty house.” - -“Where will we go first?” - -“What do you think?” - -They went down to Main Street, then they were undecided as to which -direction to take. Jack said, “Let’s toss a coin.” He drew a nickel out -of his pocket. “Heads we go to Jones Street; tails we go to that empty -house.” - -He tossed the coin into the air, caught it with his right hand and -slapped it down on his left wrist. Ken put his head close to see. Jack -removed his hand—it was tails up. “The empty house,” he whispered. - -When Paul started out early in the evening, he leisurely strolled along -Main Street until he came to his destination. There, he examined the -house on the corner from every possible view. It was a two story frame -house with the grocery occupying most of the ground floor; the rest of -the floor, Paul figured, were either closets or some form of storage -places. He was pretty sure there were no living quarters on the ground -floor. The people who occupied the house lived above the store. By -counting the windows—there were seven—he reasoned that there must be -either three or four rooms. The grocery man and his wife most likely -occupied one room, Mr. Grey another, and the children, if there were -any, the other one or two rooms. - -By now it had become dusk and Paul thought that it was time to take up -some hiding position and watch. The next moment he changed his mind. -Instead of hiding anywhere, he nonchalantly took up a position across -the street and pretended that he was waiting for someone. He didn’t -have to wait long. Pretty soon he saw Mr. Grey emerge from around the -corner and walk up Main Street. He wondered where the man was going and -what he might be up to. For several seconds he debated with himself -whether to follow him or to wait, as he had previously decided, for the -grocery man. He chose to wait. About fifteen minutes later he saw his -man come out from the rear of the house. “Very clever,” he thought to -himself. - -The grocery man came to the corner and stopped, looked around and then -walked off down Jones Street. Paul wanted to follow but on second -consideration he realized that the street was deserted and he would -instantly be noticed. He had a hunch, however, that the man’s walking -down Jones Street was done on purpose to detect anyone following. Paul -ran to the next parallel street and raced to come to the corner first. -He hid in a doorway and saw his man round the corner and continue -walking on the street parallel to Main Street. This part of the town -was rather empty and deserted. He therefore decided to let his man walk -at least two hundred and fifty yards ahead of him. - -Soon the street became busier, with many people strolling up and down. -Paul gradually narrowed the distance between himself and his man. They -came to about the centre of the town. Suddenly he caught his breath -and his heart began to beat rapidly. He saw Mr. Grey walking the other -way, and as the two men passed each other, there was a slight movement -of the head on the part of both of them. So they did know each other! -So there was some connection between the two! Paul thrilled with the -excitement of it. - -At the next corner, the grocery man turned in and headed for Main -Street, where he turned right and walked straight ahead for several -blocks. At about the middle of the street he joined a group of three -men who were standing to one side and talking quietly among themselves. -Paul crossed to the other side of the street. Pretending that he was -looking at a window display, he was actually studying the group of -four men. As far as he could tell, they were not native townspeople; -everything about them looked as though they came from somewhere else; -possibly from a large city. Two of them were very ordinary looking—of -average size and wearing the usual summer clothes. The third person -was a tall, fat individual, with a big head and a double chin. One -thing was common for all three; they all were rather hard looking. Such -was the trio that the grocery man had joined. - -It was evident that they had a lot to say to each other, for they -talked for some time, while people passed up and down and paid no -attention to them. Paul decided on a bold step. Walking down a bit, he -crossed over and, falling in behind a group of strollers, he passed -close to the group of conspirators. But they talked in such low tones -that he could not overhear a word they said. - -Not seeing any other opportunity of overhearing their conversation, -Paul crossed over again, pretended that he was looking at a window -display and walked down to the corner and back again. But every second -he kept an eye on that group. Finally after about half an hour, -the group broke up into twos. The big, fat fellow with one of his -companions walked south, while the grocery man and the third of the -trio walked north on Main Street. Paul decided to follow the grocery -man and his companion. - -They walked straight ahead for several blocks, then, very nonchalantly -rounded the corner and disappeared. Paul felt the thrill of excitement -grow on him; something hot and exciting bubbled inside of him. They -had turned into the street on which the empty house was situated. He -thought of Ken and Jack and their being on guard. But just then Jack’s -well founded hunch occurred to him; perhaps there was a secret entrance -and they would not use the front door of the house. He peeked around -the corner and saw his men turn off at the next crossing. “Good!” he -thought to himself. They were not fooling him; it was their intention -to take a roundabout route to throw anyone off their trail if they -happened to be followed. - -At a rapid pace, he took a direct route to his destination. He did not -intend to go to the house; if anything happened there, it was up to -Jack and Ken to take care of that and he knew that he could trust them. -His intention was to take up such a position that they would have to -pass him. If they did not head for the house, then he would follow them -and spy out the secret entrance to the house. - -There were only three possibilities for a secret tunnel to the house, -Paul reasoned with himself. It might be on either side or to the rear -of the house. The most probable one was at the rear of the house -because that afforded a direct connection with very little space -intervening between the two cellars. It would be a simple thing, he -thought to himself, to dig and fortify such an underground passage. - -Paul hid in a doorway and waited for his quarry to come along. In time -they did and passed within two feet of him. They were silent and -walked as though they were out for an evening stroll. Paul hesitated -ere he ventured out of his hiding place. The neighborhood was still -and dark. If he dared to follow and keep them in sight, he would very -easily be detected; he might have a running chance to escape, but that -would give him away and they, on the other hand, would then realize -that they were being suspected. - -But it was not necessary for him to follow within sight of them. He had -a pretty good idea where they were heading for. He waited for them to -round the corner and immediately he ran after them. He peeked around -the corner and saw them stop in front of a house at about the middle of -the street. They stopped and looked all around them. The next moment -they were gone. - -Paul flushed with excitement. He had discovered their secret means of -approach to the house. Now all he had to do was to thread together -all the details of the mystery, put together the puzzle into a single -whole, and choose a time when they would most probably be in the cellar -for the police to descend upon them. Paul already foresaw the moment -when the gang would be captured and locked away where they belonged. - -He decided to walk down the street, get a glimpse of the house and then -join his friends. What he saw put him in a jovial mood, as he walked -back to the corner with every intention of joining Jack and Ken. -But he did not have quite enough foresight. He had seen the group of -four break up into two pairs; he should have taken into consideration -the missing pair. Might it not be possible that these two had headed -for the same destination by a longer route. At any rate, his not -considering that angle proved disastrous for him. - -Very innocently he rounded the corner and suddenly found himself facing -the protruding, round stomach of the man he had seen as one of the -trio. Looking up into the man’s brutal face, Paul felt himself becoming -confused. In the meanwhile, he noticed the second man take his place -directly behind him. “What are you doing around here?” the fat man -demanded in a gruff, husky voice. “Don’t you know it is dangerous to be -roaming around at this time of night?” - -Paul hesitated, trying hard to keep his voice from shaking. He said, “I -just took a walk, that’s all. I live only a couple of blocks from here.” - -“So you were just taking a walk, eh? Well, then what were you spying -around for, huh?” - -Paul felt himself become tense. He wondered if they would attack him. -He answered, “I wasn’t spying, Mister. I was just walking.” - -“Then why did you look goggle eyed at every house as you passed down -the street?” - -“Just looking as I was walking.” - -The man squared his jaw and gritted his teeth. “Some day,” he hissed, -“you’ll go blind for seeing things you ain’t supposed to. Who are you?” - -Paul began to edge away so that he would not have the second gangster -directly behind his back. But he was cornered and he had no way to -move. He answered, “My name is Morris Paulson.” - -“Do you have any friends who have been snooping around lately? They had -better watch out or they will get into heaps of trouble.” - -Pretending that he was ignorant of the reference, Paul said, “I don’t -know what you are talking about, Mister. My friends are nice fellows -who mind their own business.” - -The gangster gorilla grinned mischievously. “That’s a swell idea, -everybody minding his own business,” he remarked. “And you too.” - -“Yes, sir,” Paul agreed meekly. Feeling that the questioning was over -and that he was being dismissed, he stepped out of the way and took a -step forward to walk away. For a fraction of a second he congratulated -himself on his luck. The next instant, however, he felt a crash on his -head. His whole body trembled, his knees began to wobble. As he fell -to the ground he turned half way and noticed the cruel grin on his -attacker. Then everything went dark and he knew nothing more. - -Paul lay unconscious at the feet of the fat gangster. The man poked -his toes into the boy’s ribs and turned him over on his back. “You -shouldn’t have hit him so hard,” the fat fellow said, addressing his -henchman. “He’s only a kid.” - -“I didn’t hit hard, Boss. I only tapped him nice and easy.” He looked -pleadingly at his chief. “What’ll we do with him?” he asked anxiously. - -“Bind his hands and feet and throw him in one of the empty lots.” - -“You want me to dump him, Boss?” - -“No!” was the snarling answer. “Do what I say and be quick about it.” - -Bending down, the henchman used Paul’s tie and handkerchief to tie the -boy’s hands and feet. When that was done, he picked up the inert body -under his arm and crossed the street to an empty lot and then dropped -it to the ground. Rejoining his boss, the two walked off. “That’ll -teach him a lesson,” muttered the fat fellow. - -Paul did not know how long he lay there, but he imagined that it must -have been a very long time. He tried to rise, but couldn’t. His head -ached terribly. He fell back and closed his eyes. Gradually he regained -consciousness. With difficulty, he sat up and discovered his hands and -feet bound. At first he could not recollect exactly what had happened -to him and how he came to be in this predicament. But little by little, -events came back to him. - -Frantically, Paul began to work on his bonds to free himself. But he -felt weak and every time he moved his wrist, he felt the bonds cutting -his flesh. But at last, after about twenty minutes of tiring work, -he freed his hands and it took him but a few seconds to untie his -feet. Rising, he felt himself trembling all over. He could barely keep -himself steady on his feet. Walking, he wobbled from one side to the -other. - -At the corner, he leaned against the wall of a house. Suddenly he -heard some shouts. He looked to see who it might be, but his sight was -blurred and he could only see dim shadows running toward him. Who are -they, he wondered, and what do they want from me? Was he going to be -again attacked? He wanted to run but there was no will nor effort to do -so. - - - - -CHAPTER XVII - -PARENTAL ADMONITIONS - - -Jack and Ken commenced their search for any sign of Paul. But -everything was still and dark and there wasn’t a sign of human life -anywhere about. After about twenty minutes of futile searching, the two -boys decided to leave and go to Jones Street. Coming to the corner, Ken -noticed a lonely figure hovering against a wall a short distance away. -He called his friend’s attention to it and Jack said, “Most likely a -drunk. But let’s go and see. It may be someone needing assistance.” - -As they neared the figure, both boys remarked that there was something -familiar about it. Jack began to feel a little uneasy about that lonely -figure leaning against the wall and he walked faster, Ken at his -side. Soon they were both running. “It’s Paul!” screamed Jack, almost -hysterically. - -The two friends ran over to Paul and caught hold of him on either side. -“Paul! Paul!” whispered Jack frantically. “How are you? What happened -to you?” - -Paul shook his head, trying to shake away the mist from his eyes and -the dullness out of his head. Ken whispered, “Let’s take him right -home, Jack. Don’t bother him with questions now.” - -Jack nodded and agreed. He was almost in tears at the helpless sight of -his chum. Putting their arms around their friend, they started to lead -him home. Very gradually, Paul regained his balance and self assurance. -“All right,” he muttered, “I can walk by myself now.” - -But just as soon as the boys removed their supporting arms, Paul -tottered and almost fell. Jack immediately put an arm around his -shoulder. A short while later, Paul finally walked by himself. “Some -mess I got myself into,” he mumbled. - -Jack smiled, happy that his friend was all right again. “Now don’t -talk,” he said. “Save your energy.” - -Paul grinned to himself thinking of how nearly he got away. They came -to his house and Jack whispered, “How will we wake your father up? It’s -quite late already.” - -“What do you want to wake him up for?” inquired Paul. - -“He has to treat your head, fellow. You’re all bloody and messy.” - -“Don’t bother him, Jack. I’ll wash up myself and let him see it -tomorrow.” - -“Nothing doing,” insisted Jack. “You have to be taken care of by a -doctor right away. And it’s better your father does it than anyone -else.” - -“All right, but don’t tell him what happened. Just say I fell.” - -Jack ran up the step to the porch and rang the night bell. About two -minutes later, Dr. Morrison, in his pajamas and bath robe, answered the -door. Seeing who it was, he exclaimed, “Why, Jack, is there anything -wrong?” - -Jack thought for a few seconds what to say. “Er, Dr. Morrison,” he -began, “don’t be alarmed but er—” - -The doctor was impatient and he cried, “Well, well?” - -“You see, Paul was hurt and—” - -“Where is he?” was the direct and decisive question. “I thought he was -in his room and asleep long ago.” - -They went around to the back of the porch. The doctor looked at Paul’s -wound and said, “Let’s go into the office and I’ll fix you up.” The -boys followed. At the door the doctor turned to them and said, “You go -home, fellows; it’s late.” - -Jack compressed his lips and gritted his teeth. He wanted to ask if the -wound was serious or if there was anything he could do to help. But -the doctor seemed not to want them around. He waited until Paul and -his father entered the house and closed the door. Ken whispered, “All -right, Jack, let’s go. There is nothing more we can do here.” - -Crossing the street, they separated and each went home to sleep and to -think over everything that happened that evening. - -Early in the morning, Jack got ready to leave his home. His mother -called to him and asked, “Where are you going so early? Aren’t you -going to wait for breakfast?” - -But Jack shook his head, kissed his mother on the cheek and ran out -of the house. He was anxious to see Paul, and, as it was too early -to ring the bell, he walked back and forth like a sentinel in front -of the Morrison house. Counting every minute, he finally decided at -eight-thirty sharp, that it was all right to ring the bell now. He -knew that Dr. Morrison’s office hours began at nine, and that usually -he had his breakfast between eight-fifteen and a quarter of nine. His -heart beat wildly as he heard footsteps coming to open the door. “Good -morning, Jack,” Mrs. Morrison greeted him. “What are you doing here so -early?” - -“Good morning, Mrs. Morrison. I just want to see Paul.” - -“Paul is a little tardy in getting out of bed this morning,” she told -him as they entered the dining room. “Have a seat. He ought to be down -any minute.” - -“Good morning, Dr. Morrison.” - -“Good morning, Jack. Did you have breakfast yet?” - -“Breakfast!” Jack clasped his hand to his forehead. “I completely -forgot about it.” - -Dr. Morrison laughed heartily, but his wife couldn’t see the joke and -she exclaimed, “You forgot to have breakfast! Is there anything wrong -with you?” - -Dr. Morrison laughed and Jack shook his head. “No,” he replied meekly. -“I guess I wasn’t hungry.” - -“You’re going to have breakfast right now,” insisted Mrs. Morrison. -“Sit here,” she ordered the boy and then she went to the kitchen. - -Dr. Morrison shrewdly remarked, with a twinkle in his eye, “If you can -forget your breakfast, Jack, I can imagine what happened last night.” - -Jack moved to the edge of his seat. “How is he?” he inquired anxiously. -“Hurt bad?” - -“Oh, I guess he will live to get into plenty of more trouble. Nothing -to worry about.” - -Mrs. Morrison returned and placed silverware and a plate in front of -Jack. “Your bacon and eggs will be ready right away,” she said. “In the -meanwhile, have this orange juice.” - -Just then Paul came downstairs. He was smiling and looked as though -nothing had happened. “Good morning, everybody,” he called cheerfully. - -His greetings were returned. Kissing his mother on the cheek, she -noticed the bandage on the back of his head. “What happened?” she -demanded. - -“Nothing, Mother. I just fell, that’s all.” - -She looked at her husband who was smiling. “Nothing much,” he muttered -to re-assure her. - -“I wonder,” she said skeptically. - -Paul and Jack looked at each other and grinned guiltily. “Well, sit -down,” remarked Dr. Morrison, addressing his son. - -Weighed down by a guilty conscience, the boys ate their breakfast in -silence. Jack waited for Paul to finish. They noted with dismay that -Dr. Morrison, although through with his morning meal, sat by the table -and read the paper. Paul said, “I’m ready, Jack, let’s go.” - -Dr. Morrison rose with the boys and took them under the arm. “Where -to?” he asked. - -Paul squirmed. “Just out to the porch,” he answered. - -“Are you in any particular hurry? Something very important to talk -about?” - -“No,” his son answered hesitantly. - -“That’s fine. Do you mind coming into my office for a couple of -minutes?” - -Jack thinking that Dr. Morrison meant only Paul, drew away. But the -doctor said to him, “You, too, Jack. Come along.” - -Dr. Morrison sat down at his desk and pointed the boys to chairs. For -a moment there was silence. “Well,” remarked the doctor, “now tell me -what this is all about.” - -The boys fidgeted. “What what’s about, Dad?” - -“Now don’t pretend ignorance,” commented the doctor. “You know very -well what I mean.” - -Paul turned to his companion and said, “You tell him, Jack.” - -Jack felt himself getting hot all over and becoming red in the face. -“No, you tell him yourself, Paul.” - -Dr. Morrison smiled at their uneasiness. Paul said, “Dad, I don’t want -to tell you any falsehoods and I can’t tell you now what it is all -about. You wouldn’t understand. Please don’t ask me.” - -“I don’t want to pry into your personal affairs and have you tell me -things you don’t want,” said Dr. Morrison, “but getting a bump on the -head like that is very serious.” He paused and the boys kept silent. -The doctor continued, “I have treated a number of such cases and I can -testify to the fact that the bumping was done by an expert.” - -“It really isn’t much,” Paul assured his father. “And I promise to be -more careful in the future.” - -“All right, son. You had better be—and you, too, Jack—if you want to -keep a whole head on your shoulders.” - -“Yes, Dad.” - -Grinning, the boys rose and left the office, with Dr. Morrison shaking -his head and wondering what they were up to now. - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII - -FALSE ALARM! - - -Ken was sitting on the steps of the porch. He jumped up as he heard the -door open. “Hello, fellows,” he cried. - -“Hello, Ken. You’re lucky; you always get away with things.” - -“What’s the trouble this time, Paul?” - -“My dad just had us up at the bar and almost made us tell.” - -“You can’t do that. Not yet, at any rate.” - -“For the present we got away with it,” remarked Jack. - -They went across the street to Ken’s garage where they would have the -privacy they wanted. Seating themselves on boxes in a circle, Jack -heaved a sigh, then said, “Well, Paul, now you can tell us everything -that happened.” - -Paul grinned mischievously. He leaned forward and whispered, “I found -out their secret entrance to the cellar.” - -“You mean it!” exclaimed Jack. - -“That’s perfect!” cried Ken. - -“It’s in the house to the rear of the empty house.” - -“I had a suspicion it would be something like that,” commented Jack. -“What sort of a house is it?” - -“It was dark and there was not much chance to see anything. By the -way,” he asked, “whose idea was it to suspect the grocery man?” - -“Mine,” answered Ken. “Was I wrong?” - -“On the contrary, you were right and you deserve a medal as a fine -detective. That man is one of the gang.” - -“You don’t say! Well, come on, tell us about it.” - -Paul commenced at the very beginning and related all that had happened -to him the previous night. Completing his narrative, Jack muttered, -“So! That’s the way things stand.” - -“Yes. Now you tell me what happened to you two last night.” - -“In one word,” replied Jack, “nothing.” - -“Tell him about the printing press,” suggested Ken. - -“Well, yes, but that wasn’t much. By putting our ears to the ground, we -could hear very slightly the printing press going.” - -“On the contrary. You should have been able to hear it very well,” -commented Paul. - -“Come to think of it,” remarked Jack, “you’re right. They must have -muffled the noise of the machine somehow.” - -“They are certainly going in for it in a big way,” said Ken. - -“It seems that they are,” Paul replied. “Now, if we can get a couple of -things straightened out, we can tell the story to the police and have -the gang arrested.” - -“I think we ought to wait a while,” suggested Jack. “It is a little too -soon yet.” - -“Yes. From every indication,” commented Paul, “it seems that they are -on the alert. We have to catch them at a moment when they are off their -guard and make sure that every one of them happens to be there.” - -“There are also a couple of more things that we have to check up on. -For example, we still don’t know how Mr. Grey fits into the picture -and—” - -“Oh, I forgot to tell you,” interrupted Paul. “Following the grocery -man, he and Mr. Grey passed each other and nodded. Whatever that meant -I don’t know, but it establishes beyond a doubt that they know each -other and that Mr. Grey is in with the crowd.” - -“That’s very interesting to know,” said Jack enthusiastically. “But in -that case, how are we going to explain his past behavior?” - -“I don’t know,” answered Paul. “But there is no doubt that there is -some connection between his past behavior and what we are up against -now.” - -“Yes,” muttered Jack, “I’d give a penny to know exactly how those fires -and the robbery fit into the puzzle.” - -“Eventually, we will solve that,” remarked Paul. “I have a notion how -they fit in but—” - -“Tell us!” exclaimed Ken. - -“I would rather not; it sounds foolish and I may be mistaken. Besides, -I couldn’t very well substantiate my argument. But what we have to -decide now, is what we are going to do next, what our plan of action is -going to be.” - -“Do you have any suggestion?” asked Jack. - -“My opinion is that we ought to keep away for a couple of days. That -would make them think that they have scared us away. It will also make -them a little careless and things will be easier for us to accomplish.” - -“All right. Now suppose we do play dead, so to speak, for two days; -then what?” asked Ken. - -“Well, we still have to go down to the cellar for a second time and -establish definitely what’s going on there.” - -“And we still have to locate the exact position of their secret -tunnel—for it must be that,” added Jack. - -Paul nodded. “Yes,” he said. “It would be a simple thing to bore a -tunnel connecting the two cellars.” - -“But how are we going to determine how the fires and the robbery at -Professor Link’s fit into the picture?” asked Ken. - -“For that we will have to wait and see how things turn out,” explained -Paul. “It may be very possible that those incidents have nothing to do -with it all.” - -“But those were the very things that we began to investigate,” insisted -Ken. - -“Yes, and now look what it got us into,” remarked Jack. - -Suddenly the air was rent by the screech of the fire siren. The boys -leaped to their feet and began to race down the street. “But it isn’t -time yet for another fire,” protested Paul. - -“What do you mean, it isn’t time yet?” questioned Ken. - -“I told you about it. From the reports in the papers, it seemed there -was a fire approximately every ten to fourteen days.” - -“Well, maybe this is a real fire,” suggested Jack. - -“Perhaps.” - -At Main Street, the boys saw the fire engine, a brand new one the town -of Stanhope had recently acquired, come racing madly down the street. -People were lined up along the sidewalk watching the engine pass. -“Where’s the fire?” Paul asked someone. - -The man shrugged his shoulders and answered, “I don’t know.” - -Paul asked someone else. But nobody seemed to know where the fire was. -Jack suggested that they run down the street, in the direction the fire -engine went, and perhaps they would come upon it. The boys agreed and -they fell into a trot. On the way, they stopped every once in a while -to inquire as to the location of the fire. But nobody seemed to know. -“That’s strange,” muttered Jack. - -“What’s strange?” asked Ken. - -“That no one should know where the fire is.” - -About a quarter of a mile down, they saw the fire engine returning. The -firemen waved to people as they passed. One of the firemen shouted to a -friend at the curb, “False alarm!” - -“Did you hear that?” asked Jack, turning to his friends. - -“Yes,” answered Paul, “I heard it. I’m just wondering.” - -“Wondering about what?” - -“Just thinking of something.” - -The boys began to walk back. For a while they were silent. “By golly!” -exclaimed Paul, slapping his right fist into his palm. “I wouldn’t be -surprised if—” - -He stopped to think for a second. “If what?” asked Ken. - -“If that gang,” continued Paul, “were not responsible for the false -alarm.” - -“How do you mean?” asked Jack. - -“Pretty soon,” commented Ken, “you will have that gang responsible for -everything that happens in this town.” - -“But listen to this,” explained Paul. “Suppose they want to move -something, do you think they want any witnesses?” - -“No, but—” - -“But when you hear the fire siren, people start running to the fire, -there is a commotion, no one would pay any attention to something being -moved in or out of a house. Isn’t that right?” - -“Yes,” agreed Ken hesitantly, “but—” - -“How about going over there and looking around?” suggested Jack. - -“No,” insisted Paul. “We said we would play dead for two days and we -are going to do it.” - -“All right, you win.” - - - - -CHAPTER XIX - -CAPTURED! - - -The two days were up. Jack and Ken, waiting for Paul, sat idly about -at the latter’s garage. It was early morning, about nine o’clock and -the day was clear and warm. Soon Paul appeared and he sat down near -his friends on a box. “All right, fellows,” he said, “what’s to be our -first move?” - -“Go down to the cellar,” suggested Jack. “It’s early morning and -probably no one will be there. We will have at least a couple of hours -in which to look around.” - -“Yes, and perhaps we will find the secret door,” added Ken. - -“Let’s go, then,” said Paul. - -Jack picked up the baseball bat and followed. “Again you’re bringing -along your bat,” remarked Paul. - -“Sure. It may come in handy.” - -“You’re right. It might not be a bad idea for Ken and I also to take -along some sort of weapon.” - -They stopped and looked around. Finding a stray broom handle, Ken sawed -it into three pieces and Jack discarded his bat. Putting their weapons -out of sight, they walked off. “How will we manage it?” asked Ken. - -“We will do it the same as last time,” suggested Paul. “You will stay -outside and keep a careful watch while Jack and I will go down. Is that -agreeable?” - -Ken nodded. “It’s all right with me.” - -Before they reached the empty house, Jack suggested that they take -a look at the house in its rear, where no doubt the secret door was -situated. His companions thought it was a good idea and they proceeded -to do so. - -Ken took his place at one corner and Paul, by walking around the block, -took his place at the opposite corner. When all was ready, Jack very -innocently walked down the street on the wrong side. The house under -suspicion was a one family brick building with a stoop leading up to -the front door; at the ground level were noticeable the small windows -of the cellar. From all appearances, the house was occupied; there were -curtains in the windows, several flower pots were distributed on the -small porch and a rubber hose lay on the ground not far from the house. - -As Jack reached the corner, he took over Ken’s place and the latter -strolled nonchalantly up the street, noticing everything within -sight of the house. The boys got together again and discussed their -impressions of the house. “Very innocent looking as far as I could -see,” remarked Ken. - -“Don’t let that fool you,” asserted Paul. - -The boys proceeded to the empty house. Careful not to be seen as they -entered the yard, they put their ears to the ground to find out whether -the printing press was in motion. Satisfied that everything was quiet -below as far as they could judge they prepared for action. - -Ken took his place prepared to watch, while Jack and Paul moved off and -entered the house. Closing the door quietly behind them, they entered -the first room on their right. Moving very cautiously, they approached -the spot where the trap door was supposed to be. But at first they -could not find the small piece of wood that came out of the floor. Both -boys frantically hunted for that piece of wood. After about fifteen -minutes of digging their nails into the floor in wild search, Jack at -last came upon it and lifted it out of the floor. - -Paul lifted the trap door and began to descend. Their hearts were -aflutter with excitement. What awaited them below? Would they come to -trouble? Would they come to grips with the gangsters? Both boys had had -a taste of their medicine, but that didn’t discourage them nor were -they intimidated. Grasping firmly their short sticks, they walked down -the steps. - -It was dark below, and that was a good sign. Each of the boys carried -a flashlight and lit up their way. Jack closed the trap door over his -head and followed Paul. At the bottom of the stairs, Paul waited for -his friend. A beam of light went all around the room and came to rest -on the table. About five or six bills lay sprawled on the wooden table. -Jack whispered, “Look.” - -Paul nodded. Together they approached the table and looked at the -money bills. There were two fives, two tens and a twenty dollar bill. -“Counterfeit,” whispered Paul. - -Jack picked one up and slipped it into his pocket. They returned to -the end of the room and began a thorough search, working from one end -of the room to the other. There were several pieces of clothing, many -rags, various packages, and other things, such as tools and machinery -about which they knew nothing. They paused to examine the printing -press very carefully. They moved on. Jack whispered, “Let’s try to find -the secret door.” - -Paul nodded. “It must be over the other way,” he whispered back. - -They proceeded to the other end of the cellar. A beam of light moved -back and forth over the wall, but no sign of a door. They tapped and -groped at the wall but with no success. Suddenly their hearts fell. -The faint noise of footsteps on the other side of the wall came to -them. Their minds were in a whirl. What were they to do? Were they to -be captured? If so what would happen to them? They already had a taste -of what the gang did to anyone spying on them. What would they do now? -All these thoughts flashed through their minds in an instant. Paul -whispered, “Hide.” - -Paul dived behind a bunch of rags and pulled several of the rags over -him. But Jack was not so quick. At his corner, there was no ready -hiding place for him to run to. And he was still looking for one as the -electric light flashed on and part of the middle of the wall was pushed -open. In a flash, he noticed how the door worked; the handle of the -door was pushed through on the other side, and thus a means was left -for an exit; but on leaving, if the handle was pulled in, whoever was -in the cellar was either imprisoned or had to use the trap door in the -empty house. - -As the door was thrown open, the two gangsters whom Paul had noticed -with the fat fellow and the grocery man, stepped forth. Seeing Jack, -one of them whipped a revolver out of his hip pocket. The second one, -however, grabbed his mate by the arm and exclaimed, “Don’t shoot. He is -only a kid.” - -Advancing to Jack, the second one demanded, “What are you doing here?” - -Jack held his breath and tried not to look in the direction where his -chum was hiding. “Just happen to be here,” he answered, his heart in -his mouth, wondering what they would do to him. - -The gangster became angry and boisterous. “I know you happen to be -here,” he cried as he gave the boy a shove that sent him sprawling. -“But how do you happen to be here, that’s what I want to know.” - -Jack picked himself up. The first man, with his gun still in his hand, -mumbled to his companion, “Wait a minute, Pete, somebody else may be -here. Let’s look around.” - -“Okey, Joe. Keep this fellow covered while I look around.” - -He took his gun out of his pocket and let his eyes wander about the -cellar. He spied the bundle of rags. Levelling the gun at it, he cried, -“If you’re hiding there behind the rags, you better come out or I’ll -shoot.” - -Paul thought he had better not take any chances and slowly he rose, -with his hands above his head. Joe cried, “I think that’s the guy the -boss and I caught the other day and I socked him.” - -Pete demanded, “Are there any more of you in here?” - -Paul shook his head. Out of the corner of their eyes, the boys glanced -at each other. Both were pale and tense, but not frightened. Pete -raised his fist threateningly and scowled, “If you’re lying, I’ll knock -your block off.” - -Paul said, “If you don’t believe me why don’t you look around and see -for yourself.” - -That seemed to satisfy the gangster and he lowered his arm. “What are -you doing here?” he again demanded. - -“We came upon the trap door by accident,” replied Paul undaunted, “and -we thought we would look and see what it was all about.” - -“You’re sure you don’t know any more than that?” - -“What could we know that you don’t want us to know?” asked Paul. - -Pete lunged out and hit Paul on the cheek. “That’ll teach you not to -get fresh,” he hissed. - -“What’ll we do with them?” asked the gangster named Joe, addressing his -mate. “You think we ought to dump them?” - -“No,” was the snarling reply. “We’ll tie them up and leave it to the -boss to do with them as he pleases.” - -“What for?” demanded Joe. “They’re a couple of rats and we ought to get -rid of them.” - -“They’re kids,” argued Pete. “We dump them and you’ll have the cops on -our tail.” - -“The cops don’t need to know.” - -“Never mind. Tie them up and don’t argue.” - -The two gangsters faced each other and it seemed that they might get -into a quarrel. “I say dump them,” shouted Joe. - -“And I say no,” snarled back Pete. - -Jack and Paul watched them face each other, leveling their guns. The -boys thought it would be good luck if they did fight and kill each -other. But in that case there would be shooting and they needed safe -places to run to. However, Joe, the weaker of the two, gave in and -muttered, “Okey. We’ll tie them up.” - -Tearing some rags into strips, Joe tied the boy’s hands and feet and -their own handkerchiefs were used to put around their mouths. The job -completed, they were tossed into the corner. Pete, who was watching the -procedure, now said, “All right. Now grab those two packages and take -them to the boss. And ask him what to do with these kids.” - -“And what are you gonna do?” Joe asked with malice. - -“I’m going to stay here and keep an eye on these kids.” - -“That’s all right with me,” said Joe. He went to the other end of the -cellar and picked up two packages wrapped in plain brown paper. Nodding -to his mate, he called, “Okey, I’ll be going now.” - -“And don’t take all day coming back,” snarled Pete. - -Joe was gone. Pete brought over a chair and leaned it against the wall. -Sitting down, he took a penknife out of his pocket, placed his gun in -his lap and began to clean his fingernails. “It’s too bad you kids have -to pry into things you shouldn’t,” he muttered, addressing himself to -the boys without looking at them. “It ain’t healthy. You’re liable to -get bumped off one of these days and then where will it get you?” He -paused for a moment to think and scratch his head. “Mind your own -business is my motto,” he continued. “If everybody would mind their own -business, everything would be all right. As it is, people get into the -trouble, like you kids, when you shouldn’t.” - -He stopped talking. With their hands tied behind their backs, the boys -worked feverishly to loosen their bonds. But they had to work without -being suspected by their captor. And what’s more, Joe had done a good -and expert job. The bonds were tied so strongly they could barely move -their wrists. - - - - -CHAPTER XX - -ESCAPE! - - -The boys felt cramped and awkward in their sprawling positions. The -bonds cut into their wrists and ankles. Each one worked to release -his hands, but the task was difficult. But even if they did untie -themselves, what could they do? Pete, the gangster, sat near by with -his gun in his lap. The slightest move on their part and he would shoot -at them. They realized that they were in a very bad predicament. - -The gangster began his preaching again. “Now if you kids had minded -your own business,” he said, “as you should have, you wouldn’t get -into this thing. You should have been out playing baseball or swimming -instead of snooping around. And what do you get for it? I don’t know -what the boss is going to do to you. He may even dump you and that’ll -be too bad because you’re still kids.” He shook his head in dismay. -“You should have minded your own business.” - -He put away his knife and leaned back in his chair. Taking the handle -of his gun in his hand, he glanced at the boys who seemed to be pretty -safely tied up, and then he closed his eyes. - -Waiting a few minutes, the boys continued working on their bonds. Soon -Pete began to snore. Now, if he only slept soundly for a short while -so that they could work undisturbed! But the effort to free their hands -was a very tiring process and in ten minutes they had not accomplished -anything. Paul thought of a method. Noiselessly he began to edge up to -his friend. Pete moved and the boys ceased their activity. He slept on, -and Paul finally managed to creep up to Jack. Placing themselves back -to back, Paul began to work on his friend’s bonds. - -In the meanwhile, a shadow appeared at the other end of the cellar -which seemed to have descended the stairs through the trap door. He was -so noiseless that even the boys did not hear his footsteps. He crept -forward like a cat, a veritable shadow. Nearer and nearer he came to -the sleeping form of the gangster. - -Paul decided to rest his fingers for a moment and to look up at Pete to -see if the gangster was still sound asleep. Doing so, he noticed the -approaching form. His heart sank. Nudging his friend, Jack also looked -up and together they watched the approaching form. What was he up to? -Was he friend or foe? The man put a finger to his lips and motioned to -the boys to keep utter quiet. It mystified them. Was he after all a -friend? And all the while they had taken him for a foe. - -The boys flushed with excitement and followed every stealthy move of -Mr. Grey, for it was he. When he was within about a yard of Pete, he -threw himself upon the gangster. The gun clattered to the ground. The -gangster uttered a shriek, but the next moment his face was buried into -the floor and his hands were being tied in the back with rope that Mr. -Grey took out of his pocket. Following that, Pete’s feet were tied. The -gangster tried to turn to see who his assailant was but Mr. Grey kept -his face turned toward the floor. Then Mr. Grey gagged and blindfolded -the gangster and left him lying in a heap where he was. - -The boys were breathless; they couldn’t imagine what the man was up to. -With one bound he was at their side and untying their bonds. “It’s a -lucky thing I got here in time,” he muttered. - -He helped them to their feet and motioned for them to follow him. He -ran up the stairs and through the trap door. “Now run for your lives,” -he told them. - -The boys hesitated. Paul said, “We want to thank you for saving our -lives and—” - -The man cut him short with a wave of his hand. “No time to lose,” he -whispered rapidly. “Go.” - -“Who are you?” asked Jack. - -The man shook his head and pushed them through the door. “Go,” he -commanded them for a second time. - -The boys went out of the house and signalled to Ken to follow them. -But he needed no signal. He was on the alert, waiting for them and -frantic with worry. He jumped out of his hiding place and joined his -two friends. “I thought you were goners, sure,” he cried. - -They sprinted away down the street. “What do you mean?” asked Jack as -they ran. - -“I saw Mr. Grey enter the house and—” - -Jack stopped dead in his tracks. “Say!” he exclaimed, “where did he -disappear to? Did you notice, Paul?” - -Paul shook his head. “No,” he answered. “I guess we were so excited we -didn’t notice.” - -“What happened?” asked Ken. - -“Tell you later,” answered Paul. “Finish what you started to say.” - -“Well, as I was saying I saw Mr. Grey enter the house and I became -frantic. I whistled and whistled but evidently you didn’t hear me. -I couldn’t imagine what might happen to you and I couldn’t think of -anything to do or how to help. I waited and it seemed to me like a -year. I was already preparing to go down there myself when you two came -out.” - -“Nothing else happened?” asked Jack. - -“Nothing else,” was the reply. “Wasn’t that enough?” - -They slowed down to a walk as they approached Main Street. “Now tell me -what happened to you,” said Ken. - -“Plenty happened,” remarked Paul, “but let’s wait until we get to the -garage where we can discuss the whole thing.” - -At their destination, they sat down to rest. Paul and Jack heaved a -sigh of relief. “What a close shave!” exclaimed Paul. - -“Well, tell me, what happened?” asked Ken. - -Between them, the two boys narrated the events that befell them while -Ken gasped and could hardly believe it. When the story was all told, he -exclaimed, “Say, this thing is getting to be dangerous. We have to do -something about it.” - -“Yes,” agreed Paul. “And we have to do it quickly. In all likelihood, -those gangsters are going to return to that cellar, if they haven’t -already. Seeing that we escaped, they will probably try to get away by -tonight.” - -“We have to move fast then,” added Jack. - -“But what are we going to do?” asked Ken. “What can we do?” - -Paul leaned forward and whispered to his companions, “The police!” -It struck them all at once that lately they had not thought of the -police who might have saved them a lot of trouble and who were the most -logical people to tell. Paul continued, “We have to tell the police -right away before it is too late.” - -“But wait a minute,” remarked Jack. “Do you think they will believe us. -They are liable to think that we are inventing it all.” - -“We have to convince them, that’s all there is to it.” - -“We most surely do,” added Ken. “There is nothing we can do ourselves.” - -“Oh, yes, there are lots of things we could do ourselves if we only -thought of it,” commented Jack. “I don’t know how wise it is to tell -the police. They may just take us for a bunch of crazy kids.” - -“As I said,” repeated Paul, “we have to convince them.” - -“I wonder how Mr. Grey fits into the situation. I would give a penny to -know,” said Jack. - -“So would we all,” commented Paul. “But we don’t have any time to lose, -so let’s get going.” - -“Do you think we will be able to see Chief Bates himself?” asked Jack. - -“I think I can manage that,” replied Ken. “He knows me and I’ll ask to -see him.” - -“All right, let’s go,” said Jack. - - - - -CHAPTER XXI - -CONVINCING THE POLICE - - -The boys headed for police headquarters. They undertook their task -with trepidation, wondering how they would be received, feeling that -possibly it was an unwise course to take, that perhaps if they tried -they might capture the gangsters themselves without having to be -ridiculed by unbelieving police. And coming to think of it, all the -evidence at their command was flimsy, in many cases unreasonable and -illogical. Besides, they were youngsters, and if they narrated all the -events, they would be considered mentally distorted. The fact that they -were perfectly normal and were sincere and truthful was beside the -point. It was whether they would be able to convince that would tell -the tale. - -They were very silent as they walked down Main Street toward police -headquarters. Each one was thinking his own thoughts about the past -week. Jack asked himself what the best approach might be. Paul -tried hard to think how to narrate the story so that it would sound -convincing, and in his mind he went over the words and phrases that -he thought would be most suitable to use. Ken was thinking that with -the police entering the case it would be soon ended and their mystery -solved. But would it be? - -Suppose the gang of counterfeiters were caught, what then? The boys had -started out to solve the mystery of the white card—who was responsible -for leading Betty away to the end of the town? Who was responsible for -the fires? Who was responsible for the robbery at Professor Link’s? And -these three things were linked together by virtue of the white card. -The boys felt so convinced of the white card as a clue, that if it were -found to be not so, they would be badly disappointed. - -Jack muttered skeptically, “I hope we don’t get thrown out before we -get a chance to see Chief Bates.” - -Ken assured his friend, “Oh, you’ll see him all right. The important -thing is, can you convince him?” - -Paul laughed and joked, “Whether we convince him or not, wouldn’t it be -a fine predicament if to crown all our effort and glory, Chief Bates -throws us into jail.” - -“What for?” demanded Ken. - -“For any number of reasons,” answered Paul. “He might put us away to -cool us off. Or he might jail us for doing detective work without a -license.” - -“You don’t need a license to be an amateur detective,” argued Ken. - -“Amateur is a perfect word for it,” ironically commented Jack. “He will -think we are a bunch of amateurs running wild.” - -“Well, let’s not anticipate his reception of us. The chief might give -us a bunch of onions for a prize and that would be something,” remarked -Paul. - -“I’m hungry,” exclaimed Ken. “Let’s go in for an ice cream soda.” - -“That’s the perfect idea,” agreed Paul. “And I hope it will put us into -the right spirit.” - -“Most likely it will cool us off,” remarked Jack. “But I’ll also have a -soda.” - -They entered a drugstore and ordered three ice cream sodas. As Jack -said, it cooled them off, but it also picked them up in spirits. They -emerged smiling, cheerful, confident. The police headquarters was a -short distance away and they were soon in front of the building. They -hesitated before entering. Each one of them felt his heart sink low and -his pulse begin to throb. Paul shrugged his shoulders and commented, -“Well, as the saying goes, faint heart never won fair maiden. Let’s go -in.” - -They entered the hall. At one side was a desk with a sergeant behind -it. “Yes, boys,” he called to them, “What do you want?” - -Ken said, “I want to see Chief Bates; my name is Ken, Ken Armstrong.” - -The policeman smiled patiently. “The chief is very busy, you know, and -unless you have important business with him, you can’t see him.” - -Jack piped up, “Oh, it’s very important.” - -Paul pulled his friend away. Ken said confidently, “Oh, he will see me -all right. You see, he knows me. Just say that Ken Armstrong wants to -see him.” - -“And what shall I say is your business with him?” inquired the -sergeant, amused at the boy’s self confidence. - -“It’s personal. Just say I would like to see him.” - -The policeman nodded and very lazily picked up his telephone. “Hello, -hello,” he called into the speaker, “give me the chief’s office.” He -waited for several seconds, in the meanwhile looking the boys up and -down. Again he spoke into the mouthpiece, saying, “There’s a boy here -by the name of Ken Armstrong who wants to see the chief. Says that the -chief knows him and will surely—most surely—see him.” The policeman -scowled as he said that. Again he waited for an answer. Several seconds -later, he answered, “All right.” - -He hung up the receiver and turned to Ken. “I guess he knows you all -right.” Ken was overjoyed while his two friends were glad and cheerful. -“Go down to the end of the corridor,” directed the sergeant, “and then -turn left. On the door that says Police Chief, go in there and his -secretary will take care of you.” - -“Thank you,” said Ken. - -The three boys walked down the corridor and turned left. They entered -the office of the Chief of Police and his secretary, a very attractive -young woman, greeted them. “Which of you is Ken?” she asked. - -Ken spoke up. “I am.” - -“Very well. Have a seat and Mr. Bates will see you in a few minutes. He -is busy just now.” - -The boys sat down and the secretary returned to her desk and -typewriter. To the boys it seemed that she typed faster than the eye -could follow. They looked around the room and noticed the various -pictures and other office furniture. Every moment was to them an hour. -Jack was sure that the chief would take one look at them and then -throw them out of his office. Paul wondered how it happened Ken was -acquainted with Chief Bates and made a mental note to ask his friend -about it. - -A buzzer sounded in the room and the boys jumped up. The secretary -nodded and said, “You can go in now, Ken.” - -Ken proceeded toward the door, followed by his friends. The secretary -stopped them. “I thought only Ken was going in?” - -“Oh, no,” he replied. “These are friends of mine and they are coming in -with me.” - -The young woman shrugged her shoulders. “Very well,” she said, “go -right in.” - -Ken knocked on the door and someone called loudly, “Come in.” - -They entered. Behind a large desk toward the rear of the room sat Chief -Bates. He was a man of about forty-five, well-set, husky and strong. He -called out, “Hello Ken. I’m glad to see you.” - -“Hello, Chief,” Ken answered, “these are friends of mine. I hope you -don’t mind—” - -“No, not at all. Pull up chairs, boys.” He leaned back in his swivel -chair. When they were seated, he said, “Well what is it, Ken. But I -warn you, I don’t have much time, so you better talk quickly.” - -Ken said, “We are here to ask you a favor, Chief.” - -“Anything within reason, Ken,” shot back the chief, “and I’ll do it.” - -“The favor is,” continued Ken, “that you listen to something very, very -important.” - -“Very, very important,” added Jack. - -Ken turned to Paul and said, “You tell him, Paul.” - -Paul drew up his chair and leaned on the desk. He began, “You see, -Chief, what we are going to tell you may sound very fantastic but I -want you to believe that we are telling the truth and that we are not -inventing anything.” - -“Go on, go on,” urged the chief, nonchalantly leaning back in his chair. - -“Well, to begin with,” continued Paul, “we have discovered a gang of -counterfeiters—” - -The chief almost jumped out of his seat. He flew forward to the desk -and cried, “You have what? What are you talking about? Are you telling -me stories or something?” - -Paul felt his confidence shaking. He realized that the chief was a -terror and would be hard to convince, but, he said to himself, he had -to be convinced. “You see,” he said, “already you think we are telling -you some fictionized story or trying to shock you. Please listen, it’s -very important, and if you want to catch the gang, you have to act -quickly.” - -“Go on, go on,” said the chief, leaning on his desk. - -“At 752 York Street, there is an empty house. In the cellar of that -house you will find a printing press and all the things necessary to -make counterfeit money.” - -“How do you know all that?” demanded the chief. - -“We were in there; we saw everything.” - -“And how did you happen to be in there?” - -The chief shot his questions like arrows and Paul began to waver; he -was becoming confused. “That’s a long story, Chief,” he said, “and I am -trying to come to the point directly.” - -“Never mind, tell me the whole story.” - -“But Chief Bates, that would take too long and it is important that -you act quickly. The point of the story is that there are a gang of -counterfeiters operating in the cellar of the empty house at 752 York -Street. There is also a tunnel leading from that cellar to the cellar -of the house in the rear of 752 York Street. That’s how they get in and -out without being noticed.” - -“But, my dear boy,” exclaimed the chief, irritated, “how do you know -all that? Do you have any evidence? How am I to believe that what you -are telling me is not a hoax of some sort?” - -Jack jumped to his feet, impatient and exasperated. “Why don’t you go -down there and find out?” he cried. - -He shoved his hands deep into his pockets. Paul began to say something, -but the next instant Jack jumped up and cried, “Here, here is your -evidence. Look at this. When we were down there, there were a number of -such bills on the table and I put this one into my pocket.” - -The chief picked up the fake five dollar bill that Jack had thrown on -the desk and examined it carefully. He rose and walked to the door and -called to his secretary. “Tell Jim Spencer I want to see him right -away.” - -He returned to his swivel chair and said to the boys, “Now fellows, -I am not doubting your story; on the contrary, I think that you may -be telling the truth. But you understand that I have to question you -closely.” He paused and the boys looked relieved; they even smiled -happily. “In the meanwhile, I do wish you would tell me the whole -story, from beginning to end, how you happened to discover this gang -and all that.” - -Paul looked at his friends and they nodded to him. Jack said, “Go on, -Paul, tell him. But it will take a long time, though, Chief.” - -The Chief of Police nodded. “That’s all right. I’m a good listener.” - -Just then a tall, husky man entered the office and said, “You called -for me, Chief?” - -“Yes. Take a look at this.” And the chief gave Jim Spencer the -counterfeit bill. - -The detective quickly and expertly glanced at the bill and announced, -“It’s fake, all right, Chief. Very clever work, though. Most likely the -work of Moonshine Charlie.” - -“You know what these boys are telling me, Jim?” asked the Chief. The -detective shook his head and Bates continued, “They say that they have -located the gang, have been down in their hangout and all they want -now, I guess, is for us to step in and clean the gang up, isn’t that -so, fellows?” - -“That’s right,” cried Jack. “And you had better hurry, too.” - -“Very interesting,” commented Jim Spencer. “How did they happen to -discover it all?” - -“That’s just what I’m trying to get out of them,” answered the chief, -“but it’s like pulling teeth. Sit down and listen to the story.” To -Paul, he said, “All right, go on with your story.” - -“Well,” began the boy, “how it all began may sound a little fantastic. -But you remember, Chief, that a week ago today, Ken’s little sister, -Betty, disappeared for about an hour. Jack happened to be on Leonard -Street at the moment and he saw her. He couldn’t understand what she -was doing there, but after questioning her for some time, she told him -that a tall man bought her candy and then took her for a walk and then -he left her all alone at almost the end of the town.” - -“And so you three became detectives and undertook to find the man, -isn’t that so?” commented the chief, smiling. - -“Yes, but wait a minute. This man had given Betty a blank, white card.” - -“Here it is,” cried Jack, and threw the card on the desk. - -The chief and the detective glanced at it casually. “Go on,” said the -chief. - -“Several days later,” continued Paul, “there was a fire on Water Street -and—” - -“Yes. I remember that,” said the chief. “And you very bravely ran into -the burning house and saved an old couple and an infant. That was a -very brave deed, my boy.” - -“The important thing,” said Paul, “is that in the door of the room -where the infant was, I found another card like that.” He searched -in his pocket and produced the evidence. The chief and the detective -examined the two cards. “And to make a long story short,” continued -Paul, “there was a robbery at Professor Link’s and—” - -“And you found another such card,” said the chief, interrupting. - -“Yes.” - -“But that is no evidence; it means nothing,” said the chief. “You can -find cards like these everywhere you go, by the dozen.” - -“Well, that may be so,” said Paul. “But to us it was evidence, and -we figured that the same man committed all the three crimes. And we -decided to track him down.” - -“Why didn’t you come to us and tell us?” demanded Chief Bates. - -Paul was perspiring. He was very tense and he felt that he was being -hindered rather than helped. “Well, I don’t know,” he remarked, “I -guess we didn’t think of it.” - -“Didn’t think of it!” exclaimed the chief. - -Jack saw how his friend was suffering and he jumped to his feet and -cried, “What difference does all that make? The important thing is that -we discovered the gang of counterfeiters and if you don’t act quickly -they will escape.” - -“I’m sorry for interrupting,” said the chief, somewhat embarrassed. “Go -on with your story.” - -“Well, we came across this man. To us he is known as Mr. Grey. And—” - -“And how did you come across him and how did you know it was he?” - -“There are a lot of little details that I’m leaving out to make the -story short. At any rate, Jack followed him one night to the empty -house at 752 York Street. We searched the house several times until we -found the secret door to the cellar. And that’s the end of the story.” - -“Well, there are some other things too, but we can tell you that later.” - -The chief and the detective eyed each other. Detective Spencer asked, -“Do you happen by any chance to know any of the members of this -counterfeit gang?” - -Paul nodded. “Yes,” he answered. “The fellow they call the boss and who -seems to be the chief is a big, fat, dark featured individual. The—” - -Chief Bates and the detective exclaimed simultaneously, “Moonshine -Charlie!” - -“Two other men call themselves Pete and Joe. Another member of the gang -is a man who runs a grocery store at Main and Jones Streets.” - -“Don’t forget Mr. Grey,” added Jack. - -Paul nodded and said, “That’s right, and Mr. Grey. That’s all we know.” - -“That’s plenty,” cried Jim Spencer. “Where is their hangout?” - -“At 752 York Street; in the cellar.” - -Just then they were interrupted by the entrance of the secretary, who -said, “A gentleman to see you, Mr. Bates. He—” - -The man was directly behind her and he said, “Never mind telling who I -am and what my business is. I’ll do it myself.” - -Everybody looked at the speaker. The boys jumped to their feet as if -they had been touched by an electric spark. Simultaneously, they all -cried, “Mr. Grey!” - - - - -CHAPTER XXII - -MR. GREY - - -Indeed, it was Mr. Grey. He stood there looking at them, smiling, -self-confident. By now the chief and Jim Spencer had also jumped to -their feet. Everyone was staring speechless at the gaunt man. Jack -cried, “Who are you?” - -The chief added, “Yes, tell us who you are and what you want.” - -Mr. Grey walked over to the desk. Pausing for a moment to eye the -secretary, she blushed and left the room. When the door was closed, he -took a badge out of his pocket and showed it to the chief. - -“Oh!” exclaimed the chief. “I’m glad to meet you.” - -“Who is he, Chief Bates?” demanded Jack. - -“A government man,” was the snappy retort. - -“Then why did we find him among the gang?” demanded Jack. “Anyone can -get himself a badge. Let him really identify himself.” - -They all eyed Mr. Grey. Paul and Ken felt horrified by Jack’s demand -but they felt that he was right, reasonable. Wasn’t it possible for him -to pass off as a government man and yet be in reality a member of the -gang? Mr. Grey said smilingly, “That boy will some day make a very good -sleuth.” - -“Well, you’re wrong,” retorted Jack. “I’m going to study to be a -doctor.” - -That set everybody to laughing. Addressing Chief Bates, Mr. Grey asked, -“What have the boys been telling you?” - -This time Paul was on his feet. He felt that Jack was correct in his -demand that the man identify himself further. And the fact that the -man was trying to evade it, aroused his own suspicions. “Why don’t you -identify yourself?” he demanded. “How do we know who you are? For all -we know, you may be a member of the gang, as we have thought right -along, and only pretending that you are a government man.” - -Mr. Grey raised his eyebrows but did not lose any of his equanimity. He -smiled and seemed perfectly at ease. The chief remarked humorously, “It -seems that this thing has passed completely out of my hands. So you two -had better settle the issue.” - -Mr. Grey said, “These boys are all right. No. As a matter of fact, they -are better than that. They are shrewd, fine detectives. You ought to -acquire them for your force, Chief.” - -He took his coat off and ripped the seam open. Producing several -papers, he handed them to Chief Bates, who looked them over carefully. -Then Mr. Grey rolled up the sleeve of his right arm and revealed a red -gash of about two inches long. The chief was convinced. “Good!” he -exclaimed. Addressing the boys, he said, “He has identified himself -beyond any doubt.” - -The boys were satisfied. Jack said, “All right, now we know. But do you -mind, Mr. er—” - -“Mr. Grey.” - -“Do you mind Mr. Grey, telling us the mystery of the white cards, your -being with the grocery man who is a member of the gang and—” - -“When the time comes, my boy,” he answered, “you will know everything. -In the meanwhile, may I repeat my former question. What have the boys -been telling you?” - -Chief Bates cleared his throat. With a twinkle in his eye, he remarked, -“They have been giving me a cock and bull story about a gang of -counterfeiters.” - -“Well, it just happens to be true,” announced Mr. Grey. - -For a short while there was silence, as though they were all overcome -by the government man’s statement. “Is it the Moonshine Charlie gang?” -asked Jim Spencer. - -“That’s right,” answered Mr. Grey. “And I’m here to ask you for ten men -to round up the gang.” - -“Right away?” asked Chief Bates. - -“Right away.” - -“Jim,” said the chief, addressing his detective, “round up ten men and -get them ready. What else, Mr. Grey?” - -“Nothing else,” he answered. “That is, for the present.” Addressing the -boys, he said, “Well, fellows, how do you think we ought to go about -it? But before we discuss that, may I know who you are?” - -Paul rose. “My name is Paul—Paul Morrison. And I’m glad to know you, -Mr. Grey.” - -“Thank you. You fellows have done some very good work.” - -“And this is Jack Stormways,” introduced Paul. - -The two shook hands. Jack remarked, “I’m not going to say I’m glad to -know you, but rather glad to meet you. After having followed you so -much, I think I know you by now.” - -Mr. Grey smiled. “Yes,” said Mr. Grey, “you have followed me around a -great deal and rather expertly, too.” - -“Thank you,” said Jack, grinning with pleasure. - -“And this is Ken Armstrong.” - -The two shook hands. “Now,” said Mr. Grey, “how are we going to finish -the job and capture the gang? What’s your idea, fellows?” - -Paul said, “I guess you ought to know that better than any of us. We -will leave that to you.” - -“Just one favor,” exclaimed Jack. - -“What?” - -“May we go along? I’d like to be in on it.” - -Mr. Grey and the chief exchanged glances. The chief shook his head. -“It’s going to be dangerous,” remarked Mr. Grey. - -“Any more dangerous than what we have already done?” asked Jack. - -“There may be shooting. And you might get hurt.” - -“I guess we could keep out of the way. We might keep in the background.” - -“Well,” conceded Mr. Grey, “if the chief has no objections, I’ll get -you into action somehow.” The chief shrugged his shoulders. “After -all,” he commented, “who am I to deny them their fun?” - -“That’s swell,” cried Jack. - -Just then, Detective Spencer returned to the office and announced that -everything was ready. “I’ll tell you what you can do first, boys. -Suppose Paul and Ken and two officers go down to the grocery store at -Jones Street and arrest Harriman, the grocery man. If he isn’t in the -store, he is upstairs, in the first room on your right.” - -“And what am I going to do?” asked Jack. - -“You will come with me,” said the government man. - -The boys rose. “Are we all ready?” asked the chief. “Because I’m also -going along.” - -“If you will excuse me,” said Mr. Grey, “I don’t think you should.” - -“All right. If you insist.” - -“For best interest all around.” - -The chief nodded. Addressing the boys, he said, “Well, fellows, it -seems that you were right and I want to apologize for questioning you -and doubting you. And let me tell you that I appreciate everything -you have done and I shall see to it that you are in some small way -rewarded.” - -The boys beamed with delight. Mr. Grey remarked, “They certainly -deserve it, Chief. You ought to make them honorary members of your -force.” - -“Now, that’s a serious thing,” answered Chief Bates hesitantly. “But I -shall certainly consider it.” - -“Well, goodbye,” said Ken. “Thanks for listening to our story.” - -“The thanks is all on my side,” returned the Chief. “And good luck.” - -They left the office. In the waiting room, Mr. Grey whispered something -in the secretary’s ear and she blushed and waved him away. In the -corridor, they walked to the rear of the building, where autos and -policemen, armed, waited for them. Mr. Grey gave the necessary orders, -and with screaming sirens, they were off. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIII - -PAUL HELPS OUT - - -Paul and Ken had entered a large automobile with three detectives. One -was driving, while the other two talked to the boys. The other cars -went west to drive, at the direction of Mr. Grey, a roundabout way. -The single auto drove along Main Street. The driver did not use his -siren, preferring to proceed quietly and arouse no curiosity. Detective -Walters, who was in charge of the detail asked Paul, “You know this -fellow Harriman, the grocery store keeper, don’t you? You could easily -identify him, couldn’t you?” - -“Oh, yes, very easily.” - -“Fine, then you and I will enter the store and pick him up. As for you -boys,” meaning his fellow policemen, “one of you will cover the front -of the house, and the other, the rear of the house. As for you, young -fellow,” and he addressed Ken, “you know how to drive a car, don’t you?” - -“Yes, of course. I drive my dad’s car all the time.” - -“That’s fine. You stay in the car. Get behind the wheel and if there is -any chasing to do, you will drive the car. Everybody now knows what he -is to do?” he asked, looking from one man to the other. - -“Yes,” was the answer of all of them. - -The boys felt excited. They liked the way Walters treated them. They -felt as though they were members of the force with certain jobs -assigned to them. They looked forward to doing as well as they could. - -The next moment the car came to a halt at the corner across from -the grocery store. Paul immediately jumped out of the car with the -detectives and Ken at once took his place behind the steering wheel. -The detectives carried no rifles as they did not wish to arouse -suspicion. They were merely armed with their service revolvers which -they held ready in their coat pockets. - -Walters waited for his mates to take their places and then he nodded -to each one of them in turn. To Paul, he whispered hurriedly, “In case -of trouble, take shelter right away; get out of the way of the line of -fire. You understand?” - -“Yes, sir,” was his meek reply. - -Paul felt a wave of excitement. He felt a little anxious and hoped -everything would pass off quietly without anyone coming to harm. - -Walters, with Paul at his side, started to cross the street toward -the grocery store. They mounted the sidewalk and approached the door. -Suddenly a shot rang out, fired, so it seemed to Paul, point blank at -them. Immediately Walters, with his left hand, shoved Paul to one side -and sent him sprawling. As for himself, he dodged behind the wall. -Evidently, the grocery man had seen them coming and had realized who -they were and what they were up to. And it further seemed that he did -not intend to give up without a violent struggle. Walters shouted, -“Come on out or we are coming in to get you.” - -For an answer another shot rang out. Harriman meant business and no -fooling. Walters signalled to his fellow detectives covering the front -of the house and the man crawled across the street to the car at the -curb. “Duck,” he said to Ken. - -Ken complied and lowered himself in the car. The detective took out -two rifles, a couple of boxes of ammunition which he shoved into his -pocket and a square box. With this load he crept back into position. -Suddenly Walters ran across the front of the store and joined him. The -next instant a shot rang out. But it was too late. Walters was safe and -sheltered by lying flat on the ground behind the curb. “Come on out,” -he called for a second time, “or we’ll give you the works.” - -Again the answer was a shot. Walters picked up a small stone lying -nearby, and, without raising himself, threw it and shattered the -window. Several shots rang out and Walters and his mate returned the -fire just to impress the gangster. - -In the meanwhile, the detective who covered the rear of the house, had -also run back of the car, got himself a rifle, a box of cartridges and -a square box similar to the one taken by his fellow detective. In an -instant he returned to his position. - -Walters shouted, “Harriman, if you don’t come out willingly, you’ll be -carried out.” - -No answer. For several tense moments there was silence. A number of -people had collected on the opposite sidewalk and Ken waved to them -to get out of the way. The next moment he tore open the square box -and took out what looked like a baseball and threw it into the store -through the broken window. There was an explosion and a cloud of smoke -rose. An instant later, two women burst through the door; they were -coughing frantically and rubbing their eyes. One of the women was -the wife of the grocery man, the other a customer who by chance had -happened to be in the store at the moment. Walters shouted to them, -“This way. Come here.” - -The other detective took the two women and led them to the automobile. -“Stay here,” he told them. - -Taking out his revolver, he gave it to Ken and said, “Now be careful. -Keep the women here and don’t let them get away. You understand?” - -Ken gripped the weapon and nodded, “Yes, sir.” - -The detective then stole back to his position. But just then, a cry -arose from the rear of the house. Harriman appeared at the back of the -house and was surprised by the detective who now shouted to Walters -the news. Walters left his mate to cover the front and ran to the -empty lot adjoining the corner house. Harriman, in an effort to escape -the tear gas inside the store, rushed out of the rear door and took a -position behind a cluster of bricks that seemed to form a very natural -fortress. He was cornered, but it seemed that he refused to surrender -without a violent struggle. It also seemed that he was very well armed, -having two revolvers and plenty of ammunition. - -Shots continued to ring out in an exchange of fire. Walters looked -around for a way of getting at the gangster’s rear. There was only one -way and that was through the house. But immediately Walters realized -that to move out of his shelter behind a tree would take him into the -open and make of him a very simple target. It occurred to him that he -was now just as well cornered as his prey and that the only alternative -was to shoot it out, unless of course the detective left to guard the -front of the house took the initiative and got at Harriman’s rear. - -Now let us see what happened to Paul in the meanwhile. When Walters -pushed him and sent him sprawling, he was on the side of the house -facing Main Street. He wondered what he could do. His investigation -several days before had revealed to him the door at the rear of the -house. But he thought that the grocery man, realizing the odds against -him, would certainly surrender. He had no idea that Harriman would -be so stubborn and defy the policemen. But he did. And the more Paul -waited for the gangster to surrender, the more he realized that the -grocery store keeper was bent on violence. After the barrage of tear -gas and the cry announcing the gangster at the rear of the house, he -lifted himself slightly off the ground and made sure of the exact spot -where Harriman had barricaded himself. - -Thinking quickly, he rushed to the corner and waved to the detective, -hoping that the man would understand what he was up to. The next moment -he rushed into the hall of the house where the stairs were leading -upstairs. He figured that there must be a door leading from the hall -into the store. But he didn’t want to get into the store. And he tried -to think how Harriman had escaped from the store to the rear of the -house. He looked around. There was only one door at the end of the -hall. Approaching noiselessly, he pulled the door open. To his complete -amazement, he was directly behind the gangster who was absorbed by -the fire of the detectives. Without hesitating or giving Harriman a -chance to realize his danger, Paul let out a most horrible shriek and -threw himself on the gangster. Harriman looked up, his face pale and -frightened. He turned to fire at Paul, but it was too late. The boy was -already on top of him and pinning his arms. - -Harriman was a bulky, strong individual. With Paul on top of him, he -rose and was on the point of whirling his assailant off. But by this -time the two detectives were also on top of him and pinned his arms. -Paul slipped off the gangster’s back. In an instant Walters slapped -handcuffs on the gangster. Turning to Paul, he cried, “You fool!” - -Paul smiled and appeared quite calm and confident. Walters slapped him -on the back and together they escorted the criminal to the automobile, -while the other detective began to pick up Harriman’s guns and -ammunition. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIV - -BATTLE - - -Siren screaming, Ken drove the car down Main Street and to police -headquarters. Chief Bates met them and congratulated them on their -capture. “Any trouble, boys?” he asked. - -Walters smiled and said, “It seems, Chief, that we couldn’t get along -without these youngsters.” He pointed to Paul, and asked, “Do you know -what he did, this kid?” - -The chief shook his head and asked, “What did he do? Get into trouble -again or something?” - -“Well, if it wasn’t for him,” was the answer, “we would still be there -pegging away at each other. That kid up and jumped the gangster. All we -had to do was to take him into custody.” - -The chief laughed uproariously. “Some detectives you are!” he -exclaimed. “Letting a kid do your work!” - -“I tell you, Chief, there is no getting away with it—these kids are -the tops,” said Walters, slapping Paul on the back. - -“But seriously, though,” remarked the chief, “I don’t want you fellows -to get into any trouble. Do you hear me?” he demanded, pretending he -was being tough on them. “You have done enough and I want you to keep -out of harm.” - -Paul smiled. “All right, Chief,” he said. “Did you hear from the -others?” - -“No, I didn’t,” he answered. Addressing his detectives, he said, “You -boys better run down there and give them a hand if they need it.” - -“May we go along?” asked Ken. - -“All right. I guess these detectives of mine wouldn’t be able to find -the place or know what to do without you.” They all laughed heartily. -“But don’t get into more trouble, do you hear me, you two?” - -The three detectives and Paul and Ken got into the car and rode off. -At their destination, they came upon a pitched battle. It seemed that -the gang was a tough bunch and ready to battle the law rather than -surrender in spite of the heavy odds against them. - -At the corner of York Street, when the police cars arrived, they -stopped and Mr. Grey had issued instructions. Four of the detectives -he instructed to take up varying positions across the street from the -house which led to the secret door. Accompanied by three more policemen -and Jack, he went to 752 York Street. The detectives he told to deploy -around the house and Jack he warned to keep out of the way. On second -thought, he turned to Jack and said, “You go back there and watch those -automobiles.” - -Reluctantly, Jack went to obey and sat himself in the second car. He -wanted to be in on the action, but he realized why the government -agent wanted him out of the way. - -The detectives were armed with rifles and sub-machine guns. Mr. Grey -looked around to see if all his men were in position. He gave the -signal for all of them to be on the alert. Gripping his revolver, he -entered the empty house and left the door open. Noiselessly, he opened -the trap door and descended the stairs. The cellar was lit up and that -told him that the gangsters were there. As far as he knew, Joe and Pete -were surely there, but he didn’t know whether Moonshine Charlie himself -was there. He paused to listen, and only the voices of the two reached -him. For several seconds he debated with himself whether to wait until -the arrival of the boss. On the other hand, he thought, he might seize -the two and then let Moonshine Charlie walk into a trap. - -Descending noiselessly, he came to the bottom of the stairs. The two -gangsters were at the table, Pete with his right side toward Mr. Grey -and Joe having his back toward the agent. Mr. Grey levelled his gun and -muttered threateningly, “Put your hands up, boys. Quick. Reach for the -ceiling and no monkey business.” - -The two gangsters jumped to their feet and put their hands up above -their heads. Pete cried, “What the—What’s all this about?” - -“You’ll find out right away,” was the answer. Mr. Grey saw them edging -toward the back of the table and he warned them, “Don’t you move or -I’ll plug you.” - -But the next instant Pete turned over the table with his leg and the -two gangsters threw themselves behind it. Mr. Grey fired, the bullet -burying itself in the wooden table. Pete fired back and the government -agent threw himself on the floor and crept behind the stairs for -protection. “The house is surrounded,” he told them. “You had better -surrender if you want to get out alive.” - -Pete tossed back, “Like hell!” - -He fired and Mr. Grey returned. Pulling the table along, they moved -gradually back toward the secret door. The government agent realized -that their escape through the tunnel into the next house was safe and -sure; there was nothing he could do about it. So he let them work their -way gradually back. Joe raised his arms to pull open the door and the -next moment he grabbed it away, letting out a yell. Mr. Grey had fired -and the bullet had pierced the gangster’s hand. But the door was now -ajar, and in a moment they pulled it open and escaped. - -Mr. Grey ran forward and whatever he could find, he piled up against -the door, shutting off their return into the cellar. The gangsters were -now trapped in the second house. The government man ran up the stairs, -and cautiously emerged from the house, to make sure his own men did not -fire on him. Coming out into the open, he directed his men to close up -on the house. - -In the meanwhile, the gangsters, realizing that their escape was cut -off at both ends, set up sub-machine guns at both ends of the house and -began to rake every inch of ground within sight. The detectives got -busy. Several of them used their own sub-machine guns. Others, picking -up stones wherever they found them, managed to break every window in -the house. - -The detectives ripped open the square boxes and began to throw tear -gas into the house through the open windows. Several of the bombs fell -short of the house, and pretty soon the whole house was enveloped in -thick clouds of smoke. There was no wind and the smoke hung in the air -in and around the house. Within five minutes, both gangsters stumbled -out of the doorway, coughing hard and trying hard to keep their hands -above their heads. - -Several of the detectives immediately ran forward and grabbed them, at -the same time dragging them away from the clouds of tear gas. They were -immediately surrounded and handcuffed. Just then a siren screamed and -everyone turned to see what was happening. - -Jack was sitting in the car and watched the battle. He was glad now -that he was at a safe distance. It was too bloody an affair for him. -After a while, he leaned back in the seat and paid no attention to -what was going on. He waited for the finish and for the detectives to -return. He heard the crackling of rifle fire and the explosion of -bombs. - -Resting in the back seat of the automobile he only hoped that no -one would be hit and that all would turn out well. Why couldn’t the -gangsters give up, he thought to himself. Couldn’t they see that the -odds were against them? And even if they should escape this time, which -was impossible, they would still be hunted and caught by the police of -some other town or city. - -Jack leaned forward and peeked out of the window. He caught his breath -and became tense. There was a man across the street who looked very -familiar and appeared to be exceedingly interested in the battle that -was going on between the criminals and the police. The man, tall, fat, -husky, stood in front of a roadster that evidently belonged to him. -“Moonshine Charlie,” Jack thought to himself. - -Yet he had not heard the man drive up. It was because he was absorbed -in his own thoughts. Now what am I to do? What can I do? These -questions came to Jack’s mind, yet he found no answer. It was no use -to call one of the detectives; the gangster might disappear in the -meanwhile. What could he do? - -Jack became conscious of the fact that the firing had ceased. He saw -the fat man get into his car and drive off, turning into the next -corner. Jack jumped to the wheel, set off the siren screaming and was -immediately chasing the gangster. - - - - -CHAPTER XXV - -INTO THE LAKE - - -The detectives were startled by the sound of the siren but it -immediately put them on their guard. Seeing the car which Moonshine -Charlie was driving, tearing down the street, they thought something -was wrong and they threw themselves to the ground. The gangster -was bent on revenge, though there was little he could do. His plan -evidently was to drive by the group of detectives, and through the open -window of his car, fire on them as he passed. It was a violent gesture, -born of hate and contempt. - -The detectives threw themselves on the ground, dragging the two -gangsters down with them. Moonshine Charlie fired four or five times -as he sped by, but all his shots were futile and hurt no one. However, -Jack was only a couple of yards behind him. The boy slowed down as he -came alongside a group of policemen. Mr. Grey jumped forth and leaped -onto the running board. “Drive!” he cried. - -The car leaped forward and flew out of sight. The gangster kept -speeding straight ahead. Jack kept his siren screaming and hoped no one -would get in his way. Mr. Grey assured himself of a firm hold and then -turned his attention to the fleeing automobile ahead of him. The police -car was much more powerful and Jack was gaining gradually. Mr. Grey -aimed and then fired, but with no result. - -Moonshine Charlie turned the next corner on two wheels. Jack was after -him. The gangster began to zigzag and that was to his disadvantage -because that enabled Jack to gain considerable distance on him. Mr. -Grey fired a second time, but again, the shot had no effect. Suddenly -Jack caught his breath. Moonshine Charlie had turned a corner. The boy -knew that it was a dead end street and unless the gangster slowed up, -the car would run straight into the lake. - -Jack slowed up as he turned the corner. Mr. Grey of course did not -realize why, but as soon as the corner was turned, he saw for himself. -The gangster didn’t know it was a dead end street. It was too late -when he realized it. Slamming on the brakes, the car seemed to shiver -and bounce into the air. Evidently Moonshine Charlie had lost control -of his machine, for it ran onto the sidewalk, almost crashed into the -brick wall of a house, and then leaped through the wooden fence and -into the lake. - -Jack pulled the car up to the curb and stopped. Mr. Grey and he rushed -up to the lake. The terrible splash of the water caused by the plunging -automobile was already becoming calm. Jack stared at the approximate -spot and shivered. Mr. Grey asked, “Anything wrong, fellow?” - -“No,” was the meek answer. There was a short silent pause, then he -remarked with deep feeling, “It’s a terrible death.” - -The government agent nodded silently, then replied, “He lived a -terrible life.” - -By now a crowd had gathered and several reporters and photographers -had arrived. Mr. Grey and Jack pushed their way through and drove off -again. “Shall we go back and see if the men are still there?” asked -Jack. - -Mr. Grey nodded. “Yes, let’s go back.” - -For a short while they drove along in silence. Jack felt so shaken -by the incident that he drove the car at a very slow pace. The agent -commented, “It’s a good thing you happened to be there on the spot, or -else he would have gotten away and might also have wounded some of the -men.” - -“Yes,” answered Jack ironically, “I thought I was safely out of it when -bang, there. I was right in it.” - -Mr. Grey regained his good humor and laughed. “It seems that we can’t -get along without you fellows. You boys have done more in the capture -of the gang than I and the detectives did. I wonder if they got -Harriman all right.” - -“I don’t suppose they had any difficulty,” was Jack’s opinion. - -“I’m not so sure of that,” was the contrary opinion. “Harriman was a -violent sort of person, very temperamental and brutal. But for that -matter they all were. A tough bunch they were.” - -They arrived at the scene of the battle. The change was now so vastly -different, that Mr. Grey commented upon the fact, “Suddenly, everything -is again quiet and serene. Isn’t it wonderful?” - -Jack was silent. There was no one in view and they assumed that the -detectives with their prisoners had returned to police headquarters. -Mr. Grey suggested that they enter the house and see what was inside. -Jack had no objection and together they mounted the few steps to the -porch and entered the house. The door opened on a small foyer, with -stairs leading up to the rooms above. On their left was a door which -Mr. Grey opened and they entered. The room was fairly well furnished -as a living room, but now, after the battle, it was in considerable -disorder. - -They went from room to room and then upstairs. They were all fairly -well furnished. Except for the two rooms which were used by the -gangsters in their struggle with the police, the furniture was not at -all disturbed. Jack asked, “Did the gangsters occupy this house?” - -“In a fashion. But they didn’t live here,” the agent informed him. -“Actually they lived at the hotel, but they used this house from which -to carry on their operations. Let’s go, shall we?” - -They returned to their car and drove back to police headquarters. -There they found that the prisoners had been brought in and put in -jail; not one of the detectives had been hurt. The chief greeted them -and shook Mr. Grey’s hand. “Great work,” he said, “great work. Did you -get Moonshine Charlie?” - -The government agent shook his head sadly and replied, “No, I’m sorry -to say I didn’t.” He turned to Jack for confirmation. “You see,” he -continued, “he got away. We were just about to grab him when phizz, up -he goes and jumps into the lake.” - -“Jumps into the lake!” exclaimed the chief. - -“Yes,” was the answer. “You see, he was going so fast, he couldn’t stop -himself.” - -“He fell in, car and all,” added Jack. - -Chief Bates heaved a sigh of relief. “Whew! For a moment you had me -thinking that he actually got away.” - -“Well, he did,” insisted Mr. Grey. “He got away so cleanly, no one will -ever catch him again.” - -The chief and the detectives laughed. Catching sight of Jack, the chief -pulled him forward and shook him by the hand. “I already heard of what -you did, fellow,” he said. “That was very bravely done.” - -“As I was telling him just before,” commented Mr. Grey, “I don’t know -what we would have done without him and his friends. They did more to -capture the gang than all of us put together.” - -“You didn’t hear all of it,” exclaimed the chief. “Did you hear what -his friend, Paul Morrison, did?” - -Jack nodded and wondered what Paul had been up to now. “What this -fellow, Paul, did?” continued the chief. “He went with three men to -take Harriman into custody. Well, this fellow put up a tough battle. -To make a long story short, he came out of the rear of his store, -barricaded himself and fired shot for shot. They might still be there -shooting it out if it wasn’t for this fellow. He sneaked up on his -rear, jumped the gangster, and bingo! there he was all captured and no -longer tough and fighting.” - -Mr. Grey laughed heartily. “These fellows,” he remarked, “are showing -us all up. Did I say before you ought to make them honorary members of -your force? I take it back. They would show your men up so, the whole -force would soon be plagued with an inferiority complex.” - -The chief roared and slapped his knee. “That’s a good one,” he cried. - -Jack said, “By the way, where are Ken and Paul?” - -“They are in the detectives’ room. Shall I call them? Do you want them?” - -“Well, it’s about time we went home.” - -Mr. Grey laughed. “Notice how calm and nonchalant he is and with what -poise he said that,” commented the government agent. “The job is done, -nothing else to do, so it’s about time to go home, just like that.” - -Jack blushed and Chief Bates laughed. “Well,” he said, “there is really -no reason why the boys should not go home.” - -“No, I guess not. I think they deserve it.” - -“Yes.” The chief winked to the government agent. “I think I will send -them home in an official car.” - -“Oh, that isn’t necessary at all,” cried Jack. “We can just as well -walk home.” - -He rose to his feet as if he intended to leave. “Now you just sit -there,” said the chief. Opening the door of his office, he called his -secretary to have the boys come in. - -Chief Bates and the government agent continued their joking. A minute -later Jack and Ken and Walters entered. “Oh, there you are,” cried -Paul. “We didn’t know where you were and what happened to you.” - -“Yes,” added Ken, “we were waiting for you.” - -“Well, here I am,” Jack informed his friends, “and I think it’s time we -went home.” - -Chief Bates, addressing the detective, said, “Walters, will you please -take the boys home?” - -“Oh, that isn’t necessary at all,” cried Paul. “Thanks all the same. -But we can walk home.” - -“Notice the modesty of them,” remarked Mr. Grey. “It’s really funny.” - -The chief laughed. “All right,” said Walters, “if you’re ready, let’s -go.” - -Chief Bates came around the desk and shook hands with them. “Any time I -can do anything for you boys,” he said seriously, “don’t forget to call -on me.” - -“And when you want some good detective work done,” intervened Mr. Grey, -“you call on them.” - -The boys were beginning to feel uncomfortable. The government agent -rose and approached them. “Well, boys,” he said, “it was a real -pleasure to work with you.” He paused for a second, then added, “The -only trouble of collaborating with you is that you do all the work and -leave the other fellow nothing to do.” - -There was laughter all around. Then Jack said, “Mr. Grey, you must not -forget that we want to talk some things over with you. There are a -couple of mysterious details that we think, you can clear up for us.” - -The man bowed low and replied, “I am at your disposal, sir.” - -“Perhaps you might visit us tonight at my house,” added Paul. “Then you -could tell us everything.” - -“That’s right,” nodded Ken. “How about it?” - -“I shall be there at eight sharp, gentlemen.” - -The boys smiled at the man’s behavior. He was really lots of fun. They -said goodbye all around and left, accompanied by Walters. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVI - -TROUBLE AT HOME - - -The boys got into the official car with Walters at the wheel. Jack and -Ken sat in the back while Paul sat in the front with the driver. Paul -remarked, “Now that all that is done, our real work begins.” - -“What do you mean?” asked Ken. - -“Do you remember what we originally started out to solve?” Paul asked. - -“I was just thinking of that,” muttered Jack. “We have gotten as far -away from the original mystery as we could.” - -“What are you kids talking about?” asked Walters. - -“Well,” said Paul for the detective’s information, “we happened to -discover the gang of counterfeiters by....” - -“You don’t mean to tell me that it was you fellows who discovered -them!” exclaimed the detective. - -“Well, in a small way, yes.” - -“That’s a rich one,” was Walters’ retort. “But go on with what you were -saying.” - -“What I was going to say,” continued Paul, “was that some maniac has -been roaming through town and doing things, always leaving a white card -to mark his visit there.” - -“You don’t say!” remarked Walters. “And you’re trying to track him -down?” - -“That’s right.” - -“How did you find out about this fellow with the white card?” - -“Well, do you remember when Ken’s little sister, Betty, was reported -missing for about an hour and then turned up again?” - -“Why, yes, I remember the case. And I don’t think anything was done -about it.” - -“No,” said Paul. “But that’s how we began our investigation that led up -to the discovery of 752 York Street.” - -“Now that’s very interesting,” commented the detective. “How did it -happen?” - -“Well, you see, Jack found her all the way out on Leonard Street. -Questioning her, she told him that a man bought her candy and then took -her for a walk and left her there.” - -“And then what?” - -“Well, the man also gave her a white card. And that’s how our -investigation began.” - -“Wait a minute,” cried Jack, flushed with excitement. “Do you remember -that all along we have been thinking that Mr. Grey was that man and -that is why we were following him and all that, just waiting to jump on -him?” - -Ken exclaimed, “Why that is right, come to think of it.” - -Walters laughed. “So Mr. Grey is the guilty party. That’s good.” - -And he laughed some more. “What are we going to do, Paul?” - -“We will just have to ask him, I guess,” was the reply. “I imagine he -will be able to clear up a lot of details for us.” - -“Yes,” said Ken, “but you don’t think he was responsible for the fires -and the robbery at Professor Link’s, do you?” - -“What about the fires and that robbery you are talking about?” asked -Walters. - -“We found that there have lately been more than an average number of -fires in town.” - -“That’s right,” agreed the detective. “I remember that Captain Bob has -spoken to the chief about it and I think that a detective has been put -on the case. I’ll find out who it is and tell him to look you up.” - -The detective treated it as a good joke. While he was still laughing -Paul remarked, “Yes, send him over. We may be able to give him some -valuable information.” - -The detective was still more amused and the boys laughed too. “That’s -right, Walters,” echoed Ken, “some day when you have a case you can’t -solve, call on us.” - -“I think we have been talking too much,” replied the detective. - -The car pulled up to the curb in front of the Morrison home. Paul and -Ken, who lived across the street, jumped out. They waved to Jack and -Walters as the car sped away to deliver the last of the trio home. - -Paul rushed into the house and upstairs to his room. His mother as yet -knew nothing about her son’s adventure. Later on, she called him to -dinner. Dr. Morrison walked in. Seeing his son, he exclaimed, “Well, -well! Permit me to congratulate you, my boy. I didn’t know we had a -hero in the family.” - -Paul blushed and became very busy with his grape fruit. Mrs. Morrison -asked innocently, “A hero in the family? What are you talking about?” - -Dr. Morrison waved a newspaper. “Just take a look at the evening paper -and you’ll see. His picture is in there and the whole story of how he -and his friends captured a gang of counterfeiters.” - -Paul’s head sunk lower. So his picture was in the paper! He wondered -how the reporters got it and whether Jack’s and Ken’s pictures were -also in the paper. He was itching to read what the papers had to -say about the affair. But his mother grabbed the newspaper and read -it breathlessly. A minute later she looked up and demanded, “Paul -Morrison! Will you please tell me what this is all about?” - -Paul shook his head meekly. “Why nothing, Mother,” he whispered. “It -just happened that I....” - -He faltered and his mother said, “It just happened! I will be very glad -to see you go off to college. You will be too busy there to get into -mischief.” - -But the next moment she smiled sweetly and and came around the table -and kissed him. Dr. Morrison was beaming. He had always been proud of -his son. He said, addressing his wife, “He is all right; he is one boy -who can take care of himself.” - -“I’m sure of that,” answered Mrs. Morrison, “but for my peace of mind -I wish he would keep out of trouble. I hope college will do that—keep -him out of mischief.” - -Just then the maid entered and announced that Paul was wanted on the -telephone. He went into the foyer and picked up the receiver. It was -Jack. “Hello.” - -“Hello, Paul. Are you in trouble with your family about the affair?” - -“A little.” - -“Well, so am I. Goodbye.” - -Paul went back to the dining room. His father said, “Now, since you -were a participant, do you mind telling us a few of the details?” So -Paul started in to relate the whole story. - -At the Armstrong home, it happened a little differently. Ken entered -the house and went to wash up. Soon his father returned home from -the office, carrying an evening paper. Looking around for his son, -he found the boy in the library reading a story to his little sister -Betty. Mr. Armstrong walked in, stood over the boy for several seconds, -pretending that he was going to give him a good verbal thrashing, then -exclaimed, “So! So you have decided to become a detective!” - -“What’s a defective?” Betty asked innocently. - -Ken and his father burst out laughing. Mr. Armstrong bent down and said -to the child, “Detective, honey. The word is detective.” - -Ken still laughed. He thought his little sister was cunning in the way -she had said it. Turning to his son, Mr. Armstrong asked, “Well, what -is it all about?” - -“What does the paper say?” asked Ken. - -“Here, see for yourself.” And Mr. Armstrong gave the evening paper to -his son. “Your picture is in it and Chief Bates is quoted as saying -that you were real heroes. Imagine it, my son a hero!” - -“Well, what’s wrong with that, Dad?” asked Ken. - -Just then Mrs. Armstrong entered. - -Mr. Armstrong said, “Will you come here a second, Mother? I want to -tell you something.” She came into the library. “Did you know that your -son is a hero?” asked her husband. - -“What did he do now?” she inquired calmly. - -“Give your mother the newspaper, Ken.” - -Mrs. Armstrong took the paper and glanced at the headlines and the -pictures. She said calmly, “Nothing surprises me. What these boys -can’t get into has not been invented yet. Come to dinner.” - -They rose to comply. Mr. Armstrong put an arm around the boy’s shoulder -and said, “You’re all right, son. But I do hope college will tame you -and your friends a bit.” - -They went into the dining room. When they were about half through the -meal Ken was called to the telephone. It was Jack. “Hello, Ken.” - -“Hello, Jack. What’s up?” - -“Are you having trouble with your family about that affair?” - -“No, not really. My father and mother took it very well.” - -“Well, I am. Goodbye.” - -Jack’s reception had been different. When he got into the house, he -found his mother waiting for him. One of the neighbors, who had been -out shopping returned home with an afternoon newspaper. She immediately -ran over to show Mrs. Stormways the headlines and the pictures of Jack -and his friends. Jack’s mother first became frightened, and was on the -point of calling Chief Bates to inquire further into the matter. But -then she thought it would be better to wait until her son returned. It -was evident that no harm had come to him, or it would have been in the -paper. - -She waited for her son. At last he came and she asked him, “Well, Jack -Stormways, what is this all about?” - -“What is what about, Mother?” - -He really did not know that the story was in the afternoon papers and -that his mother knew the situation. She showed him the paper with the -headlines and the pictures. His first comment was, “Not such a bad -picture of me and the boys, is it, Mother?” - -The remark took her breath away for a moment. His calmness and -self-assurance overwhelmed her. She smiled. “Is that all you can say -for yourself?” she asked. - -He went over and kissed her. “What can I say, Mother?” he replied. -“The story is right here and I guess I am guilty. But there was really -nothing to it. I merely helped a little to capture the gang.” - -“Just helped a little!” commented Mrs. Stormways. “You’re always taking -some sort of risk. I don’t know what will ever happen to you.” - -“Now, Mother,” pleaded Jack, “you know I can take care of myself.” - -“That’s just the trouble,” she replied. “You can take care of yourself -too well.” - -Just then Jack’s younger brother, aged thirteen, burst into the house. -Seeing Jack with his mother, he cried, “Say, I heard you were playing -cops and robbers; is it true?” - -Jack and his mother laughed. “Come on, Jack, tell me about it,” -insisted the boy. - -But Jack paid no attention to his brother. His mother said, “I just -wonder what your father will say when he comes home.” - -She walked out into the kitchen to continue her preparations for -dinner. In due time, Mr. Stormways came home carrying an evening paper -with him. As soon as he stepped into the house, his younger son cried, -“Did you hear, Dad? Jack has been playing cops and robbers.” - -“Yes, son, I heard all about it. Too much, in fact. What do you think -we ought to do about it?” - -“I think you ought to make him tell us all about it, Dad,” answered the -boy. “He wouldn’t tell me anything.” - -“All right, we’ll see what we can do about that. Where is he, by the -way?” - -“He is upstairs in his room. Shall I call him?” - -“Yes, do, son. Tell him to come down for dinner. I shall be in the -dining room.” - -Jack came downstairs. His father was at the table. As soon as he walked -into the room, his father rose and bowing, said, “May I congratulate -you? Will you please tell us how it feels to be a hero?” - -Jack blushed. “Oh, don’t do, that, Dad,” pleaded Jack. - -But Mr. Stormways was enjoying himself. “Sit down, my hero,” he said. -He led Jack to the head of the table and sat him down there, saying, -“Since you are now a hero, you shall preside over the dinner table.” -As Mrs. Stormways came in her husband called out, “An extra portion of -everything for the hero, my dear.” - -“Ah, Dad, don’t,” pleaded Jack. - -But Mr. Stormways was not to be dissuaded. Sitting down, he said, “Now -tell me, did you capture the gang all by yourself, or did someone help -you a little?” - -Jack smiled. He thought he might as well join in with his father’s -humor. “Well,” he answered, “Paul and Ken did help a little, but very -little.” - -“Just what I thought,” remarked his father. “And tell me another -thing,” continued Mr. Stormways, “did the gangsters run just as soon as -they saw you or did they hesitate for a little while?” - -“They immediately surrendered,” was the reply. - -“Now let me think,” mused his dad, “what else was there I wanted to -ask you. Oh, yes. I suppose, that as a reward for your bravery, the -president himself will no doubt come here to congratulate you and -bestow upon you the Congressional Medal of Honor, is that so?” - -“Well, I don’t know about that, Dad,” replied Jack. “I imagine -that he may be too busy to do that. But I am sure he will send a -representative.” - -There was a silent pause for a few seconds, then Mr. Stormways burst -out laughing. “Well, seriously, fellow,” he said, “don’t you think that -you ought to stop keeping company with gangsters and all that?” - -“I’ll try, Dad.” - -Just then Jack’s younger brother spoke up and asked for details of the -story and Jack complied by telling all of it. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVII - -MYSTERY OF THE WHITE CARD - - -The boys were at the Morrison home waiting for Mr. Grey to appear. They -had hundreds of questions to ask him and they hoped that he would clear -up the mystery of the white card. But if he did not, they would be at -a loss as to what to do next. They would either have to give up or -commence their investigation all over again, and they were rather tired -of the thing by now. Jack remarked, “I still can’t understand how we -happened to come upon Mr. Grey and follow him. I don’t suppose he had -anything to do with the mystery of the white card.” - -“But it was you who originally began to follow him,” said Ken. - -“That’s right. But now that I think of it, I can’t understand how I -happened to pick on him.” - -“Betty described the man who took her for a walk as tall and thin,” -interposed Paul. - -“Yes, but there are many tall, thin men in town,” argued Jack. - -“And we came to the conclusion that the man who would start fires and -steal a single book must be a maniac of some sort.” - -Jack laughed. “Well, does Mr. Grey look like a maniac?” he asked. - -Paul smiled and remarked, “Well, he does look rather odd, tall and thin -as he is.” - -“All that doesn’t get us anywhere,” said Jack. - -“Well, let’s not come to any conclusions but wait until Mr. Grey -comes,” remarked Paul. - -“Yes, he’ll clear it all up for us.” - -About ten minutes later, the government agent arrived. He looked like a -changed man, dressed in a summer linen suit and his hair combed neatly -back. “Hello, fellows,” he greeted as he entered. - -“Hello, Mr. Grey,” returned Paul. “Won’t you sit down?” - -“Well, I’ll try,” he said as he took a seat, “but I’m afraid you -fellows are going to question me so much, you’ll have me standing on my -head.” - -“Then we’ll turn you over and sit you down again,” spoke up Jack. - -“Now, Mr. Grey,” began Paul, “and by the way, is that your real name?” - -“No, of course not. My name is George Wilson.” - -“Well, Mr. Wilson, we are mystified by a certain little thing,” -continued Paul, “and I wonder if you can clear it for us.” - -“Try me and we’ll see.” - -“The mystery of the white card,” Jack blurted out. “What is it all -about?” - -“What white card?” asked the agent mystified. - -“You don’t know?” cried Ken. - -The man shook his head in complete ignorance. “I’ll faint,” cried -Jack, falling back in his chair and pretending that he was actually -fainting. - -“Tell me what it is all about,” asked the government agent. “I don’t -even know what you are talking about.” - -“And we thought that you could give us the solution,” commented Jack. -“Now what are we going to do?” - -“Will you please let me in on it?” Mr. Wilson asked for the second time. - -“It’s like this,” began Paul, again explaining the whole thing, this -time for the benefit of Mr. Wilson. “About ten days ago, Ken’s little -sister, Betty, disappeared. Jack happened to find her all the way out -on Leonard Street. Questioning her, he found that a man had bought her -candy, taken her for a walk and left her there after he gave her a -blank white card.” - -“May I see the card?” asked Mr. Wilson. - -Paul took it out of his pocket and showed it to him. The agent glanced -at it and then said, “Go on.” - -“Well, several days later there happened to be a fire on Water Street -and I rushed into the building. To make the story short, inside that -burning house I found another white card, an exact duplicate of the -first one.” - -“What?” asked Mr. Wilson, his curiosity now aroused. “And then what?” - -“That isn’t all,” continued Paul. “The next day a robbery occurred at -Professor Link’s and all that was taken was a single book out of the -library. And what’s more, the same white card was left.” - -“But the point of the story is,” intervened Ken, “we thought all along -that you were the guilty person and that is how Jack began to follow -you.” - -“I!” cried the agent, aghast. “How do I come in on this?” - -“Well, sir,” spoke up Jack, “it was really all my fault. After talking -the thing over, we came to the conclusion that only a,—er,—a maniac -sort of person would do anything like that.” - -“And you took me for a maniac?” cried the agent, bursting out laughing. -“That’s a good one.” - -“I don’t think so,” replied Jack. - -“No, I agree with you,” said Mr. Wilson. “I don’t think it’s quite the -thing to be taken for a maniac. But go on.” - -“Well, sir,” continued Jack, “I began to follow you. And the first -night I followed you out to Waters Street, to the exact spot where the -fire occurred, and ...” - -“But you must be wrong,” cried Mr. Wilson, “because I don’t even know -where Waters Street is.” - -“You don’t know?” demanded Jack leaping out of his seat. - -The other boys also were by now out of their seats and staring dumbly -at Mr. Wilson. The agent said, “I remember that I was once followed by -one of you, I couldn’t say who. But I shook him off quickly. Then I -also remember that Paul approached me one day and asked me where Jones -Street was and I told him.” - -“My God!” cried Jack, “I have followed the wrong man all the time.” - -“Wait a minute,” Paul said tensely. “You haven’t followed the wrong -man. On the contrary. You know what?” They all looked at him curiously. -“There is a man in this town who looks very much like you, Mr. Wilson, -and I am convinced that he is the guilty party.” - -“Now that is interesting,” commented the agent. “I should certainly -like to meet him.” - -“Now let me ask you this,” said Paul. “You don’t know anything about -the fires nor about the robbery at Professor Link’s, do you?” - -“I most certainly don’t.” - -“Was it you who saved us when Jack and I were prisoners in the cellar?” - -“Yes, that was me.” - -“Well, wait a minute,” interrupted Ken. “Suppose you tell us how you -knew that the boys were being held there and how you came to know -Harriman and how you came to be a member of the gang?” - -“It’s this way, fellows,” began Mr. Wilson. “I was put on this case and -I followed the gang to this town. Looking around for a room I hired -one over the grocery store, from Harriman. At the time I did not know -that he was a member of the gang, but I soon found it out. Through -him, I came upon the gang. I became friends with Harriman and did him -a few favors. From then on, he trusted me. After I got on their trail, -I waited to get them with the goods—that is, they were then only -experimenting and not yet turning out counterfeit money. Just as soon -as they ran off some fake greenbacks, I got into action.” - -“How did you know, then, that we were being held in the cellar of the -empty house?” asked Paul. - -“You see, the gang had a room in the hotel. And I had a room next door. -And when Joe came and told Moonshine Charlie of holding you prisoners, -I rushed down and freed you.” - -“That’s plenty funny,” commented Jack. “If it was not you whom I was -following all the time, who then was it?” - -“That is something I should like to know myself,” replied the agent. - -“Another thing, Mr. Wilson,” said Paul. “Four days ago, I followed -Harriman. On the street, I noticed you—or was it you—passing him and -you nodded to each other. Now was it you or was it not you?” - -“No, it could not have been me,” was the answer, “because I remember -distinctly that I was at the hotel at the time listening in on -Moonshine and his gang.” - -“That’s right,” continued Paul. “Harriman did lead me to Main Street -where he met Moonshine, Joe and Pete. But if it was not you who nodded -to Harriman, then I am more convinced than ever that there is a man in -this town who looks very much like you. In fact he looks so much like -you that even Harriman mistook him for you.” - -“Now that is very interesting,” Mr. Wilson said. “We will have to do -something about it.” - -“But here is something that is very suspicious, Mr. Wilson,” Paul -said. “You say that at the time you were at the hotel, but you or the -person that looks like you, walked out of the corner house, that is, -Harriman’s house, only about fifteen minutes before the grocery store -keeper himself came out. How do you figure that out?” - -“You have me puzzled, Paul, if that was the case. I can’t figure it -out.” - -The four of them leaned back in their seats and kept quiet. The -boys appeared exhausted from the ordeal. They thought that at last -everything would be cleared up and now they discovered that it still -remained a mystery. “At last,” muttered Jack, “we are back where we -started. Hooray!” Paul sighed and kept silent. Ken asked sadly, “Now -what are we going to do?” - -His companions shrugged their shoulders. Mr. Wilson remarked, “I wish -I knew how I could help you. But as a matter of fact, I am leaving on -the midnight express.” - -“That’s too bad,” said Paul. “I thought that perhaps you would stay -here for several days.” - -Mr. Wilson shook his head. “That is out of the question,” he answered. - -“To come back to the point,” said Jack, “what do you think we ought to -do, Paul?” - -“About what?” - -“The mystery of the white card, of course.” - -“I suppose we will just have to wait and see. Perhaps we will find some -clue one of these days which will solve it.” - -“If we wait until the mystery is solved by itself, we will never know -the solution,” was Ken’s statement. - -“Too bad I can’t help you,” said Mr. Wilson as he rose to go. - -They shook hands all around, the boys wishing Mr. Wilson a pleasant -trip and he wishing them success in unravelling the mystery of the -white card. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVIII - -AGAIN THE WHITE CARD - - -All of the following day the boys wandered about trying their best to -form some definite opinion about the mystery of the white card so that -they might act upon it. But however they discussed the situation, they -could come to no conclusion nor hit upon any new clue. In desperation, -they gave it up for the present and decided to let events take their -course; perhaps something might turn up in several days or weeks that -would give them a clue which they could follow with some chance of -clearing up the situation. - -Two days later, something did happen, but it only helped to complicate -things further. Paul was walking along Main Street when he heard an -automobile horn and he turned around to see who it was. A police car -pulled up to the curb and Walters waved to him. “Hey, there, fellow,” -he called. “Come on, get in.” - -Paul got into the car. “Hello, Walters,” he said, “anything up?” - -“Yes,” said the detective. “I have a very baffling case to solve and -when I saw you walking along, I thought I might ask you to help me.” -They both laughed and the detective added, “Are you bent on going any -place in particular?” - -“Well, I was going to the library. But I have plenty of time.” - -“That’s fine. Then you can drive along with me for a while. I hate to -drive all by myself with no one to talk to.” - -“I don’t mind,” said Paul. “Where are you driving to?” - -“That’s just it. No place in particular.” - -“What do you mean?” - -“Well,” said the detective, “we got a report about fifteen minutes ago -that a car was stolen.” He brought a slip of paper out of his pocket -and gave it to Paul. “Here,” he said, “look at it and then keep your -eyes open. We will begin at one end of the town and ride through street -by street. It may be that the owner parked it somewhere and forgot the -place.” - -Paul looked at the slip of paper. He read, “Ford ... four door sedan -... license number S 91 52.” - -For a while they rode along talking of various things. They rode down -one street and up the next street. Walters related some experiences of -his as a detective. Finally he remarked, “By the way, the oddest thing -happened to me yesterday. I was walking along and suddenly I noticed a -man that was the exact image of George Wilson, the government agent. I -was so astonished, I couldn’t imagine him being in town when two days -ago I saw him off on the train.” - -“Did you stop him?” demanded Paul excitedly. “Did you see where he -went?” - -The detective said, “Why, no. That’s just it. I closed my eyes for a -second because I thought they were deceiving me. When I opened them -again, he was gone.” - -“Now isn’t that the worst of luck,” said Paul. “He is just the man we -are looking for.” - -“What did he do?” asked Walters. “What do you want him for?” - -“We need him to clear up the mystery of the white card. We think he is -the missing link in the puzzle.” - -“That’s right,” remarked the detective. “I think I remember you telling -me something about this white card mystery. Did you do anything about -it?” - -“No. And that is why we are looking for this man.” - -“How do you mean?” - -“Well, our original clues led up to our following this man. But we got -him mixed up with the government agent and that is how we happened to -come upon the counterfeit gang. Well, sir, after all that was cleared -up, we questioned Mr. Wilson but he didn’t know anything about the -white card and then we knew we were up the wrong tree.” - -“In other words,” said the detective, “as far as I can figure it out, -you are back where you started and now you are looking for him again.” - -“That’s right.” - -“Well, I wish you luck. Maybe if you keep it up long enough, you will -come across another gang of crooks. But this time finish the job -yourself.” - -“I don’t think we will be able to do that,” returned Paul smiling. “You -see, Jack, Ken and I are leaving for college in two weeks.” - -“We will have to do something about that,” said the detective. “I will -tell the chief to move the police headquarters to the college or have -him move the college here. Which would you prefer?” - -“Neither one. When I get to college, I won’t have much time for -anything except study.” - -“What are you going to study?” - -“Jack and I are going to study to be doctors.” - -“Your father is a doctor, isn’t he?” - -“Yes.” - -“It’s a very respectable profession. I wish I had gone to college and -studied a profession.” - -“Aren’t you satisfied with being a detective?” - -“Oh, I’m satisfied all right but I guess it’s like the saying, that -when you’re one thing you always want to be something else.” - -They were crossing Main Street and Paul spied Ken walking along. -Hailing his friend, the detective pulled up to the curb and Ken got -into the car. “Where are you two going?” he asked. - -“Just going for a ride,” said the detective. “Want to come along?” - -“Sure, why not. I have nothing in particular to do right now. I was on -my way for a swim, but this is all right.” - -“Well, keep your eyes open for a Ford four door sedan, license number S -91 52. Walters is looking for it,” said Paul. - -“Stolen?” - -“No,” said the detective, “just removed by the wrong party.” - -“By the way,” spoke up Paul, “Walters here has come across the mystery -man of the white card, the man that looks like Mr. Wilson.” - -Ken leaned forward eagerly. “You mean it?” he cried. “Did you arrest -him, Walters?” - -“No. I didn’t want to bother,” the detective replied. - -“Didn’t want to bother!” - -“He is kidding you,” said Paul. “The man looks so much like Mr. Wilson -that he couldn’t believe his own eyes. Well, he closed them for a -second, and when he opened them again, the man was gone.” - -“Just like a detective!” cried Ken. - -“What do you mean?” asked Walters. - -“To close your eyes to things.” - -For several seconds there was silence, then Walters burst out laughing. -“That’s a good one,” he cried, “I’ll have to remember it.” - -“Well, what are we going to do now?” asked Ken. - -Paul shrugged his shoulders and didn’t answer. For a short while -they rode along in silence. Suddenly, both Ken and Paul cried -simultaneously, “Look!” - -About ten yards ahead of them was a Ford sedan with the license number -S 91 52 parked at the curb. Walters swung over to the curb and pulled -up directly behind the Ford car. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIX - -MYSTERY SOLVED - - -The three of them jumped out of the car and approached the Ford. -Walters looked it over, checked the license number and said, “This is -it, all right.” - -Ken threw open the door next to the steering wheel. “Hey, Paul, -Walters,” he cried, “come here, quick.” - -He was joined by his friend and the detective. “Look,” he muttered and -pointed at the driver’s seat. - -They looked. There on the seat lay a white card. Walters grabbed it and -turned it over on both sides. It was a plain, white, blank card. “Can -you beat that!” gasped Walters. - -Paul took his own card out of his pocket and gave it to Walters. -“Here,” he said, “compare the two.” - -The detective made the comparison and announced, “Identical.” - -Ken burst out laughing. The detective asked angrily, “What are you -laughing at, you young pup?” - -“Now it’s your mystery,” answered the boy. “You look for him and the -next time you see him don’t close your eyes.” - -“Trying to be smart,” countered the detective, grinning. “Well, I’ll -have to start looking for him all right.” - -Walters searched the front and the rear of the car but he found nothing -suspicious. His investigation completed, he asked Ken to get into the -Ford and follow him. The detective drove back to police headquarters -where the stolen car was parked and the owner of it was notified. - -Ken and Paul walked out of the police headquarters in high spirits. -There was no particular reason for it but they thought it quite -humorous that Walters was now involved in the mystery of the white -card. And Ken didn’t seem to get tired of repeating, “From now on, -perhaps he will get out of the habit of closing his eyes.” - -And after he said it, he would laugh, assured that it was a very good -joke. Paul said, “Forget it for a while. Which way are you going?” - -“Which way are you going?” - -“Well, I was on the way to the library when Walters picked me up. So I -guess I will continue my trip to the library.” - -“That suits me,” said Ken, “I’ll go along.” - -Whistling, chatting, they walked along Main Street when Ken suddenly -saw something that made him quickly alert. - -Paul was eyeing a window display as he walked. He felt his arm pinched -and he uttered a muffled cry. “Hey!” - -Ken muttered, “Shsh! Look!” - -Across the street was the man who looked so much like Mr. Wilson! The -boys gasped. He was standing in the doorway of a three story apartment -house. The ground floor was occupied by a haberdashery on one side and -a shoe store on the other. The mystery man, with his wild, maniacal -appearance, glanced both ways, then he walked off, heading north. Paul -cried, “Come on. I’ll take care of him, Ken. You run into the hall of -the building and see what he may have been up to.” - -Ken rushed into the hall. He searched frantically and at last he found -under the stairs a bundle of rags evidently soaked in gasoline or -kerosene, in flames. The wall and the back of the stairs were already -beginning to smolder. By some luck, there happened to be a pail of -dirty water at the other end of the hall. He grabbed it and dashed -the water on the fire. The flames were out in a moment. With the rags -soaking wet, he wiped it across the smoldering wood. - -Holding on to the rags, he ran outside and looked at the number of the -building. At the curb he found a sheet of newspaper which he wrapped -around the wet rags. And to make sure he did not forget the address, he -wrote it down. - -In the meanwhile, Paul had approached the man and took him under the -arm. “Do you mind if I walk along with you?” he asked. - -“Oh, no, no. No, not at all.” - -“My name is Paul. What is yours?” - -“Who, me? I have no name.” - -“That’s too bad,” said Paul. “I thought everybody had a name.” - -“Everybody except I,” was the answer. - -Paul was at a loss what to do or say. On the spur of the moment, he -remarked, “There is a man who wants to see you. I will take you to him.” - -“That is very nice of you. Where is he?” - -“Straight ahead, down Main Street.” - -“That’s fine. Let’s hurry, because I don’t want to keep him waiting. I -don’t like to keep people waiting.” - -Just then Ken came running up and took the man by the other arm. -Together they led the man to police headquarters and into the -detectives’ room. Walters was there and as soon as he saw the boys and -the man, he jumped to his feet. “Where did you get him?” he cried. - -“He was looking for you,” said Ken, “so we thought we would bring him -here.” - -“Stop kidding, will you, and tell me what it’s all about?” demanded the -detective. - -The man stood there very innocently looking from one to the other. Ken -removed the covering of paper from the rags and showed it to Walters. -Paul said, “We saw him come out of the hall of a building....” - -“357 South Main Street is the correct address,” said Ken, interrupting. -“That bunch of rags was in flames and the wall and the stairs were -already beginning to smolder.” - -“And so we brought him here,” concluded Paul. - -The detective turned to the man. “What’s your name?” he demanded. - -The man shrugged his shoulders and opened his arms in a gesture of -complete ignorance. “Did you try to start a fire just before at 357 -South Main Street?” the detective again asked. - -But the man kept his mouth shut, grinned and would say nothing. The -detective was growing red in the face. Paul said, “You ought to have -him examined by a doctor.” - -“Where do you live?” asked Walters. - -But questioning him was futile and a waste of breath and effort. The -man either would not, could not, or just did not understand enough to -answer the simple questions. Walters searched him. In his right coat -pocket was found a bunch of white cards. Paul and the detective took -out their cards and compared them to the bunch. “Identical,” muttered -Walters. - -“Hooray!” cried Ken. “The white card mystery is solved.” - -The man grinned sheepishly. Walters continued searching him. In the -other pockets they found more white cards, various odds and ends such -as pieces of string, a pocket knife, several pencils, shoe strings and -an empty wallet with a name and address. Paul read, “Jerome Walsh, 321 -Applebury Street.” - -“Let’s run down there,” suggested Ken. - -The detective nodded. “Yes, we’ll do that. First I will have him -examined by a doctor.” - -Walters took the man by the arm and led him out. The boys waited and -two minutes later he returned. “What did you do with him?” asked Ken. - -“I gave him over to one of the men to take care of. Let’s go,” said -Walters. - -They went to the back of the building and got into a police car. Ken -plopped into the rear seat and began to laugh uproariously. “What’s the -joke?” asked the detective. - -“I don’t think you will appreciate it.” - -“Take a chance, let’s hear it.” - -“What I was laughing at,” said Ken, “is how much it helps when you keep -your eyes open.” - -“Aw, keep your mouth shut,” cried the detective, and the next moment he -was himself enjoying the humor of it. - -The car sped through the town and soon pulled up in front of 321 -Applebury Street. It was a boarding house. Walters rang the bell and a -middle aged woman answered the door. “Does a man by the name of Jerome -Walsh live here?” asked the detective. - -“Why, yes,” answered the woman hesitantly. “He isn’t in just now, -though.” - -Walters showed his badge and told her who he was. “That’s all right,” -he said. “Take us up to his room.” - -“Did he do anything wrong?” asked the woman. - -“We just want to search his room,” said Walters. - -“And he is such a harmless man,” mused the woman. - -They followed the woman to the second floor and she showed them into -a small, neatly kept room. The detective and the boys entered. On a -little table were several books. Paul examined them. “Look,” he cried, -“Professor Link’s book.” - -Ken grabbed the volume and looked at it. Inside was the professor’s -name. “So,” he mumbled, “the mystery at last is solved.” - -The detective searched the room and found many small items that had -been no doubt stolen from any number of places. Turning to the woman, -he asked, “What do you know about this man, Jerome Walsh?” - -“I don’t know anything about him,” she answered meekly. “He has been -boarding with me for almost a year. Once a month a man comes, I think -it is his brother, and pays for his room and board. Tell me, Mister -detective, did Mr. Walsh do anything wrong?” - -“Plenty,” was the answer. “Is there supposed to be something wrong with -him mentally?” - -“I don’t know,” the woman replied. “Every once in a while he acts -strangely, but as far as I know, he is harmless.” - -“What sort of strange things would he do?” asked Paul. - -“Well, he would sometimes talk to himself, sometimes he would go out -walking all night long—little things like that.” - -The detective said, “The next time this man, his brother or whoever -he is, comes to pay his room and board, I want you to call me. In the -meanwhile, Mr. Walsh is not coming back here any more.” - -“But what did he do?” the woman asked frantically. - -“He tried to set a house on fire and he stole an automobile this -morning,” the detective told her. - -“Which is not all,” added Paul. “Do you have the address of this man -who visits him?” - -“Why, yes, I think I do; I think I must have it somewhere downstairs.” - -“Let’s go down, then,” said Walters. - -Downstairs, the woman searched for about ten minutes until at last -she found the address and gave it to the detective. “Very good,” he -muttered. “We will send for him.” - -They left. Ken turned to Paul and said, “Let’s run over to Jack’s and -tell him. He’ll drop dead when he hears it.” - -“Yes,” said Paul, “let’s do that.” - -Walters dropped them off in front of the Stormways home. Paul waved and -called, “So long, Walters.” - -“So long.” - -“Keep your eyes open,” called Ken. - -The detective smiled. “And you watch yourself,” he called back and -drove off. - -The two boys ran into the house, looking for their friend. Mrs. -Stormways told them that he was at the garage and they ran out of the -house again. Jack waved to them, his hands grimy with grease; he was -working on his dad’s car. “Hey!” cried Ken, “the mystery has been -broken wide open.” - -“You mean....” - -Jack stared at his friends with his mouth open. He couldn’t believe it. -Paul smiled and said, “That’s right, the mystery is solved.” - -“And without me,” moaned Jack, “How could you finish up the whole thing -without me! Tell me all about it.” - -The boys related how it had all happened. Jack looked very miserable as -he listened to the story. His great regret was that he had not been in -on the exciting final clearing-up of the mystery. - -“It’s all right Jack, next week we’ll start college and we’ll forget -all about the Mr. Grey’s and white cards and counterfeiters. We’ll have -to put our minds on how to learn all of the hard subjects we’re going -to take.” Paul tried to be consoling. - -“Yes, Jack, and you can start solving a mystery as soon as we get -there. The mystery I mean is this—how are we going to work hard and -get good grades, and still play football, go to dances and have a good -time? Figuring that out will give you a good tough sleuthing job,” Ken -said. - -Jack was quite cheerful by now. - -“If we can have as good a time at college together as we have here in -Stanhope,” he said, “We will be lucky. But I’m rather tired of summer -and the town. I get a thrill every time I think of getting on the train -Monday.” - -“So do I,” Ken added. “We’ve had plenty of adventures since the troop -has been together, and we will have plenty more.” - -“Sure we will,” said Paul, “And I’m going home and help my mother pack -my clothes right now. If I don’t watch her she will only put in my best -clothes and leave out things like football sweaters and old pants.” - -And with that all three boys started eagerly for home. - - - - - -End of Project Gutenberg's The Banner Boy Scouts Mystery, by George A. Warren - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS MYSTERY *** - -***** This file should be named 52809-0.txt or 52809-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/2/8/0/52809/ - -Produced by Giovanni Fini, Roger Frank and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/52809-0.zip b/old/52809-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ff040ef..0000000 --- a/old/52809-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52809-h.zip b/old/52809-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2bf2fcc..0000000 --- a/old/52809-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52809-h/52809-h.htm b/old/52809-h/52809-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 86409d8..0000000 --- a/old/52809-h/52809-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9766 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> - <head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> - <title> - The Project Gutenberg eBook of Banner Boy Scouts Mystery, by George A. Warren. - </title> - - <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> - <style type="text/css"> - -body {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} -div.limit {max-width: 35em; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} -div.chapter {page-break-before: always;} -.vh {visibility: hidden;} -.bord1 {border: double 8px; color: black; margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 5%;} -.bord2 {border: solid 1px; color: black; margin: 0.5em; padding: 1em;} -.font1 {font: 1em "Monotype Corsiva", serif;} - - - h1,h2 {text-align: center; clear: both;} - -p {margin-top: 0.2em; text-align: justify; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 1.5em;} -.pc {text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} -.pc1 {margin-top: 1em; text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} -.pc2 {margin-top: 2em; text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} -.pc4 {margin-top: 4em; text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} -.pch {margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 1.5em; font-size: 140%; text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} -.ptn {margin-top: 0.3em; text-indent: -1em; margin-left: 2%;} - -.p1 {margin-top: 1em;} -.p4 {margin-top: 4em;} - -.small {font-size: 75%;} -.reduct {font-size: 90%;} -.mid {font-size: 125%;} -.large {font-size: 150%;} -.elarge {font-size: 175%;} -.xlarge {font-size: 200%;} -.star {font-size: 400%;} - -hr {width: 33%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em; margin-left: 33.5%; margin-right: 33.5%; clear: both;} -hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;} -hr.d1 {width: 15%; margin-left: 42.5%; margin-right: 42.5%; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 4em;} - -table { margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} - - .tdl1 {text-align: left; vertical-align: top; padding-left: 0.5em;} - .tdl2 {text-align: left; vertical-align: top;} - .tdr1 {text-align: right; vertical-align: bottom; width: 1em;} - -#toc {width: 70%; font-size: 90%; line-height: 1em; margin-top: 1em;} - -.pagenum { /* visibility: hidden; */ position: absolute; left: 94%; color: gray; - font-size: smaller; text-align: right; text-indent: 0em; font-style: normal; font-weight: normal;} - -.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - -.figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;} - -.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA; color: black; font-size:smaller; padding:0.5em; margin-bottom:5em; font-family:sans-serif, serif; } - </style> - </head> -<body> - - -<pre> - -Project Gutenberg's The Banner Boy Scouts Mystery, by George A. Warren - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - - - -Title: The Banner Boy Scouts Mystery - -Author: George A. Warren - -Release Date: August 15, 2016 [EBook #52809] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS MYSTERY *** - - - - -Produced by Giovanni Fini, Roger Frank and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - -</pre> - -<div class="limit"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<div class="transnote p4"> -<p class="pc large">TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:</p> -<p class="ptn">—Obvious print and punctuation errors were corrected.</p> -<p class="ptn">—The transcriber of this project created the book -cover image using the front cover of the original book. -The image is placed in the public domain.</p> -</div></div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[3]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p class="pc4 xlarge">BANNER BOY SCOUTS<br /> -MYSTERY</p> - -<hr class="d1" /> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[4]</a></span></p> -<p> </p> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[5]</a></span></p> - -<div class="bord1"> -<div class="bord2"> - -<h1><span class="large">THE BANNER<br /> -BOY SCOUTS<br /> -MYSTERY</span></h1> - -<p class="pc2 elarge font1"><i>By</i></p> - -<p class="pc2 elarge">GEORGE A. WARREN</p> - -<p class="pc star">☆</p> - -<p class="pc4 mid">THE WORLD SYNDICATE<br /> -PUBLISHING<span class="vh">–.</span>COMPANY<br /> -<span class="small">CLEVELAND<span class="vh">.————</span>NEW YORK</span></p> -</div></div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[6]</a></span></p> - -<p class="pc4 reduct"><i> -Published 1937 by<br /> -The World Syndicate Publishing Co.</i></p> - -<div class="figcenter"> - <img src="images/logo.jpg" width="200" height="258" - alt="" - title="" /> -</div> - -<p class="pc reduct"><i>Printed in the United States of America</i></p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[7]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CONTENTS</h2> - -<table id="toc" summary="cont"> - - <tr> - <td colspan="2" class="tdl2"><span class="small">CHAPTER</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><span class="small">PAGE</span></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">I</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Lost</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_9">9</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">II</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Fire!</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_23">23</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">III</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Paul Looks Into the Matter</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_28">28</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">IV</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Detectives</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_36">36</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">V</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">A Suspicious Individual</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_44">44</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">VI</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">The Spy</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_53">53</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">VII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">The Robbery</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_66">66</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">VIII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Encounter</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_73">73</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">IX</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Who Is Mr. Grey?</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_81">81</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">X</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Stumped!</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_90">90</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XI</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">A Hunch</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_97">97</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">A Bump on the Head</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_105">105</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XIII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Discovery</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_113">113</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XIV</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">A New Turn of Events</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_122">122</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XV</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Following Up Their Clues</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_131">131</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XVI</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Paul Gets Into Trouble</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_138">138</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XVII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Parental Admonitions</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_149">149</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XVIII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">False Alarm!</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_156">156</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XIX</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Captured!</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_163">163</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XX</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Escape!</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_172">172</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XXI</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Convincing the Police</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_178">178</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XXII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Mr. Grey</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_191">191</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XXIII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Paul Helps Out</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_197">197</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XXIV</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Battle</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_204">204</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XXV</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Into the Lake</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_210">210</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XXVI</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Trouble at Home</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_218">218</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XXVII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Mystery of the White Card</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_229">229</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XXVIII</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Again the White Card</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_237">237</a></td> - </tr> - - <tr> - <td class="tdr1">XXIX</td> - <td class="tdl1"><span class="smcap">Mystery Solved</span></td> - <td class="tdr1"><a href="#Page_243">243</a></td> - </tr> - -</table> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[8]</a></span></p> -<p> </p> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[9]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p class="pc4 xlarge">BANNER BOY SCOUTS<br /> -MYSTERY</p> - -<hr class="d1" /> - -<h2>CHAPTER I</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Lost</span></p> - -<p>“Ken! Ken Armstrong! Dinner is ready.”</p> - -<p>“I’m coming, Mother,” he called from his -room upstairs.</p> - -<p>Hurriedly he finished brushing his hair and -raced downstairs to the dining room. His father -was already at the table and waiting for the children -to take their places. Mrs. Armstrong in the -meanwhile was adding the finishing touches in -setting the table. “Before you sit down, Ken,” his -mother told him, “will you please go out and call -Betty. She must be outside somewhere playing.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, Mother.”</p> - -<p>Ken obeyed and went outside to look for his -younger sister, who was five years old. It was a -day in the latter part of August, warm, clear. -Stepping out on the porch, he called out, “Betty! -Betty!”</p> - -<p>There was no answer. Ken looked in the yard, -then in the garage where she sometimes climbed -into the back of the car and amused herself playing -with her doll. But she was not there either. -Ken walked across the street and rang the Smiths’ -doorbell. Mrs. Smith herself answered and Ken -asked, “Is Betty here, Mrs. Smith?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span></p> - -<p>She shook her head. “No,” she answered. “She -was playing with my little Helen until about an -hour ago, when she left.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you,” Ken said and walked away. On -the sidewalk, he paused to think of all the places -where she might be. Ken walked further down the -street and stopped at the Morrison home. Paul -answered the doorbell. “Hello, Ken,” he called.</p> - -<p>“Hello, Paul. Is Betty here playing with your -little brother?”</p> - -<p>“Why, no, Ken. Pete has been at the park all -day and has just returned.”</p> - -<p>“That’s strange,” muttered Ken.</p> - -<p>“What’s strange?”</p> - -<p>“I can’t seem to find her.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, you’ll find her,” Paul assured his friend. -“She may be playing with little Karliner across -the street.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right. I didn’t think of it. Thanks, -Paul.”</p> - -<p>“So long, Ken. Don’t forget the meeting -tonight.”</p> - -<p>“I won’t,” Ken called back over his shoulder. -He went across the street to the Karliner home -and rang the doorbell. Mrs. Karliner opened the -door. “Is Betty here?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“No,” answered the youthful woman. “Betty -and Karl had a childish quarrel this morning and -they quit playing together.”</p> - -<p>“Until tomorrow,” remarked Ken, laughing.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Yes, no matter how much they quarrel the -children always come together again,” she said, -also laughing.</p> - -<p>“And it is a good thing they do,” added the -boy.</p> - -<p>“Yes. And in that respect, grown ups would do -well to take after children.”</p> - -<p>“You are right, Mrs. Karliner.” Ken edged -away from the doorway. “You will excuse me, but -I have to find Betty.”</p> - -<p>The woman smiled and closed the door. Ken -walked back toward his own house. He was puzzled -and couldn’t think where else his younger -sister might be. Usually she was somewhere in -the neighborhood. If she wasn’t in her own yard, -she could always be found either at the Morrisons, -the Smiths or the Karliners. But today she wasn’t -at any one of those places. As he entered his own -yard, Ken thought of one other place where she -might be. Around the corner was a small park -where Mrs. Armstrong very often took the child -to play. Perhaps she had gone there with some -other child. Ken thought he better run over there -in a hurry before his mother became worried. -However, there were only a few children there -because it was dinner time. And no Betty. He -walked through the playground twice. No sign -of his sister.</p> - -<p>For the first time, Ken became anxious. Of -course, she was not lost, he thought to himself.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span> -But where could she be? Slowly he walked home -without coming to any definite opinion. Stepping -onto the porch noiselessly, he hesitated to enter -the house. If he told his mother he could not find -Betty, she might become frightened. He conceived -another idea. Walking around to the side of the -house, he peeked through the window into the -dining room. Seeing that his mother was not -there, he knocked on the window and motioned -for his father to come outside. Mr. Armstrong -came out onto the porch. “What’s the trouble, -Ken?” he asked.</p> - -<p>The boy tried hard not to look anxious. “Dad, -I can’t seem to find Betty,” he whispered.</p> - -<p>Mr. Armstrong was a tall, heavy set man. He -tugged at his close cropped mustache and muttered, -“You can’t seem to find her, eh? Did you -look everywhere?”</p> - -<p>“I did.”</p> - -<p>“At the Morrisons?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. I was also at the Smiths, the Karliners -and at the park, Dad. She was not at any one of -those places.”</p> - -<p>“Hmm!” mused Mr. Armstrong. “She must be -somewhere around, Ken. Let us first search the -yard thoroughly.”</p> - -<p>Together they looked over the yard and then -the garage. But the child was not there. Finally -they stopped their search. “You say that you<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span> -were to the park, at the Morrisons, the Smiths, -the Karliners?” asked Mr. Armstrong.</p> - -<p>“Yes, Dad.”</p> - -<p>“Can you think of anywhere else she might be? -Do you know of any other child she occasionally -plays with?”</p> - -<p>Just then Mrs. Armstrong came out onto the -porch and called, “Ken, John, what are you doing -out here when you are supposed to be at the dinner -table? And where is Betty?”</p> - -<p>Mr. Armstrong walked slowly over to his wife -and said, “Now, Edna, don’t you become upset. -It seems that Betty is nowhere where she usually -plays. Do you know of any other child she sometimes -plays with and with whom she might be -now?”</p> - -<p>Mrs. Armstrong became very pale. “Were you -to the Karliners, Ken?” she queried anxiously.</p> - -<p>“Yes, mother.”</p> - -<p>“Now don’t you become alarmed, Edna. The -child is somewhere around. But she may have -walked off alone somewhere or she might be playing -at some house.”</p> - -<p>“Were you to the Johnsons?” Mrs. Armstrong -asked. Ken shook his head. “Then run over and -see. And if she is not there, stop in at the -McKinlys.”</p> - -<p>Ken was off at a run. The Johnson home was -at the end of the street. Junior himself opened<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span> -the door and Ken bent down to question the -child. “Is Betty here?” he asked.</p> - -<p>The little boy shook his head and muttered, -“Nah.” Mrs. Johnson came to the door and he -asked her the same question. “Why, no,” she -replied. “She never comes. I would like very much -for her to come and play with Junior, but she -never does. I guess it is a little too far away for -her.”</p> - -<p>Ken was anxious to be off. “Yes, I guess so,” -he answered. “Excuse me.” And he was off.</p> - -<p>The McKinly home was across the street. But -she was not there either. Ken walked away deeply -concerned. Returning home he found his parents -awaiting him, their faces drawn and worried. At -the news that the child was neither at the Johnsons -nor the McKinlys, Mrs. Armstrong clenched -her fingers. Her husband stood up. “She must -have walked off somewhere,” he said. “I’ll notify -the police and have them search for her.”</p> - -<p>“Wait a minute, Dad,” cried Ken. “Perhaps -she is in her room.”</p> - -<p>Without losing a second, he dashed up the -stairs. A minute later he was coming down slowly. -By the expression on his face the parents could -tell that she was not in her room. Mr. Armstrong -walked to the foyer where the telephone was and -they could hear him calling the police and giving -a detailed description of the child. She was five -years old, blonde hair and blue eyes, weighed between<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span> -forty-five and fifty pounds and was about -twenty-six or twenty-seven inches tall. His task -completed, he returned to the dining room. He -put an arm around his wife’s shoulder and said, -“Now, don’t worry, Edna. The child most likely -has walked off by herself and she will be found. -You will have her again in half an hour.”</p> - -<p>Ken jumped out of his chair and dashed out -of the house. He ran over to the Morrison home -and called Paul. Drawing his friend aside, he -whispered, “Paul, call the troop together. We cannot -find Betty and we have to make a search for -her.”</p> - -<p>“That’s too bad,” replied Paul. “I’m sure no -harm has come to her and we will find her.”</p> - -<p>The two boys walked off to call the boys together. -Some of the Boy Scouts lived in the immediate -neighborhood while the others were reached -by telephone. Practically every one of them knew -Betty by sight, but just to make sure a description -of her was passed around. Within ten minutes the -entire Stanhope Troop No. 1 was out on the -streets and searching for the child. In the meanwhile -the police had also sent out an alarm and -were combing the town to find Betty. The news -had spread and many townspeople had joined in -the search.</p> - -<p>For the next half hour every nook and corner -of the town was ransacked. Many a little girl -was stopped and asked if her name was Betty<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span> -Armstrong. But always it was a shake of the head -and the word no. Suddenly the news spread that -the search was off and that the child was safely -home. Ken, who was with Paul, sprinted home. -The two boys burst into the house and found -Betty sitting very calmly at the table having -her dinner. Quite innocently she shook a finger -a her big brother and scolded him. “You’re late,” -she told him. “Mama is angry if you come late -for dinner.”</p> - -<p>The two boys, hot and out of breath as they -were, couldn’t resist laughing at the innocent -humor of the child. “Where were you?” Ken -demanded.</p> - -<p>Just then Mr. Armstrong came in. Seeing his -missing child at the table, he sighed with relief. -Mrs. Armstrong came in from the kitchen and -said, “You men better have your dinner right -away, before it gets spoiled.”</p> - -<p>Paul moved away, saying, “I will wait for you -upstairs, Ken, in your room.”</p> - -<p>“Jack is also upstairs,” mentioned Mrs. Armstrong. -“He found the child and brought her -home.”</p> - -<p>Paul walked upstairs while Mr. Armstrong -turned to his wife and asked, “Where did he find -her?”</p> - -<p>“On Leonard Street.”</p> - -<p>“So far away!” exclaimed Ken. “Leonard -Street is at the edge of the town.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“What was she doing there?” asked Mr. -Armstrong.</p> - -<p>“Who knows?” his wife exclaimed.</p> - -<p>Ken turned to his younger sister. “What were -you doing so far away from home?” he demanded.</p> - -<p>“Don’t bother the child now,” asserted his -mother. “Let us eat now. You can ask her all the -questions you want later or tomorrow.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, Mother.”</p> - -<p>The family settled down to their meal and for -the present tried to forget the anxiety and worry -the child had caused them.</p> - -<p>As soon as he could get away from the table, -Ken did so and raced upstairs. Dashing into his -room, he called out, “Hello, Jack.”</p> - -<p>“Hello, Ken. I hear Betty gave you a bad -scare.”</p> - -<p>“And how!” added Paul. “The only ones we did -not have searching for her were the marines, and -only because there are none in Stanhope.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, that is just what I want to ask you about, -Jack. How did you come to find her?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“I was out that way visiting Bud Menninger. -You know him, don’t you, Ken?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, he is the fellow who wants to join our -troop, isn’t he?”</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” answered Jack. “Well, I was -riding home on my bicycle when I happened to -notice Betty walking along, all by herself. I was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span> -so surprised, I wouldn’t believe my eyes at first. -I couldn’t imagine what she would be doing so -far away from home. At any rate, I jumped off -my bike and approached her and then I saw that -it was really her. She was sucking a large peppermint -stick.”</p> - -<p>“Sucking a peppermint stick!” exclaimed Ken. -“Who gave it to her?”</p> - -<p>“That is just the point. I asked her and she -replied that a man gave it to her.”</p> - -<p>“A man!—”</p> - -<p>Paul interrupted. “Don’t interrupt, Ken,” he -said. “Listen to the rest of the story. It is mighty -interesting.”</p> - -<p>“All right, I won’t interrupt. Go on.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I questioned her a little more,” continued -Jack, “and she told me that she was walking -home from the Smiths when a man stopped -her and asked if she wanted some candy. Like a -child, she couldn’t refuse. So he took her by the -hand and he bought her that peppermint stick -she was sucking.”</p> - -<p>“Then what?” Ken asked eagerly.</p> - -<p>“From further questioning, it seems that after -he bought her the candy, they just kept on walking. -I looked her over closely and saw that she -was not all frightened or hurt in any way. So it -seems that the man who took her walking, did -not harm her in the least.”</p> - -<p>“But how come he left her at the edge of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span> -town all by herself. A man must be crazy to do -a thing like that.”</p> - -<p>“Now that is a clue,” spoke up Paul. “An ordinary -man would not do a thing like that.”</p> - -<p>“Clue!” exclaimed Ken, surprised. “What sort -of clue? What are you talking about?”</p> - -<p>“Let me finish,” urged Jack. “As I was talking -to her, I noticed that she kept one hand behind -her back. I asked her why and she just shrugged -her shoulders. I looked and I saw that she was -clutching a card in her little fist. I asked where -she got it and she told me that the man gave it -to her before he left her. I asked her to give it to -me and she did. Here it is.”</p> - -<p>Jack held up the white card, three inches by -two inches. The boys huddled together, examining -it. “Why, it is just a plain, blank, white card!” -exclaimed Ken.</p> - -<p>“That’s right. But what is the meaning of it?” -asked Jack.</p> - -<p>There was no answer. The three boys were -mystified. The whole story sounded very odd and -the card made it all the more perplexing. “From -all the evidence at hand,” remarked Paul, “I am -convinced that there must be something wrong -with the man who walked off with the child.”</p> - -<p>“But that’s just it,” exploded Ken. “If there -is something wrong with the man, he must be -found out and put away into an asylum. He can’t<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span> -be permitted to roam the streets and walk away -with children.”</p> - -<p>“And if Paul’s suggestions are correct,” added -Jack, “God knows what other tricks he might -be up to and what damage he may be doing.”</p> - -<p>“Now let’s think this out calmly and logically,” -said Paul. “First did you ask Betty to describe the -man?”</p> - -<p>“I did,” replied Jack. “But all she would say -was that he was tall and very kind to her.”</p> - -<p>“There are many tall men in town. That is no -clue,” said Ken.</p> - -<p>Paul rose. “We certainly have to look into the -matter and see what we can do.”</p> - -<p>“What can we do?” asked Ken. “As far as I -know there are no crazy people in Stanhope and -only a lunatic would do a thing like that.”</p> - -<p>“We have about an hour before the meeting,” -suggested Jack. “Suppose we go down to Leonard -Street and look around.”</p> - -<p>Just then Mr. Armstrong came in. “Hello, -Jack,” he greeted.</p> - -<p>“Hello, Mr. Armstrong.”</p> - -<p>He saw that the boys seemed to be on the verge -of leaving and he said, “I hope I am not keeping -you boys from going on your way.”</p> - -<p>“Well, we were preparing to leave, but—” that -from Ken.</p> - -<p>“I merely want to ask Jack about his finding -Betty.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span></p> - -<p>Jack repeated his story, leaving out the part -about the white card. For a while there was -silence. Mr. Armstrong mused. Finally he said, -“It must have been some man who knows the -family and bought her some candy.”</p> - -<p>“But why should he leave her at the end of the -town to walk back alone,” demanded Ken.</p> - -<p>Mr. Armstrong shrugged his shoulders wearily. -“I can’t understand that myself,” he said. “But -the fact remains that the child was not harmed. -Which leads us to the conclusion that the man -must have been a friend.”</p> - -<p>The boys had no desire to argue with the older -man and so they left it at that. In the street, Ken -asked, “Why did you leave out that part about -the white card, Jack?”</p> - -<p>“I didn’t think it mattered,” was the answer. -“I figured that if I told him about it, he would -give it over to the police, and then it would get -into the newspapers and then everybody would -know about it. And the guilty man, even if he is -crazy, would know better than to do anything to -give himself away. As it is, nobody knows, except -the three of us, and by a little quiet work we may -track the culprit down.”</p> - -<p>“I think you did right,” spoke up Paul.</p> - -<p>“That is to be seen,” added Ken skeptically.</p> - -<p>The boys walked down to Leonard Street and -Jack pointed out the exact spot where he came -upon Betty. The neighborhood was one occupied<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span> -mostly by the poorer people of the town. Of -course, there was nothing to be found in the way -of clues. They walked all around the neighborhood -and noticed the various shacks and empty -lots but did not come across any man that was tall -and kindly looking. At last they decided to give -up the search and go to a meeting of their boy -scout troop, the Red Fox Patrol.</p> - -<p>All the other boys—Nuthin’, The Carberry -twins, William and Wallace, Bobolink, Bluff—were -already there when the three arrived. -Pressed for information, Jack for the third time -re-told his story.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER II</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Fire!</span></p> - -<p>Several days passed and although the boys -had not forgotten the incident, they did nothing -to look for the culprit. The only evidence they -had was the white card and the information that -the man was tall.</p> - -<p>It was about five-thirty and the boys were coming -from the baseball field. Paul and William, -walking ahead, turned into Water Street, and the -rest of the boys followed them. At about the middle -of the street, they suddenly heard the weird -cry, “Fire! Help! Fire!”</p> - -<p>The boys stopped in their tracks and looked -around to find where the cry was coming from. -Paul began to run and the boys followed him. -They came upon a two story frame house. Dense -clouds of smoke came billowing out of the doorway. -Paul turned to the one nearest him, who -happened to be William, and ordered, “Call the -Fire Department! Hurry!”</p> - -<p>William set off at a run. Paul, followed by the -other boys, ran to the back of the house. He cried, -“A couple of you try to find buckets and water. -The others stick around and form a water brigade -until the firemen come.”</p> - -<p>Pushing open the back door, he dashed into the -house. He noticed that the smoke was dense at<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span> -the front door. Just as he turned to run up the -stairs, tongues of flames shot out of the smoke. -The thought came to him that the fire had started -at the front door. But how? Why? At the front -door, of all places.</p> - -<p>He raced upstairs and threw open the first door -that he came upon. No one there. He dashed for -the next room. An old man and woman, in their -late seventies, if not older, were rushing back and -forth, picking up things and dropping them. They -were so bewildered, they did not know what to do. -As Paul dashed in, they rushed at him and clung -to his arms. They were absolutely speechless; they -did nothing but tremble. Paul shook them off and -rushed to the window, threw it open and cried -to the boys below, “Get a ladder! Get a ladder!”</p> - -<p>He looked for the firemen but they had not yet -arrived. Every second seemed to him an hour. He -saw the boys scatter in a frantic search for a ladder. -The five minutes that elapsed to procure a -ladder seemed like an age. At last Bobolink came -running up with a ladder and he placed it under -the window. But it was too short, and Paul cried, -“Get something to stand it on. A box. Anything.”</p> - -<p>Bobolink scurried to find something upon which -to stand the ladder. A minute later he returned -with a soap box. The ladder was stood on the box -and several of the boys supported it. Paul helped -the old woman through the window onto the ladder. -“One of you boys climb up and help her down.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span></p> - -<p>He saw the boys hesitate. Evidently they -thought that the ladder would not hold. In the -meanwhile, the woman, trembling and bewildered, -almost fell from the ladder. Bluff raced up and -directed the woman’s legs, rung by rung. The old -woman at last descended and collapsed in Ken’s -arms. Paul turned to the old man. “Is there anybody -else in the house?” he asked briskly.</p> - -<p>The old man nodded his head vigorously. -“Downstairs,” his trembling lips mumbled. “A -baby in a crib.”</p> - -<p>“Which room?”</p> - -<p>The old man’s teeth chattered so violently that -he could not speak. Again Paul demanded to -know which room the child was in but the old -man could not talk. He almost hurled the man -through the window as he helped him to gain a -footing on the ladder. Without waiting another -instant, Paul dashed out of the room and down -the stairs which by now were crackling with -flames. The last couple of steps were so badly -burned that he had to jump. He scurried about -wildly and at last found what he was searching -for—a pail of water. Dipping his handkerchief -into it, he clasped the wet rag over his mouth and -nostrils. Layers of heavy smoke whirled all about -him. He walked along the wall and listened carefully. -An infant’s wailing came to his ears and he -searched frantically for the door. Finding it at<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span> -last, he threw it open and stepped in quickly. He -brought in with him a dense cloud of smoke. He -moved blindly about the room, directed only by -the cries of the infant. He stumbled against the -crib and clasped the child to him. Smoke entered -his lungs and he began to cough. He felt choked -and was sure he was going to collapse before he -managed to get out. He heard a shattering crash. -Someone had broken the window and he ran to -it. He felt someone take the child from him and -direct him to the broken window. Someone lifted -him almost bodily through the window and the -next moment he fainted.</p> - -<p>About fifteen or twenty minutes after the -alarm had been sent in, the Volunteer Fire Brigade -came clanging down the street. Immediately -they pulled out the hose and set to work. Captain -Bob was there. It was he who had helped Paul -through the window. About a minute after Paul -had been taken out of the house, there was a terrible -shattering and crackling. From all sides of -the house streaks of flame spurted forth, until the -whole building was enveloped in a sheet of flame.</p> - -<p>Paul came to and opened his eyes to find his -father bending over him. “Are you all right, fellow?” -Dr. Morrison asked.</p> - -<p>Paul sat up and blinked his eyes. He nodded. -“I’m all right, Dad. What are you doing here?”</p> - -<p>“Just happened to come along.”</p> - -<p>His father helped him to his feet and he found<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span> -the boys crowding around him. “How do you -feel?” asked William.</p> - -<p>Paul nodded. Ken remarked, “Some fire eater -you are.”</p> - -<p>He smiled and turned to watch the firemen -fighting the blazing structure. “What happened -to the old couple?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“They are all right,” answered Nuthin’. “They -wouldn’t have been, though, if it hadn’t been for -you.”</p> - -<p>Bobolink added, “The child would surely have -perished if not for you, Paul.”</p> - -<p>Just then a policeman came and pushed them -all back. Some moments later the front door fell -in with a shattering thud. The firemen poured -gallons of water into the blaze but it did not seem -to help. The fire ate through the wooden house and -ten minutes later one of the walls collapsed. A -groan rose up from the watching crowd and some -turned their heads away. As the wall collapsed -tongues of flame and dense smoke came shooting -out. Some of the firemen retreated and then returned -to continue their struggle with the blaze.</p> - -<p>Another wall caved in and eventually the roof -of the house came crashing down. Captain Bob -realized that further effort was futile and he -ordered his firemen to just stand around and let -the fire burn itself out. Soon the house was a -heap of ashes and smoldering pieces of wood. The -firemen left and the crowd dispersed.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER III</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Paul Looks Into the Matter</span></p> - -<p>Jack was sitting on the Morrison porch. It was -about eight o’clock in the evening of the same day. -Ken came walking up through the yard. “Hello, -Ken.”</p> - -<p>“Hello, Jack. What are you doing here?”</p> - -<p>“Waiting for Paul.”</p> - -<p>Ken came onto the porch and sat down beside -his friend. “Did Paul call you too?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“That’s right. He told me over the telephone -that he had something important to talk over.”</p> - -<p>“He told me the same thing. I wonder what it -is.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps it is something about the fire.”</p> - -<p>“Well, let’s not guess, but wait for Paul to tell -us instead.”</p> - -<p>Several minutes later, Paul came out. “Hello, -fellows,” he called.</p> - -<p>“Hello, Paul.”</p> - -<p>“Hello, Paul. What is it you have to tell us?” -asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“Let’s go where we will have some privacy,” -answered Paul.</p> - -<p>Paul led them into the garage and the three -boys piled into the back of the car. “Now,” said -Ken, “you can tell us without anyone overhearing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span> -us. Don’t keep us in suspense any longer or we -will collapse of curiosity.”</p> - -<p>“First tell us how you feel,” spoke up Jack. -“Any after effects from the smoke?”</p> - -<p>“I feel perfectly all right,” was the answer. -“Now, this is what I want to talk to you about.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, what is it all about?”—that from Ken.</p> - -<p>“Jack,” began Paul, “do you still have that -white card? You know the one I mean.”</p> - -<p>“Of course. I still have it, certainly. What -about it?”</p> - -<p>“Will you show it to me?”</p> - -<p>Jack began to look through his pockets. Finally -he confessed, “I guess I don’t have it with me. I -must have left it home, in my other coat pocket.”</p> - -<p>“What about the card?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“Only this,” replied Paul gravely. And he -showed them the card. “Is it the same card?” he -asked.</p> - -<p>Jack examined it very closely. “To me it appears -as though it is the very self-same card. How -did you get it?”</p> - -<p>“Now listen closely,” whispered Paul. The -other two boys leaned over. “I rushed down the -burning stairs to find the room in which the child -was. Well, I was groping along the wall with my -hands because I couldn’t see a thing. I came upon -the door and I moved my hand up and down trying -to find the knob when I came upon something -sticking in the doorway. Without thinking any<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span> -further, I grabbed it and shoved it into my -pocket.” Paul paused to add emphasis to his -forthcoming statement. “And that thing was this -card,” he concluded.</p> - -<p>The boys gasped. “This card!” exclaimed Jack.</p> - -<p>“Are you sure?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“Absolutely positive,” asserted Paul.</p> - -<p>“But how did it get there?”</p> - -<p>“That is something I don’t know and which I -would very much like to know.”</p> - -<p>For about a minute the boys sat there in silence, -overcome with amazement. Jack jumped out of -the car. “Come on, fellows,” he called.</p> - -<p>“Where to?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“To my house. I want to find that card.”</p> - -<p>Jack was so excited, he had difficulty in restraining -himself from running. The other boys kept up -with him, walking briskly. At the Stormways -home, Jack rushed up the steps of the porch. -“You wait here,” he called over his shoulder to -his companions.</p> - -<p>Two minutes later he came rushing out of the -doorway. “Here it is,” he cried, waving the white -card.</p> - -<p>The two cards were compared; they were -identical in every respect. “This is getting to be -serious,” whispered Ken.</p> - -<p>“Terribly serious,” added Ken. “We must do -something about it. The man must be absolutely -crazy.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Crazy is not the word,” said Paul. “Dangerous -is more fitting. If he is permitted to roam the -streets without being stopped, only God knows -what damage he will do and what crimes he may -commit.”</p> - -<p>“But what can we do?” Jack questioned anxiously. -“Our suspicions are only a hunch. These -cards may only be an accident.”</p> - -<p>“No,” said Paul, shaking his head. “My opinion -is that this is no accident but the work of a -distorted mind.”</p> - -<p>The boys sat down on the porch. At a loss as to -the meaning of it all, they remained silent. Paul -whispered, “I’ll tell you what we can do, though.”</p> - -<p>“What?”</p> - -<p>“Let’s go over and see Captain Bob.”</p> - -<p>“What for?” queried Ken.</p> - -<p>“I want to ask his opinion on the origin of the -fire.”</p> - -<p>“Well, that won’t hurt any,” remarked Jack.</p> - -<p>The three boys set off. Captain Bob himself -opened the door for them and led them into the -living room. Turning to Paul, the Captain said, -“You are the boy that dashed into the burning -building this afternoon, aren’t you?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but it was really nothing.”</p> - -<p>Captain Bob sat himself down and pointed the -boys to seats. “Well,” he drawled, “you are a -modest boy. But if it hadn’t been for you, the old -folks and the child would have burned to cinders.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span></p> - -<p>“If I had not entered, one of the other boys -would have,” he answered. “We were the first on -the scene, you know.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, so I understand. But what is it I can do -for you boys?”</p> - -<p>Paul leaned forward in his chair. “Captain -Bob,” he said, “we came over to ask you your -opinion on the origin of the fire.”</p> - -<p>“Just what do you want to know?”</p> - -<p>Paul hesitated, not knowing exactly how to put -his question. He said, “What I want to know, -Captain, is whether you think the fire was—er,—an -accident, or whether you think someone -started the fire.”</p> - -<p>“You are asking very serious questions,” replied -Captain, knitting his brows.</p> - -<p>“Yes, I know, but I am very much interested -and—”</p> - -<p>“May I ask why you should be interested?” -asked the old man shrewdly.</p> - -<p>“It’s only because,—er,—when I dashed into -the building, I noticed something very odd about -the fire.”</p> - -<p>“Just what do you mean?”</p> - -<p>“Well, as we ran up to the house, we noticed -smoke pouring out of the front door. I dashed -inside by the back door and then I saw that most -of the smoke and fire seemed to be at the threshold -of the front door. Now that is very odd.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, you are quite right, my boy,” answered<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span> -Captain Bob. “As a matter of fact, the front door -caved in first. However, I came to the fire a little -too late to really judge the cause or origin of the -fire. But it did seem to me that there was something -odd about the whole thing.”</p> - -<p>“Was there anything about the fire that would -lead you to believe that it was an accident or perhaps—er,—otherwise?” -asked Paul, pressing his -point.</p> - -<p>Captain Bob scratched his chin thoughtfully -and said, “My dear boy, you are asking some very -serious questions that may get you into trouble.”</p> - -<p>Paul insisted. “Just the same, would you form -an opinion?”</p> - -<p>“No, I really couldn’t because, as I said before, -I came to the fire too late. I had no chance to -look into the cause of the fire and now that the -house is a heap of ashes, the chances of finding -any clue is very slight. Suppose you tell me your -opinion, my boy.”</p> - -<p>“To be quite frank, Captain, I think that the -fire was started by some pyromaniac.”</p> - -<p>The Captain sat up in his chair. “What makes -you think so?” he demanded suddenly.</p> - -<p>Paul hesitated. He did not want to give himself -away. “Just a hunch,” he replied.</p> - -<p>Captain Bob sank back into his chair. For what -seemed a very long time there was absolute -silence. The Captain seemed to be musing over -something and the boys had nothing more to say.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span> -Paul rose and his friends did likewise. “Thank -you, Captain Bob,” said Paul. “I guess we will be -going now.”</p> - -<p>Escorting them to the door, the Captain said, -“Don’t thank me. I am glad you came.” He hesitated. -“And,—er,—don’t you go around talking -about a pyromaniac, my boy. It may get you into -trouble.”</p> - -<p>“I won’t, Captain,” promised Paul.</p> - -<p>“Goodnight, boys.”</p> - -<p>“Goodnight, Captain Bob.”</p> - -<p>The boys walked along for some few steps in -silence. Ken spoke up. “That talk with the captain -didn’t help much, did it, Paul?”</p> - -<p>“No, very little. But I have now become more -convinced than ever that the fire was the work -of a mentally distorted person.”</p> - -<p>“You count me in on that,” added Jack. “I certainly -agree with you. But what can we do about -it, that is the problem.”</p> - -<p>“Doesn’t seem as if we can do anything for the -present,” muttered Ken.</p> - -<p>“Guess you’re right,” answered Paul thoughtfully. -A moment later he added, “Tomorrow let -us try and obtain a better description of the man -from your sister, Betty, Ken. If she can tell us a -few things on how he looks and the sort of clothes -he wears, that would help a lot.”</p> - -<p>“It certainly would,” agreed Ken. “We will try -it tomorrow.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Yes. In the meanwhile there is nothing else we -can do tonight. So I am for going home,” announced Paul.</p> - -<p>“Same here.”</p> - -<p>“Me too.”</p> - -<p>The boys separated and went home. The following -morning, they met again at Ken’s home. -Taking Betty out into the yard, the boys tried to -get some information from her about the man -who had taken her for a walk and then deserted -her at the end of the town. But the child had already -forgotten him entirely and their efforts -were in vain.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER IV</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Detectives</span></p> - -<p>That afternoon, William went to the Stanhope -Free Public Library to return a book. Walking in -back of the room in search of a good novel, he -came upon Paul hunched over a stack of newspapers. -“What are you up to now, Paul?” he -asked in a whisper.</p> - -<p>“Tell you later.”</p> - -<p>“A mystery, huh?” William joked.</p> - -<p>Paul smiled and waved his friend away. “Leave -me alone now,” he said, “I’ll tell you all about it -later.”</p> - -<p>“Very well.”</p> - -<p>William walked away and Paul returned to his -stack of newspapers. He spent almost three hours -going through the papers of the past two months. -Tired, he decided to stop there. Besides, he was -quite satisfied with the information he had obtained. -He left the library and walked home. On -the way he stopped to call for Ken but did not -find him in. Crossing the street to his own home -he found Jack, Ken and William on the porch -waiting for him. “Well, what is the secret?” -cried William. “Tell us.”</p> - -<p>Paul motioned to the boys to follow him and he -led them to the garage where they would be assured<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span> -of privacy. The boys found boxes on which -to sit and they gathered around Paul. “Well, what -is it?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“I have spent about three hours in the library -this afternoon,” Paul informed them “and—”</p> - -<p>“William told us that already,” interrupted -Ken.</p> - -<p>“I have been going through the newspapers -for the past weeks,” continued Paul.</p> - -<p>“What for?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“I was looking up the fire reports. In the past -two months there have been four fires, one each -two weeks or so.”</p> - -<p>“What about it?” Jack wanted to know.</p> - -<p>“Can’t you fellows see for yourselves?” asked -Paul, irritated by their indifference. “Don’t you -think that in a small town such as this, a fire every -two weeks is very much above the average?”</p> - -<p>“Say,” cried Ken, “you have hit upon something. -Come to think of it, that is a pretty high -average.”</p> - -<p>“But what has that to do with the story?” -asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“Simply this,” answered Paul. “Under normal -conditions, there would not be such frequent fires. -In other words, all the fires of the past two -months may or may not have been caused -accidentally.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t think yesterday’s fire was an accident?” -questioned William.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span></p> - -<p>“No,” was Paul’s categorical answer.</p> - -<p>William raised his eyebrows in surprise. He -was not acquainted with the facts of the case as -the other boys were. “What therefore is the conclusion?” -asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“It is evident,” returned Paul. “For the past -two months at least one fire, or more has been -started by a maniac.”</p> - -<p>“This thing is becoming worse and worse,” -commented Ken.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” Paul said gravely, “the situation is very -serious and it is up to us to do something.”</p> - -<p>“Why is it up to us?” asked William. But just -as soon as the words were out of his mouth, he -knew the answer.</p> - -<p>“Because,” was Paul’s answer, “we are the -only ones who seem to be acquainted with the -situation and our suspicions are quite definite.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t you think it might be wise to acquaint -the police with our suspicions?” inquired Ken.</p> - -<p>“I am against doing anything of the sort,” -stated Jack. “If we do that, there will be a public -scandal. It will be in every newspaper in town and -the culprit, whoever he is, will become wary. As -it is, we may come upon him by surprise.”</p> - -<p>“I agree absolutely,” commented Paul.</p> - -<p>“What is our job going to be?” asked William, -eager to do something as soon as possible.</p> - -<p>“For the present there is only one thing we can -do,” said Paul. “We will talk the whole matter<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span> -over with the boys of the patrol. We are all pretty -close friends and we can act as a group. The thing -we have to insist upon is secrecy on the part of all -the boys and to be always on guard.”</p> - -<p>“That alone is not enough,” added William. “I -suggest that we also have the boys patrolling the -streets, so that in case of anything, they will be -Johnny-on-the-spot.”</p> - -<p>“That is something we will have to discuss with -the rest of the boys,” asserted Paul. “In the -meanwhile, suppose we notify the fellows to come -to a meeting tonight after supper. Do you think -it is all right?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, I think that is a very good idea,” commented -William. The other boys agreed and it -was decided to meet in Ken’s garage.</p> - -<p>That evening at about seven, the boys began to -congregate in Ken’s garage. They came by one’s -and two’s. Fifteen minutes later they were all -there except Jack. The boys were curious as to -the reason for the meeting and they wanted to -start without waiting for the missing member but -Paul refused. He suggested that someone run -over to call Jack. Bluff volunteered. They waited -about five minutes and the messenger returned -saying that Jack was not home. Paul remarked, “I -wonder where he could have gone?”</p> - -<p>Nuthin’ said, “He will most likely be here any -minute. In the meanwhile let’s get going.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, let’s do that,” echoed Wallace.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span></p> - -<p>Urged on by the other boys, Paul finally consented -and the meeting was called to order. Paul -then outlined the situation for them, told them -the pros and cons of the problem and in conclusion -said, “There is one more thing I want to tell you. -In going through the newspaper files for information -on the fire reports, I noticed that there -seemed to be about two weeks difference between -fires. In other words, since the last fire was yesterday, -we have about two weeks in which to act. -The thing for us to do now is not to talk about it -to anyone outside of this group and to be always -on guard. If we don’t track this maniac down, -God knows what damage he is liable to do.”</p> - -<p>For a short while there was silence. Nuthin’ -grinned and remarked, “What you want us to do, -Paul, is for us to become detectives.”</p> - -<p>Nuthin’ meant it as a joke but Paul took it seriously. -“That is just what I want you to do,” he -asserted gravely. “We must all become detectives -and find this man.”</p> - -<p>“But the information we have is so slight. We -really have no clues to work on,” protested Bobolink.</p> - -<p>“That is very true,” replied Paul, “but we must -do the best we can.”</p> - -<p>A little later, the meeting was officially adjourned, -but no boy ventured to leave. Their curiosity -was aroused by Jack’s not coming to the -meeting and they waited around. Paul felt anxious,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span> -though he had no reason to be. To Ken, who -was sitting beside him, he whispered, “I wonder -what happened to Jack!”</p> - -<p>Ken shrugged his shoulders. “I can’t imagine. -He promised to be here. And he is not home -either.”</p> - -<p>“That’s just it,” countered Paul. “The fact -that he is not home implied that he was on the -way over here. But something must have happened -on the way to keep him from coming to the -meeting.”</p> - -<p>“We can go over and see if he is home now.”</p> - -<p>“That is a good idea. Let’s go.”</p> - -<p>Ken and Paul rose and the other boys did likewise. -In a group they walked over to Jack’s house. -Ken went in while all the others remained outside. -A minute later he emerged and motioned that the -missing boy was not home. The boys were disappointed -and a few of them became worried. Bobolink -commented, “This is becoming serious. We -ought to look for him.”</p> - -<p>Paul turned the idea down. “You fellows better -go home,” he said, “and don’t worry. Jack has a -right to go wherever he pleases and if he did not -show up at the meeting, there must be a good reason -for it.”</p> - -<p>“But where could he have gone,” Nuthin’ asked -anxiously. “After all, something may have happened -to him.”</p> - -<p>Paul, though he was anxious himself, made believe<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span> -that there was nothing to worry about and -laughed at the suggestion that something might -have happened to Jack. “Most likely he went to -see someone or something like that,” he remarked -casually. “Nothing serious could have happened -to him.”</p> - -<p>“Besides, he is the sort of fellow who can take -care of himself,” added Ken.</p> - -<p>“And what’s more,” argued Paul again, “we -don’t know where to look for him. And if we -spread an alarm, his folks will become worried -and that is something we certainly don’t want.”</p> - -<p>“No, I guess you are right, Paul,” agreed -Nuthin’.</p> - -<p>Several of the other boys nodded and showed -willingness to agree with Paul’s idea that they all -go home. They walked along as a group until one -by one the boys fell out to go home. Finally only -Paul and Ken were left. The two boys walked -side by side and Paul seemed exceedingly quiet -and preoccupied with his thoughts. Ken hesitated -to break in upon his friend, but finally he asked, -“What are you so quiet and thoughtful about?”</p> - -<p>“I wasn’t really thinking of anything,” the -other replied.</p> - -<p>“We may as well go home, like the others,” -suggested Ken.</p> - -<p>“No, let’s not do that. Suppose we walk down -Main Street a bit. To tell you the truth, I am a -bit worried about Jack.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Worrying won’t help any,” Ken wisely remarked.</p> - -<p>The boys walked down Main Street and then -retraced their steps. At Paul’s house, they silently -sat down on the steps of the porch and remained -like that, neither one uttering a sound.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER V</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">A Suspicious Individual</span></p> - -<p>Now let us see what really happened to Jack. -He left his home with the intention of going to -the meeting. As he walked along, deeply occupied -with his thoughts, he suddenly became conscious -of a certain individual that had just passed. Jack -turned on his heel and stared at the retreating -back of the individual. The man was tall and thin—gaunt; -he wore a cap and a jacket and pants -that hung like sacks upon him. Jack tried to think -what it was about the individual that attracted -his attention and he concluded that it was something -wild about his appearance, about his bearing. -He began to follow the man, sorry that he -did not get a good look at the man’s face.</p> - -<p>Jack went over the situation in his mind. He -wanted to go to the meeting and if he did not -come, the boys might feel badly. On the other -hand, there was something very suspicious about -the person he was following. The man appeared -to be very excited, or anxious; he seemed to be -very much on the alert, turning his head this way -and that way, as though searching for something. -Jack felt sorry that he could not get a good look -at the man’s face. Perhaps he could do it now, he -thought, by walking ahead then walking back toward<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span> -him; or possibly by hiding in some doorway -and obtaining a close view of him as the man -passed. But on second consideration, he thought -it better not to do that. The man might get a good -look at him and remember his face, which would -put him at a disadvantage.</p> - -<p>Jack decided merely to follow and see what -would happen. Twice the man turned around and -looked back; Jack decided to cross over to the -other side of the street. His heart pounded and -he became nervous and excited. He followed, -keeping his eyes glued to the back of the suspicious -character. The man kept shifting his head -in all directions, staring at people, at houses, at -everything; his eyes seemed to bore right into -things.</p> - -<p>The man turned into John Street, usually a -deserted street with only several old houses on it. -Jack quickly removed the light sweater he was -wearing and formed it into a small package under -his arm. If the man had noticed him, the fact that -he now appeared in a white shirt, carrying a package -under his arm, would make the man think him -a different person. The man continued walking -rapidly with Jack hot on his trail. The street was -very poorly lit and Jack was forced to shorten the -distance between the man and himself, though he -still kept to the wrong side of the street. Coming -to a lonely house set on a large plot, the man suddenly -dashed behind the wall. Jack felt his excitement<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span> -increase. He was only sorry that Paul or -one of the boys were not with him; not that he -felt afraid but for the sake of companionship. He -had a weird, creepy feeling to be following a man -on a deserted, dark street.</p> - -<p>Jack kept on walking as though nothing happened. -He made believe that he didn’t see anything -unusual. His head square on his shoulders, -he kept a careful watch out of the corner of his -eye. He saw a large rock on the lot he was passing -and immediately he threw himself behind it. -Looking from the side of his shelter, he watched -the house across the street. Possibly five minutes -passed and nothing happened. To him it seemed -like hours. At last the man he had been following -showed himself at the corner of the house. Warily, -the man stuck his head out and looked in all -directions. In spite of the distance between them, -the man’s wild appearance, his ghostly form outlined -in the dark, made Jack shiver; a cold chill -ran down his spine.</p> - -<p>At last the man came forth and walked away -in the direction from which he had come. Waiting -until he thought it was safe for him to follow, -Jack then rose and sprinted forward until he was -within about five yards of his man, who no longer -shifted his head back and forth wildly but, instead -kept looking straight ahead of him. Jack was glad -of that because it made it easier following.</p> - -<p>At Main Street, the man turned right. Jack followed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span> -and became more convinced that his suspicions -were well founded. Beyond any doubt -there was either something wrong with the man -or else he was a fugitive of some sort, trying to -get away. The man turned into Water Street and -Jack felt a cold chill break out. Instantly it flashed -upon him that the suspicious fire of the previous -day had occurred on Water Street. Was the man -returning to the place of his crime? Or was he on -his way to perpetrate another crime, perhaps set -flames to another house in the same neighborhood?</p> - -<p>His head turned straight ahead of him, the -man walked on briskly. Jack followed. Closer and -closer they came to the house that had burned -down. When they were within about ten yards of -it, the man suddenly stopped in his tracks and -very slowly turned around. In the nick of time, -Jack dashed into a shadow and was out of sight. -The man hesitated and then very slowly approached -the heap of ashes and sticks of wood -that were once a house. Jack hid himself, watching -him closely, wondering what he was up to. Seeing -the man approach the heap of ashes, Jack’s emotions -got so strong that he could barely control -himself. “Easy!” he mumbled to himself. “Take -it easy now!”</p> - -<p>He flattened himself out on the ground and -watched his man who sat down on the bare earth -as though in grief. The man’s shoulders heaved<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span> -and soon Jack heard sobs of genuine sorrow. Jack -could not help feeling sorry for the poor chap. He -wondered what was wrong with him, that might -have caused him to set fire to the house. For by -now, Jack was no longer in any doubt as to the -man’s guilt.</p> - -<p>For some time the man sat there, hunched over, -his body trembling and sobbing bitterly. At last -he got on his knees and crept forward to the heap -of ashes. Picking up a handful, he let the dust -slide through his fingers. Five or six times he repeated -this action. Finally he took out of his -pocket a handkerchief, spread it out on the -ground, and piled several handfuls of ashes on it; -then gathering the ends together, he made a knot -and put the package under his arm. Rising, he -looked around and then walked off in the direction -of Main Street.</p> - -<p>Just as soon as he thought it was safe, Jack was -up and following. What was the most reasonable -thing to do, he tried to figure out. Should he -notify the police? Should he run off and talk it -over with Paul or Ken? Or should he do nothing -and just follow. Unable to determine what would -be his most reasonable action, he continued to -follow the man and thought of nothing else.</p> - -<p>A block before Main Street, he saw his man -suddenly disappear into the side street. Becoming -frantic at the thought of losing him, Jack sprinted -up to the corner. He saw his man flattening out<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span> -against the wall of the corner building. Jack hid -behind a parked car. Was the man aware of being -followed? Jack tried to think whether he had at -any moment shown himself. His deliberations -were cut short by the man stepping forth again -and continuing on his way. Pursuer and pursued -turned left on Main Street. The man increased his -pace, stretching out his long legs. However, Jack -had no difficulty in following. Clear across the -town the two went, back to John Street into which -the man turned. Jack hesitated for a second before -crossing the street. There was something funny -about being led back to this deserted street. Could -it be possible that he was being led into a trap of -some sort? Chucking his anxiety and doubt to the -winds, he crossed the street to follow, but by then -the man had disappeared. He walked up and -down the street but the man did not return.</p> - -<p>Jack returned to Main Street. “Whew!” He -wiped the perspiration off his brow. That was -some night, some chase, he thought to himself. -The next moment he felt a pang of regret for -having lost track of his man. However, it could -not be helped and it would be useless to worry -over it. Now that he had a pretty good picture of -the individual—even though he had not seen the -face—Jack felt certain that he would come upon -him again. In the meanwhile he thought it best to -go over and see Paul.</p> - -<p>Paul and Ken were sitting on the steps of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span> -porch. Side by side, in silence, each mused over -his thoughts. Paul noticed someone approach the -gate. The next moment he was on his feet and -running to meet his chum. “Jack!” he cried, -“where have you been?”</p> - -<p>Ken also ran up. “Hey!” he spoke harshly, -“you had us in stitches. What is the idea of disappearing -like that and where have you been?”</p> - -<p>Jack smiled. “I am sorry I had you fellows -worried,” he said. “But wait until I tell you what -happened to me.”</p> - -<p>“What?” demanded Paul impatiently.</p> - -<p>“Let’s sit down first; I’m tired.”</p> - -<p>The boys sat down at the rear of the porch, so -as not to be disturbed. Jack told his story and -Paul and Ken listened gravely, interrupting every -once in a while for some detailed information. -They sat so closely together, listened so attentively -to the narrative, that an outsider seeing -them would have taken them for conspirators. In -a sense they were that: they were conspiring on -how to capture and rid the neighborhood of a -maniac. When Jack had at last concluded, Ken -let out a long whistle. Paul whispered, “That -proves all my suspicions.”</p> - -<p>“Wait a minute,” said Ken. “Let’s re-consider -the whole situation. Both of you seem to have the -impression that the man is a maniac, crazy. But -how do you know that he didn’t contrive the whole -thing just to put on a show for Jack’s sake? How<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span> -do you know what the man was up to? He might -have realized that he was being followed and to -mislead Jack, he performed a mighty interesting -show. We don’t know whether this man is guilty -of burning down that house and before we are -sure of it, let’s not pass judgement.”</p> - -<p>There was silence. Those statements provided -plenty of food for thought and all three of them -knitted their brows. Paul said, “What you say -is true, Ken. Of course, we must not pass judgement -hastily. However, somehow I feel that my -suspicions are correct.”</p> - -<p>Jack nodded. “I feel the same way about it,” -he offered as his opinion.</p> - -<p>“At any rate,” argued Ken, “let’s wait and see. -You say that you would recognize him if you saw -him again—”</p> - -<p>“Absolutely,” asserted Jack interrupting. “I -could pick him out of a million men.”</p> - -<p>“Very well, then. In that case, we will watch -out for him. In the meanwhile, I suggest that the -first thing tomorrow morning we go over to -Water Street and examine the place. Perhaps we -will find some sort of clue, his footprints if nothing -else.”</p> - -<p>“It’s too bad we can’t go there tonight,” said -Jack.</p> - -<p>“No. For one thing, it is too late. And secondly -if someone noticed us there tonight, we would be<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span> -under suspicion. And that would make everything -perfect.”</p> - -<p>“That’s settled, then,” remarked Ken as he -rose. “I am going home. Coming, Jack?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. Goodnight, Paul.”</p> - -<p>“Goodnight. See you fellows tomorrow -morning.”</p> - -<p>“Righto!”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER VI</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">The Spy</span></p> - -<p>The following morning, immediately after -breakfast, the three boys met and set off for -Water Street. At the scene of the fire, Jack -pointed out the approximate spot where the man -had sat and wept. Searching for footprints, they -found many, most of them indistinct and smudged. -They continued their search for other possible -clues but found none. In the midst of their searchings, -however, Paul looking up thought he saw a -flitting shadow duck behind a fence across the -street. Making believe that he saw nothing, he -bent over and continued his investigations; however, -he had his eyes glued to the spot. And sure -enough, he saw a head protrude. He was amazed. -Was it possible that someone was spying on them? -Was it possible that the person Jack had followed -the evening before had now turned around and -was following them?</p> - -<p>He called the two boys over. Pretending that -he was explaining to them the outline of a footprint, -he told them in a few words, of his discovery. -“Don’t look now,” he warned his friends; -“and don’t both look at the same time.”</p> - -<p>Ken joked, saying, “I hope this thing hasn’t got -you so that you are beginning to see things.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Don’t be funny,” remarked Paul seriously. -“Suppose you fellows move off now. Keep an eye -on the spot I pointed out to you and don’t give -yourselves away.”</p> - -<p>The boys separated and pretended to be absorbed -in their investigations. They kept this up -for about five minutes and then Paul called them -and they walked away. “Well?” he asked anxiously.</p> - -<p>Jack nodded. “You are right,” he whispered. -“I also saw the head protruding from behind the -fence watching us.”</p> - -<p>“What about you, Ken? Did you see -anything?”</p> - -<p>He shook his head. “I’m sorry,” he said, “but -I am not as eagle-eyed as you two. I saw nothing -suspicious.”</p> - -<p>“But I saw him watching us several times,” insisted -Paul.</p> - -<p>“I saw him only once,” added Jack.</p> - -<p>“Well, you two may be right and I wrong,” -commented the third companion.</p> - -<p>“Who do you think it could be?” asked Jack. -“And what do you think his purpose is?”</p> - -<p>“How should I know?”</p> - -<p>“Do you think it is that man I followed last -night?”</p> - -<p>Paul hesitated for a moment then shook his -head. “No, and I will tell you why. The person -you followed last night was tall and gaunt. This<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span> -individual appeared to me to be about average -height and robust. I could tell that from the -shadow.”</p> - -<p>“Shall I turn around and see if we are being -followed?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“No, don’t do that,” warned Paul. “He might -catch on that we know we are being followed. I -have a better plan.”</p> - -<p>“What?”</p> - -<p>“When we get to Main Street, you, Ken, will -turn right, wave to us, make believe as though you -are saying goodbye. Jack and I will turn left and -pretend that we are going home. But instead of -actually walking off, Ken, you will dash into a -doorway and watch to see if anyone is following -us.”</p> - -<p>“And if there is?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“Then you will follow him, naturally,” was -Paul’s answer.</p> - -<p>“And if there is not?”</p> - -<p>“Then you will take a roundabout route and -meet us in my house in about half an hour.”</p> - -<p>“All right. I’ll do that.”</p> - -<p>At Main Street, the group parted, one boy -walking off in one direction, while the other two -headed in the opposite direction. Ken, just as -soon as he parted from his companions, walked -to the second store from the corner, a haberdashery, -and stared at the window display. -Actually, however, his eyes were roaming elsewhere<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span> -and he was carefully watching the corner. -Some people came out of Water Street, but by the -look on their faces, by their general appearance -and by the fact that they seemed to know exactly -which way their direction lay, Ken knew that it -was not any one of them. Suddenly he caught his -breath. A robust man of medium height emerged -from the street and paused at the corner. He wore -a light jacket and a Panama hat, the brim pulled -down over his forehead.</p> - -<p>After standing hesitantly on the corner, he -turned left, seemingly bent on following Paul and -Jack. Ken crossed the street and followed. The -chase continued for several blocks, the man increasing -his pace and Ken doing likewise. The -two boys were just ahead, crossing Chestnut -Street. As the man came to the corner, he turned. -Ken stopped at a corner store and looked at the -window display. He watched the man walk to the -middle of the block and then turn into the yard -of a private house. Ken scratched his head and -wondered.</p> - -<p>The two boys were awaiting him. As Ken came -up the walk to the porch, Paul asked, “Well?”</p> - -<p>Ken nodded meaningfully and the two boys -were re-assured of their suspicions. Joining his -companions, he muttered, “This man hunt is getting me. -I’m afraid that before it is all over I am -going to go crazy.”</p> - -<p>“Why? What’s the matter?” inquired Jack.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Do you know who was following us?” Ken -put the question very gravely and looked from -one boy to the other.</p> - -<p>“Who?”</p> - -<p>“Captain Bob.”</p> - -<p>The announcement came as a shock, almost -overwhelming them. Each boy searched the face -of the other for some meaning or understanding. -But all of them were just as puzzled. Paul repeated the name, -“Captain Bob! But why should -he follow us?”</p> - -<p>Ken shrugged his shoulders. “Are you sure it -was he?” questioned Jack, his demeanor grave -and serious.</p> - -<p>“I am absolutely positive. After all, I know the -man. It’s true I didn’t see his face—”</p> - -<p>Paul jumped. “You didn’t see his face!” he exclaimed. -“Then how do you know it was he? You -might be mistaken.”</p> - -<p>Ken shrugged his shoulders. “Very possible,” -he said, “but I am pretty sure I am not mistaken. -To begin with, I know the man and I can recognize -him without seeing his face. And secondly, -I watched him walk down Chestnut Street and -enter a house at about the middle of the street. -That is where he lives, isn’t it?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but are you sure he walked into his own -house—that is, Captain Bob’s house?” demanded -Paul.</p> - -<p>“Well, no, I didn’t follow him all the way to his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span> -home; I watched from the corner. But just the -same I am pretty sure that it was Captain Bob.”</p> - -<p>There was silence. The boys could not understand -why the Captain should follow them. “Well, -I’ll be!” exclaimed Jack. “This thing is getting -beyond me and I am losing my patience.”</p> - -<p>“Now don’t get excited,” cautioned Paul. “And -keep quiet for a couple of minutes. I am trying to -think of something.”</p> - -<p>“Think of what?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“Of what he said to us when we were over to -see him,” was the answer.</p> - -<p>“What about it?”</p> - -<p>Paul leaned over toward his two companions. -“Now look, fellows,” he began. “There is one -particular thing he told us that comes back to me -now very distinctly. You remember how just as -we were leaving, he said to us, ‘Don’t you go -around talking about a pyromaniac; it may get -you into trouble.’ Remember him saying that?”</p> - -<p>Jack nodded. “Yes, I remember.”</p> - -<p>“Same here,” added Ken, “now that you call -our attention to it. But what about it? He meant -it for our own good.”</p> - -<p>“Of course,” said Paul, “I am not doubting his -sincerity. But, Captain Bob is much shrewder than -we give him credit for, that’s the point.”</p> - -<p>“How do you mean?” inquired Jack.</p> - -<p>“We came over to talk over with him the fire, -didn’t we?” continued Paul. “Well, remember<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span> -that he didn’t seem to have a very definite opinion -though he did feel that there was something odd -about the cause or origin of the fire.”</p> - -<p>“Well, what’s your point?” demanded Ken, his -curiosity aroused.</p> - -<p>“Only this,” said Paul, “that since we told him -of our own doubts about the fire and that since -we told him we suspected a pyromaniac, he immediately -came to the conclusion that we knew -more than we were telling him. And in order to -find out what we may know about the fire, he is -following us.”</p> - -<p>“Sounds logical to me,” muttered Jack.</p> - -<p>Ken shook his head. “It may sound logical,” -he said, “but somehow I am not convinced. How -should he know we were going out to Water -Street this morning? And he would have to watch -the house of any one of us three all morning to -follow us. And why should he pick this morning -to follow us?”</p> - -<p>Paul smiled at his friend’s naive questions. “To -begin with,” he said, “how do we know he has not -been following us since that night we spoke to -him? But I am under the impression that his following -us is just an accident.”</p> - -<p>“An accident!” echoed Jack. “Explain yourself.”</p> - -<p>“I will if you don’t interrupt. My impression is -that he was coming to Water Street this morning -also to search for some clues to the fire. But when<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span> -he saw us there, he naturally watched us to see -what we were up to and then followed us.”</p> - -<p>Ken shook his head in a gesture of disbelief. -Jake, on the other hand mused quietly, trying -to untangle the whole situation, but unable to find -a starting point. Finally he asked, “Do you think -he will continue to follow us, Paul?”</p> - -<p>“Can’t tell. He may and he may not.”</p> - -<p>After a short time of silence, Jack rose and suggested, -“Well, let’s go home for lunch.”</p> - -<p>“That’s a bully idea,” cried Ken. “I didn’t -realize how hungry I am.”</p> - -<p>“All right, I’ll see you boys later,” said Paul.</p> - -<p>That evening, immediately after supper, Paul -went across the street to call for Ken. As the two -boys walked down the street, Paul whispered, -“We are being followed.”</p> - -<p>Ken gasped. “Captain Bob!” he exclaimed in a -hushed tone of voice.</p> - -<p>“Don’t know. But for the last half hour I noticed -that someone was hovering about the house. -And as we came out and walked away, I noticed a -form slink out of the shadows and follow us.”</p> - -<p>“What do you think we ought to do?”</p> - -<p>“I have an idea.” And he whispered some instructions -to his friend.</p> - -<p>Ken nodded. “And then what?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Leave the rest to me.”</p> - -<p>When the two boys arrived in front of Jack’s -home, Paul spoke up rather loudly, “I guess I’ll<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span> -walk down the block and call Nuthin’. I’ll be back -in about five minutes.”</p> - -<p>“All right,” answered Ken just as loudly. “Jack -and I will wait for you.”</p> - -<p>Ken entered the yard while Paul walked off -straight ahead. Turning in at the end of the -street, he set off at a run around the block.</p> - -<p>Returning to the same street at the other end, -he hovered close to the wall of a building and -looked everywhere to detect the hiding place of -the spy. Suddenly he caught his breath. He detected -a slight movement behind a fence at the -other side of the street, several houses below. He -crossed to the other side and walked ahead. Sure -enough, a man stepped out and came toward him. -As they met, Paul greeted, “Hello, Captain Bob.”</p> - -<p>The man grunted and was going to pass on, but -Paul instantly got into his way. The man stopped, -“Huh?” he muttered. “Did you speak to me?”</p> - -<p>“I said hello, Captain Bob.”</p> - -<p>“Hello yourself. Now let me see, your face -seems to be familiar, but I can’t seem to remember -your name.”</p> - -<p>“Paul Morrison.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes, yes. You are the boy who dashed into -the burning house and—”</p> - -<p>Paul interrupted. “Yes, that’s right; you know -me.” What a poor actor the man was, Paul -thought. He certainly couldn’t get away with pretending -that he didn’t know him. His heart<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span> -pounded and perspiration gathered on his brow. -He was debating with himself what his approach -should be. Would it be best merely to imply that -Captain Bob’s spying was a known fact to them or -should he put it frankly to the old man and see -what he would say. Paul steeled himself. Very -suddenly, trying to take the man off his guard, -he said, “Captain Bob, I am very much surprised -that you should be following us.”</p> - -<p>The old man straightened up. “What was -that you said? Following you? What for? Why -should I be following you, tell me that.”</p> - -<p>“That is something you should tell me,” he replied -respectfully. “But you spied on us this morning -on Water Street and then followed us as far -as Chestnut Street. And just now you were following -us again.”</p> - -<p>It was really too dark to tell, but Paul felt that -the old man had turned red and became confused. -“My dear boy,” he mumbled angrily, “You don’t -know what you are talking about.”</p> - -<p>“You shouldn’t say that, Captain Bob. If I -wasn’t positive, I wouldn’t accost you like this.”</p> - -<p>After a moment of tense silence, the captain -laughed. “Well, my boy,” he said, “you are right, -but I promise not to do it any more.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you. But if you don’t mind, I wish you -would tell me why you are following us.”</p> - -<p>Captain Bob replied gravely, “You see, my boy, -there have been too many fires in this town lately.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span> -And when you and your friends came and talked -to me about the fire the other day, I became a -little suspicious. I tried to,—er,—get as much information -out of you as I could, but somehow I -felt that you were not telling me everything. So I -thought I would check up on you.”</p> - -<p>A feeling of relief swept over Paul. He wanted -to jump into the air and shout for joy. Even -though he was a modest boy, he had to pat himself -on the back; thus far, all his suspicions and -deductions had been correct. He would certainly -make a good detective. The captain was waiting -for him to say something and he commented, -“But we really don’t know any more than we -told you, Captain Bob. If there is anything the -boys and I can do to help you, such as help check -up on your suspicions—that is if you have any—we -would be glad to do so.”</p> - -<p>The old man chuckled. “You are a smart one, -my boy. I know that you have something up your -sleeve. But never mind.”</p> - -<p>Paul felt his face going red. He must not give -anything away, he thought. Out loud, he said, -“But really, Captain, we don’t. We don’t know as -much as you do, if as much.”</p> - -<p>“Well, never mind. And,—er,—forget about -my following you. I meant no harm.”</p> - -<p>“I’m sure of that,” replied the boy. “And it is -perfectly all right.”</p> - -<p>“Good night, my boy.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Good night, Captain Bob.”</p> - -<p>Paul watched the man disappear around the -corner. And just as he started to cross the street, -two figures darted out toward him, “Well?” cried -Ken.</p> - -<p>Paul put a finger to his lips. “Sh!” he cautioned.</p> - -<p>The boys retreated to Jack’s garage where Paul -told his companions the story. Just as soon as the -narrative was completed, Ken cried, “The sly old -fox! You know, I wouldn’t be at all surprised if -he continues to spy on us.”</p> - -<p>“That is just what I was going to say,” agreed -Paul. “He is a very shrewd man and I am positive -that he suspects somehow.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t mean to say that he suspects us of -setting fire to that house?” inquired Jack -seriously.</p> - -<p>“No, not setting fire to the house,” answered -Paul smiling. “That is ridiculous and we must -give him more credit than that. My impression is -that he suspects us of knowing something about it -which we are holding back from him. And that -happens to be true.”</p> - -<p>“Providing, of course, that our suspicions are -correct,” argued Ken, still a bit doubtful.</p> - -<p>“Well, of course, under those conditions.”</p> - -<p>“What do you think our next move should be?” -questioned Jack.</p> - -<p>“Let’s go to the movies,” suggested Ken.</p> - -<p>“Oh, no!” exclaimed Jack.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Why not?” reasoned Paul. “Captain Bob -won’t follow us tonight any more—”</p> - -<p>“Which makes it safe for us to go to the -movies,” joked Ken.</p> - -<p>The boys laughed. “Seriously, though,” said -Paul, “there is nothing else for us to do tonight. -That man was abroad last night, and it is reasonable -to assume that he won’t do any more prowling -around tonight.”</p> - -<p>“I agree with that wholeheartedly,” said Ken. -“Let’s go to the movies.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER VII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">The Robbery</span></p> - -<p>The following morning, at the breakfast table, -Paul happened to glance at the front page of the -<i>Stanhope Herald</i> which Dr. Morrison was reading. -At the bottom of the page, boxed off, was a -story with the headline PROFESSOR LINK’S -HOUSE ROBBED. Paul became quite upset and -found it difficult to eat his cereal. However, he -controlled himself and did not show any untoward -interest in the newspaper. His father finished -breakfast first, and he laid down the paper and -left for his office. Paul gulped down his milk, -picked up the paper and went out on the porch.</p> - -<p>The story was that someone had broken into -Professor Link’s home and had stolen a valuable, -early edition of “Colonial History.” Nothing else -was taken, except that the thief had strewn many -of the books on the floor. The theory was that -the thief had entered by an open window in the -library.</p> - -<p>Ken came dashing across the street and up to -the porch. “Hey, Paul!” he cried, “did you read -the story in the morning paper?” Paul held up -the paper. “So you know already?”</p> - -<p>Jack came. “Well, what do you think of the -robbery?” he asked bluntly. “I had a feeling we<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span> -should not have gone to the movies last night.”</p> - -<p>“What could we have done?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“We might have come upon him and possibly -frustrated his plan.”</p> - -<p>“So!” exclaimed Ken. “You think that ‘he’ -did it? Pretty soon you will have every crime -under the sun charged up against him.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think we could have done anything,” -commented Paul. “The paper says that the robbery -occurred any time after about midnight, -when the professor says he left his library to go -to bed.”</p> - -<p>“But we might have come across him sometime -before and followed him. Then we might about -have judged what he was up to.” Thus argued -Jack.</p> - -<p>“Maybe yes and maybe no,” was Paul’s pert -statement.</p> - -<p>“Paul,” demanded Ken, “you don’t mean to -tell me that you really believe this man, this so-called -maniac, committed the robbery, do you?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, I do.”</p> - -<p>“Tell me, how do you figure it out?”</p> - -<p>“It’s very simple,” was Paul’s answer. “Only -one book was stolen. Of course, the book was an -old edition and valuable, but valuable only to a -man like Professor Link. In actual money, the -book is worth perhaps ten or fifteen dollars; but -if the thief was going to sell it, he wouldn’t get -more than four or five dollars for it.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Yes,” added Jack, “there were more valuable -things in the room, if the thief had been interested -in stealing something valuable. That is in -itself enough to show that the thief, whoever -he was, was either a maniac or one who was interested -in obtaining only that book and nothing -else. But an ordinary, normal man, would not -break into a house to steal something like that.”</p> - -<p>“Maybe,” remarked Ken doubtfully, “but—”</p> - -<p>Paul interrupted, saying, “Let’s go over to Bobolink -and get him to go over to Professor Link. -He is Bobolink’s grandfather, isn’t he?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. Let’s do that.”</p> - -<p>The boys wended their way to Bobolink’s home -and luckily found him still in. He was glad to see -them, and commented, “I was just going to call -you fellows.”</p> - -<p>“What for?”</p> - -<p>“I thought that perhaps you might be interested -in accompanying me to my grandfather’s -home.”</p> - -<p>“That’s why we came for you,” Jack informed -him.</p> - -<p>“Good. I’ll be with you in a minute.”</p> - -<p>Professor Link who lived alone except for a -woman who cooked and kept house for him, was a -retired college professor and an authority in colonial -history. He occupied a small, private house of -his own and spent his time writing books on the -history of the early pioneering days.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span></p> - -<p>His three companions behind him, Bobolink -rang the bell. The housekeeper opened the door. -“Good morning, Mrs. Hix,” greeted Bobolink. -“Is my grandfather in?”</p> - -<p>Mrs. Hix answered, “He is in the library.”</p> - -<p>The boys filed in and Bobolink knocked on the -library door. “Come in,” someone called.</p> - -<p>The boys entered. Mr. Link was a gray haired -man of about sixty with a warm smile, who was -very friendly to young people. “Hello, Gramps,” -greeted Bobolink.</p> - -<p>“Hello, fellows,” returned the professor. -“What are you doing here?” he asked curiously.</p> - -<p>“Just thought we would pay you a visit,” his -grandson informed him.</p> - -<p>“That’s very nice of you, but I wonder what -is behind it. Sit down, boys.”</p> - -<p>The walls of the room were lined with books. -And it appeared that the mess that the thief had -caused was all cleaned up. “What about that robbery, -Gramps?” asked Bobolink.</p> - -<p>Paul was walking around the room, pretending -to be looking at the books. Actually he was searching -for something. He paused to hear the professor’s -answer to the question. “Not much harm -done.”</p> - -<p>“Was it a valuable book?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“Not so particularly valuable; a book on colonial -history.”</p> - -<p>“Isn’t it rather odd that the thief should take<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span> -that particular book and nothing else?” asked -Paul casually.</p> - -<p>Professor Link pursed his lips. “Rather,” he -answered. “If he had been out to steal, he could -have found more valuable things to take. He -might even have found some money in the drawer -of my desk, if he had looked.”</p> - -<p>“But nothing else was touched?” Paul asked -the question and was anxious to hear the answer. -“No. Nothing else seems to have been taken.” -Bobolink and Ken discussed with the professor -the state university to which they were going, entering -as freshmen in September. Paul walked -around the back of the desk. He glanced down -into the waste-paper basket. His heart almost -stopped still. He picked something out of the basket -and said to the professor, “Do you mind if I -use this to copy down the name of a book?” -Professor Link looked at the card. “Not at -all. Where did you get it?”</p> - -<p>“In the waste basket.” Paul turned the card to -show that it was blank on both sides.</p> - -<p>The boys stared at Paul and at the white card. -“Here is some clean paper,” the professor said, -and pushed forward a white pad. “And here is a -pencil,” he added.</p> - -<p>“This is perfectly all right,” asserted Paul. -Picking up the pencil, he pretended that he was -copying down the title of a book.</p> - -<p>The boys were eager to get out, yet they could<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span> -not very well show haste without making the professor -suspicious. So they lingered for an additional -twenty minutes, discussing colleges and college life. -At last they escaped. As soon as they -were outside the door, Bobolink opened his mouth -to ask a question. But Paul cautioned him. “Sh! -Let’s wait until we are further away from the -house.”</p> - -<p>Some distance away, Bobolink finally asked his -question. “What was that card you picked out of -the basket?”</p> - -<p>Paul took it out of his pocket and showed it to -them—a white card, blank on both sides, and -three by two inches. “You have your card, Jack?” -asked Paul. “Mine is home.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, here it is.” And he produced it.</p> - -<p>The cards were compared; they were identical. -“Well, now what do you think of that!” exclaimed -Bobolink.</p> - -<p>“In every case,” whispered Paul seriously, “the -same person. This is becoming terrible.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” agreed Ken. “I’m coming to look at it -from your point of view. And from now on we -have to take it more seriously and do something.”</p> - -<p>“What can we do?” asked Bobolink.</p> - -<p>“You know what?” remarked Paul. “If I didn’t -think we would be laughed at, I would tell the -police.”</p> - -<p>“Aw, go on,” said Ken. “If all the evidence you -have is the white card and the fact that Jack followed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span> -a suspicious looking person, they would -think that you were either crazy or trying to put -something over.”</p> - -<p>“That’s the trouble,” asserted Paul. “In that -case it is up to us to solve the mystery and put -an end to it.”</p> - -<p>“Well said,” commented Bobolink, “but how -are we going to do it?”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER VIII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Encounter</span></p> - -<p>The boys did not know what to do nor how to -do it. But they were determined to put an end to -the mystery. And shortly, too. If the man was -permitted to roam the streets of the town freely, -God knows what damage he might eventually do -and what crimes he might have up his sleeve. He -might lead away another child, he might commit -more robberies, he might put the torch to a house -full of sleeping persons, he might do anything. -He had to be caught; upon that the boys were -firmly convinced.</p> - -<p>That evening, Jack came to Paul and said, -“Listen, I’m going to tell my mother that I am -having supper at your house tonight. But instead, -I am going down to Jones Street and nose around -a bit.”</p> - -<p>“That’s a good idea. But suppose I go with you.”</p> - -<p>“No, I would rather go down alone. It is too -difficult for two people to be hiding together, darting -in and out, and all that.”</p> - -<p>“You are right, Jack. Be careful, though. Don’t -get into any trouble. I feel guilty letting you go -alone.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, don’t talk like an old woman.” The boys -laughed at that. “I can take care of myself. I have -done it before.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Very well, go ahead. But I want you to come -back and tell what happens.”</p> - -<p>“All right. But if nothing happens, I won’t -come. I will go home instead.”</p> - -<p>Thus it was agreed and the two boys parted. -Half an hour later, Jack was at the corner of -Main and Jones Streets. It was still daylight and -Jack had the opportunity to look the neighborhood -over. It was a poor and deserted neighborhood, -not far from the edge of the town. The first -building on the corner was an old wooden house. -At the street level was a grocery store, and the -floor above looked as though it were occupied by -a family.</p> - -<p>Alongside this building was an empty lot, as -was true of the opposite corner. Further on, intermittently -on both sides of the street were one or -two family wooden homes. Jack walked up and -down the block twice. There were some women on -several of the porches and a number of children -played on the empty lots. He decided to take up -a position at the corner of Jones and Main -Streets, but it was still light and he didn’t want to -arouse any suspicion. So it became a problem as -to how to spend the hours until dark.</p> - -<p>First he walked up and down the block several -times, then went around the block twice until he -was afraid that people in the neighborhood might -become suspicious of him. Then he walked up -Main Street and back again. It seemed to him<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span> -that the day would never end. He crossed the -street to the empty lot and walked to the farthest -corner of it. Picking out a comfortable place to -sit down, where he would not be noticed, he tried -to watch the corner so as to see everyone who -passed.</p> - -<p>The minutes dragged on endlessly. What is the -matter, Jack asked himself. Time usually passes -so quickly; before you turn around the day is -gone. And now—He shifted in his seat and found -the ground hard to sit on. Staring vaguely at the -house on the corner, at the few people that passed -up and down, many thoughts came to his mind. -The uppermost thought in his mind was, what -might be wrong with this man, the maniac? It was -something he wished he knew, as he had always -been interested in trying to figure out what made -people do the things they did.</p> - -<p>But that thought soon slipped his mind and -was replaced by another one—that of going to -college. Another three weeks and the summer vacation -would be over and Ken, Bobolink, Paul and -he would be on their way to the state university. -What was college life like, he wondered. There -were sports, of course. Ken would make a -swell swimmer and Paul would most likely join -the football squad. As for himself, he would try -basketball. Then there were the fraternities. He -had heard a lot about Greek letter clubs. But he -was not going to bother much with any outside<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span> -activities; he was going to study to be a doctor. -So was Paul. And it took a lot of study to become -a doctor.</p> - -<p>He was staring rather aimlessly. His dreaming -helped to pass the time away. It was already almost -dusk. Suddenly he was electrified. He jumped -to his feet and then he dropped to the ground -again. A tall individual had just then emerged -from the door of the corner house. Bending low, -he ran to the corner and caught sight of the retreating -back of his man. A cold chill ran down -his spine. He was certain of his man. There was -the same height, the same baggy clothes and that -wild appearance. The man kept shifting his head -in all directions; his eyes seemed to be everywhere, -staring at people, at houses, at everything.</p> - -<p>Jack followed closely. It was still not quite dark -and he hoped he would not be stopped by anyone. -He was rather glad when the man turned into -York Street. It was a quiet, residential street and -instantly Jack feared what the man might be up -to. Was he bent on starting a fire in one of the -fine houses on the street? But his fears were in -vain because the man kept on walking, almost -reaching the tracks. Repeating his gestures of the -day before, the man suddenly stopped and very -slowly turned around on his heel. Jack had just -enough time to dash behind a fence. The man -entered the yard and then walked behind the -house. Jack ran up and hid himself behind a tree<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span> -almost directly across from the house. Looking -closely, he noticed that the house appeared to be -unoccupied. There were no lights in the windows -and there was nothing to indicate that anyone -lived there. The man reappeared and entered the -house by the front door. He just walked in without -using any key, or breaking in the lock. There -was something suspicious about the house. If it -were unoccupied, it should be locked. If a family -did live there, there would be some light in the -windows; and probably the maniac would not enter -so assured of his safety.</p> - -<p>It seemed to Jack that the man was in the house -a long time. He decided on a dangerous tactic. -Quickly, noiselessly, he sprinted across the street, -jumped the fence and ran to the side of the house. -Cautiously, he moved to see if there was a back -door; he found it on the other side of the house. -Putting his hand on the knob, he turned it and -pushed, but the door wouldn’t open; it was locked. -He moved toward the front again, to watch for -the exit of his man. Every second was an eternity. -His heart pounded wildly and if he had not controlled -himself, he would have trembled, not so -much from fear as from anxiety and excitement.</p> - -<p>He flattened himself out against the wall and -remained stationary, not daring to make a noise. -Suddenly he felt long, bony fingers grab him by -the shoulder and wheel him around. His blood -went cold and he could almost feel his hair standing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span> -on end. “So!” the man grunted under his -breath. “What are you doing, following me, eh?” -Jack cowered before the great height towering -over him. He saw that the man had a rising forehead, -bushy eyebrows and deep eye sockets. What -impressed him most, however, were the man’s -sunken cheeks and his wild eyes, which were dark -and brilliant.</p> - -<p>For almost a minute, Jack was paralyzed and -couldn’t talk. Eventually he muttered, “No—no—I—I’m -not following you.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, you are,” accused the man. “You have -been following me for two weeks now and I want -you to stop it.”</p> - -<p>Jack heaved a sigh of relief. The man was -crazy. But was he dangerous, he wondered. -Would he attack him. He was on guard against -an attack. “Why, no, Mister, I’m not following -you. Why should I? I don’t even know you.”</p> - -<p>“You lie!” screamed the other. “You lie! You -do know me and I know you.”</p> - -<p>Jack thought he had better be quiet and polite -with his assailant. A good, sound argument might -get him out of his predicament, he thought. “I am -sorry, Mister,” he said, “but I repeat that I don’t -know you. If you know me, as you say you do, -then what is my name.”</p> - -<p>Still holding on to Jack’s shoulder, the man -scratched his chin. “Now let me see,” he mumbled -to himself. “What is your name?” He mused,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span> -then he snapped his fingers and announced, “I -know. It’s Jack.”</p> - -<p>The boy gasped. How could that man know -him, know his name. What was he to do? He -wished he had never known about this thing, -had never followed this man and had never got -into this situation. Controlling himself, he asked, -“What is my family name?”</p> - -<p>“Barrows!” the man snapped back. “Barrows, -that’s it.”</p> - -<p>“You are wrong,” contradicted Jack. “My -name is Ed Smith.”</p> - -<p>“No,” insisted the man, “you are Jack Barrows. -And I demand to know why you are following -me.”</p> - -<p>“But I am not following you. You are -mistaken.”</p> - -<p>“Then what are you doing here?” The man’s -voice now boomed. “Tell me that!”</p> - -<p>“I used to live in this house,” fabricated unhappy -Jack. “I once used to live here,” he repeated, -“and I was just looking around.”</p> - -<p>“So you used to live here!”</p> - -<p>The man lifted his free arm and swung. Jack -ducked. The arm crashed against the wall, the -man screamed with pain and Jack wrenched himself -free. The man lunged for him. Jack side-stepped -and stuck his foot out; his victim tripped and -stretched himself out on the ground. Without -waiting or looking back, Jack was off. He jumped<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span> -the fence and dashed down the street. Rounding -the corner, he stopped to consider why he was running. -He stood nonchalantly and waited for his -man to appear. But the mysterious individual was -not forthcoming. He waited five more minutes -and still he did not appear.</p> - -<p>He came around the corner again and crossed -to the other side of the street. Walking slowly -and cautiously, he came to the tree opposite the -house. Taking shelter, Jack looked across. A wave -of pity swept through him at the scene he saw. -On the very same spot, almost where he fell, the -man was now sitting up and his shoulders were -trembling. From all appearances, the man was -sobbing bitterly, as though his heart were -breaking.</p> - -<p>Who is this man, Jack asked himself. And -what is the matter with him? What had ever happened -to him to cause him to become what he was. -Jack asked himself all those questions but had no -answers. He determined to find out. He must find -out, he thought to himself.</p> - -<p>Jack looked at his watch and saw that it was -almost nine o’clock. He realized that he was terribly -hungry. He decided not to wait around any -more but to go home. On the way he remembered -that he had promised Paul that he would come -over and tell him if anything had happened. But -he did not feel like it at the moment and he went -straight home and called Paul on the telephone.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER IX</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Who Is Mr. Grey?</span></p> - -<p>Paul and Ken were listening attentively to -Jack’s story of what had happened the night before. -Paul commented, “It’s really a pity. What -we have to do is to catch him in the act as soon -as possible and have him arrested. Then something -might be done for him.”</p> - -<p>“What could be done for him?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“Oh, I don’t know. Most likely he would be -put into an asylum. That would be best, too, I -guess.”</p> - -<p>Jack showed his companions the house to which -he followed his man the night before. There was -nothing much to see there. The place was empty -and unoccupied. But strangely, the front door was -open. They entered and searched about. All the -rooms were empty and dusty. In the hall again -Paul noticed some scraps of paper in one corner. -He looked at them but thought nothing suspicious -of it. He sniffed the air and then shook his head.</p> - -<p>Outside again, they walked calmly off. “No -clues here, it seems,” muttered Ken.</p> - -<p>“No,” asserted Paul. And again he thought of -the scraps of paper but the next moment dismissed -them from his mind. “What seems to bother me -most,” he added, “is how he came to suspect that -he was being followed?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I don’t think he really suspected,” said Jack. -“My opinion is that he came upon me by -accident.”</p> - -<p>“A very unhappy accident,” commented Ken.</p> - -<p>“Yes, rather.”</p> - -<p>“I should think so,” remarked Paul. He shook -his head doubtfully. “Yet somehow I can’t quite -believe it. Of course, you’re most likely right, -but—”</p> - -<p>He broke off his sentence in the middle, not -quite decided upon his opinion. Jack thought out -loud. “I wonder who this man is and what is -wrong with him?”</p> - -<p>“You say there is a grocery store at the corner -house, is that right?” The boys stopped and Jack -nodded. “Then,” continued Ken, “let’s go down -there and inquire in a roundabout way in the store. -They might know him.”</p> - -<p>“That’s a swell idea,” cried Paul.</p> - -<p>“Yes, I think so too,” added Jack. “Let’s do -it.”</p> - -<p>They walked down to Jones Street. A very -short distance before they arrived at their destination, -they stopped to decide upon their plan of -action. “Exactly how are we going to do it?” asked -Jack.</p> - -<p>“One of us will have to go inside and make a -purchase, then ask about a tall dark-complexioned -man.”</p> - -<p>“I guess one of you two better go in. They may<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span> -have noticed me around here and they might get -suspicious.”</p> - -<p>“I will go in,” offered Ken. “But what am I to -say?”</p> - -<p>“Just ask if they know a tall, dark man living -somewhere in the neighborhood,” instructed Paul.</p> - -<p>“But if they ask me what I want him for, what -am I to say?”</p> - -<p>“Make up some kind of story, anything. Say -that you were told that he was a plumber, or -something like that, and that you want him to do -a job.”</p> - -<p>“All right, I’ll go in. Where are you fellows -going to be?”</p> - -<p>“We will be right here. And when you come out, -just keep walking straight ahead as if you don’t -know us.”</p> - -<p>“Okey, here goes.”</p> - -<p>Ken walked off and came to the store. He hesitated, -looked around, pretending that he was not -certain it was the right place. He entered. He -noticed that a middle-aged woman was alone in -the store. She came out from behind the counter -and asked, “Is there anything I can do for you?”</p> - -<p>“Er—excuse me,” he said, “but I am looking -for a tall, dark man. I was told that he lives in this -neighborhood somewhere.”</p> - -<p>“I know a tall, dark man,” she answered, speaking -softly. “What is it you want him for, may I -ask?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I was told he was a carpenter and looking for -work and—”</p> - -<p>“It couldn’t be Mr. Grey. He is not a carpenter. -You couldn’t mean him.”</p> - -<p>“No, I guess not. Thank you.”</p> - -<p>“It’s quite all right.”</p> - -<p>Ken left the store much excited. He walked -briskly till he came upon the boys. They fell in -alongside of him. “Well?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“His name is Mr. Grey,” gasped Ken.</p> - -<p>“What else?”</p> - -<p>“That’s all. The woman did not tell me any -more.”</p> - -<p>“But the name alone is not enough,” cried -Jack. “What does he do? Where does he live?”</p> - -<p>“I couldn’t ask her such questions,” Ken defended -himself. “She would become suspicious and -tell me nothing.”</p> - -<p>“Let’s not argue,” cautioned Paul. “At least -we have his name, that’s something. Did the -woman in the store seem to know him?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. I should imagine from the way she spoke -that she knew him well.”</p> - -<p>“She didn’t mention anything, else?” asked -Jack.</p> - -<p>“No.”</p> - -<p>The boys walked silently along for some while. -Paul snapped his fingers. “You know what?” he -cried. “Let’s look him up in the town directory.”</p> - -<p>“Where will we get one?” inquired Ken.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I have one home,” said Paul.</p> - -<p>The boys hurried to the Morrison home and -Paul brought out the town directory. It didn’t -help them any. There were three Greys. One was -a pharmacist, the second was a butcher and the -third a lawyer. They put the book down and Jack -muttered, “That’s not much of a help.”</p> - -<p>“No. It’s very possible that he has only recently -moved into town,” commented Paul.</p> - -<p>“Now that is an idea,” remarked Ken. “The -reason he is so little known must be because he is -a newcomer around here.”</p> - -<p>“But how does that help us any?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“Well, it’s good to keep it in mind,” asserted -Ken.</p> - -<p>“What do you say we go down to that neighborhood -again?” asked Jack, “and just look -around. Perhaps we can find some person who -knows something.”</p> - -<p>“It’s all right with me,” was Paul’s comment.</p> - -<p>The three boys shuffled off the porch and -walked down Main Street again. At Jones Street, -they could find no other stores in the immediate -neighborhood where they might enter and obtain -some information. They walked back and forth -several times, but their searches were futile. One -of them suggested that they quit and go home and -the others assented. Passing on the other side of -the street, the three of them kept their eyes on -the store. A woman emerged. Ken grasped Paul<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span> -by the arm. “Look,” he said, “there’s the woman -leaving the store.”</p> - -<p>“Well, what about her?”</p> - -<p>“Don’t you understand?” demanded Ken. “She -is the woman I spoke to when I entered the -store.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” cried Jack. “If she is leaving, -someone else must be in the store. I am going in. -Perhaps I can obtain some information.”</p> - -<p>Paul held on to his chum who was on the point -of walking off. “No,” he said. “I’m going in. You -may have been noticed around here before and it -would look suspicious. Both of you just keep walking -back and forth and don’t attract attention. I -am going in.”</p> - -<p>Jack and Ken continued walking along Main -Street while Paul crossed over to the store and -entered. A customer was at the counter and Paul -pretended to be looking around. The customer -left and the man, evidently the proprietor, remained -behind the counter, waiting for Paul to -give his order. “Is there anything I can do for -you?” he asked.</p> - -<p>Paul picked up a small box of chocolate crackers -and deposited a nickel on the counter. The -man picked up the coin and rang it up on the -register. “Excuse me, Mister, but it seems that a -certain Mr. Grey lives in this neighborhood -and....”</p> - -<p>Paul did not finish his sentence. He scrutinized<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span> -the man’s features and concluded that the proprietor -of the grocery was a shrewd, hard, and -unsympathetic individual. He must be careful of -every word, he told himself. The man drawled, -“Now let me think.” He scratched his chin and -pretended that he was trying to remember an individual -by the name of Mr. Grey. “What is it -you want of him?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Well, you see,” Paul began, “my mother -heard that he was a carpenter and she wants some -work done.” That was bad, he thought to himself. -It was the same story that Ken had used and -if his wife told him that some boy was in looking -for a carpenter, the man was sure to become suspicious. -But he was obliged now to stick to his -story. He continued, “So she sent me around here -to try and find him.”</p> - -<p>“Where do you live?” the grocery man asked -him.</p> - -<p>“Around the corner. The next street.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t remember ever seeing you around in -the neighborhood.”</p> - -<p>Paul realized that he was in a predicament and -he had to get himself out of it. “We just moved -in, two weeks ago,” he answered.</p> - -<p>The man scratched his chin again. “Isn’t that -strange?” he muttered. “I haven’t heard of anyone -moving in or out of the neighborhood within -the past two weeks.” He paused and eyed Paul -who felt his face going red. “Well, at any rate, I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span> -am sorry but I don’t know any Mr. Grey around -here.”</p> - -<p>Paul moved away from the counter. “Thank -you,” he said.</p> - -<p>“It’s quite all right. Tell your mother to come -in here sometime and do her shopping. I like to -know the people in the neighborhood.”</p> - -<p>“I will.”</p> - -<p>Paul was glad to escape from the store. He had -never before realized how difficult it is to obtain -information from people. Joining his companions, -he laughed good naturedly. “What’s the joke?” -asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“The old so and so!” he exclaimed. “He got -more out of me than I got out of him.”</p> - -<p>“You mean you didn’t find out anything?” Jack -was serious and anxious.</p> - -<p>Paul shook his head. “Not a thing. The old -man beat around the bush and finally confessed -that he didn’t know anyone by the name of Mr. -Grey.”</p> - -<p>“And you fellows accused me of not obtaining -enough information,” Ken joked. “At least I -found out what his name is.”</p> - -<p>The boys were discouraged. “Now what?” -asked Jack in a tone of hopelessness.</p> - -<p>His companions did not know what to do next -and rather than talk about it, they walked along -silently. They came to the street on which Jack<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span> -lived and he said he was going home. Ken said, -“No, don’t do that. It’s early yet.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I thought I would go home and putter -around with my dad’s car; it needs some work -done on it.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll tell you what,” commented Ken. “Let’s go -over and speak to your father, Paul. He is a doctor -and knows a lot of people in town. Perhaps he -might tell us something.”</p> - -<p>Paul shrugged his shoulders. “Yes, we can do -that. But I don’t think he has many patients in -this neighborhood.”</p> - -<p>“And if he doesn’t know,” continued Ken, “we -might go over and see Chief of Police Bates. He -knows me and I am sure we could get to see him.”</p> - -<p>Paul shook his head. “I don’t think we ought -to see Chief Bates. He might ask us a lot of questions, -worm the story out of us and then laugh at -us or call us crazy kids.”</p> - -<p>“We might at least try your father,” insisted -Ken.</p> - -<p>“All right. We will do that.”</p> - -<p>But Dr. Morrison did not know either. He -mentioned John Grey, the pharmacist, Walter -Grey the butcher and W. J. Grey the lawyer. -Those were all the Greys he knew. But the boys -knew that themselves. They were stumped.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER X</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Stumped!</span></p> - -<p>It was shortly after lunch time and Paul was -doing an errand for his father. Walking down -Main Street, he stopped at a stationery store to -look at the window display. His attention was -attracted by someone coming out of the store. He -caught his breath. The man was tall, gaunt, with -ill fitting clothes hanging like sacks on him. “Mr. -Grey!” he thought to himself.</p> - -<p>Not hesitating, Paul followed. He wanted to -get a good look at the man’s face, but how was he -going to do that? He thought fast. Increasing his -pace, he walked past the man. At the corner, he -pretended that he was lost and was looking for -something. He waited for Mr. Grey to come up. -Approaching the man, he said, “Excuse me, sir. -But can you tell me where McDougal Street is? -You see, I am a stranger in this town.”</p> - -<p>Paul looked up at the great height towering -over him. He was very much excited and kept -shifting his weight from one foot to the other. -Mr. Grey answered softly, “I’m sorry, son, but I -really don’t know.”</p> - -<p>Paul pretended that he was disappointed. The -man’s sunken cheeks, long nose and deep sockets, -were imprinted in his mind. But it was Mr. Grey’s<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span> -eyes that bore into him. Those eyes! he thought to -himself, he would never forget them. They were -dark, brilliant, wild. He became conscious that -he was staring very awkwardly at the man and -that Mr. Grey was waiting for him to say something. -He said, “You see—er—I am looking for -Grey’s Pharmacy.”</p> - -<p>The man repeated to himself, “Grey’s Pharmacy! -I am sorry, but I don’t think I know where -it is.”</p> - -<p>On the spur of the moment, Paul said, “And -then I have to go down also to John and Main -Streets. Can you tell me where that is?”</p> - -<p>Paul thought that the man would show some -sign of interest at the mention of the words Grey -and John Street. But he was disappointed. Mr. -Grey was quite calm and not at all disturbed by -those words. He answered softly, “Yes, I can tell -you where John Street is. You walk straight down -Main Street; you can’t miss it. It is quite a walk -though; almost a mile.” He hesitated for a second -and looked down the street. “There is the car -coming,” he continued. “You can take it and get -off at John Street.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you,” murmured Paul and stepped -aside to let the man pass on. He watched Mr. Grey, -walk away. Remembering that he still had the -errand to do for his father, he was undecided -whether to follow or not. Shaking his head, he -turned and walked off.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span></p> - -<p>Completing the errand for his father, he ran -off to the stationery store. He entered. A young -man behind the counter asked, “What can I do -for you?”</p> - -<p>Paul showed him a blank, white card. “Have -you got any cards like that?” he asked.</p> - -<p>The young man behind the counter took the -card, fingered it and answered, “Yes, we have -them. How many do you want?”</p> - -<p>“I need ten,” said Paul.</p> - -<p>The young man stopped as he was pulling out -a box from one of the shelves, and replied, “I’m -sorry. The cards are twenty-five cents a hundred -and we don’t sell less than a package of a -hundred.”</p> - -<p>“Never mind, then,” announced Paul and -walked out of the store.</p> - -<p>Paul felt cheerful; he seethed with excitement. -Now he was getting somewhere, he thought. -Upon reflection he realized that he was nowhere -nearer to a solution of the mystery than he was -before. Yet he could not dispel his feeling of -excitement.</p> - -<p>He felt someone touch him on the arm and -Paul turned around. “Hello, Captain Bob,” he -called.</p> - -<p>“Hello, yourself, my boy,” was the reply. -“What are you doing just now?”</p> - -<p>“Nothing much. I am at your disposal, if you -want me to do something for you,” he offered.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span></p> - -<p>“No, I don’t want you to do anything for me,” -and the captain shook his head. “I merely want -to have a few words with you.”</p> - -<p>“That’s all right with me. What is it you -want?”</p> - -<p>“Let’s first move away from the main thoroughfare,” -remarked Captain Bob, smiling. “We -may get knocked over by all these people rushing -past us.”</p> - -<p>They walked away a short distance into Cherry -Street. Paul was curious to know what the captain -had to say to him. He was on his guard, though. -The old man was clever and shrewd and if he -thought he was going to obtain information from -him, he was mistaken. Paul steeled himself and -asked, “Is this all right? I guess we can talk here -without being disturbed.”</p> - -<p>Captain Bob nodded. “Yes, I think so, too,” -he answered. “What I want to ask you, my boy, -is how are you getting along with solving that -mystery of yours?”</p> - -<p>Paul gasped. He didn’t think the man would -put it up to him so bluntly. “What mystery?” he -asked, trying to make his voice sound as though -he were surprised at the question.</p> - -<p>“Now, now,” commented the old man. “Never -mind beating around the bush. Let’s be honest -with each other. I suppose you know that I am -also interested in finding the culprit who is responsible -for starting that fire?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span></p> - -<p>“That is news to me,” replied Paul. “I didn’t -think you had any suspicions about the cause of -the fire.”</p> - -<p>“Well, you know I did. And what’s more, I -also know that you and your friends are doing -a lot of detective work. I just want to know how -you are getting along and whether you have come -upon any substantial clues.”</p> - -<p>Paul smiled, feeling slightly guilty. “As a matter -of fact,” he answered, “we have not been doing -much lately at all. And ...” he paused to suspend -the effect of the remark. “And we don’t -know any more now than we did when we spoke -to you about it.”</p> - -<p>“Tsk, tsk.” Captain Bob appeared angry. “I -guess we will just have to wait and see what -happens.”</p> - -<p>“If there is anything my friends and I can -do,” began Paul.</p> - -<p>The captain cut him short. “Never mind,” he -said, “never mind. Goodbye.”</p> - -<p>Captain Bob walked off. Paul smiled to himself -and went home. All afternoon he brooded -over his problem. The mystery continued to be a -mystery to him. He wondered what Captain Bob -was up to, whether he was still following him and -his friends and also whether the old man was conducting -an investigation of his own. His father -came up the steps of the porch. “What are you -brooding about, son?” he asked.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Oh, nothing much,” was the answer. “Just -thinking.”</p> - -<p>Dr. Morrison looked askance at his son. -“Well,” he commented, “let’s hope you are really -thinking and not pretending you are thinking.”</p> - -<p>“W-w-what was that you said?” gasped Paul.</p> - -<p>But Dr. Morrison laughed softly and walked -into the house. Paul got out of his seat and walked -off. Jack was busy tinkering with his father’s car. -He looked up and called out, “Hello, Paul. Anything -new?”</p> - -<p>Paul sat down on the box of tools. “A little,” -he answered nonchalantly.</p> - -<p>Jack wiped his greasy hands. “What do you -mean.”</p> - -<p>“I saw Mr. Grey.” Jack opened his eyes wide -and stared at his friend. “And I spoke to him, -too,” he added.</p> - -<p>Jack sat down on the running board. “Well, -go on, tell me. What happened?” he asked -anxiously.</p> - -<p>Paul related the events. Jack listened attentively. -Finally he muttered, “So! Does all that -help any?”</p> - -<p>Paul shrugged his shoulders. “Very little. But -at least I now have a good idea of the sort of -person he is.” A pause. “Captain Bob spoke to -me,” he announced.</p> - -<p>“What does he want? How did you see him?”</p> - -<p>“He stopped me in the street. He wants to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span> -know what we are doing and how we are getting -along.”</p> - -<p>“A shrewd, clever fellow, that Captain Bob,” -was Jack’s appraisal. “He is aware that we know -something which we won’t tell him and he is trying -to get it out of us.”</p> - -<p>“I was wondering,” remarked Paul, “whether -it wouldn’t be better to tell him and see what -happens.”</p> - -<p>“What good will that do?”</p> - -<p>“None that I can see, but ...”</p> - -<p>“But what?”</p> - -<p>“Nothing. Let’s forget that angle of it and -think what to do?”</p> - -<p>“I know what I am going to do,” announced -Jack.</p> - -<p>“What?”</p> - -<p>“The same as I did last night. I am going to -follow Mr. Grey.” He eyed his companion. “And -you?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“I haven’t decided yet. Guess I’ll go home -now.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XI</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">A Hunch</span></p> - -<p>Paul, however, did not go home. On the way -he changed his mind and went to the library instead. -He went to the back of the room and pored -over the newspaper files of the past few months. -About an hour later he left the library. He had a -hunch which gave him a new track to work on. He -had a slip of paper in his hand and he looked on -the writing on it several times until he memorized -it. Then he tore the slip of paper into minute -scraps and disposed of it.</p> - -<p>Immediately after supper, he went out of the -house and walked off. He had a definite destination -in mind. At Corral Street, which was two -blocks from Water Street, he set about looking -for a particular number. That led him about half -a mile away from the place of the former fire, -which coincided with his hunch. He came upon the -number he was looking for. The house was a two -story dwelling, set away from the sidewalk. At -the gate was a sign:</p> - -<p class="pc1"> -JONES & JONES<br /> -REALTORS<br /> -HOUSE FOR RENT</p> - -<p class="p1">Paul walked around the block and looked over -the neighborhood. It was a similarly poor section<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span> -of the town. Coming back to the empty house, he -sneaked into the yard and walked to the rear of -the house. Unable to find a good location from -which he could watch anyone approaching or entering -the house, he retreated a short distance -and took up a position behind the gate and sheltered -by some shrubbery. From his vantage point, -he could not only see anyone approaching the -house, but also keep a sharp watch at those passing -along the street.</p> - -<p>It was already dusk. Paul settled himself, getting -as comfortable as possible. There was nothing -else to do but wait and see. Perhaps his hunch -was a good one, and on the other hand, perhaps -a very poor one, he thought to himself. At any -rate, he had nothing to lose by going through -with it.</p> - -<p>Time dragged on. He watched the sky become -grayer and darker. The moon rose and the first -star came out. Night came on gradually. In spite -of himself, he began to fidget and become impatient. -Was something going to happen or wasn’t -it? He went over in his mind the hunch that he -had and tried to figure out how reasonable it was. -At least to himself it appeared reasonable. He -wondered, however, what Jack or Ken might think -of it. It was no use doing that, he told himself, because -he had not spoken to them about it. The -next moment he was sorry he hadn’t done it. Two -heads, three heads are always better than one<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span> -and they might have seen things about this which -had not occurred to him. He felt his eyelids become -heavy and tired and he closed his eyes for -a second. Only a second. He had to keep watch, he -told himself. But even though he fought against -it, he did fall sound asleep as he waited. He -dreamed a hodge podge in which Mr. Grey, Captain -Bob, Ken and Jack were all setting fire to a -house, laughing gleefully. When he awoke he felt -ashamed of himself for not keeping the watch.</p> - -<p>He took up his position again and resumed his -watching. How could he fall asleep like that, he -asked himself. And he flushed with embarrassment -to have committed such an act. For all he -knew, somebody may have been here and was -gone again. He looked at his watch. Nine o’clock. -He had been sleeping for almost an hour. He held -his breath and listened. Nothing. For about five -minutes he watched the house and the street. Except -for an occasional bypasser, nothing happened. -He crept out of his hiding and looked all -around the house. Nothing seemed to have happened, -nobody seemed to have been there. Calling -himself a fool, he decided to give up his watch and -to go off.</p> - -<p>He walked along and meditated upon his foolish -hunch. Is it a foolish one, though, he asked -himself. If nothing happened tonight, does that -mean that there is no basis for my suspicion? Is -it not possible that something may happen tomorrow<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span> -night, or the night after? He stopped in his -tracks and thought, suppose something should -happen there now, just after I left? For a second -he felt that he should turn around and take up his -vigil again. He took several steps ahead but then -turned around and walked back.</p> - -<p>He came to the house. From across the street, -he let his eyes roam about the place to see if anything -might have happened. Nothing stirred. All -seemed to be still and quiet. He went around the -block, skipped across a fence and came up from -the back of the house. Moving along noiselessly, -he crept along the yard. He had made up his -mind to go once again all around the house and -investigate. Suddenly he caught his breath and -flattened himself on the ground, midst the wild -tall grasses. He saw a shadow coming around the -corner of the house. The man, for such it was -wore dark clothes and a slouch hat pulled down -over the forehead. Like a shadow, the man moved -along the wall. Every few seconds he stopped and -looked and listened. There was something familiar -about that man, Paul thought. He held his -breath and watched, his eyes glued to the moving -figure. The next instant he smiled to himself.</p> - -<p>The man came to the front of the house, quickly -ran across and disappeared behind the wall. Paul -got off the ground and sprinted forward. Ducking -around the corner of the house, he saw the -back of the man, who seemed to be hesitating,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span> -undecided as to his next course of action. Paul -moved forward on tiptoes. Coming up from behind, -he touched the man, who jumped as though -touched by an electric spark, “It’s only I, Captain -Bob.”</p> - -<p>He smiled. The old man stared into his face -and for several seconds was speechless. “You—you -certainly gave me a scare, boy,” he muttered.</p> - -<p>“I’m sorry,” apologized Paul, “but I thought -it was so funny to find you groping around here -that—”</p> - -<p>Captain Bob grabbed him by the arm and -pulled him around to the back of the house. Shaking -a finger under the boy’s nose, he muttered, -“You! You young upstart! Scaring me like that -and thinking it’s funny.” His severity melted and -he smiled. “I should imagine it would be funny,” -he said, “but what brings you here, my boy?”</p> - -<p>Paul smiled. He had not yet gotten over the -humor of the situation. “I imagine that we both -came here on the same hunch,” he informed the -captain.</p> - -<p>“How do you know that my hunch is the same -as yours? Tell me that.”</p> - -<p>“Suppose you tell me your hunch and I’ll tell -you mine, Captain Bob,” he said. “And I’ll wager -they are both the same.”</p> - -<p>“I asked you first,” replied the old man. “If it -is the same, I won’t hesitate to say so.”</p> - -<p>“Well,” began Paul, “I happened to be looking<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span> -through the newspaper files of the last two months -and I noticed that three out of the last four fires -occurred at houses belonging to the Jones and -Jones realty company. The papers also mentioned -several addresses of other houses of theirs, and I -picked this one to look things over.”</p> - -<p>“But why should there be anything suspicious -about that?” asked the shrewd old man.</p> - -<p>“I thought that possibly somebody had a -grudge against the realty company or against one -of the Joneses. So I thought I might as well do -a little investigation.”</p> - -<p>Captain Bob wobbled his head. “You young -pups!” he muttered. “There is no getting away -from you. Did I hear you say that you want to be -a doctor?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. I am going away to college in September. -Jack and I, both of us are going to study to be -doctors.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I don’t know about your friend Jack, -but I think you ought to study to be a detective.”</p> - -<p>“Then I guessed?” cried Paul.</p> - -<p>“You certainly did,” was the answer. “And let’s -walk away before someone sees us. You go first -and wait for me at the end of the street.”</p> - -<p>Paul obeyed. He sprinted across the yard and -over the fence and walked away. Two minutes -later, Captain Bob joined him and he related to -the old man his experience of that night and how -he had already walked off and then returned. “I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span> -thought for a while that the hunch was a very -poor one,” he concluded.</p> - -<p>“No,” answered the captain. “On the contrary, -it was a most logical one. Have you done any -more investigations along this line?”</p> - -<p>Paul became wary. He realized that again Captain -Bob was trying to elicit information from -him. He shook his head. “Not much,” was his -answer.</p> - -<p>“Well, just keep it up. Perhaps if we continue -we may yet catch the culprit.”</p> - -<p>“I hope so,” remarked Paul.</p> - -<p>Soon after they separated, Captain Bob saying -that he was going home and Paul seriously intended -to do the same. In front of his own home, -he paused and leaned against the gate. Ken -crossed the street and came up to him. “Say, -where have you been all evening?” inquired the -latter.</p> - -<p>“Oh, just following up a hunch of mine.”</p> - -<p>“What sort of hunch?”</p> - -<p>“Tell you about it later. Did you see Jack?”</p> - -<p>“No and he isn’t home either because I went -over to call him.”</p> - -<p>Paul leaned against the fence and mused. The -wind pushed a piece of paper against his leg. -Bending down to pull it away, he suddenly remembered -something. “Come on,” he said to his -friend.</p> - -<p>“Where to?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span></p> - -<p>“To that house which Jack showed us this -morning.”</p> - -<p>“What for? It is kind of late, too. Almost ten -o’clock.”</p> - -<p>“We will be back shortly. Come on.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">A Bump on the Head</span></p> - -<p>That same night Jack was impatient to be -through with supper, and immediately after, he -left his house and hiked down to Jones Street. -He didn’t know exactly what to expect, nor was he -sure that anything at all was going to happen. He -thought that it would be best to stick around and -if Mr. Grey came out of his hiding, to follow him. -It was now four days after the fire on Water -Street and something was bound to happen in the -immediate future. But what, or how, or when, -was still a mystery to him.</p> - -<p>Jack took along with him a brown sweater. He -thought that if there was any need for it, he -would put it on, and thus be able to change his -appearance, if only slightly. He had the sweater -wrapped up in a package under his arm. That too -would make a slight difference in his appearance—first -carrying a package and later being without -one.</p> - -<p>He took the same position as the day before -and he did not have to wait long for darkness to -come. It was already dusk when he came to Jones -Street. Just as soon as it was dark enough, he -changed his place by coming forward and hiding<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span> -behind the chassis of a wrecked car. That secured -for him a better view of the street as well as the -corner.</p> - -<p>Watchful waiting—that was his task. But how -long? Wasn’t Mr. Grey ever coming out? Was he -to be disappointed tonight? He glanced at his -watch; it was five minutes after nine. He saw the -stars come out one by one in the sky and the moon -come up on the horizon. In the street and around -the corner there seemed to be very little activity. -People passed up and down but he was not interested -in them. Soon he saw the grocery man -emerge and lock up his store.</p> - -<p>Jack waited and watched, counting each minute. -Time hung heavy on his hands. He began to wish, -as he had the day before that he had never -bothered with it at all, but the next instant he -thought differently. He was in it and he meant to -stick it through; he would not give it up just because -he was impatient. It was quite possible, he -thought to himself that Mr. Grey would not attempt -one of his usual jaunts through the town. -After all, one could not expect things to happen -every night. It was quite possible that Mr. Grey -had become suspicious, that he had actually become -aware that he was being followed. Anything -was possible, he thought to himself.</p> - -<p>Ten minutes passed, fifteen minutes, twenty -minutes—and still nothing happened. Gradually, -Jack became convinced that Mr. Grey was not<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span> -coming out tonight. Suddenly it occurred to him -that perhaps he had come too late. He remembered -that the day before Mr. Grey had ventured -forth at about six-thirty. And tonight he had not -arrived there until about seven-thirty. He nodded -to himself and thought that no doubt he had come -too late. But what to do now and where to look -first? He certainly could not just walk around -town and look for his man; that would probably -be futile. He debated with himself whether to go -to Water Street, to the site of the last fire or to -go to the house where he had followed Mr. Grey -the night before. He decided on the latter course -and off he went.</p> - -<p>Peace and darkness shrouded the house. Jack -walked up and down several times on the wrong -side of the street. Then, growing bold he dashed -across the street and into the yard. Not thinking -it wise to approach the house, he crept noiselessly -along the fence and all around the yard. There -seemed to be not a soul around; except for the -wind, nothing else seemed to stir. He approached -the wall of the house and tried to peek into a window. -But it was dark and, naturally, he saw -nothing.</p> - -<p>Cautiously, Jack approached the front of the -house. Suddenly he stopped and held his breath. -He heard a slight rumbling noise. He listened -closely. Again the same noise. “Mice or rats,” he -told himself. He moved forward again then, flattening<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span> -himself out against the wall, he waited. A -woman passed down the street. He took out his -searchlight which he was now glad he had -brought, and moved forward again to the front -of the house. Putting his hand on the knob, he -turned it and the door opened slightly. Wondering -how it was that the hinges, probably rusty, -did not squeak, he pushed the door wider open.</p> - -<p>He flashed his light on and stepped quickly into -the hall and closed the door behind him. He threw -a beam of light on the papers which Paul had -pointed out to him; they were still there, in the -same spot and untouched. Again he thought he -heard a slight rumbling noise. Backing up close -against the wall, he listened. Yes, there it was -again. Rats or mice, he thought to himself. For -a fraction of a second he hesitated. What was he -doing in here, he asked himself. Did he expect to -find Mr. Grey in the house? If so, what would he -do if he did? Beside, Paul, Ken and he had been -in the house only that morning.</p> - -<p>Brushing aside all the doubts in his mind, he -tiptoed along the hall. He passed one door, the -second door. He retraced his steps and threw a -beam of light upon the stairway. Suddenly he felt -a sharp blow on the back of his head. His knees -gave way and before he crashed to the floor, he -sensed a figure fleeing past him and out through -the door. As he fell to the floor he saw a million -colored stars converging upon his eyes. Innumerable<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span> -distorted thoughts flashed through his mind. -Then darkness and he knew no more.</p> - -<p>Jack opened his eyes and through a haze saw -two figures hovering over him. He reached to the -back of his head and writhed with pain. Somebody -was bending over him and talking but he could not -understand what he was saying; it sounded like -buzzing in his ears. He closed his eyes and relaxed. -Very suddenly he sat up and looked around. -He rubbed his eyes, then the back of his head; he -felt a large bump there and touching it made him -shiver with pain. “How are you, old boy?” somebody -was asking him.</p> - -<p>The person bending over him, murmured -softly, “How do you feel, Jack old boy?”</p> - -<p>The mist before his eyes cleared and in the -darkness he made out Paul on his knees in front -of him and a short distance away, Ken. He turned -his head and he noticed that he was in the open. -“W-w-where am I?” he asked, his face distorted -with pain as he touched the bump on the back of -his head.</p> - -<p>“You’re all right,” Paul assured him. “Just tell -me how you feel. Any broken bones?” he asked, -smiling.</p> - -<p>Jack felt himself all over, and answered, “No, -I guess not.” Looking into his friend’s smiling -face, he also grinned, “Just where am I and what -happened to me?” he asked curiously.</p> - -<p>“What happened to you, I don’t know; you<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span> -will have to tell us that. But I can tell you where -we are. We are in the yard of—”</p> - -<p>“Yes, I know,” interrupted Jack. He now remembered -the house, where he had been socked -on the head. Rising to his feet, he felt a little -wobbly. Paul supported him. “Let’s go away from -here,” he said dejectedly.</p> - -<p>Paul laughed. “Nobody will attack us,” he -said.</p> - -<p>They walked off. Jack was flanked on either -side by Paul and Ken. After a short silence, Jack -asked, “How did you come to be there? And tell -me what happened, will you?”</p> - -<p>“You’d better tell us what happened,” asserted -Ken. “We found you there stretched out horizontally. -Some bump you have, too.”</p> - -<p>Jack touched the wound and groaned with pain. -“It’s nothing much,” said Paul. “You’ll live a -long time yet.”</p> - -<p>Paul and Ken laughed. But Jack couldn’t see -what was so funny. Ken said, “Come on, tell us -what happened.”</p> - -<p>“That’s just it,” protested Jack, “I wish I knew -myself. The last thing I can remember is that I -got an awful wallop on the back of the head and -sock! I was out.”</p> - -<p>“Who was that person we saw running away -from the house?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>Jack stopped in his tracks. “Running away!” he -exclaimed. “Who? What? When?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Ken and I,” Paul explained, “were coming up -the street. We were about ten feet from the house, -when we saw somebody dash out of the yard and -down toward the other end of the street. We -thought there might be something wrong so we -investigated.”</p> - -<p>“And we found you,” added Ken.</p> - -<p>“He must have been the fellow who socked you -on the head,” concluded Paul.</p> - -<p>“Well, why didn’t one of you go after him?” -demanded Jack.</p> - -<p>“Somebody had to take care of you, didn’t -they?” questioned Paul.</p> - -<p>“By then it was too late,” added Ken.</p> - -<p>Jack began to walk back toward the house. -“Come on,” he said, “we’re going back and see -what happened.”</p> - -<p>“What for?” asked Paul. “We looked and -didn’t see a thing.”</p> - -<p>Jack felt his pockets. “Besides,” he added, “my -flashlight must be somewhere there in the hall.”</p> - -<p>“No. Here it is,” said Ken, taking it out of his -pocket.</p> - -<p>But Jack insisted on going back to the house -and they did. Ken was left outside on guard while -the other two entered the house. They found the -first door in the hall open. The dust on the floor -was stirred by many footprints but there was -nothing else visible in the room. The two returned -to the hall and searched but they found nothing.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[112]</a></span> -“I wonder who it was that socked me like that?” -muttered Jack.</p> - -<p>“It’s no use wondering because you can only -guess,” asserted Paul. “My own opinion is that -some stray individual happened to be in here when -you entered and just as your back was turned, he -hit you on the head and escaped. That’s all.”</p> - -<p>“But why? Why?” demanded Jack. “And what -was he doing here?”</p> - -<p>“How should I know? And since there is nothing -else we can do here, let’s go.”</p> - -<p>Joining Ken, they walked off and went home.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XIII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Discovery</span></p> - -<p>Ken was saying, “It is rather strange that somebody -should have been in that house when it is -supposed to be empty and deserted.”</p> - -<p>“But why?” demanded Paul. “Being empty and -unoccupied, anybody might walk in and look -around.”</p> - -<p>“Very true,” commented Jack, “but why should -he sock me, that’s something I can’t understand.” -He put his hand behind his head and winced with -pain. “Suppose,” he continued, “some person does -stray into the house and while he is there I enter. -Does that mean that he has to bang me on the -head and run away? It is not logical. There must -be something to it.”</p> - -<p>“You may be right,” conceded Paul, “but somehow -it doesn’t strike me so. By the way, did I tell -you fellows how I ran into Captain Bob last -night and almost scared him to death?”</p> - -<p>“No,” cried Ken. “Tell us.”</p> - -<p>Paul narrated his last night’s adventure. The -boys laughed heartily at the thought of Captain -Bob being scared out of his wits. He also told -them that the captain had also had the same -hunch as he. Then he asked, “What do you fellows -think of it?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[114]</a></span></p> - -<p>Jack merely shrugged his shoulders, manifesting -his lack of opinion. Ken, however, said, “It -sounds quite logical to me.”</p> - -<p>“Logic does not always prove anything,” remarked -Paul.</p> - -<p>Jack jumped out of his seat and snapped his -fingers. “I have an idea,” he cried.</p> - -<p>“Tell us,” said Ken.</p> - -<p>“What is it?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“It is something I couldn’t exactly explain; it’s -just something I feel—a hunch. Come on, we’re -going back to that empty house.”</p> - -<p>“But what for?” demanded Paul. “We have -been there several times and we have found no -clues or anything.”</p> - -<p>“Well, we’re going back and look again.”</p> - -<p>Jack disappeared into the house and a minute -later came out carrying his flashlight and as baseball -bat. “What is the bat for?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“Just in case of anything,” was the answer. -“I’m not taking chances any more.”</p> - -<p>The boys rocked with laughter, Jack joining -in. “You think you’re going to hit somebody with -that thing?” questioned Ken, still laughing.</p> - -<p>“I suppose the fellow who hit you is waiting -there for you to even things up,” commented Paul.</p> - -<p>“You fellows can laugh all you want,” said -Jack, “but I’m taking it along just the same. Come -on.”</p> - -<p>They were on their way. Jack said, “Paul, you<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span> -and I are going into the house, while you, Ken, -are going to hide outside and give us the usual -signal in case you see somebody suspicious coming -up the street or about to enter the house.”</p> - -<p>“And what are we going to do?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“You and I are going into that first room and -investigate. If there is anything to be found, somehow -I feel convinced that it will be found in that -room. I have only one reason for it. When I was -hit on the head I had my back to that door. Therefore -the person who hit me came out of that -room.”</p> - -<p>“That sounds reasonable,” remarked Paul. -“But I, on the contrary, have no illusions about -finding any clues there. It seems to me that we -went over every inch of ground in that room.”</p> - -<p>“You are wrong, Paul,” contradicted Jack. -“All we did was merely look around. We did not -make a real search of the room.”</p> - -<p>The boys came to the house. All three of them -made sure of a good location for Ken to hide -and keep watch. When that was done, Paul and -Jack entered the house and closed the door behind -them. “Now,” whispered Jack, “Let’s open the -door of this first room and examine it.” Jack did -so and swung the door back and forth on its -hinges. “Notice something?” he asked his chum.</p> - -<p>“I most certainly do, Jack. This is very -suspicious.”</p> - -<p>“What is it you notice?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Why, the movement of the door swinging on -its hinges; it’s noiseless. Isn’t that what you -mean?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. The hinges must be well oiled and that is -why I did not hear when the door was opened and -I was hit on the head. Under normal circumstances, -the hinges should be rusty and there -should be plenty of squeaking every time the door -is swung open.”</p> - -<p>“You are right, Jack. But I still don’t see what -your hunch is.”</p> - -<p>“Let’s just wait and see. I don’t know exactly -what it is myself yet. I can only make a wild guess. -Let’s go into the room.”</p> - -<p>They entered and closed the door behind them. -They had no use for their flashlights because the -room had a window in each corner wall, and it -was now early morning, about ten o’clock. “Notice -another thing,” remarked Jack. “The windows—they -are all in perfect shape.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right, but that is nothing extraordinary. -It is possible that the last tenant had moved -out only recently.”</p> - -<p>“Well, that doesn’t matter so much. Shall we -first thoroughly go over the walls or the floor?”</p> - -<p>Paul looked about for several seconds before -he answered. “I think we had better do the floor -first.” They looked down. “You know,” continued -Paul, “I am somehow beginning to get a hunch -like you have. I can’t exactly explain it, but—”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span></p> - -<p>Jack interrupted, crying enthusiastically, “Do -you really mean that? Because then—”</p> - -<p>Paul held up a finger to his lips and cautioned, -“Sh! Not so loud. Walls have ears, you know, -and all that.” Both of them crouched down. “Do -you notice something odd about the dust on the -floor?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied Jack. “I noticed it the first time -we were here but I forgot to mention it. There -seems to be very little dust on this floor compared -to the other rooms.”</p> - -<p>“That is right. Now you begin at the other -end of the room and I will begin at this end of the -room. Examine every single plank of wood and -see if it lifts out of the floor.”</p> - -<p>“That was my intention exactly,” whispered -Jack. “You are getting on to my hunch perfectly.”</p> - -<p>Paul by now had become excited with the new -turn of events and he was eager to be doing something. -“Less talk and more work,” he snapped at -his friend briskly.</p> - -<p>Jack smiled and moved away to his end of the -floor. The boys partitioned the floor in half and -set to work with zest. They ran their hands over -the floor and tested each plank. Despite their -eagerness and rapid movements, it took them a -long time. The two of them must have been working -close to an hour, and Paul was occupied now -in front of the window when he hissed across the -room, “Jack, I have it!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span></p> - -<p>Paul flushed with excitement. Jack raced across -the room and joined his friend. Paul had discovered -a removable piece of wood about six inches -long by about three inches wide. He held it up -in his hand. “Now!” he whispered. He plunged -his hand into the opening and pulled. But too -much effort was not necessary, the trap door -opened easily. Jack was ready to rush right down, -but Paul, ever prudent and careful, grabbed him -by the arm and restrained him. “Wait a moment,” -he whispered. “Let’s make sure of things.”</p> - -<p>Paul went to the window and peeked out. He -located Ken and saw the boy on guard, his eyes -roaming everywhere and on the alert. Jack had in -the meanwhile gone out into the hall. Paul now -joined him and together they looked through the -house to make sure whether anyone was in there -or was watching them. Reassured at last, they -returned to the room and again pulled up the -trap door. There were stairs leading down, but -it was dark below and Jack flashed on his light. -From every appearance it looked like an ordinary -cellar. Paul whispered, “All right, let’s go down. -I’ll go first.”</p> - -<p>Jack nodded and his chum began to descend the -stairs. He followed, gripping his bat in his hand. -Becoming conscious of the weapon, he smiled to -himself remembering how his friends joked at his -taking it along. Now, in case of anything, it would -be very useful.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[119]</a></span></p> - -<p>Paul, who carried the flashlight, reached the -bottom of the stairs and waited for his chum. Jack -joined him. Together they followed the beam of -light around the room. At one side was a printing -press and quite a bit of printing paraphernalia; in -the center of the room was a table and several -chairs; against the walls were several boxes, a -jacket and a cap hung on a nail and from the ceiling -there extended an electric bulb. Jack whispered, -“What do you make of it all?”</p> - -<p>Paul shrugged his shoulders. Again he threw -a beam of light all around the room. Satisfied with -what he saw, he turned and motioned to his friend -that they leave. Jack shook his head. “No,” he -whispered, “let’s see exactly what they have -here.”</p> - -<p>“Not now,” was the whispered reply. “Some -other time.”</p> - -<p>He began to mount the stairs and Jack followed. -They closed the trap after them and replaced -the piece of wood. Paul went over to the -window and peeked out. And it was a lucky thing -that he did. Locating Ken on the spot they had -left him, he noticed the guard put his fingers to his -lips and whistle. But they could not hear the whistle -because both the door to the house and the -door to the room were closed. Grabbing Jack by -the arm, he cried, “Hurry!” and dragged him -out of the room. In the hall they just managed to -duck under the stairs as the door opened and by<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[120]</a></span> -the sound of the footsteps the boys guessed that -two men had entered. They heard a gruff voice -mutter, “All right, we’ll do it.”</p> - -<p>The next instant they heard the second door -open and close. Venturing out from their hiding -place, they listened carefully to the opening of -the trap door, one man descending, then the -second man descending and then, plop, the trap -door closing again. The boys looked at each other. -Paul smiled while Jack wiped the perspiration off -his forehead with a muffled sigh of relief. Paul -opened the door noiselessly and they stepped out -into the open. At a sign from Paul, Ken was in an -instant over the fence and away. A moment later -Jack and Paul were out of the yard and running -down the street.</p> - -<p>They joined Ken at the end of the street. The -two boys did not dare to speak until they were -some distance away from the empty house. -Finally, Jack, who couldn’t restrain himself any -more, heaved a very audible sigh of relief and -exclaimed, “Boy! Was that a close shave! I’m so -nervous, my hands are shaking.”</p> - -<p>“What happened?” asked Ken who could see -that something important had transpired.</p> - -<p>“Let’s not talk now,” said Paul. “Wait until -we get someplace where we can’t be overheard.” -He looked from one of his friends to the other. -“Don’t look so curious and excited,” he added.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[121]</a></span> -“Let’s discuss some ordinary topic. Did you fix -your dad’s car, Jack?”</p> - -<p>Jack looked at his chum and burst out laughing. -Paul looked as calm and unconcerned as -though nothing had happened. “I’m glad to see -you fellows enjoying your fun,” remarked Ken. -“But I wish you would tell me the joke so I could -also enjoy it and laugh.”</p> - -<p>That set both Jack and Paul laughing. “Pardon -us, Ken,” said Paul. “But there really is nothing -to laugh about. That’s the joke. But we will tell -you all about it right away.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[122]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XIV</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">A New Turn of Events</span></p> - -<p>Jack stopped dead in his tracks. His two -friends also stopped and faced him. “What is it?” -asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“I was just wondering,” answered Jack, -“whether we shouldn’t go back there, watch until -those two leave and then go down there again.”</p> - -<p>“Go down where?” asked Ken; they had not -yet told him of the cellar they had discovered.</p> - -<p>Paul shook his head. “No,” he said. “We have -had enough for one day. And then, I want some -time to think this thing over and try to piece -everything together. Let’s go to Ken’s garage -where we can have some privacy.”</p> - -<p>“You really think we shouldn’t go back?” asked -Jack.</p> - -<p>“Yes, I’m convinced.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t mind me,” said Ken as the three of -them continued walking. “I’m only an ornament -among the three of us.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t be so impatient,” said Paul. “Wait. -We’ll tell you everything.”</p> - -<p>They came to Ken’s garage and sat down on -boxes. Paul related what had happened. Several -times Ken gasped in astonishment. When the story -was finally ended, Paul commented, “But what -puzzles me is how all the incidents fit together.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[123]</a></span> -The fires, Mr. Grey, Jack getting bumped on the -head, Captain Bob, where do all these facts fit in?”</p> - -<p>“As far as Captain Bob is concerned, you can -leave him out of it,” commented Jack. “No matter -what it is all about, I’m quite sure he is an -innocent party.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Ken. “As chief of the fire department -he naturally would be interested in why there -are an unusually large number of fires.”</p> - -<p>“All right, suppose we agree that Captain Bob -is out of it,” said Paul, “what about all the other -facts. How does Mr. Grey fit in, for example?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, how does he fit in?” asked Ken. “Isn’t -it possible that what you stumbled on today has -nothing to do with all the other incidents?”</p> - -<p>“It may sound all right,” remarked Jack, “but -I don’t think so. For example, by now I am convinced -that the fellow who hit me came out of -that cellar.”</p> - -<p>“But why should he run away?” questioned -Paul. “Why couldn’t he have made you a prisoner, -as that would be a more natural thing to do?”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps,” argued Jack. “But if he had, he -would have had to take me down in the cellar. -Now suppose he blindfolds me, still I might -hear something they say. I might escape and inform -the police. My opinion is that he hit me and -ran away, hoping that the blow on the head would -scare me so that I would never return.”</p> - -<p>His two companions nodded. “Suppose we accept<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[124]</a></span> -that as the real reason. Where does everything -else fit in? What are they doing with a printing -press down there? They shouldn’t have to -hide that.”</p> - -<p>“But the mere fact that they are hiding it is -proof that they are doing something illegal,” -commented Ken.</p> - -<p>His two companions repeated the word, “Illegal! -Illegal!”</p> - -<p>Jack began to walk up and down, his chin in -his hand and deep in thought. The other two were -also silent and thinking hard. Jack picked up an -old newspaper from the floor. Suddenly he dropped -the paper, jumped high into the air and cried -frantically, “I have it! I have it!”</p> - -<p>His two friends leaped out of their seats, and -ran up to him. “Well!” demanded Paul, for once -impatient and curious. “What is the answer?”</p> - -<p>“The answer is,” whispered Jack and then -paused, “Counterfeiters!” he whispered.</p> - -<p>Ken jumped into the air enthusiastically. -“That’s right!” he cried. “That’s right!”</p> - -<p>Paul smiled with satisfaction. Putting an arm -around Jack, he said, “It sounds very reasonable. -Counterfeiters have to use a printing press. And -counterfeiters do something illegal and therefore -have to hide.” He nodded his head. “Sounds very -logical.”</p> - -<p>They returned to their seats. “But,” continued -Paul, “even if we grant the fact that they are<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[125]</a></span> -counterfeiters, how do all the other incidents fit -in? The fires and Mr. Grey for example?”</p> - -<p>“Must they fit in?” inquired Ken.</p> - -<p>“They don’t have to,” was Paul’s reply, “but -I have a notion that they do.”</p> - -<p>Jack nodded and agreed with his chum. “I feel -the same way about it,” he said. “It is very possible -that what we have discovered today has absolutely -nothing to do with the fires or Mr. Grey. -But somehow I have a feeling that there is some -connection. But I can’t say what.”</p> - -<p>“But if there is some sort of a connection between -all these facts, how do you think they fit -in?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>Jack shook his head. Ken said, “Suppose we begin -from the very beginning. I mean from the time -you came upon the house, Jack. Now, was it not -Mr. Grey who led you to the house?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. And then he sneaked around in the back -and scared me half to death.”</p> - -<p>“All right. Now if he had anything to do with -the counterfeiters do you think he would have led -you to that very house he wants you to keep away -from? If he were a member of that gang of counterfeiters -and he knew you were following him, -don’t you think he would lead you to some other -part of town?”</p> - -<p>Paul said, “That may sound logical, but the -opposite may also sound logical. For example, if -we concede that the fellow who hit Jack on the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[126]</a></span> -head and then ran away did it to frighten him so -that he would keep away from there, why can’t we -say the same thing about Mr. Grey? Is it not possible -that Mr. Grey knew he was being followed -and purposely led Jack to that very house, then -sneaked up behind him to frighten him so that he -would never return? Isn’t that very plausible?”</p> - -<p>“Say,” cried Jack, “if what you say is true, that -fellow certainly made a mistake.”</p> - -<p>“And how!” echoed Ken.</p> - -<p>“Now if we know all that,” continued Paul, -“that makes Mr. Grey a member of the gang of -counterfeiters.”</p> - -<p>“But what about the fires? And leading Betty -away. And those white cards, what about them? -And the robbery at Professor Link’s?”</p> - -<p>The boys looked at each other very glumly. -“The whole thing is like a crazy jigsaw puzzle,” -muttered Paul.</p> - -<p>“Telling me!” mumbled Ken. “It has already -given me a headache. The thing worries me so, -I can’t sleep nights.”</p> - -<p>The boys laughed at the manner in which Ken -said it. “You have to sleep,” remarked Jack. -“Otherwise how are we going to solve this jigsaw -puzzle of a mystery?”</p> - -<p>The boys sat around and brooded. Three minds -with one thought—how to solve the mystery; how -all the details fitted into the general picture. They -were so silent and lost in thought that they were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[127]</a></span> -not at all aware of Ken’s little sister Betty approaching -and regarding them with surprise. She -stood rooted in one spot and stared at her brother -and his two friends. Finally she couldn’t bear it -any longer. She opened her mouth wide and cried -suddenly, “Boo!” The boys jumped as though -they were shot. Reassured again, they smiled -heaving sighs of relief. “Mother says you should -come to dinner,” she said.</p> - -<p>“Dinner!” exclaimed Ken. “Is it time for dinner -already?”</p> - -<p>All three simultaneously looked at their watches. -“My, how time flies,” mumbled Jack. “Twelve-thirty -already.”</p> - -<p>Mrs. Armstrong came to the porch and called, -“Betty!”</p> - -<p>“I’m right here, Mother,” cried the child. And -she ran to the porch.</p> - -<p>“Did you find Ken?”</p> - -<p>“He is at the garage. And Jack and Paul too.”</p> - -<p>“Tell them all to come in; lunch is ready.”</p> - -<p>The boys entered the house. Paul and Jack telephoned -home that they were having lunch with -Ken. At the table, in the midst of the meal, Jack -almost choked as he thought of something. “Hurry -up, fellows,” he whispered. “I’ve just thought -of something important.”</p> - -<p>“Can’t you at least eat without thinking?” -mocked Ken.</p> - -<p>“Yes, take it easy,” was Paul’s advice.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[128]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Choke easy, you mean,” corrected Ken.</p> - -<p>“Stop all that talk,” spoke up Jack, “and hurry -up and finish. I want to get out and talk this thing -over.”</p> - -<p>As soon as they were through with their meal, -the boys retreated to the garage again. “Now -what is it?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“It is something that I thought of just as soon -as we got into the cellar,” replied Jack, “but it -slipped my mind and I forgot to mention it.”</p> - -<p>“Well, what is it?” asked Ken. “Don’t keep us -in suspense.”</p> - -<p>“It’s this. When we descended the stairs into -the cellar, Paul, it occurred to me that if the police -cornered the gang of counterfeiters in that cellar, -how would they manage to escape?”</p> - -<p>“They wouldn’t,” was Ken’s opinion.</p> - -<p>“Suppose you were one of the gang, wouldn’t -you think of such a possibility and make sure of -an exit, of a means of escape?”</p> - -<p>“Certainly.”</p> - -<p>“Then that means, that probably there is another -entrance or exit into that cellar.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” said Paul. “I’m glad you -thought of it. It is something we should have -thought of at once.”</p> - -<p>“Oh I wish you didn’t,” said Ken, pretending -that he was in tears, “because that only adds another -item in the puzzle to solve.”</p> - -<p>“Which isn’t going to be very easy.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[129]</a></span></p> - -<p>“No, it certainly won’t.”</p> - -<p>“Let’s come down to earth now,” remarked Jack, -“and think in terms of action. What are we going -to do now? What should be our plan of action -from now on? Can you think of anything, Paul?”</p> - -<p>For a short while, there was silence. At last -Paul ventured to suggest, “We might, for example, -give up following Mr. Grey; at least temporarily. -Then we have to watch that house and get -to know the men entering and leaving and determine -as well as we can who the members of the -gang are.”</p> - -<p>“I was just thinking of something,” remarked -Ken. “Do you remember, Paul, how hostile the -grocery man was and how he squirmed out of -giving you any information about Mr. Grey?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, what about it?”</p> - -<p>“Well, it just occurred to me, that the man must -know something if he is so anxious to conceal it.”</p> - -<p>“Hmm!” muttered Jack.</p> - -<p>“Another thing,” continued Ken. “Isn’t it true, -Jack, that each time you followed Mr. Grey, it -seemed to you that he emerged from that corner -house, the house in which the store is situated?”</p> - -<p>“That’s right. What are you driving at?”</p> - -<p>Ken scratched his head. “I feel this way about -it,” he said, “that most likely that corner house is -owned or at least rented by the grocery man. Now -if Mr. Grey comes out of that house, he must -live there.” His two companions leaned forward<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[130]</a></span> -and listened to him attentively. They suspected -that what he was saying might be very valuable. -He continued, “Therefore, if Mr. Grey lives in -that house, the grocery man must know him; -under ordinary circumstances, he would have no -reason to say that he didn’t know Mr. Grey. It -therefore follows that either he knows that Mr. -Grey is a crook or possibly he himself is somehow -involved in the situation.”</p> - -<p>The boys gasped. The reasonableness and logic -of Ken’s statement was beyond question. Yet how -true was it? If it were true, another missing link -was being added to the already complicating puzzle. -“Then why,” asked Jack, “should the woman -have mentioned the name Mr. Grey when you entered -the store and asked for information Ken?”</p> - -<p>Paul answered, “That’s simple. If we assume -that what Ken said is true, the grocery man’s wife -knows nothing of her husband’s operations and -very innocently gave away the name.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, that’s right,” agreed Ken.</p> - -<p>“That only makes it worse,” muttered Jack.</p> - -<p>Again the group became silent. They would hit -upon an idea, discuss it rapidly and then they -would brood for a while. Jack leaped to his feet. -“Let’s do something,” he cried.</p> - -<p>Paul rose. “I for one,” he said, “am going home -and I suggest you do the same. That will calm us -down. Then we will meet again after supper and—do -something.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[131]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XV</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Following Up Their Clues</span></p> - -<p>Jack was restless, excited. The mystery had him -upset. While Paul and Ken each went to their respective -homes, Jack loitered along Main Street. -Not that he hoped to do anything or come upon -any clues; he merely didn’t feel like going home. -He walked down as far as Jones Street and again -investigated the neighborhood. Returning to the -corner, he went into the store and on the pretense -that he was buying a small box of chocolate wafers, -he let his eyes wander about the place. But there -was nothing especial to see; it was the same as any -other ordinary grocery. The woman was in the -store and she appeared to be a mild sort of person. -Considering it unwise to ask any questions -or seek any information from her, he paid for -his wafers and left.</p> - -<p>He munched as he walked along. Thinking -hard for some plan of action, he couldn’t come to -any definite decision. Finally he concluded that -Paul was right—he should go home and let the -matter rest for a while. Quickening his pace, he -walked home and busied himself with tasks about -the house.</p> - -<p>After supper, the three boys met at Paul’s -home. They sat down on the porch and waited<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[132]</a></span> -for someone to speak first. Paul finally spoke up -and said, “Right now, I think, we have to look -into two angles of the situation. One of us should -go down to Jones Street and watch the grocery -man. The other two should go back to that empty -house and see what happens there.”</p> - -<p>“How about you going down to Jones Street?” -asked Jack. “You spoke to the grocery man and -you know what he looks like.”</p> - -<p>“That suits me. You and Ken, in the meanwhile, -will watch the empty house.”</p> - -<p>“How about that other angle of yours, Paul? -The one about watching out for a fire at some -house owned by the Jones and Jones real estate -company,” commented Ken. “I think it’s a good -hunch that we ought to follow up.”</p> - -<p>“I think we can drop it for tonight at any rate -and see what happens,” answered Paul. “Let’s -go.”</p> - -<p>They walked off the porch and headed for -Main Street. “So long,” called Paul, and waved.</p> - -<p>“Good luck,” returned Jack.</p> - -<p>“We’ll be seeing you,” said Ken.</p> - -<p>Jack and Ken walked off together. “It’s a little -early yet, don’t you think?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>Jack looked at his watch; it was not quite -seven-thirty. “Yes,” he answered. “But we will go -down there anyhow and see.”</p> - -<p>They walked past the house as though they -were ordinary pedestrians. Coming to the railroad<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[133]</a></span> -tracks, they turned around and walked back -through the street on which the back of the house -faced. It was eight o’clock now but it was still -daylight. So they decided to walk around the block -once more and as far as the railroad tracks. As -soon as it became dusk, they returned to the -house and took up different positions. Jack hid -himself directly behind the fence overlooking the -front of the house; Ken, on the other hand, picked -out a hiding place at the rear of the house. The -two were thus able to keep a watch all around the -house and at the same time be within reach of -each other in case of necessity.</p> - -<p>The boys watched the sky become gray and the -stars come out; the moon crept out of the horizon -and night descended. Perfectly still, noiseless, inconspicuous, -the two kept guard. Every once in a -while, people passed up and down the street, and -immediately Jack was on the alert, anxious, impatient. -But nothing happened and time dragged -along. Suddenly he heard the sound of a soft whistle -and he turned his head to locate Ken. Again -the same soft whistle. Jack looked all around him, -then, very cautiously, he crept over to his friend. -Ken had his ear to the ground. Jack whispered, -“What’s up?”</p> - -<p>Ken motioned for his friend to put his ear to -the ground and Jack did so. He flattened himself -out and glued his ear to the ground. A slight trembling -of the earth came to his ears, accompanied<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[134]</a></span> -by a steady, muffled sound. For about five minutes -both boys put their ears to the ground and listened. -Ken, although he guessed what it was, -whispered, “What do you think it is?”</p> - -<p>“The printing press.”</p> - -<p>Ken nodded. “I thought so too.”</p> - -<p>Jack whispered, “When did you first hear that -sound?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“It seemed to begin only a short while ago.”</p> - -<p>The boys were silent, thinking hard. If the press -had been operating only a short while, then it was -most logical to conclude that whoever was in the -cellar had come there recently, within the last -thirty, forty, fifty minutes. Yet the boys had been -on guard for a full hour and as far as they knew, -no one had entered the house by the front door. -Jack, therefore, became more firmly convinced -that there was another door somewhere; that the -cellar could be reached and left perhaps some distance -away from the house. Jack whispered, “I’m -going back.”</p> - -<p>Ken nodded. His friend crept away and again he -was alone. Each one in his own hiding place, they -watched and waited, but nothing happened. Overhead -was the blue sky with the moon and the stars. -All around them was darkness. Their waiting and -watching was in vain—at least so it seemed.</p> - -<p>Another hour passed and still nothing happened. -Ken lay with his ear to the ground and occupied -himself with listening to the hissing sound<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[135]</a></span> -that came out of the earth. Jack watched and -waited but not a thing stirred. He became restless -and chafed with impatience. Finally he wiggled -over to Ken and also put his ear to the ground. -Still that hissing sound and the trembling of the -earth. Ken whispered, “They must be working -hard down there.”</p> - -<p>Jack nodded and kept silent. Together they lay -flat on the ground and listened. Again it was Ken -who whispered, “What do you say, you think we -ought to go? There is nothing doing here.”</p> - -<p>“No, let’s wait a short while more. I wonder -what Paul is doing.”</p> - -<p>“Same here. I hope at least he has found something -interesting to do. This doing nothing is killing -me.”</p> - -<p>Jack felt the same way about it. As a matter of -fact, Jack was of more impatient nature than Ken, -but he felt it upon himself to urge his friend on. -“Take it easy and don’t lose your patience,” he -whispered back. “A thing like this takes time you -know; plenty of time.”</p> - -<p>Again they fixed their ears to the ground. They -remained like that for a short time. Suddenly they -pushed their ears deeper into the ground. In the -darkness, they looked at each other. “Do you hear -what I hear?” whispered Ken.</p> - -<p>“Yes, nothing.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right. They must have stopped the -printing press.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[136]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Yes. Now what?”</p> - -<p>Silence. The boys knitted their brows. If they -had stopped their press, Jack asked himself, -would they be coming out of the cellar now? And -if they were, which door would they use? Possibly -they would come out by the front door because -they might not care to use the same door for an -exit as well as an entrance. But if they did use the -rear door how would the boys find it? Jack looked -around. It might be in either of three directions, -he reasoned to himself—on either sides of the -house or to the rear; to the front was the sidewalk -and street, which would be a most improbable -means for a tunnel or other form of approach -and exit. “Stay here,” he whispered to Ken. “I’m -going back to my place. We will stay here another -half hour, and if nothing happens, I have -other plans.”</p> - -<p>“What?”</p> - -<p>“I’ll tell you later.”</p> - -<p>Jack crept back to his hiding place. With nothing -else to do but to wait and watch he again became -conscious of the darkness and of time dragging. -There was utter stillness and he could hear -himself breathe; the tick of his watch in his pocket -sounded extraordinarily loud. He waited. A few -pedestrians passed by. He waited some more. He -counted every minute. When the time was up a low -muffled whistle issued from his lips. He turned his -head and saw Ken creep out of his place. Together<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[137]</a></span> -they sneaked out of the yard and walked -off. Ken asked, “Well, what are your other -plans?”</p> - -<p>“I was thinking,” said Jack, “that they must -have another way of getting in and out—”</p> - -<p>“Yes, you mentioned that once before.”</p> - -<p>“Well, what I was really trying to determine is -where that other entrance might be. Now, logically, -it can be at any one of three places. There -might be a tunnel leading away from the cellar -of the house on either side or at the rear. What -we have to do, therefore, is to examine those three -possibilities.”</p> - -<p>“But we can’t do much tonight,” remarked -Ken. “For one thing it’s dark and there isn’t much -we can see. And secondly, it’s late already.”</p> - -<p>“That’s very true, but I certainly would like to -get an idea of how the land lays.”</p> - -<p>“We can leave that for tomorrow. Now I think -we ought to go over and see if Paul is waiting for -us.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right. I almost forgot about him. I -wonder if he came across anything.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I only hope that he didn’t have to spend -such a dull time as we did,” was Ken’s comment.</p> - -<p>“You have to take things as they come,” answered -Jack. “Sometimes there is plenty to do and -at other times there is nothing to do.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[138]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XVI</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Paul Gets Into Trouble</span></p> - -<p>Ken and Jack came to Paul’s house but they saw -their friend nowhere around. “You think he is in -the house?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“No. He would be waiting for us on the porch.”</p> - -<p>“What will we do, then? Where will we wait -for him?”</p> - -<p>“Let’s wait for him in front of your gate, Ken. -He ought to be coming any minute, I suppose.”</p> - -<p>The boys leaned against the fence, talking in -low tones to while the time away. They were impressed -before with how hard it is to be patient, -but now it was doubly hard. For it seemed that -Paul was not coming. They waited thirty minutes, -an hour, an hour and thirty minutes and still no -Paul. Jack was actually becoming worried that -something had happened to his chum. Ken suggested -several times, “Perhaps he is home. Do you -think we ought to try to find out? Though it’s a -little too late to ring the bell.”</p> - -<p>But Jack knew better; he knew his chum. If -Paul had returned before they did, he would have -waited for them on the porch; that was a certainty. -He would not have gone to bed until he -had seen and spoken to his friends and made sure -that they were all right. Finally Jack could not<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[139]</a></span> -bear it any longer and he muttered, “I’m going to -look for him.”</p> - -<p>“I’m going with you,” said Ken with determination. -“Where will we look first?”</p> - -<p>“There are only two places where we can look—at -Jones Street and then that empty house.”</p> - -<p>“Where will we go first?”</p> - -<p>“What do you think?”</p> - -<p>They went down to Main Street, then they were -undecided as to which direction to take. Jack said, -“Let’s toss a coin.” He drew a nickel out of his -pocket. “Heads we go to Jones Street; tails we go -to that empty house.”</p> - -<p>He tossed the coin into the air, caught it with -his right hand and slapped it down on his left -wrist. Ken put his head close to see. Jack removed -his hand—it was tails up. “The empty house,” he -whispered.</p> - -<p>When Paul started out early in the evening, he -leisurely strolled along Main Street until he came -to his destination. There, he examined the house -on the corner from every possible view. It was a -two story frame house with the grocery occupying -most of the ground floor; the rest of the floor, -Paul figured, were either closets or some form of -storage places. He was pretty sure there were no -living quarters on the ground floor. The people -who occupied the house lived above the store. By -counting the windows—there were seven—he reasoned -that there must be either three or four<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[140]</a></span> -rooms. The grocery man and his wife most likely -occupied one room, Mr. Grey another, and the -children, if there were any, the other one or two -rooms.</p> - -<p>By now it had become dusk and Paul thought -that it was time to take up some hiding position -and watch. The next moment he changed his -mind. Instead of hiding anywhere, he nonchalantly -took up a position across the street and -pretended that he was waiting for someone. He -didn’t have to wait long. Pretty soon he saw Mr. -Grey emerge from around the corner and walk -up Main Street. He wondered where the man -was going and what he might be up to. For several -seconds he debated with himself whether to -follow him or to wait, as he had previously decided, -for the grocery man. He chose to wait. -About fifteen minutes later he saw his man come -out from the rear of the house. “Very clever,” he -thought to himself.</p> - -<p>The grocery man came to the corner and -stopped, looked around and then walked off down -Jones Street. Paul wanted to follow but on second -consideration he realized that the street was deserted -and he would instantly be noticed. He had -a hunch, however, that the man’s walking down -Jones Street was done on purpose to detect anyone -following. Paul ran to the next parallel street -and raced to come to the corner first. He hid in a -doorway and saw his man round the corner and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[141]</a></span> -continue walking on the street parallel to Main -Street. This part of the town was rather empty -and deserted. He therefore decided to let his man -walk at least two hundred and fifty yards ahead -of him.</p> - -<p>Soon the street became busier, with many people -strolling up and down. Paul gradually narrowed -the distance between himself and his man. -They came to about the centre of the town. Suddenly -he caught his breath and his heart began to -beat rapidly. He saw Mr. Grey walking the other -way, and as the two men passed each other, there -was a slight movement of the head on the part of -both of them. So they did know each other! So -there was some connection between the two! Paul -thrilled with the excitement of it.</p> - -<p>At the next corner, the grocery man turned in -and headed for Main Street, where he turned -right and walked straight ahead for several -blocks. At about the middle of the street he joined -a group of three men who were standing to one -side and talking quietly among themselves. Paul -crossed to the other side of the street. Pretending -that he was looking at a window display, he was -actually studying the group of four men. As far -as he could tell, they were not native townspeople; -everything about them looked as though they -came from somewhere else; possibly from a large -city. Two of them were very ordinary looking—of -average size and wearing the usual summer<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[142]</a></span> -clothes. The third person was a tall, fat individual, -with a big head and a double chin. One thing -was common for all three; they all were rather -hard looking. Such was the trio that the grocery -man had joined.</p> - -<p>It was evident that they had a lot to say to -each other, for they talked for some time, while -people passed up and down and paid no attention -to them. Paul decided on a bold step. Walking -down a bit, he crossed over and, falling in behind -a group of strollers, he passed close to the group -of conspirators. But they talked in such low tones -that he could not overhear a word they said.</p> - -<p>Not seeing any other opportunity of overhearing -their conversation, Paul crossed over again, -pretended that he was looking at a window display -and walked down to the corner and back again. -But every second he kept an eye on that group. -Finally after about half an hour, the group broke -up into twos. The big, fat fellow with one of his -companions walked south, while the grocery man -and the third of the trio walked north on Main -Street. Paul decided to follow the grocery man -and his companion.</p> - -<p>They walked straight ahead for several blocks, -then, very nonchalantly rounded the corner and -disappeared. Paul felt the thrill of excitement -grow on him; something hot and exciting bubbled -inside of him. They had turned into the street on -which the empty house was situated. He thought<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[143]</a></span> -of Ken and Jack and their being on guard. But -just then Jack’s well founded hunch occurred to -him; perhaps there was a secret entrance and they -would not use the front door of the house. He -peeked around the corner and saw his men turn -off at the next crossing. “Good!” he thought to -himself. They were not fooling him; it was their -intention to take a roundabout route to throw -anyone off their trail if they happened to be -followed.</p> - -<p>At a rapid pace, he took a direct route to his -destination. He did not intend to go to the house; -if anything happened there, it was up to Jack and -Ken to take care of that and he knew that he could -trust them. His intention was to take up such a -position that they would have to pass him. If they -did not head for the house, then he would follow -them and spy out the secret entrance to the -house.</p> - -<p>There were only three possibilities for a secret -tunnel to the house, Paul reasoned with himself. -It might be on either side or to the rear of the -house. The most probable one was at the rear of -the house because that afforded a direct connection -with very little space intervening between the two -cellars. It would be a simple thing, he thought -to himself, to dig and fortify such an underground -passage.</p> - -<p>Paul hid in a doorway and waited for his -quarry to come along. In time they did and passed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[144]</a></span> -within two feet of him. They were silent and -walked as though they were out for an evening -stroll. Paul hesitated ere he ventured out of his -hiding place. The neighborhood was still and -dark. If he dared to follow and keep them in -sight, he would very easily be detected; he might -have a running chance to escape, but that would -give him away and they, on the other hand, -would then realize that they were being suspected.</p> - -<p>But it was not necessary for him to follow -within sight of them. He had a pretty good idea -where they were heading for. He waited for them -to round the corner and immediately he ran after -them. He peeked around the corner and saw them -stop in front of a house at about the middle of the -street. They stopped and looked all around them. -The next moment they were gone.</p> - -<p>Paul flushed with excitement. He had discovered -their secret means of approach to the -house. Now all he had to do was to thread together -all the details of the mystery, put together -the puzzle into a single whole, and choose a time -when they would most probably be in the cellar -for the police to descend upon them. Paul already -foresaw the moment when the gang would be -captured and locked away where they belonged.</p> - -<p>He decided to walk down the street, get a -glimpse of the house and then join his friends. -What he saw put him in a jovial mood, as he -walked back to the corner with every intention of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[145]</a></span> -joining Jack and Ken. But he did not have quite -enough foresight. He had seen the group of four -break up into two pairs; he should have taken into -consideration the missing pair. Might it not be -possible that these two had headed for the same -destination by a longer route. At any rate, his -not considering that angle proved disastrous for -him.</p> - -<p>Very innocently he rounded the corner and suddenly -found himself facing the protruding, round -stomach of the man he had seen as one of the -trio. Looking up into the man’s brutal face, Paul -felt himself becoming confused. In the meanwhile, -he noticed the second man take his place directly -behind him. “What are you doing around here?” -the fat man demanded in a gruff, husky voice. -“Don’t you know it is dangerous to be roaming -around at this time of night?”</p> - -<p>Paul hesitated, trying hard to keep his voice -from shaking. He said, “I just took a walk, that’s -all. I live only a couple of blocks from here.”</p> - -<p>“So you were just taking a walk, eh? Well, -then what were you spying around for, huh?”</p> - -<p>Paul felt himself become tense. He wondered if -they would attack him. He answered, “I wasn’t -spying, Mister. I was just walking.”</p> - -<p>“Then why did you look goggle eyed at every -house as you passed down the street?”</p> - -<p>“Just looking as I was walking.”</p> - -<p>The man squared his jaw and gritted his teeth.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[146]</a></span> -“Some day,” he hissed, “you’ll go blind for seeing -things you ain’t supposed to. Who are you?”</p> - -<p>Paul began to edge away so that he would not -have the second gangster directly behind his back. -But he was cornered and he had no way to move. -He answered, “My name is Morris Paulson.”</p> - -<p>“Do you have any friends who have been -snooping around lately? They had better watch -out or they will get into heaps of trouble.”</p> - -<p>Pretending that he was ignorant of the reference, -Paul said, “I don’t know what you are talking -about, Mister. My friends are nice fellows -who mind their own business.”</p> - -<p>The gangster gorilla grinned mischievously. -“That’s a swell idea, everybody minding his own -business,” he remarked. “And you too.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir,” Paul agreed meekly. Feeling that -the questioning was over and that he was being -dismissed, he stepped out of the way and took a -step forward to walk away. For a fraction of a -second he congratulated himself on his luck. The -next instant, however, he felt a crash on his head. -His whole body trembled, his knees began to wobble. -As he fell to the ground he turned half way -and noticed the cruel grin on his attacker. Then -everything went dark and he knew nothing more.</p> - -<p>Paul lay unconscious at the feet of the fat -gangster. The man poked his toes into the boy’s -ribs and turned him over on his back. “You -shouldn’t have hit him so hard,” the fat fellow<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[147]</a></span> -said, addressing his henchman. “He’s only a kid.”</p> - -<p>“I didn’t hit hard, Boss. I only tapped him nice -and easy.” He looked pleadingly at his chief. -“What’ll we do with him?” he asked anxiously.</p> - -<p>“Bind his hands and feet and throw him in one -of the empty lots.”</p> - -<p>“You want me to dump him, Boss?”</p> - -<p>“No!” was the snarling answer. “Do what I -say and be quick about it.”</p> - -<p>Bending down, the henchman used Paul’s tie -and handkerchief to tie the boy’s hands and feet. -When that was done, he picked up the inert body -under his arm and crossed the street to an empty -lot and then dropped it to the ground. Rejoining -his boss, the two walked off. “That’ll teach him a -lesson,” muttered the fat fellow.</p> - -<p>Paul did not know how long he lay there, but -he imagined that it must have been a very long -time. He tried to rise, but couldn’t. His head -ached terribly. He fell back and closed his eyes. -Gradually he regained consciousness. With difficulty, -he sat up and discovered his hands and feet -bound. At first he could not recollect exactly what -had happened to him and how he came to be in -this predicament. But little by little, events came -back to him.</p> - -<p>Frantically, Paul began to work on his bonds to -free himself. But he felt weak and every time he -moved his wrist, he felt the bonds cutting his -flesh. But at last, after about twenty minutes of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[148]</a></span> -tiring work, he freed his hands and it took him -but a few seconds to untie his feet. Rising, he felt -himself trembling all over. He could barely keep -himself steady on his feet. Walking, he wobbled -from one side to the other.</p> - -<p>At the corner, he leaned against the wall of a -house. Suddenly he heard some shouts. He looked -to see who it might be, but his sight was blurred and -he could only see dim shadows running toward -him. Who are they, he wondered, and what do -they want from me? Was he going to be again attacked? -He wanted to run but there was no will -nor effort to do so.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[149]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XVII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Parental Admonitions</span></p> - -<p>Jack and Ken commenced their search for any -sign of Paul. But everything was still and dark -and there wasn’t a sign of human life anywhere -about. After about twenty minutes of futile -searching, the two boys decided to leave and go -to Jones Street. Coming to the corner, Ken noticed -a lonely figure hovering against a wall a short -distance away. He called his friend’s attention -to it and Jack said, “Most likely a drunk. But let’s -go and see. It may be someone needing -assistance.”</p> - -<p>As they neared the figure, both boys remarked -that there was something familiar about it. Jack -began to feel a little uneasy about that lonely -figure leaning against the wall and he walked -faster, Ken at his side. Soon they were both running. -“It’s Paul!” screamed Jack, almost -hysterically.</p> - -<p>The two friends ran over to Paul and caught -hold of him on either side. “Paul! Paul!” whispered -Jack frantically. “How are you? What -happened to you?”</p> - -<p>Paul shook his head, trying to shake away the -mist from his eyes and the dullness out of his -head. Ken whispered, “Let’s take him right home, -Jack. Don’t bother him with questions now.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[150]</a></span></p> - -<p>Jack nodded and agreed. He was almost in -tears at the helpless sight of his chum. Putting -their arms around their friend, they started to -lead him home. Very gradually, Paul regained his -balance and self assurance. “All right,” he muttered, -“I can walk by myself now.”</p> - -<p>But just as soon as the boys removed their supporting -arms, Paul tottered and almost fell. Jack -immediately put an arm around his shoulder. A -short while later, Paul finally walked by himself. -“Some mess I got myself into,” he mumbled.</p> - -<p>Jack smiled, happy that his friend was all right -again. “Now don’t talk,” he said. “Save your -energy.”</p> - -<p>Paul grinned to himself thinking of how nearly -he got away. They came to his house and Jack -whispered, “How will we wake your father up? -It’s quite late already.”</p> - -<p>“What do you want to wake him up for?” inquired -Paul.</p> - -<p>“He has to treat your head, fellow. You’re all -bloody and messy.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t bother him, Jack. I’ll wash up myself -and let him see it tomorrow.”</p> - -<p>“Nothing doing,” insisted Jack. “You have to -be taken care of by a doctor right away. And it’s -better your father does it than anyone else.”</p> - -<p>“All right, but don’t tell him what happened. -Just say I fell.”</p> - -<p>Jack ran up the step to the porch and rang the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[151]</a></span> -night bell. About two minutes later, Dr. Morrison, -in his pajamas and bath robe, answered the -door. Seeing who it was, he exclaimed, “Why, -Jack, is there anything wrong?”</p> - -<p>Jack thought for a few seconds what to say. -“Er, Dr. Morrison,” he began, “don’t be alarmed -but er—”</p> - -<p>The doctor was impatient and he cried, “Well, -well?”</p> - -<p>“You see, Paul was hurt and—”</p> - -<p>“Where is he?” was the direct and decisive -question. “I thought he was in his room and asleep -long ago.”</p> - -<p>They went around to the back of the porch. -The doctor looked at Paul’s wound and said, -“Let’s go into the office and I’ll fix you up.” The -boys followed. At the door the doctor turned to -them and said, “You go home, fellows; it’s late.”</p> - -<p>Jack compressed his lips and gritted his teeth. -He wanted to ask if the wound was serious or if -there was anything he could do to help. But the -doctor seemed not to want them around. He -waited until Paul and his father entered the house -and closed the door. Ken whispered, “All right, -Jack, let’s go. There is nothing more we can do -here.”</p> - -<p>Crossing the street, they separated and each -went home to sleep and to think over everything -that happened that evening.</p> - -<p>Early in the morning, Jack got ready to leave<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[152]</a></span> -his home. His mother called to him and asked, -“Where are you going so early? Aren’t you going -to wait for breakfast?”</p> - -<p>But Jack shook his head, kissed his mother on -the cheek and ran out of the house. He was anxious -to see Paul, and, as it was too early to ring -the bell, he walked back and forth like a sentinel -in front of the Morrison house. Counting every -minute, he finally decided at eight-thirty sharp, -that it was all right to ring the bell now. He knew -that Dr. Morrison’s office hours began at nine, -and that usually he had his breakfast between -eight-fifteen and a quarter of nine. His heart -beat wildly as he heard footsteps coming to open -the door. “Good morning, Jack,” Mrs. Morrison -greeted him. “What are you doing here so early?”</p> - -<p>“Good morning, Mrs. Morrison. I just want to -see Paul.”</p> - -<p>“Paul is a little tardy in getting out of bed this -morning,” she told him as they entered the dining -room. “Have a seat. He ought to be down any -minute.”</p> - -<p>“Good morning, Dr. Morrison.”</p> - -<p>“Good morning, Jack. Did you have breakfast -yet?”</p> - -<p>“Breakfast!” Jack clasped his hand to his forehead. -“I completely forgot about it.”</p> - -<p>Dr. Morrison laughed heartily, but his wife -couldn’t see the joke and she exclaimed, “You<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[153]</a></span> -forgot to have breakfast! Is there anything wrong -with you?”</p> - -<p>Dr. Morrison laughed and Jack shook his head. -“No,” he replied meekly. “I guess I wasn’t -hungry.”</p> - -<p>“You’re going to have breakfast right now,” -insisted Mrs. Morrison. “Sit here,” she ordered -the boy and then she went to the kitchen.</p> - -<p>Dr. Morrison shrewdly remarked, with a -twinkle in his eye, “If you can forget your breakfast, -Jack, I can imagine what happened last -night.”</p> - -<p>Jack moved to the edge of his seat. “How is -he?” he inquired anxiously. “Hurt bad?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I guess he will live to get into plenty of -more trouble. Nothing to worry about.”</p> - -<p>Mrs. Morrison returned and placed silverware -and a plate in front of Jack. “Your bacon and -eggs will be ready right away,” she said. “In the -meanwhile, have this orange juice.”</p> - -<p>Just then Paul came downstairs. He was smiling -and looked as though nothing had happened. -“Good morning, everybody,” he called cheerfully.</p> - -<p>His greetings were returned. Kissing his -mother on the cheek, she noticed the bandage on -the back of his head. “What happened?” she -demanded.</p> - -<p>“Nothing, Mother. I just fell, that’s all.”</p> - -<p>She looked at her husband who was smiling.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[154]</a></span> -“Nothing much,” he muttered to re-assure her.</p> - -<p>“I wonder,” she said skeptically.</p> - -<p>Paul and Jack looked at each other and grinned -guiltily. “Well, sit down,” remarked Dr. Morrison, -addressing his son.</p> - -<p>Weighed down by a guilty conscience, the boys -ate their breakfast in silence. Jack waited for Paul -to finish. They noted with dismay that Dr. Morrison, -although through with his morning meal, sat -by the table and read the paper. Paul said, “I’m -ready, Jack, let’s go.”</p> - -<p>Dr. Morrison rose with the boys and took them -under the arm. “Where to?” he asked.</p> - -<p>Paul squirmed. “Just out to the porch,” he -answered.</p> - -<p>“Are you in any particular hurry? Something -very important to talk about?”</p> - -<p>“No,” his son answered hesitantly.</p> - -<p>“That’s fine. Do you mind coming into my office -for a couple of minutes?”</p> - -<p>Jack thinking that Dr. Morrison meant only -Paul, drew away. But the doctor said to him, -“You, too, Jack. Come along.”</p> - -<p>Dr. Morrison sat down at his desk and pointed -the boys to chairs. For a moment there was -silence. “Well,” remarked the doctor, “now tell -me what this is all about.”</p> - -<p>The boys fidgeted. “What what’s about, Dad?”</p> - -<p>“Now don’t pretend ignorance,” commented -the doctor. “You know very well what I mean.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[155]</a></span></p> - -<p>Paul turned to his companion and said, “You -tell him, Jack.”</p> - -<p>Jack felt himself getting hot all over and becoming -red in the face. “No, you tell him yourself, -Paul.”</p> - -<p>Dr. Morrison smiled at their uneasiness. Paul -said, “Dad, I don’t want to tell you any falsehoods -and I can’t tell you now what it is all about. -You wouldn’t understand. Please don’t ask me.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t want to pry into your personal affairs -and have you tell me things you don’t want,” -said Dr. Morrison, “but getting a bump on the -head like that is very serious.” He paused and the -boys kept silent. The doctor continued, “I have -treated a number of such cases and I can testify to -the fact that the bumping was done by an expert.”</p> - -<p>“It really isn’t much,” Paul assured his father. -“And I promise to be more careful in the future.”</p> - -<p>“All right, son. You had better be—and you, -too, Jack—if you want to keep a whole head on -your shoulders.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, Dad.”</p> - -<p>Grinning, the boys rose and left the office, -with Dr. Morrison shaking his head and wondering -what they were up to now.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[156]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XVIII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">False Alarm!</span></p> - -<p>Ken was sitting on the steps of the porch. He -jumped up as he heard the door open. “Hello, -fellows,” he cried.</p> - -<p>“Hello, Ken. You’re lucky; you always get -away with things.”</p> - -<p>“What’s the trouble this time, Paul?”</p> - -<p>“My dad just had us up at the bar and almost -made us tell.”</p> - -<p>“You can’t do that. Not yet, at any rate.”</p> - -<p>“For the present we got away with it,” remarked -Jack.</p> - -<p>They went across the street to Ken’s garage -where they would have the privacy they wanted. -Seating themselves on boxes in a circle, Jack -heaved a sigh, then said, “Well, Paul, now you -can tell us everything that happened.”</p> - -<p>Paul grinned mischievously. He leaned forward -and whispered, “I found out their secret entrance -to the cellar.”</p> - -<p>“You mean it!” exclaimed Jack.</p> - -<p>“That’s perfect!” cried Ken.</p> - -<p>“It’s in the house to the rear of the empty -house.”</p> - -<p>“I had a suspicion it would be something like -that,” commented Jack. “What sort of a house -is it?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[157]</a></span></p> - -<p>“It was dark and there was not much chance -to see anything. By the way,” he asked, “whose -idea was it to suspect the grocery man?”</p> - -<p>“Mine,” answered Ken. “Was I wrong?”</p> - -<p>“On the contrary, you were right and you deserve -a medal as a fine detective. That man is one -of the gang.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t say! Well, come on, tell us about -it.”</p> - -<p>Paul commenced at the very beginning and related -all that had happened to him the previous -night. Completing his narrative, Jack muttered, -“So! That’s the way things stand.”</p> - -<p>“Yes. Now you tell me what happened to you -two last night.”</p> - -<p>“In one word,” replied Jack, “nothing.”</p> - -<p>“Tell him about the printing press,” suggested -Ken.</p> - -<p>“Well, yes, but that wasn’t much. By putting -our ears to the ground, we could hear very slightly -the printing press going.”</p> - -<p>“On the contrary. You should have been able -to hear it very well,” commented Paul.</p> - -<p>“Come to think of it,” remarked Jack, “you’re -right. They must have muffled the noise of the -machine somehow.”</p> - -<p>“They are certainly going in for it in a big -way,” said Ken.</p> - -<p>“It seems that they are,” Paul replied. “Now, -if we can get a couple of things straightened out,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[158]</a></span> -we can tell the story to the police and have the -gang arrested.”</p> - -<p>“I think we ought to wait a while,” suggested -Jack. “It is a little too soon yet.”</p> - -<p>“Yes. From every indication,” commented -Paul, “it seems that they are on the alert. We -have to catch them at a moment when they are -off their guard and make sure that every one of -them happens to be there.”</p> - -<p>“There are also a couple of more things that -we have to check up on. For example, we still -don’t know how Mr. Grey fits into the picture -and—”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I forgot to tell you,” interrupted Paul. -“Following the grocery man, he and Mr. Grey -passed each other and nodded. Whatever that -meant I don’t know, but it establishes beyond a -doubt that they know each other and that Mr. -Grey is in with the crowd.”</p> - -<p>“That’s very interesting to know,” said Jack -enthusiastically. “But in that case, how are we going -to explain his past behavior?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know,” answered Paul. “But there is -no doubt that there is some connection between -his past behavior and what we are up against -now.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” muttered Jack, “I’d give a penny to -know exactly how those fires and the robbery fit -into the puzzle.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[159]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Eventually, we will solve that,” remarked -Paul. “I have a notion how they fit in but—”</p> - -<p>“Tell us!” exclaimed Ken.</p> - -<p>“I would rather not; it sounds foolish and I -may be mistaken. Besides, I couldn’t very well substantiate -my argument. But what we have to decide -now, is what we are going to do next, what -our plan of action is going to be.”</p> - -<p>“Do you have any suggestion?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“My opinion is that we ought to keep away for -a couple of days. That would make them think -that they have scared us away. It will also make -them a little careless and things will be easier for -us to accomplish.”</p> - -<p>“All right. Now suppose we do play dead, so -to speak, for two days; then what?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“Well, we still have to go down to the cellar -for a second time and establish definitely what’s -going on there.”</p> - -<p>“And we still have to locate the exact position -of their secret tunnel—for it must be that,” added -Jack.</p> - -<p>Paul nodded. “Yes,” he said. “It would be a -simple thing to bore a tunnel connecting the two -cellars.”</p> - -<p>“But how are we going to determine how the -fires and the robbery at Professor Link’s fit into -the picture?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“For that we will have to wait and see how -things turn out,” explained Paul. “It may be very<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[160]</a></span> -possible that those incidents have nothing to do -with it all.”</p> - -<p>“But those were the very things that we began -to investigate,” insisted Ken.</p> - -<p>“Yes, and now look what it got us into,” remarked -Jack.</p> - -<p>Suddenly the air was rent by the screech of the -fire siren. The boys leaped to their feet and began -to race down the street. “But it isn’t time yet for -another fire,” protested Paul.</p> - -<p>“What do you mean, it isn’t time yet?” questioned -Ken.</p> - -<p>“I told you about it. From the reports in the -papers, it seemed there was a fire approximately -every ten to fourteen days.”</p> - -<p>“Well, maybe this is a real fire,” suggested -Jack.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps.”</p> - -<p>At Main Street, the boys saw the fire engine, -a brand new one the town of Stanhope had recently -acquired, come racing madly down the -street. People were lined up along the sidewalk -watching the engine pass. “Where’s the fire?” -Paul asked someone.</p> - -<p>The man shrugged his shoulders and answered, -“I don’t know.”</p> - -<p>Paul asked someone else. But nobody seemed -to know where the fire was. Jack suggested that -they run down the street, in the direction the fire -engine went, and perhaps they would come upon<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[161]</a></span> -it. The boys agreed and they fell into a trot. On -the way, they stopped every once in a while to -inquire as to the location of the fire. But nobody -seemed to know. “That’s strange,” muttered -Jack.</p> - -<p>“What’s strange?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“That no one should know where the fire is.”</p> - -<p>About a quarter of a mile down, they saw the -fire engine returning. The firemen waved to people -as they passed. One of the firemen shouted to -a friend at the curb, “False alarm!”</p> - -<p>“Did you hear that?” asked Jack, turning to -his friends.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” answered Paul, “I heard it. I’m just -wondering.”</p> - -<p>“Wondering about what?”</p> - -<p>“Just thinking of something.”</p> - -<p>The boys began to walk back. For a while they -were silent. “By golly!” exclaimed Paul, slapping -his right fist into his palm. “I wouldn’t be surprised if—”</p> - -<p>He stopped to think for a second. “If what?” -asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“If that gang,” continued Paul, “were not responsible -for the false alarm.”</p> - -<p>“How do you mean?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“Pretty soon,” commented Ken, “you will have -that gang responsible for everything that happens -in this town.”</p> - -<p>“But listen to this,” explained Paul. “Suppose<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[162]</a></span> -they want to move something, do you think they -want any witnesses?”</p> - -<p>“No, but—”</p> - -<p>“But when you hear the fire siren, people start -running to the fire, there is a commotion, no one -would pay any attention to something being moved -in or out of a house. Isn’t that right?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” agreed Ken hesitantly, “but—”</p> - -<p>“How about going over there and looking -around?” suggested Jack.</p> - -<p>“No,” insisted Paul. “We said we would play -dead for two days and we are going to do it.”</p> - -<p>“All right, you win.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[163]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XIX</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Captured!</span></p> - -<p>The two days were up. Jack and Ken, waiting -for Paul, sat idly about at the latter’s garage. -It was early morning, about nine o’clock and the -day was clear and warm. Soon Paul appeared and -he sat down near his friends on a box. “All right, -fellows,” he said, “what’s to be our first move?”</p> - -<p>“Go down to the cellar,” suggested Jack. “It’s -early morning and probably no one will be there. -We will have at least a couple of hours in which to -look around.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, and perhaps we will find the secret door,” -added Ken.</p> - -<p>“Let’s go, then,” said Paul.</p> - -<p>Jack picked up the baseball bat and followed. -“Again you’re bringing along your bat,” remarked -Paul.</p> - -<p>“Sure. It may come in handy.”</p> - -<p>“You’re right. It might not be a bad idea for -Ken and I also to take along some sort of -weapon.”</p> - -<p>They stopped and looked around. Finding a -stray broom handle, Ken sawed it into three pieces -and Jack discarded his bat. Putting their weapons -out of sight, they walked off. “How will we manage -it?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[164]</a></span></p> - -<p>“We will do it the same as last time,” suggested -Paul. “You will stay outside and keep a -careful watch while Jack and I will go down. Is -that agreeable?”</p> - -<p>Ken nodded. “It’s all right with me.”</p> - -<p>Before they reached the empty house, Jack suggested -that they take a look at the house in its -rear, where no doubt the secret door was situated. -His companions thought it was a good idea and -they proceeded to do so.</p> - -<p>Ken took his place at one corner and Paul, by -walking around the block, took his place at the -opposite corner. When all was ready, Jack very -innocently walked down the street on the wrong -side. The house under suspicion was a one family -brick building with a stoop leading up to the front -door; at the ground level were noticeable the -small windows of the cellar. From all appearances, -the house was occupied; there were curtains in the -windows, several flower pots were distributed on -the small porch and a rubber hose lay on the -ground not far from the house.</p> - -<p>As Jack reached the corner, he took over Ken’s -place and the latter strolled nonchalantly up the -street, noticing everything within sight of the -house. The boys got together again and discussed -their impressions of the house. “Very innocent -looking as far as I could see,” remarked Ken.</p> - -<p>“Don’t let that fool you,” asserted Paul.</p> - -<p>The boys proceeded to the empty house. Careful<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[165]</a></span> -not to be seen as they entered the yard, they -put their ears to the ground to find out whether -the printing press was in motion. Satisfied that -everything was quiet below as far as they could -judge they prepared for action.</p> - -<p>Ken took his place prepared to watch, while -Jack and Paul moved off and entered the house. -Closing the door quietly behind them, they -entered the first room on their right. Moving -very cautiously, they approached the spot where -the trap door was supposed to be. But at first -they could not find the small piece of wood that -came out of the floor. Both boys frantically hunted -for that piece of wood. After about fifteen minutes -of digging their nails into the floor in wild -search, Jack at last came upon it and lifted it -out of the floor.</p> - -<p>Paul lifted the trap door and began to descend. -Their hearts were aflutter with excitement. What -awaited them below? Would they come to trouble? -Would they come to grips with the gangsters? -Both boys had had a taste of their medicine, but -that didn’t discourage them nor were they intimidated. -Grasping firmly their short sticks, they -walked down the steps.</p> - -<p>It was dark below, and that was a good sign. -Each of the boys carried a flashlight and lit up -their way. Jack closed the trap door over his head -and followed Paul. At the bottom of the stairs, -Paul waited for his friend. A beam of light went<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[166]</a></span> -all around the room and came to rest on the table. -About five or six bills lay sprawled on the wooden -table. Jack whispered, “Look.”</p> - -<p>Paul nodded. Together they approached the -table and looked at the money bills. There were -two fives, two tens and a twenty dollar bill. -“Counterfeit,” whispered Paul.</p> - -<p>Jack picked one up and slipped it into his -pocket. They returned to the end of the room and -began a thorough search, working from one end -of the room to the other. There were several -pieces of clothing, many rags, various packages, -and other things, such as tools and machinery -about which they knew nothing. They paused to -examine the printing press very carefully. They -moved on. Jack whispered, “Let’s try to find the -secret door.”</p> - -<p>Paul nodded. “It must be over the other way,” -he whispered back.</p> - -<p>They proceeded to the other end of the cellar. -A beam of light moved back and forth over the -wall, but no sign of a door. They tapped and -groped at the wall but with no success. Suddenly -their hearts fell. The faint noise of footsteps on -the other side of the wall came to them. Their -minds were in a whirl. What were they to do? -Were they to be captured? If so what would happen -to them? They already had a taste of what -the gang did to anyone spying on them. What -would they do now? All these thoughts flashed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[167]</a></span> -through their minds in an instant. Paul whispered, -“Hide.”</p> - -<p>Paul dived behind a bunch of rags and pulled -several of the rags over him. But Jack was not -so quick. At his corner, there was no ready hiding -place for him to run to. And he was still looking -for one as the electric light flashed on and -part of the middle of the wall was pushed open. -In a flash, he noticed how the door worked; the -handle of the door was pushed through on the -other side, and thus a means was left for an exit; -but on leaving, if the handle was pulled in, whoever -was in the cellar was either imprisoned or -had to use the trap door in the empty house.</p> - -<p>As the door was thrown open, the two gangsters -whom Paul had noticed with the fat fellow -and the grocery man, stepped forth. Seeing Jack, -one of them whipped a revolver out of his hip -pocket. The second one, however, grabbed his -mate by the arm and exclaimed, “Don’t shoot. -He is only a kid.”</p> - -<p>Advancing to Jack, the second one demanded, -“What are you doing here?”</p> - -<p>Jack held his breath and tried not to look in -the direction where his chum was hiding. “Just -happen to be here,” he answered, his heart in his -mouth, wondering what they would do to him.</p> - -<p>The gangster became angry and boisterous. “I -know you happen to be here,” he cried as he gave -the boy a shove that sent him sprawling. “But<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[168]</a></span> -how do you happen to be here, that’s what I want -to know.”</p> - -<p>Jack picked himself up. The first man, with his -gun still in his hand, mumbled to his companion, -“Wait a minute, Pete, somebody else may be here. -Let’s look around.”</p> - -<p>“Okey, Joe. Keep this fellow covered while I -look around.”</p> - -<p>He took his gun out of his pocket and let his -eyes wander about the cellar. He spied the bundle -of rags. Levelling the gun at it, he cried, “If -you’re hiding there behind the rags, you better -come out or I’ll shoot.”</p> - -<p>Paul thought he had better not take any chances -and slowly he rose, with his hands above his head. -Joe cried, “I think that’s the guy the boss and I -caught the other day and I socked him.”</p> - -<p>Pete demanded, “Are there any more of you in -here?”</p> - -<p>Paul shook his head. Out of the corner of their -eyes, the boys glanced at each other. Both were -pale and tense, but not frightened. Pete raised -his fist threateningly and scowled, “If you’re lying, -I’ll knock your block off.”</p> - -<p>Paul said, “If you don’t believe me why don’t -you look around and see for yourself.”</p> - -<p>That seemed to satisfy the gangster and he -lowered his arm. “What are you doing here?” -he again demanded.</p> - -<p>“We came upon the trap door by accident,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[169]</a></span>” -replied Paul undaunted, “and we thought we -would look and see what it was all about.”</p> - -<p>“You’re sure you don’t know any more than -that?”</p> - -<p>“What could we know that you don’t want us -to know?” asked Paul.</p> - -<p>Pete lunged out and hit Paul on the cheek. -“That’ll teach you not to get fresh,” he hissed.</p> - -<p>“What’ll we do with them?” asked the gangster -named Joe, addressing his mate. “You think -we ought to dump them?”</p> - -<p>“No,” was the snarling reply. “We’ll tie -them up and leave it to the boss to do with them -as he pleases.”</p> - -<p>“What for?” demanded Joe. “They’re a -couple of rats and we ought to get rid of them.”</p> - -<p>“They’re kids,” argued Pete. “We dump them -and you’ll have the cops on our tail.”</p> - -<p>“The cops don’t need to know.”</p> - -<p>“Never mind. Tie them up and don’t argue.”</p> - -<p>The two gangsters faced each other and it -seemed that they might get into a quarrel. “I say -dump them,” shouted Joe.</p> - -<p>“And I say no,” snarled back Pete.</p> - -<p>Jack and Paul watched them face each other, -leveling their guns. The boys thought it would be -good luck if they did fight and kill each other. -But in that case there would be shooting and they -needed safe places to run to. However, Joe, the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[170]</a></span> -weaker of the two, gave in and muttered, “Okey. -We’ll tie them up.”</p> - -<p>Tearing some rags into strips, Joe tied the boy’s -hands and feet and their own handkerchiefs were -used to put around their mouths. The job completed, -they were tossed into the corner. Pete, -who was watching the procedure, now said, “All -right. Now grab those two packages and take -them to the boss. And ask him what to do with -these kids.”</p> - -<p>“And what are you gonna do?” Joe asked with -malice.</p> - -<p>“I’m going to stay here and keep an eye on -these kids.”</p> - -<p>“That’s all right with me,” said Joe. He went -to the other end of the cellar and picked up two -packages wrapped in plain brown paper. Nodding -to his mate, he called, “Okey, I’ll be going now.”</p> - -<p>“And don’t take all day coming back,” snarled -Pete.</p> - -<p>Joe was gone. Pete brought over a chair and -leaned it against the wall. Sitting down, he took a -penknife out of his pocket, placed his gun in his -lap and began to clean his fingernails. “It’s too -bad you kids have to pry into things you -shouldn’t,” he muttered, addressing himself to the -boys without looking at them. “It ain’t healthy. -You’re liable to get bumped off one of these days -and then where will it get you?” He paused for a -moment to think and scratch his head. “Mind<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[171]</a></span> -your own business is my motto,” he continued. -“If everybody would mind their own business, -everything would be all right. As it is, people get -into the trouble, like you kids, when you -shouldn’t.”</p> - -<p>He stopped talking. With their hands tied behind -their backs, the boys worked feverishly to -loosen their bonds. But they had to work without -being suspected by their captor. And what’s more, -Joe had done a good and expert job. The bonds -were tied so strongly they could barely move their -wrists.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[172]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XX</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Escape!</span></p> - -<p>The boys felt cramped and awkward in their -sprawling positions. The bonds cut into their -wrists and ankles. Each one worked to release his -hands, but the task was difficult. But even if they -did untie themselves, what could they do? Pete, -the gangster, sat near by with his gun in his lap. -The slightest move on their part and he would -shoot at them. They realized that they were in -a very bad predicament.</p> - -<p>The gangster began his preaching again. “Now -if you kids had minded your own business,” he -said, “as you should have, you wouldn’t get into -this thing. You should have been out playing baseball -or swimming instead of snooping around. -And what do you get for it? I don’t know what -the boss is going to do to you. He may even dump -you and that’ll be too bad because you’re still -kids.” He shook his head in dismay. “You should -have minded your own business.”</p> - -<p>He put away his knife and leaned back in his -chair. Taking the handle of his gun in his hand, -he glanced at the boys who seemed to be pretty -safely tied up, and then he closed his eyes.</p> - -<p>Waiting a few minutes, the boys continued -working on their bonds. Soon Pete began to snore.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[173]</a></span> -Now, if he only slept soundly for a short while -so that they could work undisturbed! But the -effort to free their hands was a very tiring process -and in ten minutes they had not accomplished -anything. Paul thought of a method. Noiselessly -he began to edge up to his friend. Pete moved and -the boys ceased their activity. He slept on, and -Paul finally managed to creep up to Jack. Placing -themselves back to back, Paul began to work on -his friend’s bonds.</p> - -<p>In the meanwhile, a shadow appeared at the -other end of the cellar which seemed to have -descended the stairs through the trap door. He -was so noiseless that even the boys did not hear -his footsteps. He crept forward like a cat, a veritable -shadow. Nearer and nearer he came to the -sleeping form of the gangster.</p> - -<p>Paul decided to rest his fingers for a moment -and to look up at Pete to see if the gangster was -still sound asleep. Doing so, he noticed the approaching -form. His heart sank. Nudging his -friend, Jack also looked up and together they -watched the approaching form. What was he up -to? Was he friend or foe? The man put a finger -to his lips and motioned to the boys to keep utter -quiet. It mystified them. Was he after all a friend? -And all the while they had taken him for a foe.</p> - -<p>The boys flushed with excitement and followed -every stealthy move of Mr. Grey, for it was he. -When he was within about a yard of Pete, he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[174]</a></span> -threw himself upon the gangster. The gun clattered -to the ground. The gangster uttered a -shriek, but the next moment his face was buried -into the floor and his hands were being tied in -the back with rope that Mr. Grey took out of his -pocket. Following that, Pete’s feet were tied. The -gangster tried to turn to see who his assailant was -but Mr. Grey kept his face turned toward the -floor. Then Mr. Grey gagged and blindfolded the -gangster and left him lying in a heap where he -was.</p> - -<p>The boys were breathless; they couldn’t -imagine what the man was up to. With one bound -he was at their side and untying their bonds. “It’s -a lucky thing I got here in time,” he muttered.</p> - -<p>He helped them to their feet and motioned for -them to follow him. He ran up the stairs and -through the trap door. “Now run for your lives,” -he told them.</p> - -<p>The boys hesitated. Paul said, “We want to -thank you for saving our lives and—”</p> - -<p>The man cut him short with a wave of his hand. -“No time to lose,” he whispered rapidly. “Go.”</p> - -<p>“Who are you?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>The man shook his head and pushed them -through the door. “Go,” he commanded them for -a second time.</p> - -<p>The boys went out of the house and signalled -to Ken to follow them. But he needed no signal. -He was on the alert, waiting for them and frantic<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[175]</a></span> -with worry. He jumped out of his hiding place -and joined his two friends. “I thought you were -goners, sure,” he cried.</p> - -<p>They sprinted away down the street. “What do -you mean?” asked Jack as they ran.</p> - -<p>“I saw Mr. Grey enter the house and—”</p> - -<p>Jack stopped dead in his tracks. “Say!” he exclaimed, -“where did he disappear to? Did you -notice, Paul?”</p> - -<p>Paul shook his head. “No,” he answered. “I -guess we were so excited we didn’t notice.”</p> - -<p>“What happened?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“Tell you later,” answered Paul. “Finish what -you started to say.”</p> - -<p>“Well, as I was saying I saw Mr. Grey enter -the house and I became frantic. I whistled and -whistled but evidently you didn’t hear me. I -couldn’t imagine what might happen to you and I -couldn’t think of anything to do or how to help. -I waited and it seemed to me like a year. I was -already preparing to go down there myself when -you two came out.”</p> - -<p>“Nothing else happened?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“Nothing else,” was the reply. “Wasn’t that -enough?”</p> - -<p>They slowed down to a walk as they approached -Main Street. “Now tell me what happened to -you,” said Ken.</p> - -<p>“Plenty happened,” remarked Paul, “but let’s<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[176]</a></span> -wait until we get to the garage where we can discuss -the whole thing.”</p> - -<p>At their destination, they sat down to rest. -Paul and Jack heaved a sigh of relief. “What a -close shave!” exclaimed Paul.</p> - -<p>“Well, tell me, what happened?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>Between them, the two boys narrated the events -that befell them while Ken gasped and could -hardly believe it. When the story was all told, he -exclaimed, “Say, this thing is getting to be dangerous. -We have to do something about it.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” agreed Paul. “And we have to do it -quickly. In all likelihood, those gangsters are going -to return to that cellar, if they haven’t already. -Seeing that we escaped, they will probably -try to get away by tonight.”</p> - -<p>“We have to move fast then,” added Jack.</p> - -<p>“But what are we going to do?” asked Ken. -“What can we do?”</p> - -<p>Paul leaned forward and whispered to his companions, -“The police!” It struck them all at once -that lately they had not thought of the police -who might have saved them a lot of trouble and -who were the most logical people to tell. Paul -continued, “We have to tell the police right away -before it is too late.”</p> - -<p>“But wait a minute,” remarked Jack. “Do you -think they will believe us. They are liable to think -that we are inventing it all.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[177]</a></span></p> - -<p>“We have to convince them, that’s all there is -to it.”</p> - -<p>“We most surely do,” added Ken. “There is -nothing we can do ourselves.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes, there are lots of things we could do -ourselves if we only thought of it,” commented -Jack. “I don’t know how wise it is to tell the -police. They may just take us for a bunch of crazy -kids.”</p> - -<p>“As I said,” repeated Paul, “we have to convince -them.”</p> - -<p>“I wonder how Mr. Grey fits into the situation. -I would give a penny to know,” said Jack.</p> - -<p>“So would we all,” commented Paul. “But we -don’t have any time to lose, so let’s get going.”</p> - -<p>“Do you think we will be able to see Chief -Bates himself?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“I think I can manage that,” replied Ken. “He -knows me and I’ll ask to see him.”</p> - -<p>“All right, let’s go,” said Jack.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[178]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XXI</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Convincing the Police</span></p> - -<p>The boys headed for police headquarters. They -undertook their task with trepidation, wondering -how they would be received, feeling that possibly -it was an unwise course to take, that perhaps if -they tried they might capture the gangsters themselves -without having to be ridiculed by unbelieving -police. And coming to think of it, all the evidence -at their command was flimsy, in many cases -unreasonable and illogical. Besides, they were -youngsters, and if they narrated all the events, -they would be considered mentally distorted. The -fact that they were perfectly normal and were sincere -and truthful was beside the point. It was -whether they would be able to convince that would -tell the tale.</p> - -<p>They were very silent as they walked down -Main Street toward police headquarters. Each -one was thinking his own thoughts about the past -week. Jack asked himself what the best approach -might be. Paul tried hard to think how to narrate -the story so that it would sound convincing, and -in his mind he went over the words and phrases -that he thought would be most suitable to use. -Ken was thinking that with the police entering the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[179]</a></span> -case it would be soon ended and their mystery -solved. But would it be?</p> - -<p>Suppose the gang of counterfeiters were -caught, what then? The boys had started out to -solve the mystery of the white card—who was -responsible for leading Betty away to the end of -the town? Who was responsible for the fires? -Who was responsible for the robbery at Professor -Link’s? And these three things were linked together -by virtue of the white card. The boys felt -so convinced of the white card as a clue, that if -it were found to be not so, they would be badly -disappointed.</p> - -<p>Jack muttered skeptically, “I hope we don’t get -thrown out before we get a chance to see Chief -Bates.”</p> - -<p>Ken assured his friend, “Oh, you’ll see him all -right. The important thing is, can you convince -him?”</p> - -<p>Paul laughed and joked, “Whether we convince -him or not, wouldn’t it be a fine predicament if to -crown all our effort and glory, Chief Bates throws -us into jail.”</p> - -<p>“What for?” demanded Ken.</p> - -<p>“For any number of reasons,” answered Paul. -“He might put us away to cool us off. Or he -might jail us for doing detective work without a -license.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t need a license to be an amateur -detective,” argued Ken.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[180]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Amateur is a perfect word for it,” ironically -commented Jack. “He will think we are a bunch -of amateurs running wild.”</p> - -<p>“Well, let’s not anticipate his reception of us. -The chief might give us a bunch of onions for -a prize and that would be something,” remarked -Paul.</p> - -<p>“I’m hungry,” exclaimed Ken. “Let’s go in for -an ice cream soda.”</p> - -<p>“That’s the perfect idea,” agreed Paul. “And -I hope it will put us into the right spirit.”</p> - -<p>“Most likely it will cool us off,” remarked Jack. -“But I’ll also have a soda.”</p> - -<p>They entered a drugstore and ordered three ice -cream sodas. As Jack said, it cooled them off, but -it also picked them up in spirits. They emerged -smiling, cheerful, confident. The police headquarters -was a short distance away and they were soon -in front of the building. They hesitated before -entering. Each one of them felt his heart sink low -and his pulse begin to throb. Paul shrugged his -shoulders and commented, “Well, as the saying -goes, faint heart never won fair maiden. Let’s -go in.”</p> - -<p>They entered the hall. At one side was a desk -with a sergeant behind it. “Yes, boys,” he called -to them, “What do you want?”</p> - -<p>Ken said, “I want to see Chief Bates; my name -is Ken, Ken Armstrong.”</p> - -<p>The policeman smiled patiently. “The chief is<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[181]</a></span> -very busy, you know, and unless you have important -business with him, you can’t see him.”</p> - -<p>Jack piped up, “Oh, it’s very important.”</p> - -<p>Paul pulled his friend away. Ken said confidently, -“Oh, he will see me all right. You see, he -knows me. Just say that Ken Armstrong wants to -see him.”</p> - -<p>“And what shall I say is your business with -him?” inquired the sergeant, amused at the boy’s -self confidence.</p> - -<p>“It’s personal. Just say I would like to see -him.”</p> - -<p>The policeman nodded and very lazily picked -up his telephone. “Hello, hello,” he called into -the speaker, “give me the chief’s office.” He -waited for several seconds, in the meanwhile looking -the boys up and down. Again he spoke into -the mouthpiece, saying, “There’s a boy here by -the name of Ken Armstrong who wants to see the -chief. Says that the chief knows him and will -surely—most surely—see him.” The policeman -scowled as he said that. Again he waited for an -answer. Several seconds later, he answered, “All -right.”</p> - -<p>He hung up the receiver and turned to Ken. -“I guess he knows you all right.” Ken was overjoyed -while his two friends were glad and cheerful. -“Go down to the end of the corridor,” -directed the sergeant, “and then turn left. On the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[182]</a></span> -door that says Police Chief, go in there and his -secretary will take care of you.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you,” said Ken.</p> - -<p>The three boys walked down the corridor and -turned left. They entered the office of the Chief -of Police and his secretary, a very attractive -young woman, greeted them. “Which of you is -Ken?” she asked.</p> - -<p>Ken spoke up. “I am.”</p> - -<p>“Very well. Have a seat and Mr. Bates will see -you in a few minutes. He is busy just now.”</p> - -<p>The boys sat down and the secretary returned -to her desk and typewriter. To the boys it seemed -that she typed faster than the eye could follow. -They looked around the room and noticed the -various pictures and other office furniture. Every -moment was to them an hour. Jack was sure that -the chief would take one look at them and then -throw them out of his office. Paul wondered how -it happened Ken was acquainted with Chief Bates -and made a mental note to ask his friend about it.</p> - -<p>A buzzer sounded in the room and the boys -jumped up. The secretary nodded and said, “You -can go in now, Ken.”</p> - -<p>Ken proceeded toward the door, followed by -his friends. The secretary stopped them. “I -thought only Ken was going in?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, no,” he replied. “These are friends of -mine and they are coming in with me.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[183]</a></span></p> - -<p>The young woman shrugged her shoulders. -“Very well,” she said, “go right in.”</p> - -<p>Ken knocked on the door and someone called -loudly, “Come in.”</p> - -<p>They entered. Behind a large desk toward the -rear of the room sat Chief Bates. He was a man -of about forty-five, well-set, husky and strong. He -called out, “Hello Ken. I’m glad to see you.”</p> - -<p>“Hello, Chief,” Ken answered, “these are -friends of mine. I hope you don’t mind—”</p> - -<p>“No, not at all. Pull up chairs, boys.” He -leaned back in his swivel chair. When they were -seated, he said, “Well what is it, Ken. But I warn -you, I don’t have much time, so you better talk -quickly.”</p> - -<p>Ken said, “We are here to ask you a favor, -Chief.”</p> - -<p>“Anything within reason, Ken,” shot back the -chief, “and I’ll do it.”</p> - -<p>“The favor is,” continued Ken, “that you listen -to something very, very important.”</p> - -<p>“Very, very important,” added Jack.</p> - -<p>Ken turned to Paul and said, “You tell him, -Paul.”</p> - -<p>Paul drew up his chair and leaned on the desk. -He began, “You see, Chief, what we are going -to tell you may sound very fantastic but I want -you to believe that we are telling the truth and -that we are not inventing anything.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[184]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Go on, go on,” urged the chief, nonchalantly -leaning back in his chair.</p> - -<p>“Well, to begin with,” continued Paul, “we -have discovered a gang of counterfeiters—”</p> - -<p>The chief almost jumped out of his seat. He -flew forward to the desk and cried, “You have -what? What are you talking about? Are you telling -me stories or something?”</p> - -<p>Paul felt his confidence shaking. He realized -that the chief was a terror and would be hard to -convince, but, he said to himself, he had to be -convinced. “You see,” he said, “already you think -we are telling you some fictionized story or trying -to shock you. Please listen, it’s very important, -and if you want to catch the gang, you have to -act quickly.”</p> - -<p>“Go on, go on,” said the chief, leaning on his -desk.</p> - -<p>“At 752 York Street, there is an empty house. -In the cellar of that house you will find a printing -press and all the things necessary to make counterfeit -money.”</p> - -<p>“How do you know all that?” demanded the -chief.</p> - -<p>“We were in there; we saw everything.”</p> - -<p>“And how did you happen to be in there?”</p> - -<p>The chief shot his questions like arrows and -Paul began to waver; he was becoming confused. -“That’s a long story, Chief,” he said, “and I am -trying to come to the point directly.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[185]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Never mind, tell me the whole story.”</p> - -<p>“But Chief Bates, that would take too long and -it is important that you act quickly. The point of -the story is that there are a gang of counterfeiters -operating in the cellar of the empty house at 752 -York Street. There is also a tunnel leading from -that cellar to the cellar of the house in the rear -of 752 York Street. That’s how they get in and -out without being noticed.”</p> - -<p>“But, my dear boy,” exclaimed the chief, irritated, -“how do you know all that? Do you have -any evidence? How am I to believe that what you -are telling me is not a hoax of some sort?”</p> - -<p>Jack jumped to his feet, impatient and exasperated. -“Why don’t you go down there and find -out?” he cried.</p> - -<p>He shoved his hands deep into his pockets. Paul -began to say something, but the next instant Jack -jumped up and cried, “Here, here is your evidence. -Look at this. When we were down there, -there were a number of such bills on the table -and I put this one into my pocket.”</p> - -<p>The chief picked up the fake five dollar bill -that Jack had thrown on the desk and examined -it carefully. He rose and walked to the door and -called to his secretary. “Tell Jim Spencer I want -to see him right away.”</p> - -<p>He returned to his swivel chair and said to the -boys, “Now fellows, I am not doubting your -story; on the contrary, I think that you may be<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[186]</a></span> -telling the truth. But you understand that I have -to question you closely.” He paused and the boys -looked relieved; they even smiled happily. “In the -meanwhile, I do wish you would tell me the whole -story, from beginning to end, how you happened -to discover this gang and all that.”</p> - -<p>Paul looked at his friends and they nodded to -him. Jack said, “Go on, Paul, tell him. But it will -take a long time, though, Chief.”</p> - -<p>The Chief of Police nodded. “That’s all right. -I’m a good listener.”</p> - -<p>Just then a tall, husky man entered the office -and said, “You called for me, Chief?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. Take a look at this.” And the chief gave -Jim Spencer the counterfeit bill.</p> - -<p>The detective quickly and expertly glanced at -the bill and announced, “It’s fake, all right, Chief. -Very clever work, though. Most likely the work -of Moonshine Charlie.”</p> - -<p>“You know what these boys are telling me, -Jim?” asked the Chief. The detective shook his -head and Bates continued, “They say that they -have located the gang, have been down in their -hangout and all they want now, I guess, is for us -to step in and clean the gang up, isn’t that so, -fellows?”</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” cried Jack. “And you had better -hurry, too.”</p> - -<p>“Very interesting,” commented Jim Spencer. -“How did they happen to discover it all?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[187]</a></span></p> - -<p>“That’s just what I’m trying to get out of -them,” answered the chief, “but it’s like pulling -teeth. Sit down and listen to the story.” To Paul, -he said, “All right, go on with your story.”</p> - -<p>“Well,” began the boy, “how it all began may -sound a little fantastic. But you remember, Chief, -that a week ago today, Ken’s little sister, Betty, -disappeared for about an hour. Jack happened to -be on Leonard Street at the moment and he saw -her. He couldn’t understand what she was doing -there, but after questioning her for some time, she -told him that a tall man bought her candy and -then took her for a walk and then he left her all -alone at almost the end of the town.”</p> - -<p>“And so you three became detectives and -undertook to find the man, isn’t that so?” commented -the chief, smiling.</p> - -<p>“Yes, but wait a minute. This man had given -Betty a blank, white card.”</p> - -<p>“Here it is,” cried Jack, and threw the card on -the desk.</p> - -<p>The chief and the detective glanced at it casually. -“Go on,” said the chief.</p> - -<p>“Several days later,” continued Paul, “there -was a fire on Water Street and—”</p> - -<p>“Yes. I remember that,” said the chief. “And -you very bravely ran into the burning house and -saved an old couple and an infant. That was a -very brave deed, my boy.”</p> - -<p>“The important thing,” said Paul, “is that in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[188]</a></span> -the door of the room where the infant was, I -found another card like that.” He searched in his -pocket and produced the evidence. The chief and -the detective examined the two cards. “And to -make a long story short,” continued Paul, “there -was a robbery at Professor Link’s and—”</p> - -<p>“And you found another such card,” said the -chief, interrupting.</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“But that is no evidence; it means nothing,” -said the chief. “You can find cards like these everywhere -you go, by the dozen.”</p> - -<p>“Well, that may be so,” said Paul. “But to us -it was evidence, and we figured that the same man -committed all the three crimes. And we decided to -track him down.”</p> - -<p>“Why didn’t you come to us and tell us?” demanded -Chief Bates.</p> - -<p>Paul was perspiring. He was very tense and he -felt that he was being hindered rather than -helped. “Well, I don’t know,” he remarked, “I -guess we didn’t think of it.”</p> - -<p>“Didn’t think of it!” exclaimed the chief.</p> - -<p>Jack saw how his friend was suffering and he -jumped to his feet and cried, “What difference -does all that make? The important thing is that -we discovered the gang of counterfeiters and if -you don’t act quickly they will escape.”</p> - -<p>“I’m sorry for interrupting,” said the chief, -somewhat embarrassed. “Go on with your story.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[189]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Well, we came across this man. To us he is -known as Mr. Grey. And—”</p> - -<p>“And how did you come across him and how -did you know it was he?”</p> - -<p>“There are a lot of little details that I’m leaving -out to make the story short. At any rate, Jack -followed him one night to the empty house at -752 York Street. We searched the house several -times until we found the secret door to the cellar. -And that’s the end of the story.”</p> - -<p>“Well, there are some other things too, but we -can tell you that later.”</p> - -<p>The chief and the detective eyed each other. -Detective Spencer asked, “Do you happen by any -chance to know any of the members of this counterfeit -gang?”</p> - -<p>Paul nodded. “Yes,” he answered. “The fellow -they call the boss and who seems to be the chief -is a big, fat, dark featured individual. The—”</p> - -<p>Chief Bates and the detective exclaimed simultaneously, -“Moonshine Charlie!”</p> - -<p>“Two other men call themselves Pete and Joe. -Another member of the gang is a man who runs -a grocery store at Main and Jones Streets.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t forget Mr. Grey,” added Jack.</p> - -<p>Paul nodded and said, “That’s right, and Mr. -Grey. That’s all we know.”</p> - -<p>“That’s plenty,” cried Jim Spencer. “Where is -their hangout?”</p> - -<p>“At 752 York Street; in the cellar.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[190]</a></span></p> - -<p>Just then they were interrupted by the entrance -of the secretary, who said, “A gentleman to see -you, Mr. Bates. He—”</p> - -<p>The man was directly behind her and he said, -“Never mind telling who I am and what my business -is. I’ll do it myself.”</p> - -<p>Everybody looked at the speaker. The boys -jumped to their feet as if they had been touched -by an electric spark. Simultaneously, they all cried, -“Mr. Grey!”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[191]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XXII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Mr. Grey</span></p> - -<p>Indeed, it was Mr. Grey. He stood there looking -at them, smiling, self-confident. By now the -chief and Jim Spencer had also jumped to their -feet. Everyone was staring speechless at the gaunt -man. Jack cried, “Who are you?”</p> - -<p>The chief added, “Yes, tell us who you are and -what you want.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Grey walked over to the desk. Pausing for -a moment to eye the secretary, she blushed and -left the room. When the door was closed, he took -a badge out of his pocket and showed it to the -chief.</p> - -<p>“Oh!” exclaimed the chief. “I’m glad to meet -you.”</p> - -<p>“Who is he, Chief Bates?” demanded Jack.</p> - -<p>“A government man,” was the snappy retort.</p> - -<p>“Then why did we find him among the gang?” -demanded Jack. “Anyone can get himself a badge. -Let him really identify himself.”</p> - -<p>They all eyed Mr. Grey. Paul and Ken felt -horrified by Jack’s demand but they felt that he -was right, reasonable. Wasn’t it possible for him -to pass off as a government man and yet be in -reality a member of the gang? Mr. Grey said -smilingly, “That boy will some day make a very -good sleuth.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[192]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Well, you’re wrong,” retorted Jack. “I’m going -to study to be a doctor.”</p> - -<p>That set everybody to laughing. Addressing -Chief Bates, Mr. Grey asked, “What have the -boys been telling you?”</p> - -<p>This time Paul was on his feet. He felt that -Jack was correct in his demand that the man identify -himself further. And the fact that the man -was trying to evade it, aroused his own suspicions. -“Why don’t you identify yourself?” he demanded. -“How do we know who you are? For -all we know, you may be a member of the gang, as -we have thought right along, and only pretending -that you are a government man.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Grey raised his eyebrows but did not lose -any of his equanimity. He smiled and seemed perfectly -at ease. The chief remarked humorously, -“It seems that this thing has passed completely -out of my hands. So you two had better settle the -issue.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Grey said, “These boys are all right. No. -As a matter of fact, they are better than that. -They are shrewd, fine detectives. You ought to -acquire them for your force, Chief.”</p> - -<p>He took his coat off and ripped the seam open. -Producing several papers, he handed them to -Chief Bates, who looked them over carefully. -Then Mr. Grey rolled up the sleeve of his right -arm and revealed a red gash of about two inches -long. The chief was convinced. “Good!” he exclaimed.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[193]</a></span> -Addressing the boys, he said, “He has -identified himself beyond any doubt.”</p> - -<p>The boys were satisfied. Jack said, “All right, -now we know. But do you mind, Mr. er—”</p> - -<p>“Mr. Grey.”</p> - -<p>“Do you mind Mr. Grey, telling us the mystery -of the white cards, your being with the grocery -man who is a member of the gang and—”</p> - -<p>“When the time comes, my boy,” he answered, -“you will know everything. In the meanwhile, may -I repeat my former question. What have the boys -been telling you?”</p> - -<p>Chief Bates cleared his throat. With a twinkle -in his eye, he remarked, “They have been giving -me a cock and bull story about a gang of counterfeiters.”</p> - -<p>“Well, it just happens to be true,” announced -Mr. Grey.</p> - -<p>For a short while there was silence, as though -they were all overcome by the government man’s -statement. “Is it the Moonshine Charlie gang?” -asked Jim Spencer.</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” answered Mr. Grey. “And I’m -here to ask you for ten men to round up the -gang.”</p> - -<p>“Right away?” asked Chief Bates.</p> - -<p>“Right away.”</p> - -<p>“Jim,” said the chief, addressing his detective, -“round up ten men and get them ready. What -else, Mr. Grey?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[194]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Nothing else,” he answered. “That is, for the -present.” Addressing the boys, he said, “Well, -fellows, how do you think we ought to go about -it? But before we discuss that, may I know who -you are?”</p> - -<p>Paul rose. “My name is Paul—Paul Morrison. -And I’m glad to know you, Mr. Grey.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you. You fellows have done some very -good work.”</p> - -<p>“And this is Jack Stormways,” introduced -Paul.</p> - -<p>The two shook hands. Jack remarked, “I’m -not going to say I’m glad to know you, but rather -glad to meet you. After having followed you so -much, I think I know you by now.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Grey smiled. “Yes,” said Mr. Grey, “you -have followed me around a great deal and rather -expertly, too.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you,” said Jack, grinning with pleasure.</p> - -<p>“And this is Ken Armstrong.”</p> - -<p>The two shook hands. “Now,” said Mr. Grey, -“how are we going to finish the job and capture -the gang? What’s your idea, fellows?”</p> - -<p>Paul said, “I guess you ought to know that -better than any of us. We will leave that to you.”</p> - -<p>“Just one favor,” exclaimed Jack.</p> - -<p>“What?”</p> - -<p>“May we go along? I’d like to be in on it.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Grey and the chief exchanged glances. The<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[195]</a></span> -chief shook his head. “It’s going to be dangerous,” -remarked Mr. Grey.</p> - -<p>“Any more dangerous than what we have -already done?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“There may be shooting. And you might get -hurt.”</p> - -<p>“I guess we could keep out of the way. We -might keep in the background.”</p> - -<p>“Well,” conceded Mr. Grey, “if the chief has -no objections, I’ll get you into action somehow.” -The chief shrugged his shoulders. “After all,” -he commented, “who am I to deny them their -fun?”</p> - -<p>“That’s swell,” cried Jack.</p> - -<p>Just then, Detective Spencer returned to the -office and announced that everything was ready. -“I’ll tell you what you can do first, boys. Suppose -Paul and Ken and two officers go down to the -grocery store at Jones Street and arrest Harriman, -the grocery man. If he isn’t in the store, he -is upstairs, in the first room on your right.”</p> - -<p>“And what am I going to do?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>“You will come with me,” said the government -man.</p> - -<p>The boys rose. “Are we all ready?” asked the -chief. “Because I’m also going along.”</p> - -<p>“If you will excuse me,” said Mr. Grey, “I -don’t think you should.”</p> - -<p>“All right. If you insist.”</p> - -<p>“For best interest all around.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[196]</a></span></p> - -<p>The chief nodded. Addressing the boys, he -said, “Well, fellows, it seems that you were right -and I want to apologize for questioning you and -doubting you. And let me tell you that I appreciate -everything you have done and I shall see to it that -you are in some small way rewarded.”</p> - -<p>The boys beamed with delight. Mr. Grey remarked, -“They certainly deserve it, Chief. You -ought to make them honorary members of your -force.”</p> - -<p>“Now, that’s a serious thing,” answered Chief -Bates hesitantly. “But I shall certainly consider -it.”</p> - -<p>“Well, goodbye,” said Ken. “Thanks for listening -to our story.”</p> - -<p>“The thanks is all on my side,” returned the -Chief. “And good luck.”</p> - -<p>They left the office. In the waiting room, Mr. -Grey whispered something in the secretary’s ear -and she blushed and waved him away. In the corridor, -they walked to the rear of the building, -where autos and policemen, armed, waited for -them. Mr. Grey gave the necessary orders, and -with screaming sirens, they were off.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[197]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XXIII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Paul Helps Out</span></p> - -<p>Paul and Ken had entered a large automobile -with three detectives. One was driving, while the -other two talked to the boys. The other cars -went west to drive, at the direction of Mr. Grey, -a roundabout way. The single auto drove along -Main Street. The driver did not use his siren, preferring -to proceed quietly and arouse no curiosity. -Detective Walters, who was in charge of the detail -asked Paul, “You know this fellow Harriman, -the grocery store keeper, don’t you? You could -easily identify him, couldn’t you?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes, very easily.”</p> - -<p>“Fine, then you and I will enter the store and -pick him up. As for you boys,” meaning his fellow policemen, -“one of you will cover the front of -the house, and the other, the rear of the house. -As for you, young fellow,” and he addressed Ken, -“you know how to drive a car, don’t you?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, of course. I drive my dad’s car all the -time.”</p> - -<p>“That’s fine. You stay in the car. Get behind -the wheel and if there is any chasing to do, you -will drive the car. Everybody now knows what he -is to do?” he asked, looking from one man to the -other.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[198]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Yes,” was the answer of all of them.</p> - -<p>The boys felt excited. They liked the way Walters -treated them. They felt as though they were -members of the force with certain jobs assigned -to them. They looked forward to doing as well -as they could.</p> - -<p>The next moment the car came to a halt at the -corner across from the grocery store. Paul immediately -jumped out of the car with the detectives -and Ken at once took his place behind the steering -wheel. The detectives carried no rifles as they did -not wish to arouse suspicion. They were merely -armed with their service revolvers which they -held ready in their coat pockets.</p> - -<p>Walters waited for his mates to take their -places and then he nodded to each one of them in -turn. To Paul, he whispered hurriedly, “In case -of trouble, take shelter right away; get out of the -way of the line of fire. You understand?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir,” was his meek reply.</p> - -<p>Paul felt a wave of excitement. He felt a little -anxious and hoped everything would pass off -quietly without anyone coming to harm.</p> - -<p>Walters, with Paul at his side, started to cross -the street toward the grocery store. They -mounted the sidewalk and approached the door. -Suddenly a shot rang out, fired, so it seemed to -Paul, point blank at them. Immediately Walters, -with his left hand, shoved Paul to one side and -sent him sprawling. As for himself, he dodged<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[199]</a></span> -behind the wall. Evidently, the grocery man had -seen them coming and had realized who they -were and what they were up to. And it further -seemed that he did not intend to give up without -a violent struggle. Walters shouted, “Come on -out or we are coming in to get you.”</p> - -<p>For an answer another shot rang out. Harriman -meant business and no fooling. Walters signalled -to his fellow detectives covering the front -of the house and the man crawled across the street -to the car at the curb. “Duck,” he said to Ken.</p> - -<p>Ken complied and lowered himself in the car. -The detective took out two rifles, a couple of -boxes of ammunition which he shoved into his -pocket and a square box. With this load he crept -back into position. Suddenly Walters ran across -the front of the store and joined him. The next -instant a shot rang out. But it was too late. Walters -was safe and sheltered by lying flat on the -ground behind the curb. “Come on out,” he called -for a second time, “or we’ll give you the works.”</p> - -<p>Again the answer was a shot. Walters picked -up a small stone lying nearby, and, without raising -himself, threw it and shattered the window. -Several shots rang out and Walters and his mate -returned the fire just to impress the gangster.</p> - -<p>In the meanwhile, the detective who covered -the rear of the house, had also run back of the -car, got himself a rifle, a box of cartridges and a -square box similar to the one taken by his fellow<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[200]</a></span> -detective. In an instant he returned to his -position.</p> - -<p>Walters shouted, “Harriman, if you don’t -come out willingly, you’ll be carried out.”</p> - -<p>No answer. For several tense moments there -was silence. A number of people had collected on -the opposite sidewalk and Ken waved to them to -get out of the way. The next moment he tore open -the square box and took out what looked like a -baseball and threw it into the store through the -broken window. There was an explosion and a -cloud of smoke rose. An instant later, two women -burst through the door; they were coughing frantically -and rubbing their eyes. One of the women -was the wife of the grocery man, the other a customer -who by chance had happened to be in the -store at the moment. Walters shouted to them, -“This way. Come here.”</p> - -<p>The other detective took the two women and -led them to the automobile. “Stay here,” he told -them.</p> - -<p>Taking out his revolver, he gave it to Ken and -said, “Now be careful. Keep the women here and -don’t let them get away. You understand?”</p> - -<p>Ken gripped the weapon and nodded, “Yes, -sir.”</p> - -<p>The detective then stole back to his position. -But just then, a cry arose from the rear of the -house. Harriman appeared at the back of the -house and was surprised by the detective who now<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[201]</a></span> -shouted to Walters the news. Walters left his -mate to cover the front and ran to the empty lot -adjoining the corner house. Harriman, in an effort -to escape the tear gas inside the store, rushed -out of the rear door and took a position behind a -cluster of bricks that seemed to form a very -natural fortress. He was cornered, but it seemed -that he refused to surrender without a violent -struggle. It also seemed that he was very well -armed, having two revolvers and plenty of -ammunition.</p> - -<p>Shots continued to ring out in an exchange of -fire. Walters looked around for a way of getting -at the gangster’s rear. There was only one way -and that was through the house. But immediately -Walters realized that to move out of his shelter -behind a tree would take him into the open and -make of him a very simple target. It occurred to -him that he was now just as well cornered as his -prey and that the only alternative was to shoot it -out, unless of course the detective left to guard -the front of the house took the initiative and got -at Harriman’s rear.</p> - -<p>Now let us see what happened to Paul in the -meanwhile. When Walters pushed him and sent -him sprawling, he was on the side of the house -facing Main Street. He wondered what he could -do. His investigation several days before had -revealed to him the door at the rear of the house. -But he thought that the grocery man, realizing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[202]</a></span> -the odds against him, would certainly surrender. -He had no idea that Harriman would be so stubborn -and defy the policemen. But he did. And the -more Paul waited for the gangster to surrender, -the more he realized that the grocery store keeper -was bent on violence. After the barrage of tear -gas and the cry announcing the gangster at the -rear of the house, he lifted himself slightly off -the ground and made sure of the exact spot where -Harriman had barricaded himself.</p> - -<p>Thinking quickly, he rushed to the corner and -waved to the detective, hoping that the man would -understand what he was up to. The next moment -he rushed into the hall of the house where the -stairs were leading upstairs. He figured that there -must be a door leading from the hall into the -store. But he didn’t want to get into the store. -And he tried to think how Harriman had escaped -from the store to the rear of the house. He looked -around. There was only one door at the end of -the hall. Approaching noiselessly, he pulled the -door open. To his complete amazement, he was -directly behind the gangster who was absorbed by -the fire of the detectives. Without hesitating or -giving Harriman a chance to realize his danger, -Paul let out a most horrible shriek and threw -himself on the gangster. Harriman looked up, -his face pale and frightened. He turned to fire at -Paul, but it was too late. The boy was already on -top of him and pinning his arms.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[203]</a></span></p> - -<p>Harriman was a bulky, strong individual. With -Paul on top of him, he rose and was on the point -of whirling his assailant off. But by this time the -two detectives were also on top of him and pinned -his arms. Paul slipped off the gangster’s back. In -an instant Walters slapped handcuffs on the gangster. -Turning to Paul, he cried, “You fool!”</p> - -<p>Paul smiled and appeared quite calm and confident. -Walters slapped him on the back and together -they escorted the criminal to the automobile, -while the other detective began to pick up -Harriman’s guns and ammunition.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[204]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XXIV</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Battle</span></p> - -<p>Siren screaming, Ken drove the car down Main -Street and to police headquarters. Chief Bates -met them and congratulated them on their capture. -“Any trouble, boys?” he asked.</p> - -<p>Walters smiled and said, “It seems, Chief, that -we couldn’t get along without these youngsters.” -He pointed to Paul, and asked, “Do you know -what he did, this kid?”</p> - -<p>The chief shook his head and asked, “What did -he do? Get into trouble again or something?”</p> - -<p>“Well, if it wasn’t for him,” was the answer, -“we would still be there pegging away at each -other. That kid up and jumped the gangster. All -we had to do was to take him into custody.”</p> - -<p>The chief laughed uproariously. “Some detectives -you are!” he exclaimed. “Letting a kid do -your work!”</p> - -<p>“I tell you, Chief, there is no getting away with -it—these kids are the tops,” said Walters, slapping -Paul on the back.</p> - -<p>“But seriously, though,” remarked the chief, -“I don’t want you fellows to get into any trouble. -Do you hear me?” he demanded, pretending he -was being tough on them. “You have done enough -and I want you to keep out of harm.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[205]</a></span></p> - -<p>Paul smiled. “All right, Chief,” he said. “Did -you hear from the others?”</p> - -<p>“No, I didn’t,” he answered. Addressing his -detectives, he said, “You boys better run down -there and give them a hand if they need it.”</p> - -<p>“May we go along?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“All right. I guess these detectives of mine -wouldn’t be able to find the place or know what -to do without you.” They all laughed heartily. -“But don’t get into more trouble, do you hear me, -you two?”</p> - -<p>The three detectives and Paul and Ken got -into the car and rode off. At their destination, -they came upon a pitched battle. It seemed that -the gang was a tough bunch and ready to battle -the law rather than surrender in spite of the -heavy odds against them.</p> - -<p>At the corner of York Street, when the police -cars arrived, they stopped and Mr. Grey had -issued instructions. Four of the detectives he instructed -to take up varying positions across the -street from the house which led to the secret -door. Accompanied by three more policemen and -Jack, he went to 752 York Street. The detectives -he told to deploy around the house and Jack he -warned to keep out of the way. On second -thought, he turned to Jack and said, “You go back -there and watch those automobiles.”</p> - -<p>Reluctantly, Jack went to obey and sat himself -in the second car. He wanted to be in on the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[206]</a></span> -action, but he realized why the government agent -wanted him out of the way.</p> - -<p>The detectives were armed with rifles and sub-machine -guns. Mr. Grey looked around to see if -all his men were in position. He gave the signal -for all of them to be on the alert. Gripping -his revolver, he entered the empty house and left -the door open. Noiselessly, he opened the trap -door and descended the stairs. The cellar was lit -up and that told him that the gangsters were -there. As far as he knew, Joe and Pete were surely -there, but he didn’t know whether Moonshine -Charlie himself was there. He paused to listen, -and only the voices of the two reached him. For -several seconds he debated with himself whether -to wait until the arrival of the boss. On the other -hand, he thought, he might seize the two and then -let Moonshine Charlie walk into a trap.</p> - -<p>Descending noiselessly, he came to the bottom -of the stairs. The two gangsters were at the table, -Pete with his right side toward Mr. Grey and Joe -having his back toward the agent. Mr. Grey -levelled his gun and muttered threateningly, “Put -your hands up, boys. Quick. Reach for the ceiling -and no monkey business.”</p> - -<p>The two gangsters jumped to their feet and -put their hands up above their heads. Pete cried, -“What the—What’s all this about?”</p> - -<p>“You’ll find out right away,” was the answer. -Mr. Grey saw them edging toward the back of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[207]</a></span> -the table and he warned them, “Don’t you move -or I’ll plug you.”</p> - -<p>But the next instant Pete turned over the table -with his leg and the two gangsters threw themselves -behind it. Mr. Grey fired, the bullet burying -itself in the wooden table. Pete fired back and the -government agent threw himself on the floor and -crept behind the stairs for protection. “The house -is surrounded,” he told them. “You had better -surrender if you want to get out alive.”</p> - -<p>Pete tossed back, “Like hell!”</p> - -<p>He fired and Mr. Grey returned. Pulling the -table along, they moved gradually back toward -the secret door. The government agent realized -that their escape through the tunnel into the next -house was safe and sure; there was nothing he -could do about it. So he let them work their way -gradually back. Joe raised his arms to pull open -the door and the next moment he grabbed it away, -letting out a yell. Mr. Grey had fired and the bullet -had pierced the gangster’s hand. But the door -was now ajar, and in a moment they pulled it -open and escaped.</p> - -<p>Mr. Grey ran forward and whatever he could -find, he piled up against the door, shutting off -their return into the cellar. The gangsters were -now trapped in the second house. The government -man ran up the stairs, and cautiously -emerged from the house, to make sure his own -men did not fire on him. Coming out into the open,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[208]</a></span> -he directed his men to close up on the house.</p> - -<p>In the meanwhile, the gangsters, realizing that -their escape was cut off at both ends, set up sub-machine -guns at both ends of the house and began -to rake every inch of ground within sight. The -detectives got busy. Several of them used their -own sub-machine guns. Others, picking up stones -wherever they found them, managed to break -every window in the house.</p> - -<p>The detectives ripped open the square boxes and -began to throw tear gas into the house through the -open windows. Several of the bombs fell short of -the house, and pretty soon the whole house was enveloped -in thick clouds of smoke. There was no -wind and the smoke hung in the air in and around -the house. Within five minutes, both gangsters -stumbled out of the doorway, coughing hard and -trying hard to keep their hands above their heads.</p> - -<p>Several of the detectives immediately ran forward -and grabbed them, at the same time dragging -them away from the clouds of tear gas. They -were immediately surrounded and handcuffed. -Just then a siren screamed and everyone turned to -see what was happening.</p> - -<p>Jack was sitting in the car and watched the -battle. He was glad now that he was at a safe -distance. It was too bloody an affair for him. -After a while, he leaned back in the seat and paid -no attention to what was going on. He waited for -the finish and for the detectives to return. He heard<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[209]</a></span> -the crackling of rifle fire and the explosion of bombs.</p> - -<p>Resting in the back seat of the automobile he -only hoped that no one would be hit and that all -would turn out well. Why couldn’t the gangsters -give up, he thought to himself. Couldn’t they see -that the odds were against them? And even if they -should escape this time, which was impossible, -they would still be hunted and caught by the police -of some other town or city.</p> - -<p>Jack leaned forward and peeked out of the -window. He caught his breath and became tense. -There was a man across the street who looked -very familiar and appeared to be exceedingly interested -in the battle that was going on between -the criminals and the police. The man, tall, fat, -husky, stood in front of a roadster that evidently -belonged to him. “Moonshine Charlie,” Jack -thought to himself.</p> - -<p>Yet he had not heard the man drive up. It was -because he was absorbed in his own thoughts. -Now what am I to do? What can I do? These -questions came to Jack’s mind, yet he found no -answer. It was no use to call one of the detectives; -the gangster might disappear in the meanwhile. -What could he do?</p> - -<p>Jack became conscious of the fact that the firing -had ceased. He saw the fat man get into his -car and drive off, turning into the next corner. -Jack jumped to the wheel, set off the siren screaming -and was immediately chasing the gangster.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[210]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XXV</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Into the Lake</span></p> - -<p>The detectives were startled by the sound of -the siren but it immediately put them on their -guard. Seeing the car which Moonshine Charlie -was driving, tearing down the street, they thought -something was wrong and they threw themselves -to the ground. The gangster was bent on revenge, -though there was little he could do. His plan evidently -was to drive by the group of detectives, -and through the open window of his car, fire on -them as he passed. It was a violent gesture, born -of hate and contempt.</p> - -<p>The detectives threw themselves on the ground, -dragging the two gangsters down with them. -Moonshine Charlie fired four or five times as he -sped by, but all his shots were futile and hurt -no one. However, Jack was only a couple of yards -behind him. The boy slowed down as he came -alongside a group of policemen. Mr. Grey jumped -forth and leaped onto the running board. -“Drive!” he cried.</p> - -<p>The car leaped forward and flew out of sight. -The gangster kept speeding straight ahead. Jack -kept his siren screaming and hoped no one would -get in his way. Mr. Grey assured himself of a firm<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[211]</a></span> -hold and then turned his attention to the fleeing -automobile ahead of him. The police car was -much more powerful and Jack was gaining gradually. -Mr. Grey aimed and then fired, but with no -result.</p> - -<p>Moonshine Charlie turned the next corner on -two wheels. Jack was after him. The gangster -began to zigzag and that was to his disadvantage -because that enabled Jack to gain considerable -distance on him. Mr. Grey fired a second time, -but again, the shot had no effect. Suddenly Jack -caught his breath. Moonshine Charlie had turned -a corner. The boy knew that it was a dead end -street and unless the gangster slowed up, the car -would run straight into the lake.</p> - -<p>Jack slowed up as he turned the corner. Mr. -Grey of course did not realize why, but as soon as -the corner was turned, he saw for himself. The -gangster didn’t know it was a dead end street. It -was too late when he realized it. Slamming on the -brakes, the car seemed to shiver and bounce into -the air. Evidently Moonshine Charlie had lost -control of his machine, for it ran onto the sidewalk, -almost crashed into the brick wall of a -house, and then leaped through the wooden fence -and into the lake.</p> - -<p>Jack pulled the car up to the curb and stopped. -Mr. Grey and he rushed up to the lake. The terrible -splash of the water caused by the plunging -automobile was already becoming calm. Jack<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[212]</a></span> -stared at the approximate spot and shivered. Mr. -Grey asked, “Anything wrong, fellow?”</p> - -<p>“No,” was the meek answer. There was a short -silent pause, then he remarked with deep feeling, -“It’s a terrible death.”</p> - -<p>The government agent nodded silently, then -replied, “He lived a terrible life.”</p> - -<p>By now a crowd had gathered and several reporters -and photographers had arrived. Mr. Grey -and Jack pushed their way through and drove off -again. “Shall we go back and see if the men are -still there?” asked Jack.</p> - -<p>Mr. Grey nodded. “Yes, let’s go back.”</p> - -<p>For a short while they drove along in silence. -Jack felt so shaken by the incident that he drove -the car at a very slow pace. The agent commented, -“It’s a good thing you happened to be there -on the spot, or else he would have gotten away and -might also have wounded some of the men.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” answered Jack ironically, “I thought I -was safely out of it when bang, there. I was right -in it.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Grey regained his good humor and -laughed. “It seems that we can’t get along without -you fellows. You boys have done more in the -capture of the gang than I and the detectives did. -I wonder if they got Harriman all right.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t suppose they had any difficulty,” was -Jack’s opinion.</p> - -<p>“I’m not so sure of that,” was the contrary<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[213]</a></span> -opinion. “Harriman was a violent sort of person, -very temperamental and brutal. But for that matter -they all were. A tough bunch they were.”</p> - -<p>They arrived at the scene of the battle. The -change was now so vastly different, that Mr. Grey -commented upon the fact, “Suddenly, everything -is again quiet and serene. Isn’t it wonderful?”</p> - -<p>Jack was silent. There was no one in view and -they assumed that the detectives with their prisoners -had returned to police headquarters. Mr. -Grey suggested that they enter the house and see -what was inside. Jack had no objection and together -they mounted the few steps to the porch -and entered the house. The door opened on a -small foyer, with stairs leading up to the rooms -above. On their left was a door which Mr. Grey -opened and they entered. The room was fairly -well furnished as a living room, but now, after the -battle, it was in considerable disorder.</p> - -<p>They went from room to room and then upstairs. -They were all fairly well furnished. Except -for the two rooms which were used by the gangsters -in their struggle with the police, the furniture -was not at all disturbed. Jack asked, “Did -the gangsters occupy this house?”</p> - -<p>“In a fashion. But they didn’t live here,” the -agent informed him. “Actually they lived at the -hotel, but they used this house from which to -carry on their operations. Let’s go, shall we?”</p> - -<p>They returned to their car and drove back to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[214]</a></span> -police headquarters. There they found that the -prisoners had been brought in and put in jail; not -one of the detectives had been hurt. The chief -greeted them and shook Mr. Grey’s hand. “Great -work,” he said, “great work. Did you get Moonshine -Charlie?”</p> - -<p>The government agent shook his head sadly -and replied, “No, I’m sorry to say I didn’t.” He -turned to Jack for confirmation. “You see,” he -continued, “he got away. We were just about to -grab him when phizz, up he goes and jumps into -the lake.”</p> - -<p>“Jumps into the lake!” exclaimed the chief.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” was the answer. “You see, he was going -so fast, he couldn’t stop himself.”</p> - -<p>“He fell in, car and all,” added Jack.</p> - -<p>Chief Bates heaved a sigh of relief. “Whew! -For a moment you had me thinking that he actually -got away.”</p> - -<p>“Well, he did,” insisted Mr. Grey. “He got -away so cleanly, no one will ever catch him -again.”</p> - -<p>The chief and the detectives laughed. Catching -sight of Jack, the chief pulled him forward and -shook him by the hand. “I already heard of what -you did, fellow,” he said. “That was very bravely -done.”</p> - -<p>“As I was telling him just before,” commented -Mr. Grey, “I don’t know what we would have -done without him and his friends. They did more<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[215]</a></span> -to capture the gang than all of us put together.”</p> - -<p>“You didn’t hear all of it,” exclaimed the chief. -“Did you hear what his friend, Paul Morrison, -did?”</p> - -<p>Jack nodded and wondered what Paul had been -up to now. “What this fellow, Paul, did?” continued -the chief. “He went with three men to take -Harriman into custody. Well, this fellow put up -a tough battle. To make a long story short, he -came out of the rear of his store, barricaded himself -and fired shot for shot. They might still be -there shooting it out if it wasn’t for this fellow. -He sneaked up on his rear, jumped the gangster, -and bingo! there he was all captured and no -longer tough and fighting.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Grey laughed heartily. “These fellows,” -he remarked, “are showing us all up. Did I say -before you ought to make them honorary members -of your force? I take it back. They would -show your men up so, the whole force would soon -be plagued with an inferiority complex.”</p> - -<p>The chief roared and slapped his knee. “That’s -a good one,” he cried.</p> - -<p>Jack said, “By the way, where are Ken and -Paul?”</p> - -<p>“They are in the detectives’ room. Shall I call -them? Do you want them?”</p> - -<p>“Well, it’s about time we went home.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Grey laughed. “Notice how calm and nonchalant -he is and with what poise he said that,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[216]</a></span>” -commented the government agent. “The job is -done, nothing else to do, so it’s about time to go -home, just like that.”</p> - -<p>Jack blushed and Chief Bates laughed. “Well,” -he said, “there is really no reason why the boys -should not go home.”</p> - -<p>“No, I guess not. I think they deserve it.”</p> - -<p>“Yes.” The chief winked to the government -agent. “I think I will send them home in an official -car.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, that isn’t necessary at all,” cried Jack. -“We can just as well walk home.”</p> - -<p>He rose to his feet as if he intended to leave. -“Now you just sit there,” said the chief. Opening -the door of his office, he called his secretary to -have the boys come in.</p> - -<p>Chief Bates and the government agent continued -their joking. A minute later Jack and Ken and -Walters entered. “Oh, there you are,” cried Paul. -“We didn’t know where you were and what happened -to you.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” added Ken, “we were waiting for you.”</p> - -<p>“Well, here I am,” Jack informed his friends, -“and I think it’s time we went home.”</p> - -<p>Chief Bates, addressing the detective, said, -“Walters, will you please take the boys home?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, that isn’t necessary at all,” cried Paul. -“Thanks all the same. But we can walk home.”</p> - -<p>“Notice the modesty of them,” remarked Mr. -Grey. “It’s really funny.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[217]</a></span></p> - -<p>The chief laughed. “All right,” said Walters, -“if you’re ready, let’s go.”</p> - -<p>Chief Bates came around the desk and shook -hands with them. “Any time I can do anything -for you boys,” he said seriously, “don’t forget -to call on me.”</p> - -<p>“And when you want some good detective work -done,” intervened Mr. Grey, “you call on them.”</p> - -<p>The boys were beginning to feel uncomfortable. -The government agent rose and approached them. -“Well, boys,” he said, “it was a real pleasure to -work with you.” He paused for a second, then -added, “The only trouble of collaborating with -you is that you do all the work and leave the other -fellow nothing to do.”</p> - -<p>There was laughter all around. Then Jack said, -“Mr. Grey, you must not forget that we want to -talk some things over with you. There are a couple -of mysterious details that we think, you can -clear up for us.”</p> - -<p>The man bowed low and replied, “I am at your -disposal, sir.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps you might visit us tonight at my -house,” added Paul. “Then you could tell us everything.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” nodded Ken. “How about it?”</p> - -<p>“I shall be there at eight sharp, gentlemen.”</p> - -<p>The boys smiled at the man’s behavior. He was -really lots of fun. They said goodbye all around -and left, accompanied by Walters.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[218]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XXVI</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Trouble at Home</span></p> - -<p>The boys got into the official car with Walters -at the wheel. Jack and Ken sat in the back while -Paul sat in the front with the driver. Paul remarked, -“Now that all that is done, our real work -begins.”</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“Do you remember what we originally started -out to solve?” Paul asked.</p> - -<p>“I was just thinking of that,” muttered Jack. -“We have gotten as far away from the original -mystery as we could.”</p> - -<p>“What are you kids talking about?” asked -Walters.</p> - -<p>“Well,” said Paul for the detective’s information, -“we happened to discover the gang of counterfeiters -by....”</p> - -<p>“You don’t mean to tell me that it was you -fellows who discovered them!” exclaimed the detective.</p> - -<p>“Well, in a small way, yes.”</p> - -<p>“That’s a rich one,” was Walters’ retort. “But -go on with what you were saying.”</p> - -<p>“What I was going to say,” continued Paul, -“was that some maniac has been roaming through -town and doing things, always leaving a white -card to mark his visit there.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[219]</a></span></p> - -<p>“You don’t say!” remarked Walters. “And -you’re trying to track him down?”</p> - -<p>“That’s right.”</p> - -<p>“How did you find out about this fellow with -the white card?”</p> - -<p>“Well, do you remember when Ken’s little sister, -Betty, was reported missing for about an -hour and then turned up again?”</p> - -<p>“Why, yes, I remember the case. And I don’t -think anything was done about it.”</p> - -<p>“No,” said Paul. “But that’s how we began -our investigation that led up to the discovery of -752 York Street.”</p> - -<p>“Now that’s very interesting,” commented the -detective. “How did it happen?”</p> - -<p>“Well, you see, Jack found her all the way out -on Leonard Street. Questioning her, she told him -that a man bought her candy and then took her -for a walk and left her there.”</p> - -<p>“And then what?”</p> - -<p>“Well, the man also gave her a white card. And -that’s how our investigation began.”</p> - -<p>“Wait a minute,” cried Jack, flushed with excitement. -“Do you remember that all along we -have been thinking that Mr. Grey was that man -and that is why we were following him and all -that, just waiting to jump on him?”</p> - -<p>Ken exclaimed, “Why that is right, come to -think of it.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[220]</a></span></p> - -<p>Walters laughed. “So Mr. Grey is the guilty -party. That’s good.”</p> - -<p>And he laughed some more. “What are we going -to do, Paul?”</p> - -<p>“We will just have to ask him, I guess,” was -the reply. “I imagine he will be able to clear up a -lot of details for us.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Ken, “but you don’t think he was -responsible for the fires and the robbery at Professor -Link’s, do you?”</p> - -<p>“What about the fires and that robbery you are -talking about?” asked Walters.</p> - -<p>“We found that there have lately been more -than an average number of fires in town.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” agreed the detective. “I remember -that Captain Bob has spoken to the chief -about it and I think that a detective has been put -on the case. I’ll find out who it is and tell him to -look you up.”</p> - -<p>The detective treated it as a good joke. While -he was still laughing Paul remarked, “Yes, send -him over. We may be able to give him some valuable -information.”</p> - -<p>The detective was still more amused and the -boys laughed too. “That’s right, Walters,” echoed -Ken, “some day when you have a case you can’t -solve, call on us.”</p> - -<p>“I think we have been talking too much,” replied -the detective.</p> - -<p>The car pulled up to the curb in front of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[221]</a></span> -Morrison home. Paul and Ken, who lived across -the street, jumped out. They waved to Jack and -Walters as the car sped away to deliver the last -of the trio home.</p> - -<p>Paul rushed into the house and upstairs to his -room. His mother as yet knew nothing about her -son’s adventure. Later on, she called him to dinner. -Dr. Morrison walked in. Seeing his son, he -exclaimed, “Well, well! Permit me to congratulate -you, my boy. I didn’t know we had a hero in -the family.”</p> - -<p>Paul blushed and became very busy with his -grape fruit. Mrs. Morrison asked innocently, “A -hero in the family? What are you talking about?”</p> - -<p>Dr. Morrison waved a newspaper. “Just take -a look at the evening paper and you’ll see. His -picture is in there and the whole story of how he -and his friends captured a gang of counterfeiters.”</p> - -<p>Paul’s head sunk lower. So his picture was in -the paper! He wondered how the reporters got it -and whether Jack’s and Ken’s pictures were also -in the paper. He was itching to read what the -papers had to say about the affair. But his mother -grabbed the newspaper and read it breathlessly. -A minute later she looked up and demanded, -“Paul Morrison! Will you please tell me what -this is all about?”</p> - -<p>Paul shook his head meekly. “Why nothing, -Mother,” he whispered. “It just happened that -I....”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[222]</a></span></p> - -<p>He faltered and his mother said, “It just happened! -I will be very glad to see you go off to -college. You will be too busy there to get into -mischief.”</p> - -<p>But the next moment she smiled sweetly and -and came around the table and kissed him. Dr. -Morrison was beaming. He had always been -proud of his son. He said, addressing his wife, -“He is all right; he is one boy who can take care -of himself.”</p> - -<p>“I’m sure of that,” answered Mrs. Morrison, -“but for my peace of mind I wish he would keep -out of trouble. I hope college will do that—keep -him out of mischief.”</p> - -<p>Just then the maid entered and announced that -Paul was wanted on the telephone. He went into -the foyer and picked up the receiver. It was Jack. -“Hello.”</p> - -<p>“Hello, Paul. Are you in trouble with your -family about the affair?”</p> - -<p>“A little.”</p> - -<p>“Well, so am I. Goodbye.”</p> - -<p>Paul went back to the dining room. His father -said, “Now, since you were a participant, do you -mind telling us a few of the details?” So Paul -started in to relate the whole story.</p> - -<p>At the Armstrong home, it happened a little -differently. Ken entered the house and went to -wash up. Soon his father returned home from the -office, carrying an evening paper. Looking around<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[223]</a></span> -for his son, he found the boy in the library reading -a story to his little sister Betty. Mr. Armstrong -walked in, stood over the boy for several -seconds, pretending that he was going to give him -a good verbal thrashing, then exclaimed, “So! So -you have decided to become a detective!”</p> - -<p>“What’s a defective?” Betty asked innocently.</p> - -<p>Ken and his father burst out laughing. Mr. -Armstrong bent down and said to the child, “Detective, -honey. The word is detective.”</p> - -<p>Ken still laughed. He thought his little sister -was cunning in the way she had said it. Turning -to his son, Mr. Armstrong asked, “Well, what is -it all about?”</p> - -<p>“What does the paper say?” asked Ken.</p> - -<p>“Here, see for yourself.” And Mr. Armstrong -gave the evening paper to his son. “Your picture -is in it and Chief Bates is quoted as saying that -you were real heroes. Imagine it, my son a hero!”</p> - -<p>“Well, what’s wrong with that, Dad?” asked -Ken.</p> - -<p>Just then Mrs. Armstrong entered.</p> - -<p>Mr. Armstrong said, “Will you come here a -second, Mother? I want to tell you something.” -She came into the library. “Did you know that -your son is a hero?” asked her husband.</p> - -<p>“What did he do now?” she inquired calmly.</p> - -<p>“Give your mother the newspaper, Ken.”</p> - -<p>Mrs. Armstrong took the paper and glanced -at the headlines and the pictures. She said calmly,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[224]</a></span> -“Nothing surprises me. What these boys can’t -get into has not been invented yet. Come to -dinner.”</p> - -<p>They rose to comply. Mr. Armstrong put an -arm around the boy’s shoulder and said, “You’re -all right, son. But I do hope college will tame you -and your friends a bit.”</p> - -<p>They went into the dining room. When they -were about half through the meal Ken was called -to the telephone. It was Jack. “Hello, Ken.”</p> - -<p>“Hello, Jack. What’s up?”</p> - -<p>“Are you having trouble with your family -about that affair?”</p> - -<p>“No, not really. My father and mother took it -very well.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I am. Goodbye.”</p> - -<p>Jack’s reception had been different. When he -got into the house, he found his mother waiting -for him. One of the neighbors, who had been out -shopping returned home with an afternoon newspaper. -She immediately ran over to show Mrs. -Stormways the headlines and the pictures of Jack -and his friends. Jack’s mother first became frightened, -and was on the point of calling Chief Bates -to inquire further into the matter. But then she -thought it would be better to wait until her son -returned. It was evident that no harm had come -to him, or it would have been in the paper.</p> - -<p>She waited for her son. At last he came and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[225]</a></span> -she asked him, “Well, Jack Stormways, what is -this all about?”</p> - -<p>“What is what about, Mother?”</p> - -<p>He really did not know that the story was in -the afternoon papers and that his mother knew -the situation. She showed him the paper with the -headlines and the pictures. His first comment was, -“Not such a bad picture of me and the boys, is it, -Mother?”</p> - -<p>The remark took her breath away for a moment. -His calmness and self-assurance overwhelmed -her. She smiled. “Is that all you can say -for yourself?” she asked.</p> - -<p>He went over and kissed her. “What can I say, -Mother?” he replied. “The story is right here -and I guess I am guilty. But there was really nothing -to it. I merely helped a little to capture the -gang.”</p> - -<p>“Just helped a little!” commented Mrs. Stormways. -“You’re always taking some sort of risk. I -don’t know what will ever happen to you.”</p> - -<p>“Now, Mother,” pleaded Jack, “you know I -can take care of myself.”</p> - -<p>“That’s just the trouble,” she replied. “You -can take care of yourself too well.”</p> - -<p>Just then Jack’s younger brother, aged thirteen, -burst into the house. Seeing Jack with his mother, -he cried, “Say, I heard you were playing cops and -robbers; is it true?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[226]</a></span></p> - -<p>Jack and his mother laughed. “Come on, Jack, -tell me about it,” insisted the boy.</p> - -<p>But Jack paid no attention to his brother. His -mother said, “I just wonder what your father will -say when he comes home.”</p> - -<p>She walked out into the kitchen to continue her -preparations for dinner. In due time, Mr. Stormways -came home carrying an evening paper with -him. As soon as he stepped into the house, his -younger son cried, “Did you hear, Dad? Jack has -been playing cops and robbers.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, son, I heard all about it. Too much, in -fact. What do you think we ought to do about it?”</p> - -<p>“I think you ought to make him tell us all about -it, Dad,” answered the boy. “He wouldn’t tell me -anything.”</p> - -<p>“All right, we’ll see what we can do about that. -Where is he, by the way?”</p> - -<p>“He is upstairs in his room. Shall I call him?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, do, son. Tell him to come down for dinner. -I shall be in the dining room.”</p> - -<p>Jack came downstairs. His father was at the -table. As soon as he walked into the room, his -father rose and bowing, said, “May I congratulate -you? Will you please tell us how it feels to be -a hero?”</p> - -<p>Jack blushed. “Oh, don’t do, that, Dad,” -pleaded Jack.</p> - -<p>But Mr. Stormways was enjoying himself. “Sit -down, my hero,” he said. He led Jack to the head<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[227]</a></span> -of the table and sat him down there, saying, -“Since you are now a hero, you shall preside over -the dinner table.” As Mrs. Stormways came in -her husband called out, “An extra portion of -everything for the hero, my dear.”</p> - -<p>“Ah, Dad, don’t,” pleaded Jack.</p> - -<p>But Mr. Stormways was not to be dissuaded. -Sitting down, he said, “Now tell me, did you capture -the gang all by yourself, or did someone help -you a little?”</p> - -<p>Jack smiled. He thought he might as well join -in with his father’s humor. “Well,” he answered, -“Paul and Ken did help a little, but very little.”</p> - -<p>“Just what I thought,” remarked his father. -“And tell me another thing,” continued Mr. -Stormways, “did the gangsters run just as soon as -they saw you or did they hesitate for a little -while?”</p> - -<p>“They immediately surrendered,” was the -reply.</p> - -<p>“Now let me think,” mused his dad, “what else -was there I wanted to ask you. Oh, yes. I suppose, -that as a reward for your bravery, the president -himself will no doubt come here to congratulate -you and bestow upon you the Congressional -Medal of Honor, is that so?”</p> - -<p>“Well, I don’t know about that, Dad,” replied -Jack. “I imagine that he may be too busy to do -that. But I am sure he will send a representative.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[228]</a></span></p> - -<p>There was a silent pause for a few seconds, -then Mr. Stormways burst out laughing. “Well, -seriously, fellow,” he said, “don’t you think that -you ought to stop keeping company with gangsters -and all that?”</p> - -<p>“I’ll try, Dad.”</p> - -<p>Just then Jack’s younger brother spoke up and -asked for details of the story and Jack complied -by telling all of it.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[229]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XXVII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Mystery of the White Card</span></p> - -<p>The boys were at the Morrison home waiting -for Mr. Grey to appear. They had hundreds of -questions to ask him and they hoped that he would -clear up the mystery of the white card. But if he -did not, they would be at a loss as to what to do -next. They would either have to give up or commence -their investigation all over again, and they -were rather tired of the thing by now. Jack remarked, -“I still can’t understand how we happened -to come upon Mr. Grey and follow him. I -don’t suppose he had anything to do with the mystery -of the white card.”</p> - -<p>“But it was you who originally began to follow -him,” said Ken.</p> - -<p>“That’s right. But now that I think of it, I can’t -understand how I happened to pick on him.”</p> - -<p>“Betty described the man who took her for a -walk as tall and thin,” interposed Paul.</p> - -<p>“Yes, but there are many tall, thin men in -town,” argued Jack.</p> - -<p>“And we came to the conclusion that the man -who would start fires and steal a single book must -be a maniac of some sort.”</p> - -<p>Jack laughed. “Well, does Mr. Grey look like -a maniac?” he asked.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[230]</a></span></p> - -<p>Paul smiled and remarked, “Well, he does look -rather odd, tall and thin as he is.”</p> - -<p>“All that doesn’t get us anywhere,” said Jack.</p> - -<p>“Well, let’s not come to any conclusions but -wait until Mr. Grey comes,” remarked Paul.</p> - -<p>“Yes, he’ll clear it all up for us.”</p> - -<p>About ten minutes later, the government agent -arrived. He looked like a changed man, dressed -in a summer linen suit and his hair combed neatly -back. “Hello, fellows,” he greeted as he entered.</p> - -<p>“Hello, Mr. Grey,” returned Paul. “Won’t you -sit down?”</p> - -<p>“Well, I’ll try,” he said as he took a seat, “but -I’m afraid you fellows are going to question me -so much, you’ll have me standing on my head.”</p> - -<p>“Then we’ll turn you over and sit you down -again,” spoke up Jack.</p> - -<p>“Now, Mr. Grey,” began Paul, “and by the -way, is that your real name?”</p> - -<p>“No, of course not. My name is George Wilson.”</p> - -<p>“Well, Mr. Wilson, we are mystified by a certain -little thing,” continued Paul, “and I wonder -if you can clear it for us.”</p> - -<p>“Try me and we’ll see.”</p> - -<p>“The mystery of the white card,” Jack blurted -out. “What is it all about?”</p> - -<p>“What white card?” asked the agent mystified.</p> - -<p>“You don’t know?” cried Ken.</p> - -<p>The man shook his head in complete ignorance.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[231]</a></span> -“I’ll faint,” cried Jack, falling back in his chair -and pretending that he was actually fainting.</p> - -<p>“Tell me what it is all about,” asked the government -agent. “I don’t even know what you are -talking about.”</p> - -<p>“And we thought that you could give us the -solution,” commented Jack. “Now what are we -going to do?”</p> - -<p>“Will you please let me in on it?” Mr. Wilson -asked for the second time.</p> - -<p>“It’s like this,” began Paul, again explaining -the whole thing, this time for the benefit of Mr. -Wilson. “About ten days ago, Ken’s little sister, -Betty, disappeared. Jack happened to find her all -the way out on Leonard Street. Questioning her, -he found that a man had bought her candy, taken -her for a walk and left her there after he gave -her a blank white card.”</p> - -<p>“May I see the card?” asked Mr. Wilson.</p> - -<p>Paul took it out of his pocket and showed it to -him. The agent glanced at it and then said, “Go -on.”</p> - -<p>“Well, several days later there happened to be -a fire on Water Street and I rushed into the building. -To make the story short, inside that burning -house I found another white card, an exact duplicate -of the first one.”</p> - -<p>“What?” asked Mr. Wilson, his curiosity now -aroused. “And then what?”</p> - -<p>“That isn’t all,” continued Paul. “The next day<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[232]</a></span> -a robbery occurred at Professor Link’s and all -that was taken was a single book out of the library. -And what’s more, the same white card was -left.”</p> - -<p>“But the point of the story is,” intervened Ken, -“we thought all along that you were the guilty -person and that is how Jack began to follow you.”</p> - -<p>“I!” cried the agent, aghast. “How do I come -in on this?”</p> - -<p>“Well, sir,” spoke up Jack, “it was really all -my fault. After talking the thing over, we came -to the conclusion that only a,—er,—a maniac sort -of person would do anything like that.”</p> - -<p>“And you took me for a maniac?” cried the -agent, bursting out laughing. “That’s a good -one.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think so,” replied Jack.</p> - -<p>“No, I agree with you,” said Mr. Wilson. “I -don’t think it’s quite the thing to be taken for a -maniac. But go on.”</p> - -<p>“Well, sir,” continued Jack, “I began to follow -you. And the first night I followed you out to -Waters Street, to the exact spot where the fire -occurred, and ...”</p> - -<p>“But you must be wrong,” cried Mr. Wilson, -“because I don’t even know where Waters Street -is.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t know?” demanded Jack leaping out -of his seat.</p> - -<p>The other boys also were by now out of their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[233]</a></span> -seats and staring dumbly at Mr. Wilson. The -agent said, “I remember that I was once followed -by one of you, I couldn’t say who. But I shook him -off quickly. Then I also remember that Paul approached -me one day and asked me where Jones -Street was and I told him.”</p> - -<p>“My God!” cried Jack, “I have followed the -wrong man all the time.”</p> - -<p>“Wait a minute,” Paul said tensely. “You -haven’t followed the wrong man. On the contrary. -You know what?” They all looked at him curiously. -“There is a man in this town who looks -very much like you, Mr. Wilson, and I am convinced -that he is the guilty party.”</p> - -<p>“Now that is interesting,” commented the -agent. “I should certainly like to meet him.”</p> - -<p>“Now let me ask you this,” said Paul. “You -don’t know anything about the fires nor about the -robbery at Professor Link’s, do you?”</p> - -<p>“I most certainly don’t.”</p> - -<p>“Was it you who saved us when Jack and I -were prisoners in the cellar?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, that was me.”</p> - -<p>“Well, wait a minute,” interrupted Ken. “Suppose -you tell us how you knew that the boys were -being held there and how you came to know Harriman -and how you came to be a member of the -gang?”</p> - -<p>“It’s this way, fellows,” began Mr. Wilson. “I -was put on this case and I followed the gang to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[234]</a></span> -this town. Looking around for a room I hired one -over the grocery store, from Harriman. At the -time I did not know that he was a member of the -gang, but I soon found it out. Through him, I -came upon the gang. I became friends with Harriman -and did him a few favors. From then on, he -trusted me. After I got on their trail, I waited to -get them with the goods—that is, they were then -only experimenting and not yet turning out counterfeit -money. Just as soon as they ran off some -fake greenbacks, I got into action.”</p> - -<p>“How did you know, then, that we were being -held in the cellar of the empty house?” asked -Paul.</p> - -<p>“You see, the gang had a room in the hotel. -And I had a room next door. And when Joe came -and told Moonshine Charlie of holding you prisoners, -I rushed down and freed you.”</p> - -<p>“That’s plenty funny,” commented Jack. “If it -was not you whom I was following all the time, -who then was it?”</p> - -<p>“That is something I should like to know myself,” -replied the agent.</p> - -<p>“Another thing, Mr. Wilson,” said Paul. -“Four days ago, I followed Harriman. On the -street, I noticed you—or was it you—passing him -and you nodded to each other. Now was it you or -was it not you?”</p> - -<p>“No, it could not have been me,” was the answer, -“because I remember distinctly that I was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[235]</a></span> -at the hotel at the time listening in on Moonshine -and his gang.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” continued Paul. “Harriman did -lead me to Main Street where he met Moonshine, -Joe and Pete. But if it was not you who nodded -to Harriman, then I am more convinced than ever -that there is a man in this town who looks very -much like you. In fact he looks so much like you -that even Harriman mistook him for you.”</p> - -<p>“Now that is very interesting,” Mr. Wilson -said. “We will have to do something about it.”</p> - -<p>“But here is something that is very suspicious, -Mr. Wilson,” Paul said. “You say that at the time -you were at the hotel, but you or the person that -looks like you, walked out of the corner house, -that is, Harriman’s house, only about fifteen minutes -before the grocery store keeper himself came -out. How do you figure that out?”</p> - -<p>“You have me puzzled, Paul, if that was the -case. I can’t figure it out.”</p> - -<p>The four of them leaned back in their seats and -kept quiet. The boys appeared exhausted from the -ordeal. They thought that at last everything -would be cleared up and now they discovered that -it still remained a mystery. “At last,” muttered -Jack, “we are back where we started. Hooray!” -Paul sighed and kept silent. Ken asked sadly, -“Now what are we going to do?”</p> - -<p>His companions shrugged their shoulders. Mr. -Wilson remarked, “I wish I knew how I could<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[236]</a></span> -help you. But as a matter of fact, I am leaving on -the midnight express.”</p> - -<p>“That’s too bad,” said Paul. “I thought that -perhaps you would stay here for several days.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Wilson shook his head. “That is out of the -question,” he answered.</p> - -<p>“To come back to the point,” said Jack, “what -do you think we ought to do, Paul?”</p> - -<p>“About what?”</p> - -<p>“The mystery of the white card, of course.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose we will just have to wait and see. -Perhaps we will find some clue one of these days -which will solve it.”</p> - -<p>“If we wait until the mystery is solved by itself, -we will never know the solution,” was Ken’s statement.</p> - -<p>“Too bad I can’t help you,” said Mr. Wilson -as he rose to go.</p> - -<p>They shook hands all around, the boys wishing -Mr. Wilson a pleasant trip and he wishing them -success in unravelling the mystery of the white -card.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[237]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XXVIII</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Again the White Card</span></p> - -<p>All of the following day the boys wandered -about trying their best to form some definite opinion -about the mystery of the white card so that -they might act upon it. But however they discussed -the situation, they could come to no conclusion -nor hit upon any new clue. In desperation, -they gave it up for the present and decided to let -events take their course; perhaps something might -turn up in several days or weeks that would give -them a clue which they could follow with some -chance of clearing up the situation.</p> - -<p>Two days later, something did happen, but it -only helped to complicate things further. Paul was -walking along Main Street when he heard an automobile -horn and he turned around to see who it -was. A police car pulled up to the curb and Walters -waved to him. “Hey, there, fellow,” he -called. “Come on, get in.”</p> - -<p>Paul got into the car. “Hello, Walters,” he -said, “anything up?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said the detective. “I have a very baffling -case to solve and when I saw you walking -along, I thought I might ask you to help me.” -They both laughed and the detective added, “Are -you bent on going any place in particular?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[238]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Well, I was going to the library. But I have -plenty of time.”</p> - -<p>“That’s fine. Then you can drive along with me -for a while. I hate to drive all by myself with no -one to talk to.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t mind,” said Paul. “Where are you -driving to?”</p> - -<p>“That’s just it. No place in particular.”</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?”</p> - -<p>“Well,” said the detective, “we got a report -about fifteen minutes ago that a car was stolen.” -He brought a slip of paper out of his pocket and -gave it to Paul. “Here,” he said, “look at it and -then keep your eyes open. We will begin at one -end of the town and ride through street by street. -It may be that the owner parked it somewhere and -forgot the place.”</p> - -<p>Paul looked at the slip of paper. He read, -“Ford ... four door sedan ... license number -S 91 52.”</p> - -<p>For a while they rode along talking of various -things. They rode down one street and up the next -street. Walters related some experiences of his as -a detective. Finally he remarked, “By the way, -the oddest thing happened to me yesterday. I was -walking along and suddenly I noticed a man that -was the exact image of George Wilson, the government -agent. I was so astonished, I couldn’t -imagine him being in town when two days ago I -saw him off on the train.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[239]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Did you stop him?” demanded Paul excitedly. -“Did you see where he went?”</p> - -<p>The detective said, “Why, no. That’s just it. I -closed my eyes for a second because I thought -they were deceiving me. When I opened them -again, he was gone.”</p> - -<p>“Now isn’t that the worst of luck,” said Paul. -“He is just the man we are looking for.”</p> - -<p>“What did he do?” asked Walters. “What do -you want him for?”</p> - -<p>“We need him to clear up the mystery of the -white card. We think he is the missing link in the -puzzle.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” remarked the detective. “I -think I remember you telling me something about -this white card mystery. Did you do anything -about it?”</p> - -<p>“No. And that is why we are looking for this -man.”</p> - -<p>“How do you mean?”</p> - -<p>“Well, our original clues led up to our following -this man. But we got him mixed up with the -government agent and that is how we happened to -come upon the counterfeit gang. Well, sir, after -all that was cleared up, we questioned Mr. Wilson -but he didn’t know anything about the white -card and then we knew we were up the wrong -tree.”</p> - -<p>“In other words,” said the detective, “as far -as I can figure it out, you are back where you<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[240]</a></span> -started and now you are looking for him again.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I wish you luck. Maybe if you keep it up -long enough, you will come across another gang -of crooks. But this time finish the job yourself.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think we will be able to do that,” returned -Paul smiling. “You see, Jack, Ken and I -are leaving for college in two weeks.”</p> - -<p>“We will have to do something about that,” -said the detective. “I will tell the chief to move -the police headquarters to the college or have him -move the college here. Which would you prefer?”</p> - -<p>“Neither one. When I get to college, I won’t -have much time for anything except study.”</p> - -<p>“What are you going to study?”</p> - -<p>“Jack and I are going to study to be doctors.”</p> - -<p>“Your father is a doctor, isn’t he?”</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“It’s a very respectable profession. I wish I -had gone to college and studied a profession.”</p> - -<p>“Aren’t you satisfied with being a detective?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I’m satisfied all right but I guess it’s like -the saying, that when you’re one thing you always -want to be something else.”</p> - -<p>They were crossing Main Street and Paul spied -Ken walking along. Hailing his friend, the detective -pulled up to the curb and Ken got into the -car. “Where are you two going?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Just going for a ride,” said the detective. -“Want to come along?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">[241]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Sure, why not. I have nothing in particular to -do right now. I was on my way for a swim, but -this is all right.”</p> - -<p>“Well, keep your eyes open for a Ford four -door sedan, license number S 91 52. Walters is -looking for it,” said Paul.</p> - -<p>“Stolen?”</p> - -<p>“No,” said the detective, “just removed by the -wrong party.”</p> - -<p>“By the way,” spoke up Paul, “Walters here -has come across the mystery man of the white -card, the man that looks like Mr. Wilson.”</p> - -<p>Ken leaned forward eagerly. “You mean it?” -he cried. “Did you arrest him, Walters?”</p> - -<p>“No. I didn’t want to bother,” the detective -replied.</p> - -<p>“Didn’t want to bother!”</p> - -<p>“He is kidding you,” said Paul. “The man -looks so much like Mr. Wilson that he couldn’t -believe his own eyes. Well, he closed them for a -second, and when he opened them again, the man -was gone.”</p> - -<p>“Just like a detective!” cried Ken.</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?” asked Walters.</p> - -<p>“To close your eyes to things.”</p> - -<p>For several seconds there was silence, then -Walters burst out laughing. “That’s a good one,” -he cried, “I’ll have to remember it.”</p> - -<p>“Well, what are we going to do now?” asked -Ken.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[242]</a></span></p> - -<p>Paul shrugged his shoulders and didn’t answer. -For a short while they rode along in silence. Suddenly, -both Ken and Paul cried simultaneously, -“Look!”</p> - -<p>About ten yards ahead of them was a Ford -sedan with the license number S 91 52 parked at -the curb. Walters swung over to the curb and -pulled up directly behind the Ford car.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[243]</a></span></p> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="p4">CHAPTER XXIX</h2> - -<p class="pch"><span class="smcap">Mystery Solved</span></p> - -<p>The three of them jumped out of the car and -approached the Ford. Walters looked it over, -checked the license number and said, “This is it, -all right.”</p> - -<p>Ken threw open the door next to the steering -wheel. “Hey, Paul, Walters,” he cried, “come -here, quick.”</p> - -<p>He was joined by his friend and the detective. -“Look,” he muttered and pointed at the driver’s -seat.</p> - -<p>They looked. There on the seat lay a white -card. Walters grabbed it and turned it over on -both sides. It was a plain, white, blank card. “Can -you beat that!” gasped Walters.</p> - -<p>Paul took his own card out of his pocket and -gave it to Walters. “Here,” he said, “compare the -two.”</p> - -<p>The detective made the comparison and announced, -“Identical.”</p> - -<p>Ken burst out laughing. The detective asked -angrily, “What are you laughing at, you young -pup?”</p> - -<p>“Now it’s your mystery,” answered the boy. -“You look for him and the next time you see him -don’t close your eyes.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[244]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Trying to be smart,” countered the detective, -grinning. “Well, I’ll have to start looking for him -all right.”</p> - -<p>Walters searched the front and the rear of the -car but he found nothing suspicious. His investigation -completed, he asked Ken to get into the -Ford and follow him. The detective drove back -to police headquarters where the stolen car was -parked and the owner of it was notified.</p> - -<p>Ken and Paul walked out of the police headquarters -in high spirits. There was no particular -reason for it but they thought it quite humorous -that Walters was now involved in the mystery of -the white card. And Ken didn’t seem to get tired -of repeating, “From now on, perhaps he will get -out of the habit of closing his eyes.”</p> - -<p>And after he said it, he would laugh, assured -that it was a very good joke. Paul said, “Forget -it for a while. Which way are you going?”</p> - -<p>“Which way are you going?”</p> - -<p>“Well, I was on the way to the library when -Walters picked me up. So I guess I will continue -my trip to the library.”</p> - -<p>“That suits me,” said Ken, “I’ll go along.”</p> - -<p>Whistling, chatting, they walked along Main -Street when Ken suddenly saw something that -made him quickly alert.</p> - -<p>Paul was eyeing a window display as he walked. -He felt his arm pinched and he uttered a muffled -cry. “Hey!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[245]</a></span></p> - -<p>Ken muttered, “Shsh! Look!”</p> - -<p>Across the street was the man who looked so -much like Mr. Wilson! The boys gasped. He was -standing in the doorway of a three story apartment -house. The ground floor was occupied by a -haberdashery on one side and a shoe store on the -other. The mystery man, with his wild, maniacal -appearance, glanced both ways, then he walked -off, heading north. Paul cried, “Come on. I’ll take -care of him, Ken. You run into the hall of the -building and see what he may have been up to.”</p> - -<p>Ken rushed into the hall. He searched frantically -and at last he found under the stairs a bundle -of rags evidently soaked in gasoline or kerosene, -in flames. The wall and the back of the stairs were -already beginning to smolder. By some luck, there -happened to be a pail of dirty water at the other -end of the hall. He grabbed it and dashed the -water on the fire. The flames were out in a moment. -With the rags soaking wet, he wiped it -across the smoldering wood.</p> - -<p>Holding on to the rags, he ran outside and -looked at the number of the building. At the curb -he found a sheet of newspaper which he wrapped -around the wet rags. And to make sure he did not -forget the address, he wrote it down.</p> - -<p>In the meanwhile, Paul had approached the -man and took him under the arm. “Do you mind -if I walk along with you?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Oh, no, no. No, not at all.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">[246]</a></span></p> - -<p>“My name is Paul. What is yours?”</p> - -<p>“Who, me? I have no name.”</p> - -<p>“That’s too bad,” said Paul. “I thought everybody -had a name.”</p> - -<p>“Everybody except I,” was the answer.</p> - -<p>Paul was at a loss what to do or say. On the -spur of the moment, he remarked, “There is a -man who wants to see you. I will take you to him.”</p> - -<p>“That is very nice of you. Where is he?”</p> - -<p>“Straight ahead, down Main Street.”</p> - -<p>“That’s fine. Let’s hurry, because I don’t want -to keep him waiting. I don’t like to keep people -waiting.”</p> - -<p>Just then Ken came running up and took the -man by the other arm. Together they led the man -to police headquarters and into the detectives’ -room. Walters was there and as soon as he saw -the boys and the man, he jumped to his feet. -“Where did you get him?” he cried.</p> - -<p>“He was looking for you,” said Ken, “so we -thought we would bring him here.”</p> - -<p>“Stop kidding, will you, and tell me what it’s -all about?” demanded the detective.</p> - -<p>The man stood there very innocently looking -from one to the other. Ken removed the covering -of paper from the rags and showed it to Walters. -Paul said, “We saw him come out of the hall of -a building....”</p> - -<p>“357 South Main Street is the correct address,” -said Ken, interrupting. “That bunch of rags was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">[247]</a></span> -in flames and the wall and the stairs were already -beginning to smolder.”</p> - -<p>“And so we brought him here,” concluded Paul.</p> - -<p>The detective turned to the man. “What’s your -name?” he demanded.</p> - -<p>The man shrugged his shoulders and opened his -arms in a gesture of complete ignorance. “Did -you try to start a fire just before at 357 South -Main Street?” the detective again asked.</p> - -<p>But the man kept his mouth shut, grinned and -would say nothing. The detective was growing -red in the face. Paul said, “You ought to have -him examined by a doctor.”</p> - -<p>“Where do you live?” asked Walters.</p> - -<p>But questioning him was futile and a waste of -breath and effort. The man either would not, -could not, or just did not understand enough to -answer the simple questions. Walters searched -him. In his right coat pocket was found a bunch -of white cards. Paul and the detective took out -their cards and compared them to the bunch. -“Identical,” muttered Walters.</p> - -<p>“Hooray!” cried Ken. “The white card mystery -is solved.”</p> - -<p>The man grinned sheepishly. Walters continued -searching him. In the other pockets they found -more white cards, various odds and ends such as -pieces of string, a pocket knife, several pencils, -shoe strings and an empty wallet with a name and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">[248]</a></span> -address. Paul read, “Jerome Walsh, 321 Applebury -Street.”</p> - -<p>“Let’s run down there,” suggested Ken.</p> - -<p>The detective nodded. “Yes, we’ll do that. -First I will have him examined by a doctor.”</p> - -<p>Walters took the man by the arm and led him -out. The boys waited and two minutes later he -returned. “What did you do with him?” asked -Ken.</p> - -<p>“I gave him over to one of the men to take care -of. Let’s go,” said Walters.</p> - -<p>They went to the back of the building and got -into a police car. Ken plopped into the rear seat -and began to laugh uproariously. “What’s the -joke?” asked the detective.</p> - -<p>“I don’t think you will appreciate it.”</p> - -<p>“Take a chance, let’s hear it.”</p> - -<p>“What I was laughing at,” said Ken, “is how -much it helps when you keep your eyes open.”</p> - -<p>“Aw, keep your mouth shut,” cried the detective, -and the next moment he was himself enjoying -the humor of it.</p> - -<p>The car sped through the town and soon pulled -up in front of 321 Applebury Street. It was a -boarding house. Walters rang the bell and a middle -aged woman answered the door. “Does a man -by the name of Jerome Walsh live here?” asked -the detective.</p> - -<p>“Why, yes,” answered the woman hesitantly. -“He isn’t in just now, though.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">[249]</a></span></p> - -<p>Walters showed his badge and told her who he -was. “That’s all right,” he said. “Take us up to -his room.”</p> - -<p>“Did he do anything wrong?” asked the woman.</p> - -<p>“We just want to search his room,” said Walters.</p> - -<p>“And he is such a harmless man,” mused the -woman.</p> - -<p>They followed the woman to the second floor -and she showed them into a small, neatly kept -room. The detective and the boys entered. On a -little table were several books. Paul examined -them. “Look,” he cried, “Professor Link’s book.”</p> - -<p>Ken grabbed the volume and looked at it. Inside -was the professor’s name. “So,” he mumbled, -“the mystery at last is solved.”</p> - -<p>The detective searched the room and found -many small items that had been no doubt stolen -from any number of places. Turning to the woman, -he asked, “What do you know about this -man, Jerome Walsh?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know anything about him,” she answered -meekly. “He has been boarding with me -for almost a year. Once a month a man comes, I -think it is his brother, and pays for his room and -board. Tell me, Mister detective, did Mr. Walsh -do anything wrong?”</p> - -<p>“Plenty,” was the answer. “Is there supposed -to be something wrong with him mentally?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">[250]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I don’t know,” the woman replied. “Every -once in a while he acts strangely, but as far as I -know, he is harmless.”</p> - -<p>“What sort of strange things would he do?” -asked Paul.</p> - -<p>“Well, he would sometimes talk to himself, -sometimes he would go out walking all night long—little -things like that.”</p> - -<p>The detective said, “The next time this man, -his brother or whoever he is, comes to pay his -room and board, I want you to call me. In the -meanwhile, Mr. Walsh is not coming back here -any more.”</p> - -<p>“But what did he do?” the woman asked frantically.</p> - -<p>“He tried to set a house on fire and he stole an -automobile this morning,” the detective told her.</p> - -<p>“Which is not all,” added Paul. “Do you have -the address of this man who visits him?”</p> - -<p>“Why, yes, I think I do; I think I must have it -somewhere downstairs.”</p> - -<p>“Let’s go down, then,” said Walters.</p> - -<p>Downstairs, the woman searched for about ten -minutes until at last she found the address and -gave it to the detective. “Very good,” he muttered. -“We will send for him.”</p> - -<p>They left. Ken turned to Paul and said, “Let’s -run over to Jack’s and tell him. He’ll drop dead -when he hears it.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Paul, “let’s do that.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251">[251]</a></span></p> - -<p>Walters dropped them off in front of the -Stormways home. Paul waved and called, “So -long, Walters.”</p> - -<p>“So long.”</p> - -<p>“Keep your eyes open,” called Ken.</p> - -<p>The detective smiled. “And you watch yourself,” -he called back and drove off.</p> - -<p>The two boys ran into the house, looking for -their friend. Mrs. Stormways told them that he -was at the garage and they ran out of the house -again. Jack waved to them, his hands grimy with -grease; he was working on his dad’s car. “Hey!” -cried Ken, “the mystery has been broken wide -open.”</p> - -<p>“You mean....”</p> - -<p>Jack stared at his friends with his mouth open. -He couldn’t believe it. Paul smiled and said, -“That’s right, the mystery is solved.”</p> - -<p>“And without me,” moaned Jack, “How could -you finish up the whole thing without me! Tell me -all about it.”</p> - -<p>The boys related how it had all happened. Jack -looked very miserable as he listened to the story. -His great regret was that he had not been in on -the exciting final clearing-up of the mystery.</p> - -<p>“It’s all right Jack, next week we’ll start college -and we’ll forget all about the Mr. Grey’s and -white cards and counterfeiters. We’ll have to put -our minds on how to learn all of the hard subjects -we’re going to take.” Paul tried to be consoling.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">[252]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Yes, Jack, and you can start solving a mystery -as soon as we get there. The mystery I mean is -this—how are we going to work hard and get -good grades, and still play football, go to dances -and have a good time? Figuring that out will give -you a good tough sleuthing job,” Ken said.</p> - -<p>Jack was quite cheerful by now.</p> - -<p>“If we can have as good a time at college together -as we have here in Stanhope,” he said, -“We will be lucky. But I’m rather tired of summer -and the town. I get a thrill every time I think -of getting on the train Monday.”</p> - -<p>“So do I,” Ken added. “We’ve had plenty of -adventures since the troop has been together, and -we will have plenty more.”</p> - -<p>“Sure we will,” said Paul, “And I’m going -home and help my mother pack my clothes right -now. If I don’t watch her she will only put in my -best clothes and leave out things like football -sweaters and old pants.”</p> - -<p>And with that all three boys started eagerly for -home.</p> - - -</div></div> - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of Project Gutenberg's The Banner Boy Scouts Mystery, by George A. Warren - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS MYSTERY *** - -***** This file should be named 52809-h.htm or 52809-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/2/8/0/52809/ - -Produced by Giovanni Fini, Roger Frank and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/52809-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/52809-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2eb5560..0000000 --- a/old/52809-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52809-h/images/logo.jpg b/old/52809-h/images/logo.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 82600ef..0000000 --- a/old/52809-h/images/logo.jpg +++ /dev/null |
